SM - MX C311 401 PDF
SM - MX C311 401 PDF
SM - MX C311 401 PDF
SERVICE MANUAL
CODE: 00ZMXC401/S1E
MX-C310/C311
MX-C380/C381
MODEL MX-C400/C401
CONTENTS
Parts marked with " " are important for maintaining the safety of the set. Be sure to replace these parts with
specified ones for maintaining the safety and performance of the set.
following points.
It may cause an explosion, a fire or an electric shock.
1. Precautions for servicing
• Gas tube
1) When servicing, disconnect the power plug, the printer cable, • Lightning conductor
the network cable, and the telephone line from the machine,
• A water pipe or a water faucet, which is not recognized as a
except when performing the communication test, etc.
grounding object by the authorities.
It may cause an injury or an electric shock.
• Grounding wire for telephone line
2) There is a high temperature area inside the machine. Use an
5) Do not damage, break, or work the power cord.
extreme care when servicing.
Do not put heavy objects on the power cable. Do not bend it
It may cause a burn.
forcibly or do not pull it extremely.
3) There is a high voltage section inside the machine which may
It may cause a fire or an electric shock.
cause an electric shock. Be careful when servicing.
6) Keep the power cable away from a heat source.
4) Do not disassemble the laser unit. Do not insert a reflective
material such as a screwdriver in the laser beam path. Do not insert the power plug with dust on it into a power outlet.
It may damage eyes by reflection of laser beams. It may cause a fire or an electric shock.
5) When servicing with the machine operating, be careful not to 7) Do not put a receptacle with water in it or a metal piece which
squeeze you hands by the chain, the belt, the gear, and other may drop inside the machine.
driving sections. It may cause a fire or an electric shock.
6) Do not leave the machine with the cabinet disassembled. 8) With wet or oily hands, do not touch the power plug, do not
insert the telephone line jack, do not operate the machine, or
Do not allow any person other than a serviceman to touch
inside the machine. It may cause an electric shock, a burn, or do not perform servicing.
an injury. It may cause an electric shock.
7) When servicing, do not breathe toner, developer, and ink
excessively. Do not get them in the eyes. 3. Note for installing site
If toner, developer, or ink enters you eyes, wash it away with Do not install the machine at the following sites.
water immediately, and consult a doctor if necessary. 1) Place of high temperature, high humidity, low tempera-
8) The machine has got sharp edges inside. Be careful not to ture, low humidity, place under an extreme change in tem-
damage fingers when servicing. perature and humidity.
9) Do not throw toner or a toner cartridge in a fire. Otherwise, Paper may get damp and form dews inside the machine, caus-
toner may pop and burn you. ing paper jam or copy dirt.
10) When replacing the lithium battery of the PWB, use a specified For operating and storing conditions, refer to the specifications
one only. described later.
If a battery of different specification is used, it may be broken,
causing breakdown or malfunction of the machine.
11) When carrying a unit with PWB or electronic parts installed to
it, be sure to put it in an anti-static-electricity bag.
It may cause a breakdown or malfunctions.
CAUTION
DOUBLE POLE/NEUTRAL FUSING
2) Place of much vibrations
(200V series only)
It may cause a breakdown.
1. System configuration
MX-BTX1
Business card feeder
MX-FN12 MX-C401/MX-C381
Finisher
MX-C400/MX-C380
MX-C311/MX-C310
Digital full color multifunctional system
MX-SCX1
Staple cartridge
MX-CSX1
500 sheet paper feed unit
MX-CSX1 MX-CSX2
500 sheet paper feed unit 500 sheet paper feed unit
3. Option list
MX-C401 MX-C400 Product key
Model Name Model name MX-C311 MX-C310
MX-C381 MX-C380 target
Paper feed 500 sheet paper feed unit MX-CSX1 OPT –
system 500 sheet paper feed unit MX-CSX2 OPT –
Name card feeder MX-BTX1 OPT –
Paper exit system Finisher MX-FN12 OPT –
Electrical system Barcode font kit AR-PF1 OPT –
(ROM) Data security kit MX-FR12U OPT –
Data security kit MX-FR12 OPT Yes
Electrical system PS3 expansion kit MX-PKX5 STD OPT Yes
(Software) Internet fax expansion kit MX-FWX1 OPT Yes
XPS expansion kit MX-PUX1 OPT *1 Yes
Sharpdesk 1 license kit MX-USX1 OPT –
Sharpdesk 5 license kit MX-USX5 OPT –
Sharpdesk 10 license kit MX-US10 OPT –
Sharpdesk 50 license kit MX-US50 OPT –
Sharpdesk 100 license kit MX-USA0 OPT –
Application integration module MX-AMX1 OPT –
Application communication module MX-AMX2 OPT Yes
External account module MX-AMX3 OPT Yes
Facsimile expansion kit MX-FXX3 OPT –
Memory Expansion memory board MX-SMX3 OPT –
*1: Life: A4/Letter size at Area Coverage 5% (Reference: 8K for A4/Letter 6%)
The toner life may vary depending on the document density and temperature and humidity.
The life of toner cartridges packed together with the main unit is 2.5K.
*2: Life: A4/Letter size in 4-sheet continuous print within 550K of the cartridge rotations.
*1: Life: A4/Letter size at Area Coverage 5% (Reference: 8K for A4/Letter 6%)
The toner life may vary depending on the document density and temperature and humidity.
The life of toner cartridges packed together with the main unit is 2.5K.
*2: Life: A4/Letter size in 4-sheet continuous print within 550K of the cartridge rotations.
*1: Life: A4/Letter size at Area Coverage 5% (Reference: 8K for A4/Letter 6%)
The toner life may vary depending on the document density and temperature and humidity.
The life of toner cartridges packed together with the main unit is 2.5K.
*2: Life: A4/Letter size in 4-sheet continuous print within 550K of the cartridge rotations.
D. SMEF/Taiwan/Africa/Israel/Philippines (MX-C310/311/380/381)
Quantity in
No. Item Content Life Model Name Remarks
collective package
1 Toner Cartridge (Black) Toner Cartridge (Black) with IC Chip x1 10K *1 MX-C38FTB 10
(Black toner : Net 215g)
2 Toner Cartridge (Cyan) Toner Cartridge (Cyan) with IC Chip x1 10K *1 MX-C38FTC 10
(Cyan toner : Net 215g)
3 Toner Cartridge (Magenta) Toner Cartridge (Magenta) with IC Chip x1 10K *1 MX-C38FTM 10
(Magenta toner : Net 215g)
4 Toner Cartridge (Yellow) Toner Cartridge (Yellow) with IC Chip x1 10K *1 MX-C38FTY 10
(Yellow toner : Net 215g)
5 Developer Cartridge (Black) Developer Cartridge (Black) x1 60K *2 MX-C38FVB 10
(Black developer : Net 185g)
6 Developer Cartridge (Cyan) Developer Cartridge (Cyan) x1 30K *2 MX-C38FVC 10
(Cyan developer : Net 185g)
7 Developer Cartridge (Magenta) Developer Cartridge (Magenta) x1 30K *2 MX-C38FVM 10
(Magenta developer : Net 185g)
8 Developer Cartridge (Yellow) Developer Cartridge (Yellow) x1 30K *2 MX-C38FVY 10
(Yellow developer : Net 185g)
9 Drum Cartridge (Black) Drum Cartridge (Black) x1 60K *2 MX-C38FRB 10
Charger Cleaner x1
10 Drum Cartridge Drum Cartridge (Common to C, M, Y) x1 30K *2 MX-C38FRS 10
(Cyan/Magenta/Yellow) * 3 cartridges are required for one machine.
*1: Life: A4/Letter size at Area Coverage 5% (Reference: 8K for A4/Letter 6%)
The toner life may vary depending on the document density and temperature and humidity.
The life of toner cartridges packed together with the main unit is 2.5K.
*2: Life: A4/Letter size in 4-sheet continuous print within 550K of the cartridge rotations.
*1: The life is estimated with 5% coverage of each color and 25% color ratio. It differs depending on the use conditions of the machine.
*1: The life is estimated with 5% coverage of each color and 25% color ratio. It differs depending on the use conditions of the machine.
70,000
Numbers of printable quantity
60,000
50,000
40,000 Black drum
30,000 Color drum
20,000
10,000
0
ti
ti
ti
ti
ul
ul
ul
ul
m
m
m
m
ts
le
s
ts
t
ee
ng
ee
ee
sh
Si
sh
sh
4
2
Display condition
Print job Enable/
Display content Sim26-38-E
Counter name Counter value Disable
set value
(Maintenance required. 0 (Print continue) Drum cartridge print counter (K) When 60K is reached Enable
Code:DK) Drum cartridge accumulated rotation number (K) When 550K rotations is reached Enable
(Maintenance required. 0 (Print continue) Drum cartridge print counter (C) When 30K is reached Enable
Code:DC) Drum cartridge accumulated rotation number (C) When 550K rotations is reached Enable
(Maintenance required. 0 (Print continue) Drum cartridge print counter (M) When 30K is reached Enable
Code:DM) Drum cartridge accumulated rotation number (M) When 550K rotations is reached Enable
(Maintenance required. 0 (Print continue) Drum cartridge print counter (Y) When 30K is reached Enable
Code:DY) Drum cartridge accumulated rotation number (Y) When 550K rotations is reached Enable
(The supplies will be needed 1 (Print stop) Drum cartridge print counter (K) When 90% of 60K is reached by Enable
soon. Photoconductive Drum cartridge print counter (C) the K counter.
Drum Cartridge K C M Drum cartridge print counter (M) When 90% of 30K is reached by
Y ) *1 Drum cartridge print counter (Y) the C, M, or Y counter.
Drum cartridge accumulated rotation number (K) When 90% of 550K rotations is Enable
Drum cartridge accumulated rotation number (C) reached by either counter
Drum cartridge accumulated rotation number (M)
Drum cartridge accumulated rotation number (Y)
[Change the supplies. 1 (Print stop) Drum cartridge print counter (K) When 60K is reached Disable
Photoconductive Drum Drum cartridge accumulated rotation number (K) When 550K rotations is reached Disable
Cartridge K ]
(Change the supplies. 1 (Print stop) Drum cartridge print counter (C) When 30K is reached by either Enable for Black/White
Photoconductive Drum Drum cartridge print counter (M) counter Disable for Color
Cartridge C M Y ) Drum cartridge print counter (Y) *2
Drum cartridge accumulated rotation number (C) When 550K rotations is reached Enable for Black/White
Drum cartridge accumulated rotation number (M) by either counter Disable for Color
Drum cartridge accumulated rotation number (Y) *2
*1: Selection of Display/Not Display can be made with Sim26-69. (Default: Not Display)
*2: When the black drum cartridge does not reach the life end and only the color drum cartridge reaches the life end, black/white print can be
performed but color print cannot be performed.
• When the drum cartridge is replaced with a new one, the print counter, the accumulated traveling distance counter, the accumulated rotation
number counter, and the usage day counter are automatically cleared, and the above display disappears.
• If the above guidance does not disappear when the drum cartridge is replaced, SIM24-7 must be executed to clear the print counter, the
accumulated traveling distance counter, the accumulated rotation number counter, and the usage day counter, and the auto color calibration
must be executed.
• The above display disappears when the counters are cleared.
B. Developer cartridge
For K C Y M , only the life end cartridge code is displayed.
Display condition
Print job
Display content Sim26-38-E
Counter name Counter value Enable/Disable
set value
(Maintenance required. 0 (Print continue) Developer cartridge print counter (K) When 60K is reached Enable
Code:VK) Developer cartridge accumulated rotation number (K) When 550K rotations is reached Enable
(Maintenance required. 0 (Print continue) Developer cartridge print counter (C) When 30K is reached Enable
Code:VC) Developer cartridge accumulated rotation number (C) When 550K rotations is reached Enable
(Maintenance required. 0 (Print continue) Developer cartridge print counter (M) When 30K is reached Enable
Code:VM) Developer cartridge accumulated rotation number (M) When 550K rotations is reached Enable
(Maintenance required. 0 (Print continue) Developer cartridge print counter (Y) When 30K is reached Enable
Code:VY) Developer cartridge accumulated rotation number (Y) When 550K rotations is reached Enable
(The supplies will be 1 (Print stop) Developer cartridge print counter (K) When 90% of 60K is reached by Enable
needed soon. Developer cartridge print counter (C) the K counter.
Developer cartridge K Developer cartridge print counter (M) When 90% of 30K is reached by
C M Y ) *1 Developer cartridge print counter (Y) the C, M, or Y counter.
Developer cartridge accumulated rotation number (K) When 90% of 550K rotations is Enable
Developer cartridge accumulated rotation number (C) reached by either counter
Developer cartridge accumulated rotation number (M)
Developer cartridge accumulated rotation number (Y)
[Change the supplies. 1 (Print stop) Developer cartridge print counter (K) When 60K is reached Disable
Photoconductive Drum Developer cartridge accumulated rotation number (K) When 550K rotations is reached Disable
Cartridge K ]
*1: Selection of Display/Not Display can be made with Sim26-69. (Default: Not Display)
*2: When the black drum cartridge does not reach the life end and only the color drum cartridge reaches the life end, black/white print can be
performed but color print cannot be performed.
• When the developer cartridge is replaced with a new one, the print counter, the accumulated traveling distance counter, the accumulated
rotation number counter, and the usage day counter are automatically cleared, and the guidance for execution of the auto color calibration is
displayed.
• If the above guidance does not disappear when the developer cartridge is replaced, the initial setting of the toner density must be executed
with the simulation, and the auto color calibration must be executed.
• When the initial setting of the toner density is executed, the counters are cleared and the above display disappears.
C. Toner cartridge
For K C Y M , only the life end cartridge code is displayed.
Display condition
Print job
Display content Sim26-38-A Remaining
Status Enable/Disable
set value quantity display *1
( K C M Y Toner supply is low.) 0 (Print continue) 25-0% Toner remaining quantity is 25% or less. Enable
*2 1 (Print stop)
(The supplies will be needed soon. 0 (Print continue) 25-0% Toner remaining quantity corresponds to output of Enable
Toner Cartridge K C M Y ) *2 1 (Print stop) XX sheets. *3
[Change the toner cartridge. K ] 0 (Print continue) 25-0% When the black toner cartridge reaches toner end. Disable
1 (Print stop)
(Change the supplies. Toner 0 (Display) 25-0% When the color toner cartridge reaches toner end. Enable for Black/White
Cartridge C M Y ) 1 (No display) Disable for Color
*4
No display — 50-25% Toner remaining quantity is 49 - 25%. Enable
No display — 75-50% Toner remaining quantity is 74 - 50%. Enable
No display — 100-75% Toner remaining quantity is 100-75%. Enable
Install the toner cartridge. — No display When no toner cartridges are installed. Disable
When a toner cartridge of a different color is installed.
Improper cartridge. — No display When an incompatible toner cartridge is installed. Disable
Cartridge error. — No display CRUM trouble Disable
Toner cartridge connector contact trouble
*1: Detected by the toner motor rotation number and the pixel count (The value of larger life percentage is employed.)
Since the life of the toner cartridge which is packed when shipping from the factory is 2.5K, the remaining quantity of the toner cartridge,
though it is a new one, is displayed as 25-0%.
*2: Selection of Display/Not Display can be made with Sim26-69. (Default: Not Display)
*3: Setting can be made with Sim26-69. (Default: 0 sheet)
*4: When the black toner cartridge does not reach the life end and only the color toner cartridge reaches the life end, black/white print can be
performed but color print cannot be performed.
7. Environment conditions
A. Operating environment conditions
Temperature: 10 - 35qC
Humidity: 20 - 85% RH
Atmospheric pressure: 590 - 1013hPa (Altitude: 0 - 2000m)
Humidity (RH)
85%
60%
20%
Temperature
D. Disposal standard
Toner cartridge/developer cartridge: 24 months (unopened) from
the production month.
Drum cartridge: 36 months from the production month
1. External view
4 12
13
6
8 11
9
14
10 11
*1: Option
1 6 7 8
2
4
PE
T
11
11
PET 5
9 10
6 7
1 2 3 4 5
4. Connectors
6
1
2 5
3
4
1 2 3 4 5 6 9 10
JOB STATUS
SYSTEM
SETTINGS
READY
PRINT
DATA
LINE
IMAGE SEND
DATA LOGOUT
HOME
7 8 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 12 13 14
READY
BACK OK PRINT DATA
LINE
IMAGE SEND DATA
COPY
SYSTEM
JOB STATUS SETTINGS
LOGOUT
9 10 11 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
SCOV
SPPD1
SPED
SPPD2
SOCD
MHPS TFD2
POD2
POD1
RTH_EX1 APPD1
HLPCD
RTH_EX2 RTH_Sub
APPD2
TCS_Y TCS_M TCS_C TCS_K PPD2
MPLD1
PPD1 MPWS
CPED1 CPFD1 MPED
CLUD1
TH/HUD
CSPD1
7. Switches
DSW-R
PWRSW
DSW-F
DRCRU_Y
DRCRU_M
DRCRU_C
DRCRU_K
1TNFD
MSW
SPUS
ADUC1
HLPCS 1TURC_1
1TURC_2
2TURC
MPFS
CPUC1
CPFC
SPFM
MIM
TNM_Y
TNM_M
POM TNM_C
TNM_K
FUM
PGM1
DVM_CL
DVM_K
RRM
CPFM
CLUM
CLI
CCFT
DL_Y
DL_M
DL_C
HL_EX
DL_K
HL_EX2
HL_Main
HL_Sub
PROFM1
POFM
FUFM
HDDFAN
PROFM2
LSUFM PSFM
MX-C311/C381/C401 MX-C310/C380/C400
(8.5 Inch LCD model) (4.3 Inch LCD model)
1 2 3 1 3
4
6
7
8
21
20
19
9
18 10
17 11
16 12
15
13
14
RDTCT_EX2
RDTCT_EX
RDTCT_Main
RDTCT_Low
F401 F405
F404
F402
F403
F301
F201
F101 F002
F004 F001
F003
4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
3
2
1 12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
1. General
Each adjustment item in the adjustment item list is associated with Unnecessary adjustments can be omitted. Even in this case, how-
a specific Job number. Perform the adjustment procedures in the ever, the sequence from the smallest to the greatest Job number
sequence of Job numbers from the smallest to the greatest. must be observed.
However, there is no need to perform all the adjustment items. Per- If the above precaution should be neglected, the adjustment would
form only the necessary adjustments according to the need. not complete normally or trouble may occur.
MX-C401 ADJUSTMENTS 4 – 1
Job No Adjustment item list Simulation
ADJ 15 Printer color balance/density 15A Printer color balance adjustment (Auto adjustment) 67-24
adjustment 15B Printer color balance adjustment (Manual adjustment) 67-25
15C Printer density adjustment (low density part density adjustment) (Normally unnecessary to 67-36
adjust)
15D Printer high density part desnsity correction setting (high density part tone gap 67-34
countermeasure) (Normally unnecessary to the setting change)
15E Auto color balance adjustment by the user (Printer color balance auto adjustment ENABLE 26-54
setting and adjustment)
15F Automatic copy/printer color balance and density adjustment (Automatic adjustment) 46-74
15G Printer color balance adjustment (Automatic adjustment for each dither) 67-54
(Normally unnecessary to adjust)
ADJ 16 Manual paper feed tray paper size (width) sensor adjustment 40-2
ADJ 17 Touch panel coordinate setting 65-1
ADJ 18 Image loss, void area, image off- 18A Print image main scanning direction image magnification ratio automatic adjustment 50-28
center, image magnification ratio 18B Image off-center automatic adjustment (Document table mode) 50-28
auto adjustment with SIM50-28 18C Copy lead edge image reference position adjustment, image off-center, sub scanning 50-28
direction image magnification ratio automatic adjustment (Document table mode)
18D SPF mode image off-center, image lead edge position, sub scanning direction image 50-28
magnification ratio automatic adjustment (RSPF mode)
ADJ 19 Fusing paper guide position adjustment
3. Details of adjustment Enter the adjustment value of each mode which is specified on
the label attached on the MC high voltage power PWB.
NOTE: Note that the adjustment value may differ depending on the
MC high voltage power PWB.
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
Since the adjustment value label is attached on the MC
0+9*5,'6(77,1*$1'287387
high voltage PWB, the PWB must be removed in order to
$˖ ˖0,''/(ǂ63(('ǂ*%B.
$˖ check the adjustment value.
%˖ ˖0,''/(ǂ63(('ǂ*%B&
This is a troublesome procedure. Therefore, it is advisable
˷̚˹ &˖ ˖0,''/(ǂ63(('ǂ*%B0
to put down the adjustment value in advance.
'˖ ˖0,''/(ǂ63(('ǂ*%B<
Mode Item/Display Content Setting range
0,''/( /2: (;(&87(
MIDDLE A MIDDLE K charging/grid bias set 150 - 850
SPEED GB_K value at middle speed
B MIDDLE C charging/grid bias set 150 - 850
(8.5 Inch LCD model) SPEED GB_C value at middle speed
C MIDDLE M charging/grid bias set 150 - 850
SPEED GB_M value at middle speed
D MIDDLE Y charging/grid bias set 150 - 850
SPEED GB_Y value at middle speed
LOW A LOW SPEED K charging/grid bias set 150 - 850
GB_K value at low speed
B LOW SPEED C charging/grid bias set 150 - 850
GB_C value at low speed
C LOW SPEED M charging/grid bias set 150 - 850
GB_M value at low speed
D LOW SPEED Y charging/grid bias set 150 - 850
GB_Y value at low speed
MX-C401 ADJUSTMENTS 4 – 2
1-B Adjust the developing bias voltage Mode Item/Display Content
Setting
range
This adjustment is needed in the following situations:
MIDDLE A MIDDLE SPEED K developing bias set 0-600
* When the MC high voltage power PWB is replaced. DVB_K value at middle speed
* U2 trouble has occurred. B MIDDLE SPEED C developing bias set 0-600
* The PCU PWB has been replaced. DVB_C value at middle speed
C MIDDLE SPEED M developing bias set 0-600
* The EEPROM of the PCU PWB has been replaced.
DVB_M value at middle speed
1) Go through the modes specified in Simulation 8-1. D MIDDLE SPEED Y developing bias set 0-600
(4.3 Inch LCD model) DVB_Y value at middle speed
LOW A LOW SPEED K developing bias set 0-600
DVB_K value at low speed
B LOW SPEED C developing bias set 0-600
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26( DVB_C value at low speed
'96(77,1*$1'287387 C LOW SPEED M developing bias set 0-600
DVB_M value at low speed
$˖ ˖0,''/(63((''9%B.
$˖ D LOW SPEED Y developing bias set 0-600
%˖ ˖0,''/(63((''9%B& DVB_Y value at low speed
˷̚˹ &˖ ˖0,''/(63((''9%B0
DVK:XXX DVC:XXX DVM:XXX DVY:XXX
'˖ ˖0,''/(63((''9%B<
When the adjustment value (specified value) of the middle speed
0,''/( /2: (;(&87( mode is set, the adjustment values of the other modes are auto-
matically set according to the middle speed mode setting in a cer-
tain relationship.
(8.5 Inch LCD model)
'˖ ˖7&0,''/(63(('&/&
(;(&87(
MX-C401 ADJUSTMENTS 4 – 3
(8.5 Inch LCD model) 2) Select an item to be adjusted.
Enter the adjustment value (specified value), and press [OK]
key. (For the 4.3 Inch LCD model, press the OSA shortcut
key.)
When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the voltage entered in the
procedure 3 is outputted for 30sec and the set value is saved.
When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the output is stopped.
By setting the default value (specified value), the specified out-
put is provided.
Default value
Adjustment Default Actual output
Item/Display Content of actual
range value setting range
output value
A TC1 LOW SPEED CL K Primary Color mode K Low speed 51 - 255 95 2 - 30PA 8PA
transfer bias mode
B TC1 MIDDLE SPEED CL K adjustment Middle speed 51 - 255 131 2 - 30PA 13PA
value mode
C TC1 LOW SPEED CL C C Low speed 51 - 255 95 2 - 30PA 8PA
mode
D TC1 MIDDLE SPEED CL C Middle speed 51 - 255 131 2 - 30PA 13PA
mode
E TC1 LOW SPEED CL M M Low speed 51 - 255 95 2 - 30PA 8PA
mode
F TC1 MIDDLE SPEED CL M Middle speed 51 - 255 131 2 - 30PA 13PA
mode
G TC1 LOW SPEED CL Y Y Low speed 51 - 255 95 2 - 30PA 8PA
mode
H TC1 MIDDLE SPEED CL Y Middle speed 51 - 255 131 2 - 30PA 13PA
mode
I TC1 LOW SPEED BW K Black/White K Low speed 51 - 255 95 2 - 30PA 8PA
mode mode
J TC1 MIDDLE SPEED BW Middle speed 51 - 255 131 2 - 30PA 13PA
K mode
K TC2 PLAIN CL SPX Secondary Color mode Standard paper Front surface 51 - 255 111 –2 - –80PA –25PA
transfer bias mode mode
L TC2 PLAIN CL DPX adjustment Back surface 51 - 255 124 –2 - –80PA –30PA
value mode
M TC2 PLAIN BW SPX Black/White Front surface 51 - 255 111 –2 - –80PA –25PA
mode mode
N TC2 PLAIN BW DPX Back surface 51 - 255 111 –2 - –80PA –25PA
mode
O TC2 HEAVY CL SPX Color mode Heavy paper Front surface 51 - 255 93 –2 - –80PA –10PA
mode mode
P TC2 HEAVY CL DPX Back surface 51 - 255 93 –2 - –80PA –10PA
mode
Q TC2 HEAVY BW SPX Black/White Front surface 51 - 255 93 –2 - –80PA –10PA
mode mode
R TC2 HEAVY BW DPX Back surface 51 - 255 93 –2 - –80PA –10PA
mode
S TC2 OHP CL OHP Color mode 51 - 255 85 –2 - –80PA –8PA
T TC2 OHP BW Black/White mode 51 - 255 85 –2 - –80PA –8PA
U TC2 ENVELOPE CL Envelope Color mode 51 - 255 124 –2 - –80PA –30PA
V TC2 ENVELOPE BW Black/White mode 51 - 255 124 –2 - –80PA –30PA
W TC2 THIN CL Thin paper Color mode 51 - 255 111 –2 - –80PA –25PA
X TC2 THIN BW Black/White mode 51 - 255 111 –2 - –80PA –25PA
Y TC2 GLOSSY CL Gloss paper Color mode 51 - 255 72 –2 - –80PA –10PA
Z TC2 GLOSSY BW Black/White mode 51 - 255 72 –2 - –80PA –10PA
AA TC2 CLEANING Cleaning mode 51 - 255 67 –2 - -80PA –8PA
AB TC2 CLEAN LOW SPD Secondary Low speed print mode 0 - 255 16 –100V - 1500V 0V
AC TC2 CLEAN MIDDLE SPD transfer Middle speed print mode 0 - 255 16 –100V - 1500V 0V
AD TC2 CLEAN CLEANING cleaning bias Cleaning mode 0 - 255 143 –100V - 1500V 800V
adjustment
value
AE PTC LOW SPEED CL PTC current Color mode Low speed mode 0 - 255 133 0PA - –700PA –300PA
AF PTC MIDDLE SPEED CL output Middle speed mode 0 - 255 133 0PA - –700PA –300PA
AG PTC LOW SPEED BW adjustment Black/White mode Low speed mode 0 - 255 133 0PA - –700PA –300PA
AH PTC MIDDLE SPEED BW value Middle speed mode 0 - 255 133 0PA - –700PA –300PA
MX-C401 ADJUSTMENTS 4 – 4
Default value
Adjustment Default Actual output
Item/Display Content of actual
range value setting range
output value
AI CASE VOLT LOW CL PTC case Color mode Low speed mode 0 - 255 0 0V - –1000V 0V
AJ CASE VOLT MID CL voltage Middle speed mode 0 - 255 0 0V - –1000V 0V
AK CASE VOLT LOW BW adjustment Black/White mode Low speed mode 0 - 255 0 0V - –1000V 0V
AL CASE VOLT MID BW value Middle speed mode 0 - 255 0 0V - –1000V 0V
AM PEEL VOLT LOW CL Separation Color mode Low speed mode 51 - 255 200 –50 - –3000V –2200V
AN PEEL VOLT MIDDLE CL discharge Middle speed mode 51 - 255 200 –50 - –3000V –2200V
AO PEEL VOLT LOW BW adjustment Black/White mode Low speed mode 51 - 255 200 –50 - –3000V –2200V
AP PEEL VOLT MIDDLE BW value Middle speed mode 51 - 255 200 –50 - –3000V –2200V
ADJ 2 Image density sensor (image 2-A Color image density sensor (image
registration sensor F) calibration
registration sensor) adjustment Perform the color image density sensor (image registration sensor
There are some parts variations in the image density sensor sec- F) calibration in one of the following methods.
tion. Therefore, the absolute detection level differs in each * Color image density sensor (Image registration sensor F) calibra-
machine. To correct this, calibration is executed. tion value setting (Method by SIM44-61)
This adjustment is needed in the following situations: When the registration sensor unit is replaced, the calibration
* When the color image density sensor (image registration sensor value is set manually with this method. The calibration jig is not
F) is replaced. required.
* When the image registration sensor unit is replace. When, however, the color image density senor itself is replaced,
* U2 trouble has occurred. use the calibration jig and execute SIM44-13 to perform calibra-
* The PCU PWB has been replaced. tion.
* Color image density sensor (Image registration sensor F) calibra-
* The EEPROM of the PCU PWB has been replaced.
tion value setting (Method by SIM44-13)
The targets of the adjustment are the color image density sensor
When the color image density sensor itself is replaced, use the
(image registration sensor F) and the black image density sensor
calibration jig and perform calibration with this method.
(image registration sensor R). There are following adjustment
methods. (Color image density sensor (Image registration sensor F) cal-
ibration value setting (Method by SIM44-61))
* Color image density sensor (image registration sensor F) calibra-
tion SIM44-13 1) Enter the SIM44-61 mode.
* Color image density sensor (Image registration sensor F) calibra- (4.3 Inch LCD model)
tion value setting (SIM44-61)
* Black image density sensor (image registration sensor R) cali-
bration SIM44-2 ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12 &/26(
7(67
NOTE: The color image density sensor detects color image density 3$7&+6($/$'-8670(17˄,1387
and image registration on front frame side, the black image $˖ ˖3&6B&/&$5%287
density sensor detects black image density and image reg- $˖
istration on rear frame side. That is, two functions is
%˖ ˖3&6B&//('$'-
assigned to each one sensor. ˷̚˹
MX-C401 ADJUSTMENTS 4 – 5
2) Select an item to be set. 3) Open the front cover.
Check to confirm that the belt tension of the primary transfer
Setting Default
Item/Display Content unit is released (the separation lever of the primary transfer
range value
unit is under the state shown in the figure).
A PCS_CL CARB OUT Calibration plate sensor 1 - 255 108
value If the belt tension is not released, turn the separation lever to
B PCS_CL LED ADJ Color sensor light 1 - 255 21 the state shown in the figure.
emitting quantity
adjustment value
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
3$7&+6($/$'-8670(17
3&6B&/&$5%287
3&6B&//('$'-
(;(&87(
㩷㪈㪆㩷㪈
5) Open the right door.
(8.5 Inch LCD model)
6) Put the lock lever horizontally, release the lock, and pull out the
primary transfer unit until it stops.
MX-C401 ADJUSTMENTS 4 – 6
7) Hold the handle, push the lock on the left side of the primary * Image sensor calibration jig (standard reflection sheet dirt,
transfer unit and remove the primary transfer unit. scratch, discoloration)
* Image density sensor calibration plate
NOTE: Store the image sensor calibration jig under low tempera-
ture, low humidity and dark place.
(;(&87(
㩷㪈㪆㩷㪊
9) Install the waste toner box, and close the right door and the
front cover.
10) Press [EXECUTE] key.
Color image sensor (image registration sensor F) calibration is
automatically executed. When the operation is completed, the
adjustment result is displayed and [EXECUTE] key returns to 2) Press [EXECUTE] key.
the normal display. The color image density sensor (image registration sensor F),
the black image density sensor (image registration sensor R)
Adjustment are automatically adjusted.
Display/Item Content Default
value range
After completion of the adjustment, the adjustment result is
A PCS_CL Color image density sensor 1 - 255 108
displayed and [EXECUTE] key returns to the normal display.
CARB OUT LED current adjustment
target value
De-
B PCS_CL Color image density sensor 1 - 255 21 Mode Display/Item Content Range
fault
LED ADJ LED current adjustment
Adjustment A PCS_CL Color image sensor 1 - 255 21
target value (PCS CL CARB
value for LED ADJ light emitting quantity
OUT) registered LED current
process adjustment value
level
control B PCS_K Black image sensor 1 - 255 21
If the adjustment is not completed normally, "ERROR" is displayed. operation LED ADJ light emitting quantity
mode adjustment value
When an error occurs, the adjustment result is not revised.
C PCS_CL Dark voltage of color 0 - 255 0
In that case, check the following sections for any abnormality. If any DARK
abnormality is found, repair and execute calibration again. D PCS_K Dark voltage of black 0 - 255 0
* Color image density sensor (image registration sensor F) DARK
* PCU PWB E PCS_K Belt base detection 0 - 255 0
GRND level when
completion of Item B
adjustment
MX-C401 ADJUSTMENTS 4 – 7
De- If the adjustment is not completed normally, "ERROR" is dis-
Mode Display/Item Content Range played.
fault
Adjustment F PCS_K Maximum value of 0 - 255 0
value for BELT belt base detection Mode Error display Error content
process MAX level Adjustment BK_SEN_ADJ Black image PCS_K LED ADJ error
control G PCS_K Minimum value of 0 - 255 0 value for _ERR density (The target value is not
operation BELT MIN belt base detection process sensor obtained after retried
mode level control adjustment three times.)
H PCS_K Belt base detection 0 - 255 0 operation abnormality
BELT DIF level difference mode CL_SEN_ADJ Color image PCS_CL LED ADJ
(Item E - Item F) _ERR sensor error (The target value
Adjustment I REG_F Image registration 1 - 255 56 adjustment is not obtained after
value for LED ADJ sensor light emitting abnormality retried three times.)
image quantity adjustment BELT_READ Transfer belt PCS_K GRND error
registration value F _ERR surface (The surface detection
operation J REG_R Image registration 1 - 255 56 reading level is maximum or
mode LED ADJ sensor light emitting abnormality the minimum value
quantity adjustment difference is outside a
value R reference range.)
K REG_F Image registration 0 - 255 0 Adjustment REG_SEN_F Registration REG_F LED ADJ error
DARK sensor dark voltage value for _ADJ_ERR sensor F (The target value is not
F image adjustment obtained after retried
registration abnormality three times.)
L REG_R Image registration 0 - 255 0
operation REG_SEN_R Registration REG_R LED ADJ
DARK sensor dark voltage
mode _ADJ_ERR sensor R error (The target value
R
adjustment is not obtained after
M REG_F Belt base detection 0 - 255 0
abnormality retried three times.)
GRND level when
completion of Item I REG_BELT_F F side REG_F GRND error
adjustment _READ_ERR transfer belt (The surface detection
surface level is maximum or
N REG_R Belt base detection 0 - 256 0
reading the minimum value
GRND level when
abnormality difference is outside a
completion of Item J
reference range.)
adjustment
REG_BELT_R R side REG_R GRND error
O REG_F Maximum value of 0 - 255 0
_READ_ERR transfer belt (The surface detection
BELT belt base detection
surface level is maximum or
MAX level (F side)
reading the minimum value
P REG_F Minimum value of 0 - 255 0
abnormality difference is outside a
BELT belt base detection
reference range.)
MIN level (F side)
Q REG_F Belt base detection 0 - 255 0 When an error occurs, check the following sections for any
BELT level difference abnormality.
DIF (Item O - Item P)
• Color image density sensor (image registration sensor F)
R REG_R Maximum value of 0 - 255 0
BELT belt base detection • Black image density sensor (image registration sensor R)
MAX level (R side) • PCU PWB
S REG_R Minimum value of 0 - 255 0
• Transfer belt (dirt, scratch)
BELT belt base detection
MIN level (R side) • Transfer belt cleaner
T REG_R Belt base detection 0 - 255 0 • Color image sensor calibration plate
BELT level difference If any abnormality is found, repair and adjust again.
DIF (Item R - Item S)
If an error occurs, the adjustment result is not revised.
U REG_F Patch detection level 0 - 255 0
PATCH F for check (K)
(K)
V REG_F Patch detection level 0 - 255 0 ADJ 3 Image skew adjustment
PATCH F for check (C)
(C) (LSU unit)
W REG_F Patch detection level 0 - 255 0 This adjustment is needed in the following situations:
PATCH F for check (M)
(M) * When the color shift occurs.
X REG_F Patch detection level 0 - 255 0 * When the LSU unit is replaced.
PATCH F for check (Y) * When the LSU unit is removed from the main unit.
(Y)
* When a color image registration mistake occurs.
Y REG_R Patch detection level 0 - 55 0
PATCH R for check (K) * When the unit is installed or when the installing site is changed.
(K) (Required depending on the cases.)
Z REG_R Patch detection level 0 - 255 0 * When there is an uneven density area or a difference in color
PATCH R for check (C) balance in the main scanning direction (back and forth).
(C)
* When the color phase is not matched by the color balance
AA REG_R Patch detection level 0 - 255 0
adjustment.
PATCH R for check (M)
(M) * When the OPC drum drive unit is replaced.
AB REG_R Patch detection level 0 - 255 0 * When the primary transfer unit is replaced.
PATCH R for check (Y)
The image skew adjustment (LSU unit) is performed by changing
(Y)
the parallelism of the LSU unit scan laser beams for the OPC drum.
MX-C401 ADJUSTMENTS 4 – 8
NOTE: Before execution of the this adjustment, perform the follow- 2) Select the tray with A4 (11" x 8.5") paper in it.
ing procedures in advance for better efficiency of the 3) Press [EXECUTE] key.
adjustment.
The check pattern is printed out.
The black (K) image skew, however, must be properly
4) Check the printed black image for any skew.
adjusted for that.
There are following two methods of checking the black image
1) In the SIM50-22 mode, select ALL mode to perform the auto-
for any skew (right angle).
matic image registration adjustment.
Method 1:
2) The current skew level is displayed on the SKEW display
Measure the length of the diagonal lines of the rectangle print
menu.
pattern. Check the difference in the length of the diagonal lines
3) Put down the displayed skew level value. for judgment of good or no good
(Meaning of the skew level value) Method 2:
* When "R" is displayed in front of the value, turn the skew adjust- Compare the right angle of vertical side/horizontal side of the
ment screw (LSU) clockwise by the value (angle). rectangle print pattern and the right angle sides of A4 (11" x
* When "L" is displayed in front of the value, turn the skew adjust- 8.5") paper for judgment of good or no good.
ment screw (LSU) counterclockwise by the value (angle). (NOTE)
NOTE: The K (Black) image skew level cannot be checked with In the case of Method 2, the right angle of paper to be used
SIM50-22. may not be exact. Be sure to check the right angle of paper to
1) Enter SIM61-4 mode. be used in advance.
(;(&87(
(Method 2)
a) Fit the side of A4 or 11" x 8.5" paper to the long side of the rectangle print pattern.
Lead edge inclination ( 0.5mm or less) Rear edge inclination ( 0.5mm or less)
A B A B
MX-C401 ADJUSTMENTS 4 – 9
b) Measure the shift distance between vertical side of paper
and side of the rectangle print pattern.
If the above distances (left and right) are 0.5mm or less,
there is no need to adjust.
If not, execute the following procedures.
5) Open the front cabinet, and remove the waste toner box.
6) Turn the LSU unit image skew adjustment screw (K) to adjust.
(When Method 1 is used to check the black image for any
skew (right angle) in procedure 4 in advance)
Diagonal line C is longer than diagonal line D: Turn the adjust-
ment screw clockwise.
Diagonal line C is shorter than diagonal line D: Turn the adjust-
ment screw counterclockwise.
(When Method 2 is used to check the black image for any K
skew (right angle) in procedure 4 in advance)
When the image is skewed in the arrow direction A, turn the
b a
adjustment screw clockwise. When the image is skewed in the
arrow direction B, turn the adjustment screw counterclockwise.
7) Install the waste toner box, and close the front cabinet.
8) Perform the procedures 3) - 4).
(Perform the procedures 3) - 8) until a satisfactory result is obtained.)
9) Enter the SIM50-22 mode to select the adjustment item of
ALL, and press [EXECUTE] key.
The image registration adjustment is automatically performed and the adjustment data are displayed. Write down the display contents of
SKEW C, M, and Y.
10) Turn the image skew adjustment screw of the target color to adjust.
(When the adjustment is performed with the skew level value of SIM50-22 as the reference)
* When "R" is displayed in front of the value of SKEW, turn the skew adjustment screw (LSU) clockwise by the number (angle).
* When "L" is displayed in front of the value of SKEW, turn the skew adjustment screw (LSU) counterclockwise by the number (angle).
11) Enter the SIM61-4 mode and perform the procedures of 2) - 3).
Check the printed color image skew pattern.
R side Color image shift check C (Image shift fine adjustment reference frame)
section (Rough adjustment)
A-sub
A-main B-main
F side
The sub scan rough adjustment color image shifts
on the R side and the F side are in the same balance
both in the rough adjustment check section and
the fine adjustment check section B-sub Color image shift check
A-main: Main scan rough adjustment pattern scale (Fine adjustment)
A-sub: Sub scan rough adjustment pattern
B-main: Main scan fine adjustment scale
B-sub: Sub scan fine adjustment scale
C: Main scan sub scan fine adjustment pattern
In each Y/M/C color print pattern printed separately in the F side and in the R side, note the same print color pattern and check to confirm
that the front frame side and the rear frame side are in the same condition.
Rough adjustment pattern check:
Check the sub scan rough adjustment color image shift check section on the R side and the F side of each color, use the black scale of "0"
as the center reference, and check the balance in shifts of the color image line positions in the positive and the negative directions. The
balance in the R side must be the same as that in the F side.
MX-C401 ADJUSTMENTS 4 – 10
Fine adjustment pattern check:
4-A OPC drum phase adjustment
Check the square frames on the R side and the F side of each
color. (Normally five sections of high density can be seen.) (Auto adjustment)
Check the sub scanning direction position of the center area of 1) Enter SIM50-22 mode.
high density (one of the above five sections). These must be (4.3 Inch LCD model)
on the same position on the R side and the F side.
In this case, use the sub scan direction color image shift check
scale (fine adjustment) as the reference.
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
Visually check the color density and make the darkest section
as the center, and use it as the read value of the shift amount. $872$'-8670(172)5(*,675$7,21 '580326,7,21
Check that the difference in the center position of the dark den- 0$,1)0$,1568%6.(:
sity section is within r2 step. &ǂ/1*
The positional relations of the front and the rear frame of the 052.
print color patterns of a same color are compared. There is no </2.
need that all the colors are in the same state. Compare only
the positional relations of color patterns of a same color. 5(*,67 '580326 $// (;(&87(
If the above condition is not met, do the following:
12) Turn the image skew adjustment screw of the target color to
adjust. EXECUTE Adjustment completed
Relationship between the adjustment screw rotating angle and
the change in the adjustment image position:
Adjustment screw rotating angle (degree) = Image shift
amount (Adjustment scale) x 10 ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
$872$'-8670(172)5(*,675$7,21 '580326,7,21
12:(;(&87,1*
(;(&87(
Abnormal end
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
Y M C
$872$'-8670(172)5(*,675$7,21 '580326,7,21
b a 35(66>(&(;87(@7267$57
(55257211(5(037<
(;(&87(
Repeat procedures 11) - 12) until a satisfactory result is obtained.
MX-C401 ADJUSTMENTS 4 – 11
(8.5 Inch LCD model)
ADJ 5 Print engine image
magnification ratio adjustment
(BK) (Main scanning direction)
(Print engine section) (Manual
adjustment)
This adjustment is needed in the following situations:
* When the LSU (writing) unit is replaced.
* U2 trouble has occurred.
* The PCU PWB has been replaced.
* The EEPROM of the PCU PWB has been replaced.
* When the color shift occurs.
EXECUTE Adjustment completed 1) Go through the modes specified in Simulation 50-10.
(4.3 Inch LCD model)
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
3$3(5&(17(52))6(76(783
$˖ ˖%.0$*
$˖ %˖ ˖0$,10)7
˷̚˹ &˖ ˖0$,1&6
'˖ ˖0$,1&6
(;(&87(
MX-C401 ADJUSTMENTS 4 – 12
Setting
ADJ 6 Image off-center adjustment Display/Item Content
range
Default
3) Set A4 (11" x 8.5") paper in the paper feed tray selected in pro-
cedure 2).
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
4) Press [EXECUTE] key.
3$3(5&(17(52))6(76(783
The adjustment pattern is printed.
$˖ ˖%.0$*
$˖ 5) Check that the adjustment pattern image is printed in the cor-
%˖ ˖0$,10)7
rect position.
˷̚˹ &˖ ˖0$,1&6
Measure the dimension of the void area in the front and the
'˖ ˖0$,1&6 rear frame direction of the adjustment pattern, and check that
(;(&87( all the following conditions are satisfied.
RV
3.0 2.0mm
(8.5 Inch LCD model)
FV
2) Select a target paper feed tray to be adjusted with the scroll 3.0 2.0mm
keys. RV: REAR VOID AREA
FV: FRONT VOID AREA
Setting RV + FV d 8.0mm
Display/Item Content Default
range
RV = 3.0 r 2.0mm
A BK-MAG Main scan print 60 - 140 100
FV = 3.0 r 2.0mm
magnification ratio BK
B MAIN-MFT Print off center adjustment 1 - 99 50 If the above requirement is not met, do the following steps.
value (Manual paper feed) 6) Change the adjustment value.
C MAIN-CS1 Print off center adjustment 1 - 99 50 Enter the adjustment value and press [OK] key. (For the 4.3
value (Tray 1) Inch LCD model, press the OSA shortcut key.)
D MAIN-CS2 Print off center adjustment 1 - 99 50
value (Tray 2)
When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the adjustment pattern is
E MAIN-CS3 Print off center adjustment 1 - 99 50
printed.
value (Tray 3) When the adjustment value is increased, the adjustment pat-
F MAIN-CS4 Print off center adjustment 1 - 99 50 tern is shifted to the front frame side. When it is decreased, the
value (Tray 4) adjustment pattern is shifted to the rear frame side.
MX-C401 ADJUSTMENTS 4 – 13
When the set value is changed by 1, the shift distance is
changed by about 0.1mm. 7-A Image registration adjustment (Main
Repeat procedures 5) - 6) until the conditions of procedure 5) scanning direction, sub scanning direction)
are satisfied. (Auto adjustment)
In this adjustment, the image registration adjustment in the main
scanning direction and that in the sub scanning direction are exe-
ADJ 7 Image registration adjustment cuted simultaneously and automatically.
1) Enter SIM50-22 mode.
(Print engine section)
(4.3 Inch LCD model)
This adjustment is needed in the following situations:
* When the color shift occurs.
* When the LSU (writing) unit is replaced.
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
* When the LSU (writing) unit is removed from the main unit.
$872$'-8670(172)5(*,675$7,21 '580326,7,21
* When the color image registration mistake in the main scanning
direction occurs. 0$,1)0$,1568%6.(:
* When the color image registration mistake in the sub scanning &ǂ/1*
direction occurs 052.
* When the unit is installed or when the installing place is changed. </2.
* When maintenance work is performed. (Replacement of the
OPC drum, the OPC cartridge, the transfer unit, the transfer belt, 5(*,67 '580326 $// (;(&87(
etc.)
* When [ADJ 5] print engine image magnification ratio (BK) (main
scanning direction) is performed.
EXECUTE Adjustment completed
* U2 trouble has occurred.
* The PCU PWB has been replaced.
* The EEPROM of the PCU PWB has been replaced.
Note before adjustment ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
(Before execution of this adjustment, all the following adjustments $872$'-8670(172)5(*,675$7,21 '580326,7,21
must have been completed.)
12:(;(&87,1*
* [ADJ 3] image skew adjustment (LSU (writing) unit)
* [ADJ 5] print engine image magnification ratio (BK) (main scan-
ning direction) (print engine section)
(;(&87(
Abnormal end
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
$872$'-8670(172)5(*,675$7,21 '580326,7,21
35(66>(&(;87(@7267$57
(55257211(5(037<
(;(&87(
MX-C401 ADJUSTMENTS 4 – 14
(8.5 Inch LCD model)
7-B Image registration adjustment (Main
scanning direction) (Manual adjustment)
NOTE: If item "AR_AUTO" in SIM44-1 is 0 (Allows) and process
control is executed, the image registration adjustment is
executed automatically and updates the result in each
case.
In case of retaining the manual adjustment result, 1 must
be set to item "AR_AUTO" of SIM44-1 (inhibits).
1) Enter SIM50-20 mode.
(4.3 Inch LCD model)
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
EXECUTE Adjustment completed 5(*,675$7,21$'-8670(17)52175($5',5(&7,21
$˖ ˖&<$1)5217
$˖ %˖ ˖&<$15($5
˷̚˹ &˖ ˖0$*(17$)5217
(;(&87(
Abnormal end
MX-C401 ADJUSTMENTS 4 – 15
2) Select the paper feed tray with A4 (11" x 8.5") paper.
3) Press [EXECUTE] key.
The image registration adjustment pattern is printed.
R side Color image registration check C (Image registration fine adjustment reference frame)
section (Rough adjustment)
A-sub
A-main B-main
F side
The color image registrations of all the colors on the F side
and on the R side must be within the specified range.
4) Check the rough adjustment and the fine adjustment print pat-
Adjustment
tern positions of each color in the front frame and the rear Display/Item Content Default
value range
frame sides.
A CYAN Image registration 1 - 199 100
Use the visually highest color density section as the center, (FRONT) adjustment value
and measure the shift amount. (Main scanning direction)
The front frame registration and the rear frame registration are (Cyan) (F side)
adjusted independently. B CYAN Image registration 1 - 199 100
(REAR) adjustment value
To check the image registration, therefore, check the front
(Main scanning direction)
frame side and the rear frame side individually. (Cyan) (R side)
Rough adjustment pattern check: Check the color image regis- C MAGENTA Image registration 1 - 199 100
tration check section, and use the black scale of "0" as the (FRONT) adjustment value
center reference, and check the balance in shifts of the color (Main scanning direction)
image line positions in the positive and the negative directions. (Magenta) (F side)
With the scale of "0" as the center reference, the color image D MAGENTA Image registration 1 - 199 100
line on the positive side must be on the symmetrical position of (REAR) adjustment value
(Main scanning direction)
that on the negative side.
(Magenta) (R side)
Fine adjustment pattern check: Check to confirm that the dark E YELLOW Image registration 1 - 199 100
area (one of the five areas which are normally to be seen) is at (FRONT) adjustment value
the center of the image registration fine adjustment reference (Main scanning direction)
frame in the square frame. (Yellow) (F side)
In this case, use the color image registration check scale (fine F YELLOW Image registration 1 - 199 100
adjustment) as the reference. (REAR) adjustment value
(Main scanning direction)
Check to confirm that the center position of the dark section is (Yellow) (R side)
within r2 step.
(If the fine adjustment print pattern is located in the range of 0 Repeat procedures 3) - 4) until a satisfactory result is obtained.
r2 from the fine adjustment reference pattern scale, the adjust- NOTE: If either of front or rear adjustment value is changed, the
ment is not required.) other adjustment print pattern position may be varied. Be
If the above condition is not satisfied, select the color mode careful of that.
adjustment item A - F to be adjusted and change the adjust-
ment value to adjust.
MX-C401 ADJUSTMENTS 4 – 16
7-C Image registration adjustment (Sub
scanning direction) (Manual adjustment)
NOTE: If item "AR_AUTO" in SIM44-1 is 0 (Allows) and process
control is executed, the image registration adjustment is
executed automatically and updates the result in each
case.
In case of retaining the manual adjustment result, 1 (inhib-
its) must be set to item "AR_AUTO" of SIM44-1.
1) Enter SIM50-20 mode.
(4.3 Inch LCD model) (8.5 Inch LCD model)
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
5(*,675$7,21$'-8670(17)52175($5',5(&7,21
$˖ ˖&<$1)5217
$˖ %˖ ˖&<$15($5
˷̚˹ &˖ ˖0$*(17$)5217
(;(&87(
R side Color image registration check C (Image registration fine adjustment reference frame)
section (Rough adjustment)
A-sub
A-main B-main
F side
The color image registrations of all the colors on the F side
and on the R side must be within the specified range.
4) Check the rough adjustment and the fine adjustment print pat- Fine adjustment pattern check:
tern positions of each color on the front frame side and on the Check to confirm that the dark area (one of the five areas
rear frame side. which are normally to be seen) is at the center of the image
Visually check the color density and make the darkest section registration fine adjustment reference frame in the square
as the center, and use it as the read value of the shift amount. frame.
The image registration on the front frame side and that on the In this case, use the color image registration check scale (fine
rear frame side are independently adjusted. adjustment) as the reference.
To check the image registration, therefore, check each of the Check to confirm that the center position of the dark section is
front frame side and the rear frame side. within r2 step.
Rough adjustment pattern check: (If the fine adjustment print pattern is located in the range of 0
Check the color image registration check section, and use the r2 from the fine adjustment reference pattern scale, the adjust-
black scale of "0" as the center reference, and check the bal- ment is not required.)
ance in shifts of the color image line positions in the positive If the above condition is not satisfied, select the color mode
and the negative directions. With the scale of "0" as the center adjustment item A - F to be adjusted, and change the adjust-
reference, the color image line on the positive side must be on ment value to adjust.
the symmetrical position of that on the negative side.
MX-C401 ADJUSTMENTS 4 – 17
2) Enter the simulation 48-1 mode.
Adjustment
Display/Item Content Default (4.3 Inch LCD model)
value range
G CYAN Image registration 1 - 199 100
(SUB) adjustment value
(Sub scanning direction)
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12 &/26(
(Cyan) 7(67
I MAGENTA Image registration 1 - 199 100 0$*1,),&$7,21$'-8670(17
(SUB) adjustment value $˖ ˖&&'0$,1
(Sub scanning direction) $˖
(Magenta)
%˖ ˖&&'68%
H YELLOW Image registration 1 - 199 100 ˷̚˹ &˖ ˖63)0$,1
(SUB) adjustment value
'˖ ˖63)68%
(Sub scanning direction)
(Yellow)
MX-C401 ADJUSTMENTS 4 – 18
3) Make a normal copy and obtain the copy magnification ratio.
8-B Scan image magnification ratio adjustment
(Sub scanning direction) (Document table Copy magnifi- (Original dimension - Copy dimension)
100%
mode) cation ratio Original dimension
1) Place a scale on the document table as shown in the figure
below. (Example 1)
Copy A
10 20 90 100 110
(Shorter than
the original)
Scale
(Original) 10 20 90 100 110
(Example 2)
2) Enter the simulation 48-1 mode. Copy B
10 20 90 100 110
(4.3 Inch LCD model) (Longer than
the original)
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26( 4) Check that the copy magnification ratio is within the specified
0$*1,),&$7,21$'-8670(17 range (100 r 0.8%).
$˖ ˖&&'0$,1 If the copy magnification ratio is within the specified range (100
$˖ r 0.8%), the adjustment is completed. If the copy magnification
%˖ ˖&&'68%
ratio is not within the specified range, perform the following
˷̚˹ &˖ ˖63)0$,1 procedure.
'˖ ˖63)68% 5) Change the adjustment value of the adjustment item CCD
(SUB) of SIM48-1.
When the adjustment value is increased, the copy magnifica-
tion ratio in the sub scanning direction is increased.
(8.5 Inch LCD model) When the adjustment value is changed by 1, the copy magnifi-
cation ratio is changed by about 0.1%.
Repeat the procedures 3) - 5) until the copy magnification ratio is
within the specified range (100 r 0.8%).
Setting Default
9-A Scan image magnification ratio adjustment
Item/Display Content
range value (Main scanning direction) (RSPF mode)
A CCD (MAIN) SCAN main scanning 1 - 99 50 1) Place the duplex adjustment chart shown below on the docu-
magnification ratio ment tray of the RSPF.
adjustment (CCD)
B CCD (SUB) SCAN sub scanning 1 - 99 50
The adjustment chart is prepared by the following procedures.
magnification ratio Use A4 (11" x 8.5") paper, and put marks on both sides and
adjustment (CCD) both surfaces of the paper at 10mm from each edge.
Paper pass
direction
A4 size
MX-C401 ADJUSTMENTS 4 – 19
2) Make a duplex copy at the normal ratio on A4 paper.
Setting Default
3) Measure the images on the copy paper and the original Item Display Content
range value
images. C SPF (MAIN) RSPF document front 1 - 99 50
surface magnification ratio
adjustment (Main scan)
D SPF (SUB) RSPF document front 1 - 99 50
surface magnification ratio
adjustment (Sub scan)
E SPFB (MAIN) RSPF document back 1 - 99 50
surface magnification ratio
adjustment (Main scan)
F SPFB (SUB) RSPF document back 1 - 99 50
original surface magnification ratio
adjustment (Sub scan)
10mm
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
0$*1,),&$7,21$'-8670(17
$˖ ˖&&'0$,1
Paper pass
direction
A4 size
$˖ %˖ ˖&&'68%
˷̚˹ &˖ ˖63)0$,1
10mm
MX-C401 ADJUSTMENTS 4 – 20
2) Make a duplex copy at the normal ratio on A4 paper.
Setting Default
3) Measure the images on the copy paper and the original Item Display Content
range value
images. C SPF (MAIN) RSPF document front 1 - 99 50
surface magnification ratio
adjustment (Main scan)
10
D SPF (SUB) RSPF document front 1 - 99 50
surface magnification ratio
50
adjustment (Sub scan)
E SPFB (MAIN) RSPF document back 1 - 99 50
100
surface magnification ratio
adjustment (Main scan)
150
F SPFB (SUB) RSPF document back 1 - 99 50
200 original surface magnification ratio
adjustment (Sub scan)
10
(Front surface)
SPFB (SUB): Sub scanning direction image magnification ratio
150
(Back surface)
copy
200
A=B
MX-C401 ADJUSTMENTS 4 – 21
2) Make a copy of the adjustment chart in the document table
mode. 10-B Scan image off-center adjustment
3) Check the copy image center position. (RSPF mode)
If A’ - B’ = r 4.0mm, the adjustment is not required. NOTE: To execute this adjustment, the paper off-center must have
been adjusted properly.
1) Make an adjustment chart. (Draw a line at the center of both
surfaces in parallel with the paper transport direction.)
A’
Front surface
B’
A’ - B’ = 1.0mm B
(100%)
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12 A
7(67 &/26(
25,*,1$/&(17(52))6(76(783
$˖ ˖2&
$˖ %˖ ˖63)6,'(
˷̚˹ &˖ ˖63)6,'(
A=B
(8.5 Inch LCD model) 2) Set the adjustment chart on the RSPF, and make a copy in the
duplex copy mode.
3) Check the copy image center position.
(Single) If A’ - B’ = r 5.0mm, the adjustment is not required.
(Duplex) If A’ - B’ = r 5.4mm, the adjustment is not required.
A’
MX-C401 ADJUSTMENTS 4 – 22
4) Enter the simulation 50-12 mode. NOTE: Before execution of this adjustment, be sure to execute
(4.3 Inch LCD model) ADJ 5 Print image magnification ratio adjustment (BK)
(Main scanning direction) (Print engine section) in
advance.
1) Enter SIM50-10 mode.
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
(4.3 Inch LCD model)
25,*,1$/&(17(52))6(76(783
$˖ ˖2&
$˖
%˖ ˖63)6,'( ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
˷̚˹ &˖ ˖63)6,'(
3$3(5&(17(52))6(76(783
$˖ ˖%.0$*
$˖ %˖ ˖0$,10)7
˷̚˹ &˖ ˖0$,1&6
'˖ ˖0$,1&6
(8.5 Inch LCD model)
(;(&87(
Setting Default
Item Display Content
range value
A OC Document table image off- 1 - 99 50 2) Set A4 (11" x 8.5") paper in the paper feed tray of the adjust-
center adjustment ment target.
B SPF(SIDE1) SPF front surface image off- 1 - 99 50
center adjustment
3) Select the paper feed tray of the adjustment target.
C SPF(SIDE2) SPF back surface image off- 1 - 99 50 4) Press [EXECUTE] key.
center adjustment The adjustment pattern is printed.
6) Enter the adjustment value with 10-key, and press [OK] key. 5) Check the adjustment pattern to confirm that the items below
(For the 4.3 Inch LCD model, press the OSA shortcut key.) are in the range of the standard values.
When the set value is increased, the main scanning print posi- Content Standard adjustment value
tion is shifted to the front side by 0.1mm. X Lead edge void area 3.0 r 1.0mm
7) Make a copy, and check the position of the copy image center. Y Rear edge void area 2.0 - 5.0mm
Change the adjustment value and perform procedures 4) - 6) Z1/Z2 FRONT/REAR void area 3.0 r 2.0mm
until the above condition is satisfied.
Z1
3.0 2.0mm
ADJ 11 Print area (Void area)
adjustment (Print engine
section)
This adjustment is needed in the following situations: X Y
3.0 1.0mm 2.0 5.0mm
* When the LSU is replaced or removed.
* When a paper tray is replaced.
* When the paper tray section is disassembled.
* When the manual feed tray is replaced.
* When the manual feed tray is disassembled.
* When the switchback section is disassembled.
* When the regist roller section is disassembled.
* U2 trouble has occurred. Z2
3.0 2.0mm
* The PCU PWB has been replaced.
* The EEPROM of the PCU PWB has been replaced. If the above condition is not satisfied, or if it is set to a desired
condition, execute the simulation 50-1.
(Note) Feed paper from all the paper feed trays to confirm.
MX-C401 ADJUSTMENTS 4 – 23
6) Go through the modes specified in Simulation 50-1. Setting De-
Display/Item Content
(4.3 Inch LCD model) range fault
M Sub DENB-MFT Manual feed 1 - 99 50
scanning correction value
N direction DENB-CS1 Tray 1 correction 1 - 99 50
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26( print area value
O correction DENB-CS2 Tray 2 correction 1 - 99 50
/($'('*($'-8670(179$/8(
value value
$˖ ˖55&$
P DENB-CS3 Tray 3 correction 1 - 99 50
$˖ %˖ ˖55&%&6 value
˷̚˹ &˖ ˖55&%'6. Q DENB-CS4 Tray 4 correction 1 - 99 50
value
'˖ ˖55&%0)7
R DENB-ADU ADU correction value 1 - 99 50
MX-C401 ADJUSTMENTS 4 – 24
1) Place a scale on the document table as shown in the figure Setting De-
below. Display/Item Content
range fault
Place a scale so that it is in parallel with the scanning direction H Void area DENA Lead edge void area 1 - 99 30
and that its lead edge is in contact with the document guide adjust- adjustment
plate. I ment DENB Rear edge void area 1 - 99 30
adjustment
Place white paper on the document table so that the scale lead
J FRONT/ FRONT/REAR void 1 - 99 30
edge can be seen.
REAR area adjustment
K Off-center OFSET_OC OC document off- 1 - 99 50
adjust- center adjustment
ment
L Magnifica SCAN_ SCAN sub scanning 1 - 99 50
tion ratio SPEED_OC magnification ratio
correction adjustment (CCD)
M Sub DENB-MFT Manual feed 1 - 99 50
scanning correction value
N direction DENB-CS1 Tray 1 correction 1 - 99 50
print area value
O correction DENB-CS2 Tray 2 correction 1 - 99 50
value value
P DENB-CS3 Tray 3 correction 1 - 99 50
value
Q Sub DENB-CS4 Tray 4 correction 1 - 99 50
2) Go through the modes specified in Simulation 50-1.
scanning value
(4.3 Inch LCD model) R direction DENB-ADU ADU correction value 1 - 99 50
print area
correction
value
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
4) Perform the image lead edge reference position adjustment.
/($'('*($'-8670(179$/8(
Shift from the simulation mode to the copy mode and make a
$˖ ˖55&$
$˖ copy in 100% mode and in 200% mode.
%˖ ˖55&%&6 When the adjustment value of RRCA is proper, the lead edge
˷̚˹ &˖ ˖55&%'6. image from 3.0mm is not copied in either of 100% and 200%
'˖ ˖55&%0)7 copy scale.
If not, change and adjust the RRCA value.
(Adjust so that the lead edge image from 3.0mm is not copied
in either of different copy magnification ratios.)
(8.5 Inch LCD model) Repeat the above procedures until a satisfactory result is
obtained.
Scale image 3.0mm position
Paper lead
edge
100%
5mm 10mm
200%
5mm 10mm
MX-C401 ADJUSTMENTS 4 – 25
(8.5 Inch LCD model)
Adjust Standard
Display/ De-
Content ment adjustment
Item fault
range value
LEAD Image loss Lead edge 0 - 99 30 3.0
adjustment image loss r 1.0mm
adjustment
SIDE Side image 0 - 99 20 2.0
loss adjustment r 1.0mm
12-B Adjust the original scan start position 3) Enter the adjustment value and press the [OK] key. (For the
(Adjust the scanner read position in RSPF- 4.3 Inch LCD model, press the OSA shortcut key.)
mode front face scan) <<Description of adjustment display>>
This adjustment is needed in the following situations:
Set Default
* The scan control PWB has been replaced. Item Display item Description
range value
* The EEPROM on the scan control PWB has been replaced. A ADJUST VALUE RSPF scan position 1 - 99 70
adjustment
* The scanner (reading) section has been disassembled.
* The scanner (reading) unit has been replaced. • When the set value is increased, the distance from the home
* U2 trouble has occurred. position to the RSPF scan position is increased.
* The RSPF section has been disassembled. • When the set value is changed by 1, the scan position is
* The RSPF unit has been replaced. changed by 0.1mm.
This adjustment is intended to adjust the scanner read position in • Repeat the procedures of 1) - 3) until a satisfactory result is
RSPF-mode scan. obtained.
An incorrect adjustment would deviate the scanner stop position • NOTE: After execution of this adjustment, be sure to
from the required position, thus possibly causing a shadow of the execute ADJ 12C Copy image position, image loss
original table to appear at the leading edge of an image generated adjustment (RSPF mode).
by RSPF mode scan.
1) Make a copy in RSPF mode, and make sure that the printed 12-C Copy image position, image loss
image at the leading edge of the copied image is free from adjustment (RSPF mode)
shadows. 1) Prepare the adjustment chart.
The adjustment chart can be made by the following proce-
dures.
Use A4 (11" x 8.5") paper and draw arrow marks vertically and
Papar lead edge horizontally on the front and the back surfaces.
At the same time, put marks of the lead edge, the trail edge,
Image area the front end, and the rear end as well as the identification
marks of the front surface and the back surface.
R Front surface
FACE
L T
Back surface
R
BACK
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
63)6&$11,1*326,7,21$'-8670(17
$872 0$18$/ L T
Draw arrows.
MX-C401 ADJUSTMENTS 4 – 26
2) Enter the SIM50-6 mode. (Lead edge image loss adjustment)
(4.3 Inch LCD model) 1) Set the lead edge image loss adjustment values (LEAD EDGE
(SIDE1/SIDE2)) on the front surface and the back surface to
the following values.
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21 ǂǂ12 &/26(
(Standard set value)
7(67
/($'('*($'-8670(179$/8(63)
LEAD EDGE(SIDE 1):
30 Lead edge image loss set value (Front surface)
$˖ ˖6,'(
$˖ LEAD EDGE(SIDE 2):
%˖ ˖6,'( 30 Lead edge image loss set value (Back surface)
˷̚ ˹ &˖ ˖/($'B('*( 6,'( (When the set value is increased, the lead edge image loss is
'˖ ˖)5217B5($5 6,'( increased.)
(Change for change in the set value: 0.1mm/step)
2) Make a duplex copy in 100% in the RSPF mode. Check to
confirm that the lead edge image loss is within 3.0 r 1.0mm on
(8.5 Inch LCD model) the front surface and the back surface. The paper lead edge
must be aligned with the presumed image lead edge.
Paper lead edge The paper lead edge must be aligned with
the image lead edge.
Copy image
Setting Default
Item/Display Content
range value
Image loss
A SIDE1 Front surface 1 - 99 50 3.0 1.0mm
document scan
position adjustment
If the above condition is not satisfied, perform the following
(CCD)
procedure.
B SIDE2 Back surface 1 - 99 50
document scan 3) Enter the adjustment value of SIDE1/SIDE2 with 10-key, and
position adjustment press [OK] key. (For the 4.3 Inch LCD model, press the OSA
(CCD) shortcut key.)
C Image LEAD_EDGE Front surface lead 0 - 99 20 Adjust so that the paper lead edge is aligned with the pre-
loss (SIDE1) edge image loss sumed image lead edge.
amount amount setting
D setting FRONT_REAR Front surface side 0 - 99 20
SIDE1:
SIDE1 (SIDE1) image loss amount Front surface document lead edge scan position adjustment
setting SIDE2:
E TRAIL_EDGE Front surface rear 0 - 99 30
Back surface document lead edge scan position adjustment
(SIDE1) edge image loss
amount setting (When the adjustment value is increased, the print image posi-
F Image LEAD_EDGE Back surface lead 0 - 99 20 tion is shifted to the delaying direction for the paper.)
loss (SIDE2) edge image loss (Change for change in the set value: 0.1mm/step)
amount amount setting
Perform the procedures of 2) - 3) until a satisfactory result is
G setting FRONT_REAR Back surface side 0 - 99 20
SIDE2
obtained.
(SIDE2) image loss amount
setting
H TRAIL_EDGE Back surface rear 0 - 99 30
(SIDE2) edge image loss
amount setting
I OFSET_SPF1 SPF front surface 1 - 99 50
document off-
center adjustment
J OFSET_SPF2 SPF back surface 1 - 99 50
document off-
center adjustment
K SCAN_SPEED_SPF1 RSPF document 1 - 99 50
front surface
magnification ratio
(Sub scan)
L SCAN_SPEED_SPF2 RSPF document 1 - 99 50
back surface
magnification ratio
(Sub scan)
MX-C401 ADJUSTMENTS 4 – 27
(Rear edge image loss adjustment)
1) Make a duplex copy in 100% in the RSPF mode. Check to ADJ 13 Print lead edge image position
confirm that the rear edge image loss is 2.0 - 5.0mm on the adjustment (Printer mode)
front surface and the back surface.
(Print engine section)
Paper rear edge This adjustment is needed in the following situations:
* When the regist roller section is disassembled.
* When the LSU is replaced or removed.
* U2 trouble has occurred.
* The PCU PWB has been replaced.
* The EEPROM of the PCU PWB has been replaced.
NOTE: This adjustment is performed by the user to increase the
Copy image lead edge image position (standard value: 3mm).
1) Enter the simulation 50-5 mode.
(4.3 Inch LCD model)
Copy image
2) Select the set item K with the scroll key, and enter the value
corresponding to the paper feed tray with A4 (11" x 8.5") paper
in it.
Setting
Display/Item Content Default
range
A DEN-C Printer lead edge 1 - 99 30
image position
Copy image
adjustment
Paper R Image loss B DEN-B Rear edge void area 1 - 99 30
side edge 2.0 2.0mm
adjustment
If the above condition is not satisfied, perform the following C FRONT/REAR FRONT/REAR void 1 - 99 30
procedure. area adjustment
D DENB-MFT Manual feed rear edge 1 - 99 50
2) Enter the adjustment value of FRONT/REAR (SIDE 1)/
void area adjustment
FRONT/REAR (SIDE 2), and press [OK] key. (For the 4.3 Inch correction value
LCD model, press the OSA shortcut key.) E DENB-CS1 Tray 1 rear edge void 1 - 99 50
FRONT/REAR (SIDE 1) Front/Rear image loss adjustment area adjustment
value (Front surface) correction value
FRONT/REAR (SIDE 2) Front/Rear image loss adjustment F DENB-CS2 Tray 2 rear edge void 1 - 99 50
value (Back surface) area adjustment
correction value
(When the adjustment value is increased, the front/rear image G DENB-CS3 Tray 3 rear edge void 1 - 99 50
loss is increased.) area adjustment
(Change for change in the adjustment value: 0.1mm/step) correction value
Perform the procedures of 1) - 2) until a satisfactory result is
obtained.
MX-C401 ADJUSTMENTS 4 – 28
Setting (The following items affect the copy color balance/density
Display/Item Content Default adjustment, and must be checked and adjusted before execu-
range
H DENB-CS4 Tray 4 rear edge void 1 - 99 50 tion of the image quality adjustments.)
area adjustment 1) The following adjustment items must be adjusted properly.
correction value
I DENB-ADU ADU rear edge void 1 - 99 57 Job
area adjustment Adjustment Item List Simulation
No
correction value ADJ Image density ADJColor image sensor 44-13
J MULTI COUNT Number of print 1 - 999 1 2 sensor, image 2A calibration
K PAPER MFT Tray Manual 1-6 1 2 (CS1) registration sensor ADJColor image density 44-2
selection paper feed adjustment 2B sensor, black image
CS1 Tray 1 2 density sensor, image
CS2 Tray 2 3 registration sensor
CS3 Tray 3 4 adjustment
CS4 Tray 4 5 ADJ Image skew adjustment (LSU unit) 64-1/61-4
L DUPLEX YES Duplex Yes 0-1 0 1 (NO) 3
NO print No 1 ADJ OPC drum phase ADJ OPC drum phase 50-22
selection 4 adjustment 4A adjustment
(Auto adjustment)
3) Press [EXECUTE] key. ADJ Image registration ADJ Image registration 50-22
The adjustment pattern is printed. 7 adjustment (Print 7A adjustment
engine section) (Main scanning
4) Measure the distance from the paper lead edge the adjustment
direction, sub
pattern to the image lead edge. scanning direction)
Standard adjustment value: 3.0 r 2.0mm (Auto adjustment)
ADJ Image registration 50-20
7B adjustment (Main
scanning direction)
(Manual adjustment)
ADJ Image registration 50-21
7C adjustment (Sub
scanning direction)
3.0 2.0mm (Manual adjustment)
Job
Adjustment item list Simulation
No
ADJ Adjusting high ADJ Adjust the main charger 8-2
If an adjustment is required, perform the following procedures. 1 voltage values 1A grid voltage
5) Select the adjustment target of the paper feed mode adjust- ADJ Adjust the developing 8-1
ment item DENC with the scroll key. 1B bias voltage
6) Enter the adjustment value and press [OK] key. (For the 4.3 ADJ Transfer voltage 8-6
1C adjustment
Inch LCD model, press the OSA shortcut key.)
ADJ CCD gamma adjustment (CCD calibration) 63-3
When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the adjustment pattern is 14A
printed.
When the adjustment value is increased, the distance from the (Relationship between the servicing job contents and the copy
paper lead edge to the image lead edge is increased. When color balance/density adjustment)
the adjustment value is decreased, the distance is decreased. Note that the preliminary jobs before execution of the copy color
When the set value is changed by 1, the distance is changed balance/density adjustment depend on the machine status and the
by about 0.1mm. servicing conditions.
Perform the procedures 4) - 6) until a satisfactory result is Follow the flowchart of the copy color balance/density adjustment
obtained. procedures depending on the actual conditions.
There are following four, major cases.
1) When installing
ADJ 14 Copy color balance/density 2) When a periodic maintenance is performed.
adjustment 3) When a repair, an inspection, or a maintenance is performed.
(When a consumable part is replaced.)
(1) Note before execution of the copy color balance/density
4) When an installation, a repair, or inspection is performed.
adjustment
(Without replacement of a consumable part)
* After completion of this adjustment, the printer color balance/
(2) Copy color balance and density check
density adjustment must be executed.
(Note)
* Requisite conditions before execution of the copy color balance/
density adjustment Before checking the copy color balance and density, be sure to
execute the following jobs.
Before execution of the copy color balance/density adjustment,
check to insure that the adjustments which affect the copy color * Execute the high density image correction (Process correction)
balance/density adjustment have been completed. forcibly. (SIM 44-6)
The importance levels of them are shown below. * Execute the half-tone image correction forcibly. (SIM 44-26)
MX-C401 ADJUSTMENTS 4 – 29
(Method)
Make a copy of the gray test chart (UKOG-0162FCZZ) and a copy 14-A CCD gamma adjustment (CCD calibration)
of the servicing color test chart (UKOG-0326FCZZ/UKOG- (Normal document copy mode)
0326FC11), and check that they are proper. This adjustment is needed in the following situations:
a. Note for execution of the color balance and density check in the * When the CCD unit is replaced.
color copy mode * When a U2 trouble is occurred.
To check the copy color balance and density, use the gray test * When the scanner control PWB is replaced.
chart (UKOG-0162FCZZ) and the servicing color test chart
* When the EEPROM on the scanner control PWB is replaced.
(UKOG-0326FCZZ/UKOG-0326FC11). Set the copy density
level to "3" in the Text/Printed Photo mode (Manual), and make a (1) Note before adjustment
copy. 1) Check that the table glass, No. 1, 2, 3 mirrors, and the lens
At that time, all the color balance adjustments in the user adjust- surface are free from dirt and dust.
ment mode must be set to the default (center). (If there is some dust and dirt, wipe and clean with alcohol.)
In addition, be sure to use the recommended paper for color. 2) Check to confirm that the patches in BK1 and BK2 arrays of
b. Note for checking the monochrome copy mode density the SIT chart (UKOG-0280FCZZ or UKOG-0280FCZ1) are
free from dirt and scratches.
To check the density, use the gray test chart (UKOG-0162FCZZ).
Set the copy density level to "Manual 3" in the Text/Printed Photo If they are dirty, clean them.
mode (Manual). If they are scratched or streaked, replace with new one.
In addition, all the color balance adjustments in the user adjust- (2) Adjustment procedures
ment mode must be set to the default (center). 1) Set the SIT chart (UKOG-0280FCZZ or UKOG-0280FCZ1) to
[Check with the gray test chart (UKOG-0162FCZZ)] the center reference position on the left rear frame side of the
In the copy density check with the gray test chart, check to insure document table.
the following conditions. Set the chart so that the lighter density side of the patch is on
the left side.
NOTE: For the color (gray) balance, use the servicing color test
chart (UKOG-0326FCZZ/UKOG-0326FC11) to check.
(Color copy)
Patch 1 is SHARP gray chart
slightly copied.
SHARP GRAY CHART
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 W
Patch 2 is copied.
(Black-and-white copy)
Patch 2 is SHARP gray chart
slightly copied.
SHARP GRAY CHART If the SIT chart is not available, execute SIM 63-5 to set the
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 W
CCD gamma to the default. In this case, however, the adjust-
ment accuracy is lower when compared with the adjustment
method using the SIT chart.
NOTE: Check to insure that the SIT chart (UKOG-0280FCZZ or
Patch 3 is copied. UKOG-0280FCZ1) is in close contact with the document
Patch 1 is not copied. table.
UKOG-0280FCZZ is equivalent to UKOG-0280FCZ1.
[Check with the servicing color test chart (UKOG-0326FCZZ/
UKOG-0326FC11)] 2) Enter the SIM 63-3 mode and press [EXECUTE] key.
In the copy color balance check with the servicing color test chart, The automatic operation is started. During the adjustment,
check to insure the following conditions. [EXECUTE] is highlighted. After completion of the adjustment,
[EXECUTE] returns to the normal display.
(Color copy)
(4.3 Inch LCD model)
Serviceman chart (Color patch section)
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ
7(67 &/26(
6&$11(5&2/25%$/$1&($872$'-8670(17
2&
ǂ
The densities of patches 1 - 6 of Patch 7 is slightly
each color are properly balanced. copied or not copied.
% * 5 2&
MX-C401 ADJUSTMENTS 4 – 30
(8.5 Inch LCD model) b. Note for execution of the color balance adjustment (Auto
adjustment)
1) The print engine section must have been adjusted properly.
2) The CCD gamma adjustment must have been adjusted prop-
erly.
3) For the color balance adjustment, use the recommended color
paper. (For the recommended paper, refer to [2].)
If the other kind of paper is used for the color balance adjust-
ment, the proper image quality (color balance, density) may
not be obtained.
4) When setting the adjustment pattern on the document table in
the automatic color balance adjustment procedures, place 5
sheets of white paper on the adjustment pattern in order to
prevent back copying and adverse effects of paper wrinkles as
far as possible.
NOTE: Since the SIT chart (UKOG-0280FCZZ or UKOG-0280FC
Z1) is easily discolored by sunlight (especially ultraviolet
rays) and humidity and temperature, put it in a bag (such
as a dark file) and store in a dark place of low temperature
and low humidity.
There are following two modes in the auto color balance adjust-
ment.
1) Auto color balance adjustment by the serviceman (SIM 46-24
is used.)
2) Auto color balance adjustment by the user (The user program
mode is used.) (The color balance target is the service target.)
The auto color balance adjustment by the user is provided to
reduce the number of service calls.
If the copy color balance is lost for some reasons, the user can
use this color balance adjustment to recover the balance.
When, however, the machine has a fatal problem or when the
machine environment is greatly changed, this function does
not work effectively.
On the other hand, the auto color balance adjustment by the
serviceman functions to recover the normal color balance
though the machine environment is greatly changed. If the
machine has a fatal problem, repair and adjust it for obtaining
the normal color balance.
To perform the adjustment, the above difference must be fully
understood.
MX-C401 ADJUSTMENTS 4 – 31
c. Adjustment procedure
(Auto color balance adjustment by the serviceman)
Start
Set the adjustment pattern on the document table. Select the factory
target or the service target, and press [EXECUTE] key.
(The adjustment pattern is scanned, and the adjustment is automati-
cally performed to print the check pattern.) (*1)
Check the printed check pattern for any streaks or unclear copy. (*4)
Press [OK] key, and the initial setting of the half tone image correction
is automatically performed. Automatic color balance target change
End
MX-C401 ADJUSTMENTS 4 – 32
1) Enter the SIM 46-24 mode. (4.3 Inch LCD model)
(4.3 Inch LCD model)
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26( (1*,1(+$/)721($872$'-8670(1702'(5(*8/$5
(1*,1(+$/)721($872$'-8670(1702'(5(*8/$5 3/($6(6(/(&77+(02'()$&725<256(59,&($1'3/$&(
35(66>(;(&87(@72352&21(;($1'35,177+(7(673$7&+ 7+(7(673$7&+21*/$667+(135(66>(;(&87(@
3/($6(86(63(&,),('7<3(2)$25h6,=(3$3(5
)257+,6$'-
/,*+7$5($$7/()76,'(21'2&80(17*/$66
(;(&87(
2.
MX-C401 ADJUSTMENTS 4 – 33
(8.5 Inch LCD model)
Bk
Q
(Max)
A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P
Remark:
After pressing [OK] key on the operation panel, the initial set- 2) Patch C or D of each of Y, M, C,
ting of the half tone image correction is started. During the and BK is very slightly copied.
operation, "NOW REGISTERING THE NEW TARGET OF Patch A of each of Y, M, C,
HALFTONE PROCON." is displayed. This operation takes and BK are not copied.
several minutes. 1) The max. density section is not blurred.
After completion of the operation, "PLEASE QUIT THIS
3) Patch for each of Y, M, C, BK
MODE" is displayed. The patch density is identical between patches or not reversed.
The patch density is changed gradually.
Do not cancel the simulation until "PLEASE QUIT THIS
MODE" is displayed.
The print density must be changed gradually from the lighter
(4.3 Inch LCD model) level to the darker level. The density changing direction must
not be reversed.
The density level of each color must be almost at the same
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12 level.
7(67 &/26(
(1*,1(+$/)721($872$'-8670(1702'(5(*8/$5
x Patch B may not be copied.
&203/(7('7+,6352&('85(
x Patch A must not be copied.
(Method 2)
3/($6(48,77+,602'(
By printing the color balance adjustment sheet with SIM 46-21
and comparing each process (CMY) black patch color balance
with the black patch, the color balance adjustment can be
checked more precisely.
Bk
CMY
blend
Q
(Max)
A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P
MX-C401 ADJUSTMENTS 4 – 34
(Method 3) 11) Use the servicing color test chart (UKOG-0326FCZZ/UKOG-
Use the servicing color test chart (UKOG-0326FCZZ/UKOG- 0326FC11) in the Text/Printed Photo mode (Manual) to check
0326FC11) in the Text/Photo mode (Manual) to check the copy the copy color balance/density. (Refer to the item of the copy
color balance and density. (Refer to the item of the copy color color balance and density check.)
balance and density check.) Though the above procedures 9) - 11) are performed, the copy
When satisfactory color balance and density are not obtained color balance and density are not in the specified range, there may
from the automatic adjustment by selecting the factory target in be another cause.
procedure 4), change the factory color balance target with SIM Troubleshoot the cause and repair or perform proper treatments,
63-11 and repeat the procedures from 1). and try all the procedures of the print image adjustment from the
If a satisfactory result is not obtained with the above proce- beginning.
dure, perform the manual color balance adjustment (ADJ If the automatic adjustment cannot obtain satisfactory results of the
14C). copy color balance and density, use SIM 46-21 (ADJ 14C) (Manual
Also when the service target is selected in procedure 4) to exe- adjustment).
cute the automatic adjustment and a satisfactory result is not
obtained, perform the manual color balance adjustment (ADJ 14-C Copy color balance adjustment
14C). (Manual adjustment)
7) Use SIM44-26 to execute the half tone image correction. This adjustment is needed in the following situations:
(Forcible execution)
* When a consumable part (developer, OPC drum, transfer belt) is
Enter the SIM44-26 mode and press [EXECUTE] key. replaced.
[EXECUTE] key is highlighted and the operation is started. * The CCD unit has been replaced.
(4.3 Inch LCD model) * When the scanner (reading) section is disassembled.
* When the scanner (reading) section is replaced.
* U2 trouble has occurred.
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26( * When the MFP PWB is replaced.
+$/)721('(16,7<&255(&7(;(&87,21 * When the EEPROM on the MFP PWB is replaced.
728&+>(;(&87(@7+(1(;(&87,2167$57 * The scanner control PWB has been replaced.
* The EEPROM on the scanner control PWB has been replaced.
a. General
The color balance adjustment (Manual adjustment) is used to
(;(&87(
adjust the copy density (17 point for each color) of CMYK. This is
used at the following situation. When the result of auto adjustment
described above is not existing within the range of reference. When
(8.5 Inch LCD model) a fine adjustment is required. When there is request from the user
for changing (customizing) the color balance.
In this manual adjustment, adjust only the color patch which could
not adjusted properly in the automatic adjustment.
If the color balance is improper, execute the automatic color bal-
ance adjustment in advance, and execute this adjustment for better
efficiency.
MX-C401 ADJUSTMENTS 4 – 35
c. Adjustment procedure
Copy color balance and density adjustment (Manual adjustment) procedure
flowchart (SIM46-21)
Start
YES
Cancel the SIM46-21 mode.
Check the copy color balance and density adjustment result with the
test chart. (*1)
Use the test chart (UKOG-0326FCZZ/UKOG-0326FC11)
to make a copy in the Text/Printed Photo mode, and check
the color balance and density.
YES
Check to confirm that the initial setting of the half tone image correction is
properly set. (*2)
Set the service target for the automatic copy color balance
adjustment. (SIM63-7)
End
MX-C401 ADJUSTMENTS 4 – 36
1) Enter the SIM46-21 mode. When, however, the color balance is adjusted according to a
(4.3 Inch LCD model) request from the user, there is no need to set to the standard
color balance stated above.
If the color balance of each patch of the process black (CMY
mixed color) is slightly shifted to Magenta, it means that the
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26( adjustment is proper. If the color balance of the adjustment
(1*,1(&2/25%$/$1&(0$18$/$'->$//&2/25@ pattern printed in this mode is slightly shifted to Magenta, it is
$˖ ˖32,17 converted into the natural gray color balance by the color cor-
$˖ rection table in an actual copy mode. (When the color balance
%˖ ˖32,17
target is DEF 1.)
˷̚˹ &˖ ˖32,17
4) Select the color to be adjusted with the color select key, and
'˖ ˖32,17 select the adjustment point with the scroll key.
5) Enter the adjustment value with 10-key and press [OK] key.
. & 0 < (;(&87(
(For the 4.3 Inch LCD model, press the OSA shortcut key.)
The adjustment value is set in the range of 245 - 755 (1 - 999).
(8.5 Inch LCD model) When SIM 46-24 is used to adjust the automatic color balance
and density, all the set values of this simulation are set to 500.
To increase the density, increase the adjustment value. To
decrease the density, decrease the adjustment value.
Repeat procedures of 2) - 5) until the condition of 3) is satis-
fied.
;
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
/ +$/)721(352&2167$1'$5'9$/8(5(*,67(5
728&+>(;(&87(@7+(1(;(&87,2167$57
%
$M
CMY
Blend (;(&87(
3
/CZ
# $ % & ' ( ) * + , - . / 0 1 2
3) Patch A of each of Y, M, C,
and BK are not copied.
MX-C401 ADJUSTMENTS 4 – 37
After completion of the operation, the simulation is canceled. (Gamma setting of auto color balance adjustment service
This procedure is to save the copy color balance adjustment color balance target)
data as the reference data for the half tone correction. a. General
Immediately after execution of ADJ 14C (Color balance adjust- When the automatic color balance adjustment is executed, a cer-
ment, Manual) with SIM 46-21, be sure to execute this proce- tain color balance (gamma) is used as the target.
dure. There are following three kinds of the target.
When ADJ 14B (Color balance adjustment, Auto) is executed • Factory color balance (gamma) target
with SIM 46-24, this procedure is automatically executed.
• Service color balance (gamma) target
When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, it is highlighted and the
• User color balance (gamma) target
operation is started.
In the above three, only the service color balance target can be set
8) Use SIM 44-26 to execute the half tone image correction.
to a desired level.
(Forcible execution)
This adjustment is required in the following cases.
Enter the SIM 44-26 mode and press [EXECUTE] key.
* When the copy color balance/density adjustment (manual adjust-
[EXECUTE] key is highlighted and the operation is started.
ment) is executed with SIM 46-21).
(4.3 Inch LCD model)
* U2 trouble has occurred.
* When the MFP PWB is replaced.
* When the EEPROM on the MFP PWB is replaced.
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26( * The scanner control PWB has been replaced.
+$/)721('(16,7<&255(&7(;(&87,21 * The EEPROM on the scanner control PWB has been replaced.
728&+>(;(&87(@7+(1(;(&87,2167$57 * When the user requests for customizing the color balance.
* When the service color balance target gamma is judged as
improper.
(Each color balance target for the copy color balance
adjustment)
(;(&87(
Type Descriptions
A Factory color There are three kinds of the color balance target,
balance and each of them is specified according to the
(8.5 Inch LCD model)
(gamma) target machine design. Use SIM 63-11 to select one of
them as the factory target. The default setting
(factory setting) is the color balance (DEF1)
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
which emphasizes color reproduction.
+$/)721('(16,7<&255(&7(;(&87,21
728&+>(;(&87(@7+(1(;(&87,2167$57 B Service color This target is used when the user requests to
balance customize the color balance to user's desired
(gamma) target level. In advance, the user's unique color balance
must be registered as the service color balance
target. The above registration (setting) is made
by the serviceman with SIM 46-21 to adjust the
color balance and with SIM 63-7 to register it.
This color balance target is used when the user
executes the color balance adjustment. When,
therefore, the service color balance target is
changed, the color balance target of the user's
color balance adjustment is also changed. When,
(;(&87(
however, SIM 63-8 is executed, the color balance
is set to the factory color balance target set with
It takes several minutes to complete the operation. After com-
SIM 63-11. The default setting (factory setting) of
pletion of the operation, "COMPLETE" is displayed. the color balance is same as the factory color
After completion of the operation, the simulation is canceled. balance target. (Emphasized on color
9) Make a copy of the servicing color test chart (UKOG- reproduction (DEF1))
If the user does not request for customizing the
0326FCZZ/UKOG-0326FC11) and a user's document accord-
color balance, be sure to use SIM 63-8 to set the
ing to necessity in the Text/Printed Photo mode (Manual) and
color balance to the factory color balance target
check the adjustment result again. (Refer to the item of the
C User color Same color balance as the service color balance
copy color balance/density check.) balance (gamma) target When the service color balance
If the copy color balance and density are not adjusted to the (gamma) target target is changed, this color balance target is also
specified level, there may be another cause. changed accordingly.
Troubleshoot the cause, and repair or perform proper treat-
ments, and try all the procedures of the print image adjustment
from the beginning.
NOTE: If the color balance is customized, use SIM 63-7 to register
the color balance as the service target.
If the color balance is not customized, this procedure is not
required.
If the customized color balance is registered as the service
target, the automatic color balance adjustment can be
made in the next color balance adjustment.
In the next color balance adjustment, select the service tar-
get color balance in the automatic color balance adjust-
ment mode to make an adjustment to the similar color
balance as the registered color balance.
MX-C401 ADJUSTMENTS 4 – 38
• Relationship between the factory target and the service target and the color balance target for the user color balance adjustment in the copy
color balance adjustment (SIM 46-24)
SIM63-8
Factory color balance target (DEF2) =
Factory color balance target Service color balance target/Color balance
(DEF2) target for the user color balance adjustment
• Service color balance target in the copy color balance adjust- (Meaning of the service color balance target gamma data and
ment (SIM 46-24). the purpose of registration)
For the service color balance target, an optional color balance This procedure must be executed only when the color balance is
can be adjusted with SIM 46-21 and registered with SIM 63-7. customized with SIM 46-21. If the color balance is not customized,
When, however, SIM 63-8 is executed, the color balance is set to this procedure is not required.
the same balance as the factory color balance target set with After completion of the customized color balance adjustment (Man-
SIM 63-11. ual) with SIM 46-21 according to the user's request, use SIM 63-7
• Color balance target in the user color balance adjustment to register the service color balance target data by using adjust-
This color balance is same as the service color balance target in ment pattern that was printed in this mode.
the copy color balance adjustment (SIM 46-24). When, therefore, By this procedure, the service color balance target is revised.
the service color balance target is changed, this target is also It is recommendable to keep the printed adjustment pattern with
changed accordingly. SIM 46-21. This adjustment pattern can be used to register the
same color balance target to another machine.
MX-C401 ADJUSTMENTS 4 – 39
It is also useful to register the service color balance target data. 3) Press [SETUP] key.
Do not fold it and keep it under the circumstances which protect it 4) Set the color patch image (adjustment pattern) correctly
from discoloration and dirt. adjusted and printed in the copy color balance adjustment
The service color balance target data are basically registered (Manual adjustment) (SIM 46-21) (ADJ 14C) on the document
immediately after the color balance adjustment (Manual) with SIM table.
46-21. The color patch image (adjustment pattern) printed with SIM
If a considerable time has passed after completion of the color bal- 64-7 can be used instead. In this case, however, check that the
ance adjustment (Manual) with SIM 46-21, the color balance of the printed pattern is normal.
adjustment pattern at the time of adjustment differs from the color (When the color patch image (adjustment pattern) is printed by
balance of the adjustment pattern printed after a considerable time. SIM 64-7, set the item B (PROC ADJ) to "0 (YES)" and press
Never use such a pattern for the adjustment. [EXECUTE] key to print.)
The correctness of the service color balance target data can be A color patch image (adjustment pattern) printed by another
judges as follows. machine can be used.
When result of the color valance adjustment (Auto) with selecting Set the pattern so that the light density side is on the left side.
the service color balance target in SIM 46-24 is unsatisfactory or Place 5 sheets of white paper on the color patch image
abnormal. (adjustment pattern).
In that case, the registered service target data for the color balance If the color balance could not be adjusted satisfactorily with
adjustment (Auto) may be improper. SIM 46-21 (Color balance adjustment (Manual)), do not exe-
This may be caused when an improper or abnormal color balance cute SIM 63-7 to register the service color balance target data.
adjustment pattern was used to register the service color balance 5) Press [EXECUTE] key.
target data for the color balance adjustment with SIM 63-7.
(4.3 Inch LCD model)
The color balance adjustment pattern used in registration was
made and printed by the color balance adjustment (Manual) with
SIM 46-21. This procedure may have been executed erroneously
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
6&$11(57$5*(72)&2/25&$/,%6(7836(59,&(
%&'()
*+,-.
/012
The color patch image (adjustment pattern) is read.
(8.5 Inch LCD model) 6) Press [REPEAT] key, set the second color patch image
(adjustment pattern), and execute the procedure 5) again.
(4.3 Inch LCD model)
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
6&$11(57$5*(72)&2/25&$/,%6(7836(59,&(
%$6(
%&'()
*+,-.
/012
MX-C401 ADJUSTMENTS 4 – 40
(8.5 Inch LCD model) 2) Press [EXECUTE] key.
3) Press [YES] key.
The service color balance target and the color balance target for
the user color balance adjustment are set to the same color bal-
ance as the factory color balance target.
Setting
Display/Item Content Default
range
A AUTO Auto LOW 1 - 99 50
HIGH 1 - 99 50
B TEXT Text LOW 1 - 99 50
HIGH 1 - 99 50
C TEXT/PRINTED Text/Printed LOW 1 - 99 50
PHOTO Photo HIGH 1 - 99 50
D TEXT/PHOTO Text/Photograph LOW 1 - 99 50
HIGH 1 - 99 50
E PRINTED PHOTO Printed Photo LOW 1 - 99 50
HIGH 1 - 99 50
F PHOTOGRAPH Photograph LOW 1 - 99 50
HIGH 1 - 99 50
MX-C401 ADJUSTMENTS 4 – 41
Setting * U2 trouble has occurred.
Display/Item Content Default
range * When the MFP PWB is replaced.
G MAP Map LOW 1 - 99 50 * When the EEPROM on the MFP PWB is replaced.
HIGH 1 - 99 50
The density is adjusted in each copy mode individually. Normally
H LIGHT Light document LOW 1 - 99 50
individual adjustments are not required. When there is a request
HIGH 1 - 99 50
from the user, execute this adjustment.
I TEXT Text (Copy LOW 1 - 99 50
(COPY TO COPY) document) HIGH 1 - 99 50 1) Enter the SIM 46-2 mode.
J TEXT/PRINTED Text/Printed LOW 1 - 99 50 (4.3 Inch LCD model)
PHOTO Photo (Copy HIGH 1 - 99 50
(COPY TO COPY) document)
K PRINTED PHOTO Printed Photo LOW 1 - 99 50
(COPY TO COPY) (Copy document) HIGH 1 - 99 50 ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
L TEXT Text LOW 1 - 99 50 (;32685($'-8670(17%:>&23<@
(COLOR TONE (Color tone HIGH 1 - 99 50 $˖ ˖$872
ENHANCEMENT) enhancement) $˖
M TEXT/PRINTED Text/Printed LOW 1 - 99 50
%˖ ˖$872
PHOTO Photo HIGH 1 - 99 50 ˷̚˹ &˖ǂ ˖7(;7
(COLOR TONE (Color tone
'˖ ˖7(;735,17('3+272
ENHANCEMENT) enhancement)
N TEXT/PHOTO Text/Photograph LOW 1 - 99 50 /2: +,*+
(COLOR TONE (Color tone HIGH 1 - 99 50
ENHANCEMENT) enhancement)
O PRINTED PHOTO Printed Photo LOW 1 - 99 50
(COLOR TONE (Color tone
(8.5 Inch LCD model)
HIGH 1 - 99 50
ENHANCEMENT) enhancement)
P PHOTOGRAPH Photograph LOW 1 - 99 50
(COLOR TONE (Color tone HIGH 1 - 99 50
ENHANCEMENT) enhancement)
Q MAP Map LOW 1 - 99 50
(COLOR TONE (Color tone HIGH 1 - 99 50
ENHANCEMENT) enhancement)
R SINGLE COLOR Single color LOW 1 - 99 50
HIGH 1 - 99 50
S SINGLE COLOR Single color LOW 1 - 99 50
(COPY TO COPY) (Copy document) HIGH 1 - 99 50
T TWO COLOR Two-color LOW 1 - 99 50
(Red/Black) copy HIGH 1 - 99 50
U TWO COLOR Two-color LOW 1 - 99 50
(COPY TO COPY) (Red/Black) copy HIGH 1 - 99 50
(Copy document) 2) Select the copy mode to be adjusted with the scroll key.
3) Enter the adjustment value with 10-key and press [OK] key. Setting
Display/Item Content Default
When adjusting the copy density on the low density part, select range
"LOW" mode and change the adjustment value. When adjust- A AUTO1 Auto 1 LOW 1 - 99 50
ing the copy density on the high density part, select "HIGH" HIGH 1 - 99 50
mode and change the adjustment value. B AUTO2 Auto 2 LOW 1 - 99 50
When the adjustment value is increased, the copy density is HIGH 1 - 99 50
increased. When the adjustment value is decreased, the copy C TEXT Text LOW 1 - 99 50
density is decreased. HIGH 1 - 99 50
D TEXT/PRINTED Text/Printed LOW 1 - 99 50
4) Make a copy and check the adjustment result. PHOTO Photo HIGH 1 - 99 50
Switch the simulation mode and the normal copy mode alter- E TEXT/PHOTO Text/Photograph LOW 1 - 99 50
nately, and adjust and check the adjustment result. HIGH 1 - 99 50
Repeat switching the adjustment mode (SIM 46-1) and the F PRINTED PHOTO Printed Photo LOW 1 - 99 50
normal copy mode and changing the adjustment value and HIGH 1 - 99 50
checking the adjustment result until a satisfactory result is G PHOTOGRAPH Photograph LOW 1 - 99 50
obtained. HIGH 1 - 99 50
To increase the density, increase the adjustment value. To H MAP Map LOW 1 - 99 50
decrease the density, decrease the adjustment value. HIGH 1 - 99 50
I TEXT Text (Copy LOW 1 - 99 50
(COPY TO COPY) document) HIGH 1 - 99 50
14-E Copy density adjustment (Each
J TEXT/PRINTED Text/Printed LOW 1 - 99 50
monochrome copy mode) (Whole PHOTO Photo (Copy HIGH 1 - 99 50
adjustment) (Normally unnecessary to (COPY TO COPY) document)
adjust) K PRINTED PHOTO Printed Photo LOW 1 - 99 50
(COPY TO COPY) (Copy document) HIGH 1 - 99 50
This adjustment is needed in the following situations:
L LIGHT Light document LOW 1 - 99 50
* When there is necessity to change copy density of the low den- HIGH 1 - 99 50
sity and high density part at each copy mode individually.
* When there is necessity to change the density gradient of the
copy by each the copy mode individually.
* When there is necessity to change all copy density by each the
copy mode individually.
MX-C401 ADJUSTMENTS 4 – 42
3) Enter the adjustment value with 10-key and press [OK] key.
Density level Adjustment
When adjusting the copy density on the low density part, select Item/Display Default
(Point) value range
"LOW" mode and change the adjustment value. When adjust- A POINT1 Point 1 245 - 755 500
ing the copy density on the high density part, select "HIGH" B POINT2 Point 2 245 - 755 500
mode and change the adjustment value. C POINT3 Point 3 245 - 755 500
When the adjustment value is increased, the copy density is D POINT4 Point 4 245 - 755 500
increased. When the adjustment value is decreased, the copy E POINT5 Point 5 245 - 755 500
density is decreased. F POINT6 Point 6 245 - 755 500
4) Make a copy and check the adjustment result. G POINT7 Point 7 245 - 755 500
Switch the simulation mode and the normal copy mode alter- H POINT8 Point 8 245 - 755 500
nately, and adjust and check the adjustment result. I POINT9 Point 9 245 - 755 500
J POINT10 Point 10 245 - 755 500
Repeat switching the adjustment mode (SIM 46-2) and the
K POINT11 Point 11 245 - 755 500
normal copy mode and changing the adjustment value and
L POINT12 Point 12 245 - 755 500
checking the adjustment result until a satisfactory result is
M POINT13 Point 13 245 - 755 500
obtained.
N POINT14 Point 14 245 - 755 500
To increase the density, increase the adjustment value. To O POINT15 Point 15 245 - 755 500
decrease the density, decrease the adjustment value. P POINT16 Point 16 245 - 755 500
Q POINT17 Point 17 245 - 755 500
14-F Copy color balance adjustment
5) Enter the adjustment value with 10-key and press [OK] key.
(Color balance adjustment at each density
(For the 4.3 Inch LCD model, press the OSA shortcut key.)
level in each color copy mode)
When the adjustment value is increased, the density is
(Normally not required) increased. When the adjustment value is decreased, the den-
This adjustment is needed in the following situations: sity is decreased.
* When there is necessity to change the color balance and gamma When the arrow key is pressed, the color densities selected
by each the copy mode individually. with the color keys are collectively adjusted.
* U2 trouble has occurred. That is, all the density levels (points) from the low density point
* When the MFP PWB is replaced. to the high density point can be adjusted collectively.
* When the EEPROM on the MFP PWB is replaced. When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the adjustment pattern is
This is to adjust the color balance at each density level in each printed out.
color copy mode. Normally individual adjustments are not required. The color balance at each density level (point) and the density
This adjustment is executed when there is a request from the user. can be checked by referring to this printed adjustment pattern.
1) Enter the SIM 46-10 mode. However, it is more practically to make a copy and check it.
(4.3 Inch LCD model)
14-G Monochrome copy density/gamma
adjustment (Each monochrome copy mode)
(Normally not required)
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ
7(67 &/26(
This adjustment is needed in the following situations:
(1*,1(&2/25%$/$1&(0$18$/$'-8670(17
* When there is necessity to change the gamma in monochrome
7(;7 7;7353+ 35,173+ 3+7;73+
mode.
0$3 /,*+7 &23<25*
* U2 trouble has occurred.
* When the MFP PWB is replaced.
* When the EEPROM on the MFP PWB is replaced.
This is to adjust each density level in each monochrome copy
mode. Normally individual adjustments are not required. This
adjustment is executed when there is a request from the user.
(8.5 Inch LCD model) 1) Enter the SIM 46-16 mode.
(4.3 Inch LCD model)
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21
7(67 ǂǂ12 &/26(
(1*,1(&2/25%$/$1&(0$18$/$'->$//%:@3*
$˖ ˖32,17
$˖ %˖ ˖32,17
˷̚ ˹ &˖ ˖32,17
(;(&87(
MX-C401 ADJUSTMENTS 4 – 43
(8.5 Inch LCD model) (4.3 Inch LCD model)
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
(;32685(02'(6(783%:$(
$(B02'( 02'( 02'(
$(B63B&3 5($/7,0( 6723 35(6&$1
$(B63B)$; 2)) 21
$(B63B6&$1 5($/7,0( 6723 35(6&$1
$(B),/7(5 62)7 1250$/ 6+$53
MX-C401 ADJUSTMENTS 4 – 44
AE WIDTH PART: 1) Enter the SIM 46-32 mode.
Document density reading area in monochrome auto mode (4.3 Inch LCD model)
is 3 - 7 mm (leading edge of document) x 100 mm (width).
No relationship to PRESCAN MODE
Operation in monochrome auto copy mode:
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12 &/26(
When the density of the document of the read area is light, 7(67
output image density is increased by control. When the /,0,72)$(5($&7,216(77,1*
density of the document of the read area is dark, output $˖ ˖&23<˖2&
image density is decreased by control. $˖ %˖ ˖&23<˖563)
Document table/RSPF mode ˷̚˹ &˖ ˖6&$1˖2&
'˖ ˖6&$1˖563)
3 to 7mm
3 to 7mm
100mm
AE WIDTH = PART
Set
Display/Item Content Default
value
A COPY : FOC Copy mode (for OC) 1 - 250 196
100mm AE WIDTH = PART B COPY : RSPF Copy mode (for RSPF) 1 - 250 196
C SCAN : OC Scanner mode (for OC) 1 - 250 196
D SCAN : RSPF Scanner mode (for RSPF) 1 - 250 196
E FAX : OC FAX mode (for OC) 1 - 250 196
F FAX : RSPF FAX mode (for RSPF) 1 - 250 196
MX-C401 ADJUSTMENTS 4 – 45
1) Enter the SIM 46-63 mode.
14-K Color copy text, line image edge gamma,
(4.3 Inch LCD model)
density adjustment / Text Map mode
gamma, density adjustment
(Adjustment 1)
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
By changing Text/Printed Photo, Text/Photograph, automatic copy
%*5(029($'-8670(17 mode Text, line image edge section gamma and the density, the
$˖ ˖&2/25&23<7(;735,17('3+272 reproducibility of text and line profile can be varied optionally.
$˖ %˖ ˖&2/25&23<7(;7 With this adjustment, the density and the thickness of fine text and
˷̚˹ &˖ ˖&2/25&23<35,17('3+272 lines can be varied.
'˖ ˖&2/25&23<3+272*5$3+
Check the result of this adjustment by text/printed photo copy mode
(manual).
This adjustment is required in the following cases.
* When the reproducibility of text and line copy image is to be
changed.
(8.5 Inch LCD model)
* U2 trouble has occurred.
* When the MFP PWB is replaced.
* When the EEPROM on the MFP PWB is replaced.
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
%*5(029($'-8670(17
$˖ ˖&2/25&23<7(;735,17('3+272 1) Enter the SIM 46-27 mode.
$˖ %˖ ˖&2/25&23<7(;7
)˖ ˖&2/25&23<0$3
*˖ ˖&2/25&23</,*+7
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
+˖ ˖&2/25&23<7(;735,17('3+272&23<72&23<
,˖ ˖&2/25&23<7(;7&23<72&23< &2()),&,(172)*$00$6(783
-˖ ˖&2/25&23<35,17('3+272&23<72&23<
.˖ ˖&2/25386+7(;735,17('3+272
$˖ ˖%/$&.7(;76/23(
/˖ ˖&2/25386+7(;7
$˖ %˖ ˖%/$&.7(;7,17(5&(37
2.
˷̚˹ &˖ ˖&2/257(;76/23(
2) Select the mode to be adjusted with the scroll key. '˖ ˖&2/257(;7,17(5&(37
Set
Display/Item Content Default
value
A COLOR COPY : Text print 1-9 3
TEXT/PRINTED PHOTO (color copy) (8.5 Inch LCD model)
B COLOR COPY : TEXT Text (color copy) 1-9 3
C COLOR COPY : Printed photo 1-9 5
PRINTED PHOTO (color copy)
D COLOR COPY : Photograph 1-9 5
PHOTOGRAPH (color copy)
E COLOR COPY : Text/Photograph 1-9 3
TEXT/PHOTO (color copy)
F COLOR COPY : MAP map (color copy) 1-9 5
G COLOR COPY : LIGHT Light document 1-9 6
(color copy)
H COLOR COPY : Copy document, 1-9 5
TEXT/PRINTED PHOTO Text print
(COPY TO COPY) (color copy)
I COLOR COPY : TEXT Copy document, 1-9 5
(COPY TO COPY) Text (color copy)
J COLOR COPY : Copy document, 1-9 5
PRINTED PHOTO Printed photo 2) Select the mode to be adjusted with the scroll key.
(COPY TO COPY) (color copy)
K COLOR PUSH:TEXT/ Text print 1-9 3 Adjust
Display/Item
PRINTED PHOTO (color PUSH) Content ment Default
(Copy mode)
range
L COLOR PUSH:TEXT Text (color PUSH) 1-9 3
A BLACK TEXT Black character edge 1 - 99 50
M COLOR PUSH:PRINTED Printed photo 1-9 5
(SLOPE) gamma skew adjustment
PHOTO (color PUSH)
B BLACK TEXT Black character edge density 1 - 99 50
N COLOR Photograph 1-9 5
(INTERCEPT) adjustment
PUSH:PHOTOGRAPH (color PUSH)
C COLOR TEXT Color character edge 1 - 99 50
O COLOR PUSH:TEXT/ Text/Photograph 1-9 3
(SLOPE) gamma skew adjustment
PHOTO (color PUSH)
D COLOR TEXT Color character edge density 1 - 99 50
P COLOR PUSH:MAP map (color PUSH) 1-9 5
(INTERCEPT) adjustment
3) Enter the adjustment value with 10-key and press [OK] key. E ED TEXT Text/Map mode gamma 1 - 99 50
(For the 4.3 Inch LCD model, press the OSA shortcut key.) (SLOPE) adjustment (Text/Map mode)
F ED TEXT Text/Map mode density 1 - 99 50
When the adjustment value is increased, reproducibility of the (INTERCEPT) adjustment (Text/Map mode)
background and the low density image is increased. When the
adjustment value is decreased, reproducibility of the back-
ground and the low density image is decreased.
If a satisfactory result is not obtained, adjust by ADJ14D and
ADJ14E.
MX-C401 ADJUSTMENTS 4 – 46
3) Enter the adjustment value with 10-key. 2) Select the mode to be adjusted with the scroll key.
When the adjustment values of item A and C are changed, the
Adjust
gamma at the line edge section is changed.
Display/Item (Copy mode) Content ment Default
When the adjustment value is increased, the image contrast of range
character edge and line edge is increased. When the adjust- A BLACK TEXT Black character edge 1 - 99 50
ment value is decreased, the image contrast of character and (SLOPE) gamma skew
line edge is decreased. adjustment
When the adjustment value of the adjustment item B and D are B BLACK TEXT Black character edge 1 - 99 50
increased, the image density at the line edge section is (INTERCEPT) density adjustment
increased, and vice versa. C COLOR Color character edge 1 - 99 50
TEXT(SLOPE) gamma skew
4) Press [OK] key. (For the 4.3 Inch LCD model, press the OSA adjustment
shortcut key.) D COLOR TEXT Color character edge 1 - 99 50
5) Make a copy in monochrome text/printed photo copy mode (INTERCEPT) density adjustment
(manual), check the copy. E ED TEXT (SLOPE) Text/Map mode 1 - 99 50
When checking, use a copy of the document with a thin char- gamma adjustment
(Text/Map mode)
acter and line image.
F ED TEXT Text/Map mode density 1 - 99 50
If a satisfactory result is not obtained, return to the SIM 46-27 (INTERCEPT) adjustment
mode and change the adjustment value. (Text/Map mode)
Repeat the above procedures until a satisfactory result is
obtained. 3) Enter the adjustment value with 10-key.
(Adjustment 2) When the adjustment value of the adjustment item E is
changed, the gamma (contrast) is changed.
This adjustment is used to change the gamma and the density in
the Text/Map copy mode. When the adjustment value is increased, the contrast is
increased, and vice versa.
This adjustment is required in the following cases.
When the adjustment value of the adjustment item F is
* To change the contrast and the density of the Text/Map copy
increased, the image density is increased, and vice versa.
mode images.
4) Press [OK] key. (For the 4.3 Inch LCD model, press the OSA
* U2 trouble has occurred.
shortcut key.)
* When the MFP PWB is replaced.
5) Make a copy in the Text/Map copy mode (manual), and check
* When the EEPROM on the MFP PWB is replaced. the output print.
1) Enter the SIM 46-27 mode. If a satisfactory result is not obtained, use SIM46-27 to change the
(4.3 Inch LCD model) adjustment value.
Repeat the above procedures until a satisfactory result is obtained.
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26( 14-L Color document reproducibility adjustment
&2()),&,(172)*$00$6(783 in the monochrome copy mode
$˖ ˖%/$&.7(;76/23( (Normally unnecessary to adjust)
$˖ Use to adjust the reproducibility for the red image and the yellow
%˖ ˖%/$&.7(;7,17(5&(37
image when printing color document that included the red/yellow
˷̚˹ &˖ ˖&2/257(;76/23(
image in monochrome copy mode.
'˖ ˖&2/257(;7,17(5&(37
This adjustment is required in the following cases.
* When there is desire to change reproducibility of yellow/red
image in case of making a color copy of the color document in
monochrome copy mode.
(8.5 Inch LCD model) * U2 trouble has occurred.
* When the MFP PWB is replaced.
* When the EEPROM on the MFP PWB is replaced.
1) Enter the SIM 46-37 mode.
(4.3 Inch LCD model)
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
% :,0$*(&5($7($'-8670(17%5DWLR
$˖ ˖55DWLR
$˖ %˖ ˖*5DWLR
˷̚˹
MX-C401 ADJUSTMENTS 4 – 47
(8.5 Inch LCD model) 1) Enter the SIM 46-38 mode.
(4.3 Inch LCD model)
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
%/$&.,0$*(&5($7($'-8670(17
7(;7ǂ357 ˄˅/87 ˄˅/87 120$/
˄˅/87 ˄˅/87
7(;7 ˄˅/87 ˄˅/87 120$/
˄˅/87 ˄˅/87
0$18$/ $872
MX-C401 ADJUSTMENTS 4 – 48
Display/Item Select
Content Default 14-N Sharpness adjustment in the monochrome
(Copy mode) button
MANUAL COPY ORG/ (-) LUT2 Copy NORMAL auto copy mode (Normally unnecessary to
TXT (-) LUT1 document/ adjust)
NOMAL Text (Manual)
Use for sharpness adjustment of the high density image in color
(+) LUT1 auto copy mode.
(+) LUT2
This adjustment changes smoothness (asperity) in the image
COPY ORG/ (-) LUT2 Copy NORMAL
shade part.
PHT (-) LUT1 document/
Printed photo This adjustment is required in the following cases.
NOMAL
(+) LUT1 (Manual) * When changing the sharpness of copy image in auto copy mode.
(+) LUT2 (obtain crispy image) (decreases moire)
LIGHT ORG (-) LUT2 Light (+) LUT1 * When there is desire to improving smoothness in the image
(-) LUT1 document shade part (for decrease of asperity)
NOMAL (Manual)
* To make the black background and the dark area darker.
(+) LUT1
* To reproduce the gradation change in the dark area.
(+) LUT2
* U2 trouble has occurred.
AUTO AUTO0 (-) LUT2 Auto mode NORMAL
(-) LUT1 judgment 0 * When the MFP PWB is replaced.
NOMAL * When the EEPROM on the MFP PWB is replaced.
(+) LUT1 1) Enter the SIM 46-60 mode.
(+) LUT2
(4.3 Inch LCD model)
AUTO1 (-) LUT2 Auto mode NORMAL
(-) LUT1 judgment 1
NOMAL
(+) LUT1 ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
(+) LUT2 &2/25$87202'(ǂ),/7(5ǂ$'-8670(17
AUTO2 (-) LUT2 Auto mode NORMAL
$˖ ˖6&5((1),/7(5/(9(/$872
(-) LUT1 judgment 2
$˖
NOMAL %˖ ˖$87202'(),/7(5/(9(/&(17(5
(+) LUT1 ˷̚˹ &˖ ˖&2/25&23<&0<21
(+) LUT2
'˖ ˖&2/25&23<.21
AUTO3 (-) LUT2 Auto mode NORMAL
(-) LUT1 judgment 3
NOMAL
(+) LUT1
(+) LUT2 (8.5 Inch LCD model)
AUTO4 (-) LUT2 Auto mode NORMAL
(-) LUT1 judgment 4
NOMAL ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
&2/25$87202'(ǂ),/7(5ǂ$'-8670(17
(+) LUT1 $˖ ˖6&5((1),/7(5/(9(/$872
'˖ ˖&2/25&23<.21
(-) LUT1 judgment 5
(˖ ˖6,1*/(&2/25&0<21
NOMAL )˖ ˖&2/25&23<&0<21
+˖ ˖%:&23<21
(+) LUT2
,˖ ˖&2/25386+5*%21
AUTO6 (-) LUT2 Auto mode NORMAL -˖ ˖%:386+21
MX-C401 ADJUSTMENTS 4 – 49
2) Select the mode to be adjusted with the scroll key.
Setting
Display/Item Content Default NOTE
range
A SCREEN H Sharpness (filter) adjustment of dot Strong emphasis 1 3 (Auto) Apply to auto copy mode only
FILTER LEVEL L pattern image in auto copy mode Soft emphasis 2
AUTO Auto 3
B AUTOMODE SOFT Sharpness (filter) adjustment for the SOFT 1 2 (CENTER)
FILTER LEVEL CENTER auto copy mode CENTER 2
HIGH HIGH 3
C COLOR OFF Soft filter applying setting to C, M, Y OFF 0 1 (ON) Available for the high density
COPY:CMY ON image in color copy mode ON 1 image except text and line image
D COLOR OFF Soft filter applying setting to K image in OFF 0 1 (ON)
COPY:K ON color copy mode ON 1
E SINGLE OFF Soft filter applying setting to C, M, Y OFF 0 1 (ON) When setting ON, smoothness in
COLOR:CMY ON image in sigle color copy mode ON 1 the image shade part improves by
F 2 COLOR OFF Soft filter applying setting to C, M, Y OFF 0 1 (ON) applying soft filter.
COPY:CMY ON image in 2-color copy mode ON 1 (asperity decreases)
2 COLOR OFF Soft filter applying setting to K image in OFF 0 1 (ON)
G
COPY:K ON color copy mode ON 1
B/W COPY OFF Soft filter applying setting in OFF 0 1 (ON)
H
ON monochrome copy mode ON 1
COLOR OFF Soft filter applying setting to image in OFF 0 1 (ON)
I
PUSH:RGB ON push scan color mode ON 1
B/W PUSH OFF Soft filter applying setting to image in OFF 0 1(ON)
J
ON push scan monochrome mode ON 1
When setting ON, smoothness in the image shade part '˖ ˖0$*(17$ǂ0$;ǂ7$5*(7
improves by applying soft filter. (asperity decreases)
4) Press [OK] key. (For the 4.3 Inch LCD model, press the OSA
shortcut key.)
5) Make a copy and check the copy image. (8.5 Inch LCD model)
If a satisfactory result is not obtained, return to the SIM 46-60 mode
and change the adjustment value.
Repeat the above procedures until a satisfactory result is obtained.
MX-C401 ADJUSTMENTS 4 – 50
Setting (8.5 Inch LCD model)
Display/Item Content Default
range
B K 0 K engine maximum
(0: ENABLE density correction mode
1: DISABLE) Enable
0-1 1
1 K engine maximum
density correction mode
DIsable
C CYAN MAX Scanner target value for 0 - 999 629
TARGET CYAN maximum density
correction
D MAGENTA Scanner target value for 0 - 999 532
MAX TARGET MAGENTA maximum density
correction
E YELLOW MAX Scanner target value for 0 - 999 500
TARGET YELLOW maximum density
correction
2) Select the color to be adjusted with the scroll key.
F BLACK MAX Scanner target value for 0 - 999 500
TARGET BLACK maximum density 3) Select the color (Y, M, C) to be adjusted.
correction 4) Enter the adjustment value with 10-key.
* If a tone gap occurs on part of high density, set 0 to item A Adjustment Default
and B. Display/Item
range C M Y
The density of high density part decreases. However, the A RED 0 - 255 0 255 200
tone gap is better. B GREEN 0 - 255 255 0 255
* In case of more increase of the density on high density part, C BLUE 0 - 255 255 200 0
set 1 to item A and B. D YELLOW 0 - 255 0 0 255
The tone gap may occur in high density part. E MAGENTA 0 - 255 0 255 0
F CYAN 0 - 255 255 0 0
3) Press [OK] key. (For the 4.3 Inch LCD model, press the OSA
shortcut key.) 5) Press [OK] key. (For the 4.3 Inch LCD model, press the OSA
NOTE: Do not change the setting values of item C, D, E and F shortcut key.)
(MAX TARGET). If these values is changed, density of the 6) Make a copy in the single color copy mode and check the
high density part is changed. copy.
If these values is changed, be sure to execute the copy color bal- If a satisfactory result is not obtained, return to the SIM 46-25 mode
ance density adjustment ADJ 14B. (Auto adjustment) and change the adjustment value.
Repeat the above procedures until a satisfactory result is obtained.
14-P Copy color balance adjustment (Single
color copy mode) (Normally not required) 14-Q Copy density adjustment in the RSPF mode
This adjustment is used to set the color balance and the density in (Normally unnecessary to adjust)
the single color copy mode to the user's request. This setting normally not required. When, however, there are case
The adjustment is made by changing Y, M, C components of each of following, change the setting.
color. * When copy in RSPF mode differs from copy in document table
This adjustment is not required normally, but executed when there mode.
is a request from the user. * When copy density in RSPF mode is low or too high.
When the default adjustment value is changed, this adjustment is * When the RSPF unit is replaced.
required in the following cases.
* When the RSPF unit is disassembled.
* The CCD unit has been replaced.
* The CCD unit has been replaced.
* U2 trouble has occurred.
* U2 trouble has occurred.
* When the MFP PWB is replaced.
* When the MFP PWB is replaced.
* When the EEPROM on the MFP PWB is replaced.
* When the EEPROM on the MFP PWB is replaced.
a. Adjustment procedure
a. Adjustment procedure
1) Enter the SIM 46-25 mode.
1) Enter the SIM 46-9 mode.
(4.3 Inch LCD model)
(4.3 Inch LCD model)
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26( ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
6,1*/(&2/2502'(&2/25%$/$1&(6(783
(;32685($'-8670(1763)
$˖ ˖5('
$˖ ˖&23<˖/2:
$˖ $˖
%˖ ˖*5((1 %˖ ˖6&$1˖/2:
˷̚˹ &˖ ˖%/8(
˷̚˹ &˖ ˖)$;˖/2:
'˖ ˖&<$1
'˖ ˖&23<˖+,*+
& 0 <
MX-C401 ADJUSTMENTS 4 – 51
(8.5 Inch LCD model) b. Setting procedure
1) Enter the SIM 26-53 mode.
(4.3 Inch LCD model)
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
(1$%/,1*2)$8720$7,&&2/25&2/,%5$7,21
$˖ ˖<(612
$˖
˷̚˹
Setting De-
Item/Display Content
range fault
A COPY : LOW RSPF copy mode exposure 1 - 99 45
adjustment (Low density side)
B SCAN : LOW RSPF scanner mode exposre 1 - 99 45
adjustment (Low density side)
C FAX : LOW PSPF FAX mode exposure 1 - 99 45
adjustment (Low density side)
D COPY : HIGH RSPF copy copy mcde 1 - 99 48
exposure adjustment
(High density side)
E SCAN : HIGH RSPF scanner mode exposre 1 - 99 48
adjustment (Low density side)
F FAX : HIGH RSPF FAX mode exposure 1 - 99 48 2) Select ENABLE or DISABLE with 10-key.
adjustment (High density side)
When disabling, set to "0" (NO). When enabling, set to "1"
3) Enter the adjustment value with 10-key. (Yes).
In case of increase of image density, input large numeric 3) Press [OK] key.
value. Or in case of diluting the image density, input small (For the 4.3 Inch LCD model, press the OSA shortcut key.)
numeric value. When set to DISABLE, the menu of the user auto color calibration
4) Press [OK] key. (automatic adjustment of copy color balance and density) is not dis-
(For the 4.3 Inch LCD model, press the OSA shortcut key.) played in the user program mode.
5) Make a copy in the single color copy mode and check the (Auto color calibration by the user (Auto color balance
copy. adjustment))
If a satisfactory result is not obtained, return to the SIM 46-25 mode Remark:
and change the adjustment value. This adjustment is based on the service target color balance set
with SIM 63-7 and SIM 63-8. If, therefore, the above settings are
Repeat the above procedures until a satisfactory result is obtained.
not properly performed, this adjustment cannot be made properly.
1) Enter the system setting mode.
14-R Auto color balance adjustment by the user
2) Enter the copy setting mode.
(Copy color balance auto adjustment
3) Press the auto color calibration key.
enable setting and adjustment)
4) Press [EXECUTE] key.
a. General
The color patch image (adjustment pattern) is printed out.
In the user program mode, the user can execute the auto color cal-
ibration (auto adjustment of the copy color balance and density). 5) Set the color patch image (adjustment pattern) printed in pro-
cedure 4) on the document table.
This adjustment is to set Enable/Disable of the above user opera-
tion with SIM 26-53. Set the patch image so that the light density area is on the left
side.
NOTE: This setting must be set to ENABLE only when the user's
At that time, place 5 sheets of white paper on the above color
understanding on the automatic adjustment of the copy
patch image (adjustment pattern).
color balance and density and the user's operational ability
are judged enough to execute the adjustment. 6) Press [EXECUTE] key, and the copy color balance adjustment
is executed automatically. After completion of the adjustment,
When set to ENABLE, give enough explanations on the
the display returns to the original operation screen.
operating procedures, notes, and operations to the user.
This adjustment is required in the following cases.
* U2 trouble has occurred.
* When the MFP PWB is replaced.
* When the EEPROM on the MFP PWB is replaced.
* When the PCU PWB is replaced.
* When the EEPROM of the PCU PWB is replaced.
MX-C401 ADJUSTMENTS 4 – 52
14-S Copy color balance adjustment
(Automatic adjustment for each dither)
(Normally unnecessary to adjust)
a. General
This adjustment is to adjust the color balance and the density in the
monochrome mode, the heave paper mode, the black text, color
text edge, the line image edge, the text mode, and the map mode.
This simulation is used to improve image quality in these modes
and images.
b. Note for execution of the color balance adjustment
(Automatic adjustment for each dither)
1) For the color balance adjustment, use the recommended color
paper. (For the recommended paper,. Refer to [2].) 4) Press [EXECUTE] key.
If the other kind of paper is used for the color balance adjust- The color balance adjustment is automatically performed.
ment, the proper image quality (color balance, density) may The adjustment pattern is printed out. Check it for any abnor-
not be obtained.
mality.
2) When setting the adjustment pattern on the document table in
5) Press [OK] key.
the automatic color balance adjustment procedures, place 5 (For the 4.3 Inch LCD model, press the OSA shortcut key.)
sheets of white paper on the adjustment pattern in order to
The list of the adjustment items (for each dither) is displayed.
prevent back copying and adverse effects of paper wrinkles as
far as possible. 6) Select an adjustment item (for each dither).
c. Adjustment procedures
Select item
1) Enter the SIM46-54 mode. Content
(Mode/Image)
(4.3 Inch LCD model) Heavy Paper Adjustment item to improve the color balance in the
*1 heavy paper mode
Black Edge Adjustment item (K) to improve the reproduction of lines,
text density, and thickness
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26( Color Edge Adjustment item (Color) to improve the reproduction of
(1*,1(+$/)721($872$'-8670(1702'(',7+(5 lines, text density, and thickness
B/W Adjustment item to improve the density and gradation in
35(66>(;(&87(@72352&21(;($1'35,177+(7(673$7&+
the monochrome mode
3/($6(86(63(&,),('7<3(2)$25h6,=(3$3(5 Color Ed Adjustment item to improve the color balance in the text
ǂ)257+,6$'- mode and the map mode.
MX-C401 ADJUSTMENTS 4 – 53
ADJ 15 Printer color balance/density
adjustment Low density High density
MX-C401 ADJUSTMENTS 4 – 54
b. Note for execution of the color balance adjustment
(Auto adjustment)
1) The copy color balance adjustment must have been completed
properly.
2) For the color balance adjustment, use the recommended color
paper. (For the recommended paper, refer to [2].)
If the other kind of paper is used for the color balance adjust-
ment, the proper image quality (color balance, density) may
not be obtained.
3) When setting the adjustment pattern on the document table in
the automatic color balance adjustment procedures, place 5
sheets of white paper on the adjustment pattern in order to
prevent back copying and adverse effects of paper wrinkles as
far as possible.
c. Adjustment procedure
(Auto color balance adjustment by the serviceman)
Printer color balance and density adjustment (Automatic adjustment) procedure
flowchart (SIM67-24)
Start
YES
End
MX-C401 ADJUSTMENTS 4 – 55
1) Enter the SIM 67-24 mode. (4.3 Inch LCD model)
(4.3 Inch LCD model)
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26( 35,17(5(1*,1(+$/)721($872$'-8670(1702'(5(*8/$5
35,17(5(1*,1(+$/)721($872$'-8670(1702'(5(*8/$5 3/($6(6(/(&77+(02'()$&725<256(59,&($1'3/$&(
35(66>(;(&87(@72352&21(;($1'35,177+(7(673$7&+ 7(673$7&+21*/$667+(135(66>(;(&87(@
3/($6(86(63(&,),('7<3(2)$25h6,=(3$3(5
)257+,6$'-
/,*+7$5($$7/()76,'(21'2&80(17*/$66
(8.5 Inch LCD model)
(8.5 Inch LCD model)
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
35,17(5(1*,1(+$/)721($872$'-8670(1702'(5(*8/$5
4) Press [FACTORY] key on the operation panel, and press &21),507+($'-3$7&+$1'35(66>2.@725(*3$7&+'$7$
[EXECUTE] key.
When the color balance is customized with the manual color
balance adjustment (SIM 67-25) according to the user's
request and the color balance is registered as the service tar-
get with SIM 67-27, if the color balance is adjusted to that color
balance, select the service target.
MX-C401 ADJUSTMENTS 4 – 56
(8.5 Inch LCD model)
$M
3
/CZ
# $ % & ' ( ) * + , - . / 0 1 2
Remark:
After pressing [OK] key, the initial setting of the half tone image
correction is started. During the operation, "NOW REGISTER- 2) Patch C or D of each of Y, C, M, and
BK is very slightly copied.
ING THE NEW TARGET OF HALFTONE" is displayed. This
operation takes several minutes. Patch A of each of Y, M, C, and
BK are not copied.
After completion of the operation, "PLEASE QUIT THIS
MODE" is displayed. 1) The max. density section is not blurred.
Do not cancel the simulation until "PLEASE QUIT THIS 3) Patch for each of C, M, Y, BK
The patch density is identical between patches or not reversed.
MODE" is displayed. The patch density is changed gradually.
(4.3 Inch LCD model)
The print density must be changed gradually from the lighter
level to the darker level. The density changing direction must
not be reversed.
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
The density level of each color must be almost at the same
35,17(5(1*,1(+$/)721($872$'-8670(1702'(5(*8/$5 level.
&203/(7('7+,6352&('85( Patch B may not be copied.
Patch A must not be copied.
3/($6(48,77+,602'( (Method 2)
By printing the color balance adjustment sheet with SIM 67-25
and comparing each process (CMY) black patch color balance
with the black patch, the color balance adjustment can be
checked more precisely.
$M
CMY
Blend
3
/CZ
# $ % & ' ( ) * + , - . / 0 1 2
MX-C401 ADJUSTMENTS 4 – 57
(Method 3) c. Adjustment procedure
Use SIM64-5 to print the print test pattern, and check the color
Printer color balance and density adjustment (Manual adjustment) procedure
balance and density. flowchart (SIM67-25)
Set each set value to the default and press [EXECUTE] key.
The print test pattern is printed out. Start
Use SIM64-5 to print the print test pattern, and check the color
balance and density. (Refer to the item of the printer color bal-
ance and density check.)
Execute ADJ15C (Printer color balance and density
When the factory target is selected in the procedure 4) and the adjustment (Manual adjustment). (*1)
auto adjustment is executed but a satisfactory result is not
Enter the SIM67-25 mode, and select A3
obtained on the color balance and the density, use SIM 67-26
(11" x 17") paper. (Automatic selection.)
to change the factory color balance target and repeat the pro-
cedures from 1). Press [EXECUTE] key.
(The adjustment pattern is printed.)
If a satisfactory result is not obtained with the above proce-
dure, perform the manual color balance adjustment (ADJ 15B). Check the printed adjustment check pattern,
Cancel SIM 67-25. and select a target adjustment color with the
color keys (C,M,Y,K).
15-B Printer color balance adjustment (Manual Select a target adjustment density level with the
adjustment) scroll key.
This adjustment is needed in the following situations: Enter the adjustment value with 10 key.
* When the copy color balance/density adjustment is required.
Refer to the page of the ADJ print color balance/density adjust- Press [EXECUTE] key.
ment. (The adjustment pattern is printed.)
YES
End
*1:
If satisfactory color balance and density are not
obtained with the adjustment, check the print
engine for any problems.
*2:
If the initial setting of the half tone image correction
is not properly adjusted, satisfactory color balance
and density cannot be obtained. In this case, check
the print engine for any problems.
MX-C401 ADJUSTMENTS 4 – 58
1) Enter the SIM 67-25 mode. Patch B may not be copied.
(4.3 Inch LCD model) Patch A must not be copied.
When, however, the color balance is adjusted according to a
request from the user, there is no need to set to the standard
color balance stated above.
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
If the color balance of each patch of the process black (CMY
35,17(5(1*,1(&2/25%$/$1&(0$18$/$'-8670(173*
mixed color) is slightly shifted to Magenta, it means that the
$˖ ˖32,17 adjustment is proper. In an actual print mode, it is converted
$˖ into the natural gray color balance by the color table. (When
%˖ ˖32,17
˷̚˹
the color balance target is DEF 1.)
&˖ ˖32,17
4) Select the color to be adjusted with the color select key, and
'˖ ˖32,17
select the adjustment point with the scroll key.
. & 0 < (;(&87( 5) Enter the adjustment value with 10-key and press [OK] key.
(For the 4.3 Inch LCD model, press the OSA shortcut key.)
The adjustment value is set in the range of 0 - 255 (1 - 99).
(8.5 Inch LCD model) When SIM 67-24 is used to adjust the automatic color balance
and density, all the set values of this simulation are set to 50.
To increase the density, increase the adjustment value. To
decrease the density, decrease the adjustment value.
Repeat procedures of 2) - 5) until the condition of 3) is satis-
fied.
When the overall density is low, or when the density is high
and patch A is copied, use the arrow key to adjust all the
adjustment values of A - Q (MAX) to a same level collectively.
Then, adjust each patch density individually. This is an efficient
way of adjustment.
Referring to the black/gray patches, adjust so that each pro-
cess (CMY) black/gray patch color balance of A - Q (MAX)
approaches the black/gray patch level as far as possible.
6) Cancel SIM 67-25.
2) Press [EXECUTE] key. (A4 or 11" x 8.5" paper is automatically
7) Use SIM 64-5 to print the print test pattern and check the print
selected.)
color balance and the density.
The color balance adjustment pattern is printed.
NOTE: If the color balance is customized, use SIM 67-27 to regis-
3) Check that the following specification is satisfied or the color
ter the color balance as the service target. If the color bal-
balance is satisfactory.
ance is not customized, this procedure is not required.
If not, execute the following procedures.
If the customized color balance is registered as the service
target, the automatic color balance adjustment can be
made in the next color balance adjustment.
Low density High density In the next color balance adjustment, select the service tar-
get color balance in the automatic color balance adjust-
;
ment mode to make an adjustment to the similar color
balance as the registered color balance.
/
$M
CMY
Blend
3
/CZ
# $ % & ' ( ) * + , - . / 0 1 2
MX-C401 ADJUSTMENTS 4 – 59
(Gamma setting of auto color balance adjustment service • Color balance target for the printer color balance adjustment
color balance target)
Type Descriptions
a. General
A Factory color There are three kinds of the color balance
When the automatic color balance adjustment is executed, a cer- balance target, and each of them is specified according
tain color balance (gamma) is used as the target. (gamma) to the machine design. Use SIM 67-26 to select
There are following three kinds of the target. target one of them as the factory target. The default
setting (factory setting) is the color balance
• Factory color balance (gamma) target
(DEF1) which emphasizes color reproduction.
• Service color balance (gamma) target B Service color This target is used when the user requests to
• User color balance (gamma) target balance customize the color balance to user's desired
In the above three, only the service color balance target can be set (gamma) level. In advance, the user's unique color
target balance must be registered as the service color
to a desired level.
balance target. The above registration (setting)
This adjustment is required in the following cases. is made by the serviceman with SIM 67-25 to
* When the copy color balance/density adjustment (manual adjust- adjust the color balance and with SIM 67-27 to
ment) is executed with SIM 67-25. register it.
This color balance target is used when the user
* U2 trouble has occurred.
executes the color balance adjustment. When,
* When the MFP PWB is replaced. therefore, the service color balance target is
* When the EEPROM on the MFP PWB is replaced. changed, the color balance target of the user's
color balance adjustment is also changed.
* When the user requests for customizing the color balance.
When, however, SIM 67-28 is executed, the
* When the service color balance target gamma is judged as color balance is set to the factory color balance
improper. target set with SIM 67-26. The default setting
(factory setting) of the color balance is same as
the factory color balance target. (Emphasized
on color reproduIf the user does not request for
customizing the color balance, be sure to use
SIM 67-28 to set the color balance to the factory
color balance targetction (DEF1))
C User color Same color balance as the service color
balance balance (gamma) target When the service color
(gamma) balance target is changed, this color balance
target target is also changed accordingly.
• Relationship between the factory target and the service target and the color balance target for the user color balance adjustment in the
printer color balance adjustment (SIM 67-24)
MX-C401 ADJUSTMENTS 4 – 60
• Factory target in the printer color balance adjustment (SIM 67-24)
By use of SIM 67-26, one of the following color balances can be set as the factory color balance target.
Each of the three color balances cannot be changed. (Fixed)
SIM67-28
Factory color balance target (DEF2) =
Factory color balance target Service color balance target/Color balance
(DEF2) target for the user color balance adjustment
• Service color balance target in the copy color balance adjust- When result of the color valance adjustment (Auto) with selecting
ment (SIM 67-28). the service color balance target in SIM 67-24 is unsatisfactory or
For the service color balance target, an optional color balance abnormal.
can be adjusted with SIM 67-25 and registered with SIM 67-27. In that case, the registered service target data for the color balance
When, however, SIM 67-28 is executed, the color balance is set adjustment (Auto) may be improper.
to the same balance as the factory color balance target set with This may be caused when an improper or abnormal color balance
SIM 67-26. adjustment pattern was used to register the service color balance
• Color balance target in the user color balance adjustment target data for the color balance adjustment with SIM 67-27.
This color balance is same as the service color balance target in The color balance adjustment pattern used in registration was
the copy color balance adjustment (SIM 67-24). When, therefore, made and printed by the color balance adjustment (Manual) with
the service color balance target is changed, this target is also SIM 67-25. This procedure may have been executed erroneously.
changed accordingly.
(Meaning of the service color balance target gamma data and b. Setting procedure
the purpose of registration)
(Setting procedure of an optional color balance (gamma) as the
This procedure must be executed only when the color balance is service color balance target)
customized with SIM 67-25. If the color balance is not customized,
1) Use SIM 67-25 (Printer color balance adjustment (manual
this procedure is not required.
adjustment) mode) to print two sheets of the color patch image
After completion of the customized color balance adjustment (Man- (adjustment pattern).
ual) with SIM 67-25 according to the user's request, use SIM 67-27
If the color balance is shifted from the standard, an adjustment
to register the service color balance target data by use of the
is required. If not, an adjustment is not required. When an
printed adjustment pattern.
optional color balance is requested by the user, make an
By this procedure, the service color balance target is revised. adjustment.
It is recommendable to keep the printed adjustment pattern with 2) Enter the SIM 67-27 mode.
SIM 67-25. This adjustment pattern can be used to register the
(4.3 Inch LCD model)
same color balance target to another machine.
It is also useful to register the service color balance target data. Do
not fold it and keep it under the circumstances which protect it from
discoloration and dirt. ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
The service color balance target data are basically registered 6&$11(57$5*(72)35,17(5&2/25&$/,%6(7836(59,&(
immediately after the color balance adjustment (Manual) with SIM %&'()
67-25.
*+,-.
If a considerable time has passed after completion of the color bal-
/012
ance adjustment (Manual) with SIM 67-25, the color balance of the
adjustment pattern at the time of adjustment differs from the color
balance of the adjustment pattern printed after a considerable time. . & 0 < 6(783
Never use such a pattern for the adjustment.
The correctness of the service color balance target data can be
judges as follows.
MX-C401 ADJUSTMENTS 4 – 61
(8.5 Inch LCD model) 6) Press [REPEAT] key, set the second color patch image
(adjustment pattern), and execute the procedure 5) again.
(4.3 Inch LCD model)
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
6&$11(57$5*(72)35,17(5&2/25&$/,%6(7836(59,&(
%$6(
%&'()
*+,-.
/012
3) Press [SETUP] key.
4) Set the color patch image (adjustment pattern) correctly
adjusted and printed in the printer color balance adjustment (8.5 Inch LCD model)
(Manual adjustment) (SIM 67-25) (ADJ 15B) on the document
table.
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
A color patch image (adjustment pattern) printed by another 6&$11(57$5*(72)35,17(5&2/2(&$/,%6(7836(59,&(
%$6(
machine can be used.
%&'()
Set the pattern so that the light density side is on the left side. *+,-.
(adjustment pattern).
This procedure must not be executed when the copy color bal-
ance (manual) was adjusted with SIM 67-25 to a unique color
balance requested by the user and it was registered as the
service color balance target with SIM 67-27.
5) Press [EXECUTE] key.
(4.3 Inch LCD model) . & 0 < 5(3($7 2.
The color balance (gamma) target set level of each color (K, C,
M and Y) can be checked with K/C/M/Y keys.
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12 &/26(
7(67 Check that the set level is increased in the sequence of B - Q
6&$11(57$5*(72)35,17(5&2/2(&$/,%6(7836(59,&( (MAX). If there is no variation or variation is reversed, it is
12:&+$573$7&+5($',1* judged as abnormal.
In case of an abnormality, repair the problem and try again.
7) Press [OK] key.
The color balance (gamma) of the color patch image (adjust-
ment pattern) used in the procedure 5) is set as the service tar-
(;(&87( get.
(Procedures to set the service color balance target and the
color balance target for the user color balance adjustment to
the same color balance as the factory color balance target)
(8.5 Inch LCD model)
This procedure must not be executed when the copy color balance
was adjusted with SIM 67-25 to a unique color balance requested
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26( by the user and it was registered as the service color balance tar-
6&$11(57$5*(72)35,17(5&2/2(&$/,%6(7836(59,&( get with SIM 67-27.
12:&+$573$7&+5($',1*
* When the factory color balance target is changed with SIM 67-
26, be sure to execute this procedure.
1) Enter the SIM 67-28 mode.
(4.3 Inch LCD model)
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
67$1'$5'6&$11(57$5*(72)35,17(5&2/25&$/,%6(59,&(
(;(&87(
MX-C401 ADJUSTMENTS 4 – 62
(8.5 Inch LCD model) 2) Enter the adjustment value and press the [OK] key. (For the
4.3 Inch LCD model, press the OSA shortcut key.)
In case of increase of the image density on low density part,
increase the adjustment value. In case of increase of the
image density on low density part, increase the adjustment
value. For diluting the image density on low density part,
decrease the adjustment value.
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26( (8.5 Inch LCD model)
35,17(5+,*+/,*+7$'-8670(17
$˖ ˖$3$7&+,1387
$˖
˷̚˹
Setting
Display/Item Content Default
range
A CMY 0 CMY engine maximum 0-1 0
(0: ENABLE density correction
1:DISABLE) mode Enable
1 CMY engine maximum
density correction
mode Disable
MX-C401 ADJUSTMENTS 4 – 63
Setting b. Setting procedure
Display/Item Content Default
range 1) Enter the SIM 26-54 mode.
B K 0 K engine maximum 0-1 1 (4.3 Inch LCD model)
(0:ENABLE density correction
1: DISABLE) mode Enable
1 K engine maximum
density correction ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
mode Disable
(1$%/,1*2)$872&2/25&$/,%5$7,212)35,17(5
C CYAN MAX Scanner target value for 0 - 999 500
TARGET CYAN maximum density $˖ ˖<(612
correction $˖
D MAGENTA MAX Scanner target value for 0 - 999 500
˷̚˹
TARGET MAGENTA maximum
density correction
E YELLOW MAX Scanner target value for 0 - 999 500
TARGET YELLOW maximum density
correction
F BLACK MAX Scanner target value for 0 - 999 500
TARGET BLACK maximum density
(8.5 Inch LCD model)
correction
MX-C401 ADJUSTMENTS 4 – 64
15-F Copy/Printer color balance and density
adjustment (Automatic adjustment)
This adjustment is needed in the following situations:
* When a consumable part (developer, OPC drum, transfer belt) is
replaced.
* When the CCD unit is replaced.
* When the scanner (reading) section is disassembled.
* When the scanner (reading) unit is replaced.
* U2 trouble has occurred.
* When the MFP PWB is replaced.
* When the EEPROM on the MFP PWB is replaced.
* The scanner control PWB has been replaced.
* The EEPROM on the scanner control PWB has been replaced.
a. General
SIM46-74 is used to perform the automatic copy color balance and
density adjustment (SIM46-24) and the automatic printer color bal-
ance and density adjustment (SIM67-24) continuously.
Since it is desirable to perform the copy color balance adjustment
(automatic adjustment) before the automatic printer color balance
and density adjustment, it is advisable to perform the adjustment in
this mode.
This mode is also advisable to effectively perform both of the auto-
matic copy color balance and density adjustment (SIM46-24) and
the automatic printer color balance and density adjustment (SIM67-
24). It saves considerable time when compared with performing
each of the auto copy/printer color balance and the density adjust-
ment individually.
b. Note for execution of the copy color balance adjustment
(Automatic adjustment for each dither)
1) For the color balance adjustment, use the recommended color
paper. (For the recommended paper, refer to [2].)
If the other kind of paper is used for the color balance adjust-
ment, the proper image quality (color balance, density) may
not be obtained.
2) When setting the adjustment pattern on the document table in
the automatic color balance adjustment procedures, place 5
sheets of white paper on the adjustment pattern in order to
prevent back copying and adverse effects of paper wrinkles as
far as possible.
MX-C401 ADJUSTMENTS 4 – 65
b. Adjustment procedures
(Auto color balance adjustment by the serviceman)
Start
Execute ADJ15F Copy color balance and density/Printer color balance and density
adjustment (automatic density). (SIM46-74)
Enter the SIM46-74 mode, and select A4 (11" x 8.5") paper. (Automatic selection)
Set the adjustment pattern on the document table. Select the factory target or the
service target, and press [EXECUTE] key.
(The adjustment pattern is scanned, and the adjustment is automatically performed to
print the check pattern.) (*1)
Check the printed check pattern for any streaks or unclear copy. (*4)
Set the adjustment pattern on the document table. Select the factory target or the
service target, and press [EXECUTE] key.
(The adjustment pattern is scanned, and the adjustment is automatically performed to
print the check pattern.) (*1) Automatic adjustment color balance target change
Check the printed check pattern for any streaks or unclear copy. (*4) Change the factory color balance and density target
which is available in 3 kinds. (SIM63-11)
Press [OK] key. (The initial setting of the half tone image correction is automatically
NO
performed.) (*3)
Cancel SIM46-74.
Though the factory color
balance and density target
Check the copy color balance and density adjustment result.
(available in 3 kinds) is
Use the test chart (UKOG-0326FCZZ/UKOG-0326FC11) to make a copy in the Text changed, satisfactory color
/Printed Photo mode, and check the copy color balance and density. balance and density are
not obtained (SIM63-11),
or the service target is
Use SIM46-21 to print the color balance check pattern, and check the patch color selected.
balance and density in the process gray. (If the color balance is slightly shifted to
Magenta, it is properly adjusted.)
YES
YES
End
MX-C401 ADJUSTMENTS 4 – 66
1) Enter the SIM46-74 mode. 3) Set the color patch image (adjustment pattern) paper printed in
(4.3 Inch LCD model) procedure 2) on the document table.
Set the printed color patch image (adjustment pattern) on the
document table. Place the color patch image so that the fine
lines are on the left side in the center reference. At that time,
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12 &/26(
7(67 place 5 sheets of white paper on the printed color patch image
(1*,1($872$'-8670(176(59,&( (adjustment pattern).
35(66>(;(&87(@72352&21(;($1'35,177+(7(673$7&+
3/($6(86(63(&,),('7<3(2)$25h6,=(3$3(5
)257+,6$'-8670(17
(;(&87(
MX-C401 ADJUSTMENTS 4 – 67
6) Set the color patch image (adjustment pattern) paper printed in
procedure 5) on the document table.
Set the printed color patch image (adjustment pattern) on the
Low density High density
document table. Place the color patch image so that the fine
; lines are on the left side in the center reference. At that time,
place 5 sheets of white paper on the printed color patch image
/ (adjustment pattern).
$M
3
Ტ/CZᲣ
# $ % & ' ( ) * + , - . / 0 1 2
Remark:
(Descriptions on the factory service key button in the color bal-
ance automatic adjustment menu)
There are two kinds of the gamma target for the color balance
automatic adjustment: the factory target and the service target.
FACTORY key and SERVICE key are used to select one of the
above two. 7) Select [FACTORY] target on the operation panel, and press
Factory target color balance: Standard color balance [EXECUTE] key.
(The color balance can be selected from the three kinds of When the color balance is customized with the manual color
fixed ones with SIM63-11.) balance adjustment (SIM 67-25) according to the user's
Service target color balance: The color balance can be cus- request and the color balance is registered as the service tar-
tomized according to the user's request. (Variable) get with SIM 67-27, if the color balance is adjusted to that color
balance, select the service target.
When shipping from the factory, the service target gamma data
and the factory target gamma data are the same. (4.3 Inch LCD model)
Both are set to the standard color balance when shipping from
the factory. For the service target, a customized color balance
gamma can be registered with SIM63-7. ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
5) Press [EXECUTE] key. (1*,1($872$'-8670(176(59,&(
The printer color patch image (adjustment pattern) is printed 3/($6(6(/(&77+(02'()$&725<256(59,&($1'3/$&(
out. (A4 or 11" x 8.5" paper is automatically selected.)
7+(35,17('7(673$7&+21*/$667+(135(66>(;(&87(@
(4.3 Inch LCD model)
/,*+7$5($$7/()76,'(21'2&80(17*/$66
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12 )$&725< 6(59,&( (;(&87(
7(67 &/26(
(1*,1($872$'-8670(176(59,&(
&21),507+($'-3$7&+$1'35(66>(;(&87(@72$'-8670(17
$1'35,177+(7(673$7&+ (8.5 Inch LCD model)
3/($6(86(63(&,),('7<3(2)$25h6,=(3$3(5
)257+,6$'-8670(17
(;(&87(
MX-C401 ADJUSTMENTS 4 – 68
(8.5 Inch LCD model)
$M
3
/CZ
# $ % & ' ( ) * + , - . / 0 1 2
NOTE: The adjustment result becomes valid only when the both
adjustments in the copy mode and in the printer mode are
8) The initial setting menu of the half tone image correction is dis- completed.
played. Press [OK] key.
For example, if the copy color balance adjustment (auto-
The initial setting of the half tone image correction is per- matic adjustment) is performed and the simulation is can-
formed. celed, the adjustment result is invalid.
(4.3 Inch LCD model) 10) Check the copy color balance and density.
There are two methods to check the color balance and density.
(Method 1)
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26( Use the servicing color test chart (UKOG-0326FCZZ/UKOG-
(1*,1($872$'-8670(176(59,&( 0326FC11) in the Text/Printed Photo mode (Manual) to check
&21),50$'-3$7&+$1'35(66>2.@725(*,67(57+,63$7&+
the copy color balance and density. (Refer to the item of the
copy color balance and density check.)
When satisfactory color balance and density are not obtained
from the automatic adjustment by selecting the factory target in
procedure 4), change the factory color balance target with SIM
63-11 and repeat the procedures from 1).
2.
If a satisfactory result is not obtained with the above proce-
dure, perform the manual color balance adjustment (ADJ
14C).
(8.5 Inch LCD model)
Also when the service target is selected in procedure 4) to exe-
cute the automatic adjustment and a satisfactory result is not
obtained, perform the manual color balance adjustment (ADJ
14C).
(Method 2)
By printing the color balance adjustment sheet with SIM 46-21
and comparing each process (CMY) black patch color balance
with the black patch, the color balance adjustment can be
checked more precisely.
$M
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
CMY
(1*,1($872$'-8670(176(59,&( Blend
3
&203/(7('7+,6352&('85(
/CZ
# $ % & ' ( ) * + , - . / 0 1 2
3/($6(48,77+,602'(
2) Patch C or D of each of Y, C, M, and
BK is very slightly copied.
MX-C401 ADJUSTMENTS 4 – 69
If the color balance of each patch of the process black (CMY 16) Check the printer color balance and density.
mixed color) is slightly shifted to Magenta, it means that the There are two methods to check the color balance and density.
adjustment is proper. If the color balance of the adjustment
(Method 1)
pattern printed in this mode is slightly shifted to Magenta, it is
converted into the natural gray color balance by the color table Use SIM 64-5 to print the print test pattern and check the print
in an actual copy mode. (When the color balance target is DEF color balance and the density.
1.) Set each setting value to the default and press [EXECUTE]
key, and the print test pattern is printed.
11) Use SIM 44-26 to perform the half tone image correction.
(Compulsory execution) (Refer to the item of the printer color balance and density
• Enter the SIM 44-26 mode and press [EXECUTE] key. check.)
(4.3 Inch LCD model) Use SIM67-25 to print the color balance adjustment sheet and
compare the black patch color balance of each process (CMY)
with the black patch. This procedure allows checking the color
balance adjustment result correctly.
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
+$/)721('(16,7<&255(&7(;(&87,21
728&+>(;(&87(@7+(1(;(&87,2167$57 Low density High density
(;(&87(
%
$M
(8.5 Inch LCD model)
CMY
Blend
3
/CZ
# $ % & ' ( ) * + , - . / 0 1 2
• It takes several minutes to complete the operation. After If the color balance of each patch of the process black (CMY
completion of the operation, "COMPLETE" is displayed. mixed color) is slightly shifted to Magenta, it means that the
• After completion of the operation, the simulation is canceled. adjustment is proper. If the color balance of the adjustment
pattern printed in this mode is slightly shifted to Magenta, it is
12) Use the servicing color test chart (UKOG-0326FCZZ/UKOG-
converted into the natural gray color balance by the color table
0326FC11) in the Text/Printed Photo mode (Manual) to check
in an actual printer mode. (When the color balance target is
the copy color balance and density. (Refer to the item of the
DEF 1.)
copy color balance and density check.)
If a satisfactory result on the print color balance and the den-
If the copy color balance and density are not satisfactory, per-
sity is not obtained with the automatic adjustment, execute the
form the following procedures.
manual adjustment (SIM 67-25) (ADJ 15B).
13) Execute the initial setting of the half tone image correction.
(SIM 44-21)
15-G Printer color balance adjustment
14) Execute the half tone image correction. (Forcible execution)
(SIM44-26)
(Automatic adjustment for each dither)
15) Use the servicing color test chart (UKOG-0326FCZZ/UKOG-
(Normally unnecessary to adjust)
0326FC11) in the Text/Printed Photo mode (Manual) to check a. General
the copy color balance/density. (Refer to the item of the copy This adjustment is used to adjust the color balance and the density
color balance/density check.) in the monochrome mode, the heave paper mode, 1200dpi, 600dpi,
Though the procedures 13) - 15) are performed, the copy color and 1bit mode.
balance and density are not in the specified range, there may This simulation is used to improve image quality in these modes
be another cause. and images.
Troubleshoot the cause and repair or perform proper treat- b. Note for execution of the color balance adjustment
ments, and try all the procedures of the print image adjustment (Automatic adjustment for each dither)
from the beginning. 1) For the color balance adjustment, use the recommended color
If the automatic adjustment cannot obtain satisfactory results paper. (For the recommended paper, refer to [2].)
of the copy color balance and density, use SIM 46-21 (ADJ If the other kind of paper is used for the color balance adjust-
14C) (Manual adjustment). ment, the proper image quality (color balance, density) may
not be obtained.
MX-C401 ADJUSTMENTS 4 – 70
2) When setting the adjustment pattern on the document table in 6) Select an adjustment item (for each dither).
the automatic color balance adjustment procedures, place 5
sheets of white paper on the adjustment pattern in order to Select item
Content
prevent back copying and adverse effects of paper wrinkles as (Mode)
far as possible. Heavy Paper Adjustment item to improve the color balance in the heavy
paper mode
c. Adjustment procedures
1200dpi 1bit Adjustment item to improve the color balance in 1200dpi
1) Enter the SIM67-54 mode. mode (When 1200dpi mode is frequently used)
(4.3 Inch LCD model) 600dpi 1bit Adjustment item to improve the color balance in 600dpi,
1bit mode.
B/W Adjustment item to improve the density and gradation in
the monochrome mode
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
7) Press [EXECUTE] key. (A4 or 11" x 8.5" paper is automatically
35,17(5(1*,1(+$/)721($872$'-8670(1702'(',7+(5
selected.)
35(66>(;(&87(@72352&21(;($1'35,177+(7(673$7&+
The color patch image (adjustment pattern) is printed out.
3/($6(86(63(&,),('7<3(2)$25h6,=(3$3(5
8) Set the color patch image (adjustment pattern) paper printed in
ǂ)257+,6$'- procedure 2) on the document table.
Set the printed color patch image (adjustment pattern) on the
(;(&87( document table. Place the color patch image so that the fine
lines are on the left side in the center reference. At that time,
place 5 sheets of white paper on the printed color patch image
(adjustment pattern).
(8.5 Inch LCD model)
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
35,17(5(1*,1(+$/)721($872$'-8670(1702'(',7+(5
35(66>(;(&87(@72352&21(;(&87,21$1'35,177+(7(673$7&+
3/($6(86(63(&,),('7<3(2)$25h6,=(3$3(5
)257+,6$'-8670(17
(;(&87(
MX-C401 ADJUSTMENTS 4 – 71
1) Go through the modes specified in Simulation 40-2. (8.5 Inch LCD model)
(4.3 Inch LCD model)
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
%<3$6675$<$'-8670(17
0$;326,7,21$'-8670(17
35(66>(;(&87(@7267$57
(;(&87(
EXECUTE
EXECUTE
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
%<3$6675$<$'-8670(17
3$5326,7,21$'-8670(17
35(66>(;(&87(@7267$57
(;(&87(
EXECUTE
EXECUTE
Repeat the above procedure to adjust
Repeat the above procedure to adjust the A5R width MIN POSITION.
the A5R width MIN POSITION.
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
%<3$6675$<$'-8670(17
&203/(7(
(;(&87(
MX-C401 ADJUSTMENTS 4 – 72
2) Open the manual paper feed guide to the maximum width posi-
tion. ADJ 17 Touch panel coordinate setting
(8.5 Inch LCD model only)
This adjustment is needed in the following situations:
* The operation panel has been replaced.
* U2 trouble has occurred.
* The scanner control PWB has been replaced.
* The EEPROM on the scanner control PWB has been replaced.
1) Enter the SIM 65-1 mode.
MX-C401 ADJUSTMENTS 4 – 73
NOTE: Fit the adjustment pattern correctly with the document
18-A Print image main scanning direction image guide.
magnification ratio automatic adjustment
1) Enter the SIM50-28 mode.
(4.3 Inch LCD model)
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
$872,0$*(326,7,21$'-8670(176(59,&(
2&ǂ$'- %.0$*ǂ$'-
63)ǂ$'- 6(78335,17ǂ$'-
5(68/7 '$7$
12:(;(&87,1*
5(35,17 (;(&87(
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
$872,0$*(326,7,21$'-8670(176(59,&(
0)7 &6 &6
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
$872,0$*(326,7,21$'-8670(176(59,&(
%.0$*
MX-C401 ADJUSTMENTS 4 – 74
(8.5 Inch LCD model) (8.5 Inch LCD model)
(Note)
18-B Image off-center automatic adjustment When [ALL] is selected, the adjustments of the following two
(Document table mode) items are performed at a same time.
1) Enter the SIM50-28 mode. * [LEAD]: Print image lead edge image position adjustment
(4.3 Inch LCD model) * [OFFSET]: Print image off-center adjustment
4) Select a paper feed tray to be adjusted.
Set A4 (11" x 8.5") paper in each paper feed tray in advance.
(4.3 Inch LCD model)
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
$872,0$*(326,7,21$'-8670(176(59,&(
2&ǂ$'- %.0$*ǂ$'-
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
63)ǂ$'- 6(78335,17ǂ$'-
5(68/7 '$7$ $872,0$*(326,7,21$'-8670(176(59,&(
0)7 &6 &6 $'8
&6 &6 /&&
MX-C401 ADJUSTMENTS 4 – 75
6) Set the adjustment pattern to the center reference position on (8.5 Inch LCD model)
the document table.
NOTE: Fit the adjustment pattern correctly with the document
guide.
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
5(35,17 (;(&87(
$872,0$*(326,7,21$'-8670(176(59,&(
2&ǂ$'- %.0$*ǂ$'-
(8.5 Inch LCD model) 63)ǂ$'- 6(78335,17ǂ$'-
5(68/7 '$7$
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26( ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
$872,0$*(326,7,21$'-8670(176(59,&( $872,0$*(326,7,21$'-8670(176(59,&(
&$6&$6
/&&
35260)7
&$6
&$6
$'8
&$6
&$6
/&&
(;(&87(
5(35,17 5(6&$1 5(75< '$7$
MX-C401 ADJUSTMENTS 4 – 76
(8.5 Inch LCD model) 7) Press [OK] key.
(For the 4.3 Inch LCD model, press the OSA shortcut key.)
The adjustment result becomes valid.
(4.3 Inch LCD model)
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
$872,0$*(326,7,21$'-8670(176(59,&(
2&/($'
2))6(7
68%
12:(;(&87,1*
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
$872,0$*(326,7,21$'-8670(176(59,&(
5(35,17 (;(&87(
2&ǂ$'- %.0$*ǂ$'-
63)ǂ$'- 6(78335,17ǂ$'-
MX-C401 ADJUSTMENTS 4 – 77
2) Press the [SPF ADJ] button. 5) Press the [EXECUTE] button.
3) Press the button of the item to be adjusted. Select [ALL]. The machine starts self-print of RSPF adjustment patterns.
(4.3 Inch LCD model) When self-print finishes, the next screen appears where you
can start RSPF adjustments.
6) Set the adjustment pattern face up in the RSPF.
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
$872,0$*(326,7,21$'-8670(176(59,&(
6,'( 6,'(
$//
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
$872,0$*(326,7,21$'-8670(176(59,&(
0)7 &6 &6
MX-C401 ADJUSTMENTS 4 – 78
10) Press [OK] key. (For the 4.3 Inch LCD model, press the OSA
shortcut key.)
This screen shows the current values along with the previous
values in parentheses.
* By pressing the [REPRINT] button, you can return to the
cassette selection screen and have the machine self-print
RSPF adjustment patterns (for the front and back sides)
again.
* To have the machine start re-reading the RSPF adjustment
patterns (front and back sides), press the [RESCAN] button.
* To return to the top menu without saving the adjustment val-
ues into EEPROM and RAM, press the [RETRY] button.
* To display the data used for adjustment, press the [DATA]
button.
* To save the adjustment values into EEPROM and RAM and
return to the top menu, press the [OK] button.
* To return to the result screen, press the [BACK] button.
MX-C401 ADJUSTMENTS 4 – 79
[5] SIMULATION
MX-C401
5GTXKEG/CPWCN
A. Basic operation
(1) Starting the simulation
a. 8.5 Inch LCD model b. 4.3 Inch LCD model
* Entering the simulation mode * Entering the simulation mode
1) Copy mode key ON o Program key ON o Asterisk (*) key ON 1) Copy mode key ON o Program key ON o Asterisk (*) key ON
o CLEAR key ON o Asterisk (*) key ON o Ready for input of o CLEAR key ON o Asterisk (*) key ON o Ready for input of
a main code of simulation a main code of simulation
2) Entering a main code with the 10-key o START key ON. 2) Entering a main code with the 10-key o START key ON.
Or select a main code with the SIM key on the touch panel. Or select a main code with the SIM key on the touch panel.
3) Entering a sub code with the 10-key o START key ON. 3) Entering a sub code with the 10-key o START key ON.
4) Select an item with the scroll key and the item key. 4) Select an item with the Cross key (Numeric key and OSA
5) The machine enters the mode corresponding to the selected shortcut key *1).
item. Press [START] key or [EXECUTE] key to start the simu- 5) The machine enters the mode corresponding to the selected
lation operation. item. Press [START] key or [OK] key to start the simulation
operation.
* Canceling the simulation mode to return to the normal mode
*1: If the direct selection menu is available, enter the number
1) Press CA (Clear all) key.
corresponding to the target item, and press OSA shortcut
key.
(Note for the simulation mode)
* Canceling the simulation mode to return to the normal mode
Do not turn OFF the power switch on the operation panel when the
machine is in the simulation mode. If the power switch should be 1) Press CA (Clear all) key.
turned OFF in the simulation mode, a malfunction may be resulted.
In this case, turn OFF/ON the main power source. (Note for the simulation mode)
Do not turn OFF the power switch on the operation panel when the
machine is in the simulation mode. If the power switch should be
turned OFF in the simulation mode, a malfunction may be resulted.
In this case, turn OFF/ON the main power source.
MX-C401 SIMULATION 5 – 1
(2) Operation flowchart
a. 8.5 Inch LCD model
NO Do you YES
Operation is made according want to end the Press the clear all key.
to the selected mode and item. simulation ?
NO
The display is made according to
the selected some and the item.
NO
The selected mode and
the item are cleared.
MX-C401 SIMULATION 5 – 2
b. 4.3 Inch LCD model
NO Do you YES
Operation is made according want to end the Press the clear all key.
to the selected mode and item. simulation ?
NO
The display is made according to
the selected some and the item.
NO
The selected mode and
the item are cleared.
Enter the new setting and Press the OSA shortcut key
adjustment values. and [OK] button.
*1: If the direct selection menu is available, enter the number corresponding to the target item, and press OSA shortcut key.
MX-C401 SIMULATION 5 – 3
(3) Functions of the keys used in the simulation mode
a. 4.3 Inch LCD model
11 10 6, 7, 8,9 2 3 16 13 12 21
1 4 5 22 18 17 19 14 15 20
MX-C401 SIMULATION 5 – 4
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
(1*,1(&2/25%$/$1&(0$18$/$'-8670(17>7(;7@
$˖ ˖32,17
$˖ %˖ ˖32,17
˷̚˹ &˖ ˖32,17
'˖ ˖32,17
25 24 23
No. Keys on the simulation menu Function and purpose in the simulation mode
23 EXECUTE key • Operates corresponding to the selected button or item.
• Also used to settle the adjustment value and the set value depending on the simulation content.
24 All plus key All the set values and the adjustment values are increased together.
25 All minus key All the set values and the adjustment values are decreased together.
OK key Used to settle the set content.
The buttons displayed on the simulation menu can be operated with the mechanical keys such as the cursor key, OK key, and OSA shortcut
key.
The buttons on the display screen of the machine cannot be operated directly such as the touch panel.
(Functional descriptions of the cursor key) (Operational descriptions of the direct selection mode)
The cursor key is used to select a button or an item on the simula- The direct selection function is used to select a target item by
tion menu. directly entering the number assigned to each item on the simula-
(Example) tion menu with 10 key.
1) Use UP and DOWN cursor keys to select a button. (Example)
2) Use RIGHT and LEFT cursor keys to select an item. 1) Enter the number displayed on the left side of a target item
3) Use OK key to settle the button or item selected by the cursor with 10 key.
keys. 2) Press HOME key to settle the selected target item.
To switch the simulation menu page, use UP and DOWN cur-
sor keys.
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
'96(77,1*$1'287387
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
$˖ ˖0,''/(63((''9%B.
)(('287387&+(&.
$˖ %˖ ˖0,''/(63((''9%B&
3)0 550 320) 3205
˷̚˹ &˖ ˖0,''/(63((''9%B0 )80 &3)0 260 :710
'˖ ˖0,''/(63((''9%B< &3)& 785& 3&66 /6866
0,''/( /2: (;(&87( /6866 &/80 &38& &/80
(;(&87(
UP and DOWN cursor keys are also used for switching the simula-
tion screen as well as selecting an item.
Use UP and DOWN cursor keys
to switch the menu page.
MX-C401 SIMULATION 5 – 5
2. List of simulation codes
Main Sub Functions Section
1 1 Used to check the operation of the scanner (reading) unit and the control circuit. Scanner (reading)
2 Used to check the sensors in the scanner (reading) section and the related circuits. Scanner (reading)
5 Used to check the operation of the scanner (reading) unit and the control circuit. Scanner (reading)
2 1 Used to check the operations of the auto document feed unit and the control circuit. RSPF
2 Used to check the operations of the sensors and the detectors in the document feed unit section and the RSPF
control circuits.
3 Used to check the operations of the loads in the auto document feed unit and the control circuit. RSPF
3 2 Used to check the operations of the sensors and the detectors in the finisher and the control circuit. Finisher
3 Used to check the operation of the load in the finisher and the control circuit. Finisher
10 Used to adjust the finisher. Finisher
4 2 Used to check the operations of the sensors and detectors in the paper feed tray, and the control circuit of Paper feed tray (Option)
those.
3 Used to check the operations of the loads in the paper feed tray, and the control circuit of those. Paper feed tray
5 Used to check the operations of the paper feed tray unit paper transport clutch (DTRC). Paper feed tray unit
5 1 Used to check the operation of the display, LCD in the operation panel, and control circuit. Operation panel
2 Used to check the operation of the heater lamp and the control circuit. Fusing
3 Used to check the operation of the scanner lamp and the control circuit. Scanner (reading)
4 Used to check the operation of the discharge lamp and the control circuit. Process
6 1 Used to check the operations of the load in the paper transport system (clutches and solenoids) and the Paper transport/Paper exit
control circuits. section
2 Used to check the operations of each fan motor and its control circuit. Others
3 Used to check the operations of the primary transfer unit and the control circuit. Process (Transfer)
6 Used to check the operation of the fusing separation. Fusing
51 Used to forcibly cut down the initial fuse of the developer unit and the fusing unit. Developing, fusing unit
7 1 Used to set the operating conditions of aging. Others
6 Used to set the operating intermittent aging cycle.
8 Used to display the warm-up time.
9 Color setting in the color copy test mode (Used to check the copy operation and the image quality for each
color).
12 The document reading number of sheets setting (for aging operation) RSPF
8 1 Used to check and adjust the operations of the developing voltage in each print mode and the control circuit. Process (Developing)
* When the middle speed is adjusted, the low speed are also adjusted simultaneously.
2 Used to check and adjust the operation of the main charger grid voltage in each printer mode and the control Process (Charging)
circuit.
* When the middle speed is adjusted, the low speed are also adjusted simultaneously.
6 Used to check and adjust the operation of the transfer voltage and the control circuit. Process (Transport)
9 2 Used to check the operations of the sensors and detectors in the paper reverse section (duplex section) and Duplex
its control circuit.
3 Used to check the operations of the load in the switchback section (duplex section) and its control circuit. Duplex
10 1 Used to check the operations of the toner supply mechanism (toner motor) and the related circuit. Process (Developing)
13 - Used to cancel the self-diag "U1" trouble.
14 - Used to cancel the self-diag H3, H4, H5 troubles.
16 - Used to cancel the self-diag "U2" trouble. MFP PWB / PCU PWB /
SCU PWB
17 - Used to cancel the self-diag "PF" trouble.
21 1 Used to set the maintenance cycle.
22 1 Used to check the print count value in each section and each operation mode. (Used to check the
maintenance timing.)
2 Used to check the total numbers of misfeed and troubles. (When the number of total jam is considerably
great, it is judged as necessary for repair.)
3 Used to check misfeed positions and the misfeed count of each position.
* Presumption of the faulty point by this data is possible.
4 Used to check the trouble (self diag) history.
5 Used to check the ROM version of each unit (section). Firmware
6 Used to output various adjustment/setting data (simulations, FAX soft switch counter), the firmware version,
the counter list, the process control data, and SIM50-24 data.
8 Used to check the number of operations (counter value) of the finisher, the RSPF, and the scan (reading) unit.
9 Used to check the number of use (print quantity) of each paper feed section. Paper feed, ADU
10 Used to check the system configuration (option, internal hardware).
11 Used to check the use frequency (send/receive) of FAX. (Only when FAX is installed) FAX
12 Used to check the RSPF misfeed positions and the number of misfeed at each position. (When the number of RSPF
misfeed is considerably great, it can be judged as necessary for repair.)
13 Used to check the operating time of the process section (OPC drum, DV unit, toner cartridge). Process
19 Used to check the values of the counters related to the scan - image send.
90 Used to output the various set data lists.
23 2 Used to output the trouble history list of paper jam and misfeed.
(If the number of troubles of misfeed is considerably great, the judgment is made that repair is required.)
80 Used to check the operation of paper feed and paper transport in the paper feed section and the paper Paper feed, Paper transport
transport section. Used to output the list of the operation status of the sensor and the detectors in the paper
feed section and the paper transport section.
MX-C401 SIMULATION 5 – 6
Main Sub Functions Section
24 1 Used to clear the jam counter, and the trouble counter. (After completion of maintenance, clear the counters.)
2 Used to clear the number of use (the number of prints) of each paper feed section.
3 Used to clear the finisher, RSPF, and the scan (reading) unit counter.
4 Used to clear the maintenance counter, the printer counters of the transport unit and the fusing unit.
(After completion of maintenance, clear the counters.)
5 Used to clear the developer counter. (After replacement of developer, clear the counter.)
6 Used to clear the copy counter.
7 Used to clear the OPC drum counter. (After replacement of the OPC drum, clear the counter.)
9 Used clear the printer mode print counter and the self print mode print counter.
10 Used to clear the FAX counter. (Only when FAX is installed)
15 Used to clear the counters related to the scan mode and the image send.
30 Used to initialize the administrator password.
31 Used to initialize the service mode password.
25 1 Used to check the operations of the developing section. Process (Developing section)
2 Used to make the initial setting of toner density when replacing developer. (Automatic adjustment) Image process (Photoconductor/
Developing/Transfer/Cleaning)
26 2 Used to set the paper weight type. Paper feed
3 Used to set the specifications of the auditor. (Setting must be made according to the auditor use conditions.) Auditor
6 Used to set the specifications (paper, fixed magnification ratio, etc.) of the destination.
10 Used to set the trial mode of the network scanner.
18 Used to set Disable/Enable of the toner save mode operation. (For the Japan and the UK versions.)
30 Used to set the operation mode corresponding to the CE mark (Europe safety standards). (For slow start to
drive the fusing heater lamp)
35 Used to set the display mode of SIM 22-4 trouble history when a same trouble occurred repeatedly. There are
two display modes: display as one trouble and display as several series of troubles.
38 Used to set Continue/Stop of print when the maintenance life is reached.
41 Used to set Enable/Disable of the magnification ratio automatic select function (AMS) in the center binding
mode.
49 Used to set the print speed of postcards mode.
50 Used to set functions.
52 Used to set whether non-printed paper (insertion paper, cover paper) is counted up or not.
53 User auto color calibration (color balance adjustment) Inhibit/Allow setting (copy mode)
54 User auto color calibration (color balance adjustment) Inhibit/Allow setting (printer mode)
55 Used to set Enable/Disable of the automatic color calibration (automatic color balance adjustment) when
replacing a consumable part.
65 Used to set the staple process restriction.
69 Used to set the operating conditions for toner near end.
73 Used to adjust the image loss (shade delete amount) in the name card copy mode.
74 Used to set the OSA trial mode.
78 Used to set the password of the remote operation panel.
27 1 Used to set non-detection of communication error (U7-00) with RIC. (FSS function)
2 Used to set the sender's registration number and the HOST server telephone number. (FSS function)
4 Used to set the initial call and toner order auto send. (FSS function)
5 Used to set the machine tag No. (This function allows the host computer to check the machine tag No.) Communication (RIC/MODEM)
(FSS function)
6 Used to set of the manual service call. (FSS function)
7 Used to set of the enable, alert callout. (FSS function)
9 Used to set the paper transport time recording YES/NO threshold value and shading gain adjustment retry
number. (FSS function)
10 Used to clear the trouble prediction history information. (FSS function)
11 Used to check the serial communication retry number and the scanner gain adjustment retry number history.
(FSS function)
12 Used to check the high-density, half-tone process control and the automatic registration adjustment error
history. (FSS Function)
13 Used to check the history of paper transport time between sensors. (FSS function)
14 Used to set the FSS function connection test mode.
30 1 Used to check the operations of the sensors and the detectors in other than the paper feed section and the
control circuits.
2 Used to check the operations of the sensors and the detectors in the paper feed section and the control
circuits.
33 1 Used to check the operations of the card reader sensor and the control circuit.
2 Used to delete the ID (IDM) information of Felica card.
40 2 Manual paper feed tray paper width sensor adjustment. Paper feed
7 Used to set the adjustment value of the manual paper feed tray paper width sensor. Paper feed
MX-C401 SIMULATION 5 – 7
Main Sub Functions Section
43 1 Used to set the fusing reference temperature of each operation mode.
4 Used to set the fusing temperature 2 in each mode. (Continued from SIM 43-1.)
20 Used to set the environmental correction under low temperature and low humidity (L/L) for the fusing
temperature setting (SIM 43-1) in each paper mode.
21 Used to set the environment correction under high temperature and high humidity (H/H) for the fusing
temperature setting (SIM 43-1) in each paper mode.
22 Used to set the environment correction under low temperature and low humidity (L/L) for the fusing
temperature setting (SIM 43-4) in each paper mode.
23 Used to set the environment correction under high temperature and high humidity (H/H) for the fusing
temperature setting (SIM 43-4) in each paper mode.
24 Used to set the correction of the temperature adjustment value of SIM 43-1 and 43-4.
44 1 Used to set each correction operation function in the image forming (process) section. Image process (Photoconductor/
Developing/Transfer/Cleaning)
2 Used to adjust the sensitivity of the image density sensor (registration sensor). Process
4 Used to set the conditions of the high density process control operation. Process
6 Used to execute the high density process control forcibly. Process
9 Used to display the result data of the high density process control operation. Image process (Photoconductor/
Developing/Transfer/Cleaning)
12 Used to display the operation data of the high density process control and the image density sensor Image process (Photoconductor/
(registration sensor). Developing)
13 Used to perform the color image sensor (image registration sensor F) calibration.
14 Used to display the output level of the temperature and humidity sensor. Process (OPC drum,
development)/Fusing/LSU
16 Used to display the toner density control data. Developing system
21 Used to set the half tone process control target. Process
22 Used to display the toner patch density level in the half tone process control operation. Process
24 Used to display the correction target and the correction level in the half tone process control operation. Process
25 Used to set the calculating conditions of the correction value for the half tone process control. Process
26 Used to execute the half tone process control compulsorily. Process
27 Used to clear the correction data of the half tone process control. Process
28 Used to set the process control execution conditions. Process
29 Used to set the operating conditions of the process control during a job. Process
31 Used to adjust the OPC drum phase. (Manual adjustment) Process
37 Used to set the development bias correction level in the continuous printing operation.
43 Used to display the identification information of the developing unit. Developing system
61 Used to set the calibration data of the color image sensor (image registration sensor F).
46 1 Used to adjust the copy density in the copy mode.
2 Used to adjust the copy density in the copy mode.
4 Used to adjust the density in the image send mode.
5 Used to adjust the density in the image send mode.
8 Used to adjust the image send mode color balance RGB.
9 Used to adjust the scan image density.
10 Used to adjust the copy color balance and the gamma (for each color copy mode).
16 Used to adjust the monochrome copy density and the gamma (for each monochrome copy mode).
19 Used to set the operating conditions for the density scanning (exposure) of monochrome auto copy mode
documents.
21 Copy color balance adjustment (Manual adjustment)
23 Used to set the density correction of copy high density section (High density tone gap supported).
24 Copy color balance adjustment (Auto adjustment)
25 Used to adjust the copy color balance. (Single color copy mode)
26 Used to reset the single color mode color balance set value to the default.
27 Used to adjust the gamma/density of copy images, texts, and line image edges.
30 Used to adjust the resolution in the sub scanning direction in the copy mode.
32 Used to adjust the document background density reproducibility in the monochrome auto copy mode.
36 Used to adjust the colors in the 2-color copy mode.
37 Used to adjust the color document reproducibility in the monochrome copy mode.
38 Used to adjust the black component amount in the color copy mode.
39 Used to adjust the sharpness of FAX send images.
40 Used to adjust the FAX send image density. (Collective adjustment of all the modes)
41 Used to adjust the FAX send image density. (Normal)
42 Used to adjust the FAX send image density. (Fine)
43 Used to adjust the FAX send image density. (Super Fine)
MX-C401 SIMULATION 5 – 8
Main Sub Functions Section
46 44 Used to adjust the FAX send image density. (Ultra fine)
45 Used to adjust the FAX send image density. (600dpi).
47 Used to set the compression rate of copy and scan images (JPEG).
51 Used to adjust the gamma for the copy mode heavy paper mode and the image process mode.
(Manual adjustment)
52 Used to reset the copy color balance adjustment (adjustment for each dither) to the default value.
(The set values of SIM46-51 and SIM46-54 are set to the default values.)
54 Used to reset the copy color balance adjustment (auto adjustment for each dither).
60 Used to adjust the sharpness in the color auto copy mode.
61 Used to adjust the area separation recognition level.
62 Used to set the operating conditions of the ACS, the area separation, the background image process, and the
auto exposure mode.
63 Used to adjust the density in the copy low density section.
74 Copy color balance adjustment (Auto adjustment)/Printer color balance adjustment (Auto adjustment)
48 1 Used to adjust the scan image magnification ratio (in the main scanning direction and the sub scanning
direction).
5 Used to correction the scan image magnification ratio (in the sub scanning direction). Scanner section
6 Used to adjust the rotation speed of each motor.
49 1 Used to perform the firmware update.
3 Used to update the operation manual in the HDD.
50 1 Copy image position, image loss adjustment
2 Used to adjust the copy image position and the image loss.
(This simulation is a simplified version of SIM 50-1).
5 Used to adjust the print lead edge image position. (PRINTER MODE)
6 Used to adjust the copy image position and the image loss. (RSPF mode) RSPF
7 Used to adjust the copy image position and the image loss (RSPF mode). RSPF
(This simulation is a simplified version of SIM 50-6.)
10 Used to adjust the black print image magnification ratio and the off-center position.
(The adjustment is made separately for each paper feed section.)
12 Used to perform the scan image off-center position adjustment.
(The adjustment is made separately for each scan mode.)
20 Image registration adjustment (Manual adjustment)
22 Used to adjust the image registration. (Main scan direction, sub scan direction)
(Auto adjustment)/OPC drum phase adjustment (Auto adjustment)
24 Used to display the detail data of SIM 44-2, 50-20 and 22.
27 Used to perform the image loss adjustment of scanned images in the FAX or image send mode.
28 Used to automatically adjust the image loss, void area, image off-center, and image magnification ratio.
51 1 Used to adjust the ON/OFF timing of the secondary transport voltage.
2 Used to adjust the contact pressure (deflection amount) on paper by the main unit and the RSPF resist roller.
(This adjustment is performed when there is a considerable variation in the print image position on the paper
or when paper jams frequently occur.)
53 8 Used to adjust the document lead edge reference and the RSPF mode document scan position.
55 1 Used to set the specifications of the engine control operations. (SOFT SW)
2 Used to set the specifications of the scanner control operation. (SOFT SW)
3 Used to set the specifications of the controller operation. (SOFT SW)
56 1 Used to transport data between HDD - MFP PWB SRAM/EEPROM. (Used to repair the PWB.)
2 Used to backup the data in the EEPROM. SRAM, and HDD (including user authentication data and address
data) to the USB memory. (Corresponding to the device cloning and the storage backup.)
3 Used to backup the print hold data (document filling data) to the USB memory. (4.3 Inch LCD model)
3 Used to backup the document filling data to the USB memory. (8.5 Inch LCD model)
4 Used to backup the JOB log data to the USB memory.
60 1 Used to check the operations (read/write) of the MFP PWB memory.
2 Used to set the MFP PWB onboard SDRAM.
61 1 Used to check the LSU polygon motor rotation and laser detection. LSU
3 Used to set the laser power
4 Used to print the print image skew adjustment pattern. (LSU unit)
62 1 Used to execute the hard disk format (except operation manual area).
2 Used to check read/write of the hard disk (partial).
3 Used to check read/write of the hard disk (all areas).
6 Used to perform the self diagnostics of the hard disk.
7 Used to print the hard disk self diagnostics error log.
8 Used to format the hard disk. (Excluding the system area and the operation manual area)
10 Used to delete the job log data.
11 Used to delete the print hold data (document filing data). (4.3 Inch LCD model)
11 Used to delete the document filing data. (8.5 Inch LCD model)
12 Used to set Enable/Disable of auto format in a hard disk trouble.
13 Used to format the hard disk. (only the operation manual area)
MX-C401 SIMULATION 5 – 9
Main Sub Functions Section
63 1 Used to display the shading correction result. Scanner
2 Used to perform shading.
3 Used to perform scanner (CCD) color balance and gamma auto adjustment. Scanner
4 Used to display the SIT chart patch density.
5 Used to perform the scanner (CCD) color balance and gamma default setting.
6 Used to display the scan level and the density level of the copy color balance adjustment patch.
7 Used to register the service target of the copy mode auto color balance adjustment.
8 Used to set the default of the service target of the copy mode auto color balance adjustment.
11 Used to set the target color balance of the copy mode auto color balance adjustment.
64 1 Test print. (Self print) (Color mode)
2 Test print. (Self print) (Monochrome mode)
4 Printer test print. (Self print) (256 gradations)
5 Printer test print. (Self print) (PCL)
6 Printer test print. (Self print) (PS)
7 Used to print the adjustment pattern of the test print. (Self print).
(The adjustment pattern of SIM46-21 is printed.)
65 1 Used to adjust the touch panel (LCD display section) detection coordinates. (8.5 Inch LCD model only) Operation panel section
2 Used to display the touch panel (LCD display section) detection coordinates. (8.5 Inch LCD model only)
5 Used to check the operation panel key input.
67 17 Used to reset the printer controller. Printer
24 Printer color balance adjustment (Auto adjustment) Printer
25 Printer color balance adjustment (Manual adjustment) Printer
26 Used to set the target color balance of the printer mode auto color balance adjustment. Printer
27 Used to set the service target of the printer mode auto color balance adjustment. Printer
28 Used to set the default of the service target of the printer mode auto color balance adjustment. Printer
31 Used to clear the printer calibration value. Printer
33 Used to change the gamma of the printer screen. (for PCL/PS) Printer
34 Used to set the density correction in the printer high density section. (Support for the high density section Printer
tone gap)
36 Used to adjust the density in the low density section. Printer
52 Used to reset the printer color balance adjustment (adjustment for each dither) to the default value. (The set
values of SIM67-54 and SIM67-33 are set to the default values.)
54 Printer color balance adjustment (Automatic adjustment for each dither)
70 MFP PWB SRAM data clear MFP PWB
MX-C401 SIMULATION 5 – 10
3. Details of simulation • 4.3 Inch LCD model
1
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
6&$11(56(1625&+(&.
1-1
0+36
Purpose Operation test/check
Function (Purpose) Used to check the operation of the scanner
(reading) unit and the control circuit.
Section Scanner (reading)
Operation/Procedure
1) Select the operation speed.
2) Press [EXECUTE] key.
Scanning is once performed at the speed corresponding to the • 8.5 Inch LCD model
scan resolution (operation speed).
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
6&$11(5&+(&. 1-5
2&6&$1 '3, '3, '3, Purpose Operation test/check
'3, Function (Purpose) Used to check the operation of the scanner
(reading) unit and the control circuit.
Section Scanner (reading)
Operation/Procedure
(;(&87(
1) Select the operation speed.
2) Press [EXECUTE] key.
Scanning is repeated at the speed corresponding to the scan
• 8.5 Inch LCD model
resolution (operation speed).
When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the operation is terminated.
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12 &/26(
1-2 7(67
6&$11(5&+(&.
Purpose Operation test/check
2&6&$1 '3, '3, '3,
Function (Purpose) Used to check the sensors in the scanner
(reading) section and the related circuits. '3,
MX-C401 SIMULATION 5 – 11
• 8.5 Inch LCD model • 8.5 Inch LCD model
2-2
2 Purpose Operation test/check
Function (Purpose) Used to check the operations of the sen-
2-1 sors and the detectors in the document
Purpose Operation test/check feed unit section and the control circuits.
Function (Purpose) Used to check the operations of the auto Section RSPF
document feed unit and the control circuit. Operation/Procedure
Section RSPF The operating conditions of the sensors and detectors are dis-
played.
Operation/Procedure
The code names of the sensors and the detectors which are active
1) Select the operation mode and the speed.
are highlighted.
2) Press [EXECUTE] key.
The RSPF repeats paper feed, transport, and paper exit oper- SSET RSPF installation detection
ations at the speed corresponding to the scan resolution (oper- SOCD RSPF open/close detector
ation speed). SCOV RSPF cover open/close detector
When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the operation is terminated. SPED RSPF document empty detector
SPPD1 RSPF transport detector 1
Item/Display Operation mode Default value SPPD2 RSPF transport detector 2
(SINGLE) 300DPI 300DPI 300DPI
(205.9mm/s) (205.9mm/s) • 4.3 Inch LCD model
400DPI 400DPI
(154.4mm/s)
600DPI 600DPI
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
(102.9mm/s)
(DOUBLE) 300DPI 300DPI 300DPI 63)6(1625&+(&.
(205.9mm/s) (205.9mm/s) 66(7 62&' 6&29 63('
400DPI 400DPI 633' 633'
(154.4mm/s)
600DPI 600DPI
(102.9mm/s)
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12 &/26( • 8.5 Inch LCD model
7(67
63)$*,1*
63)6&$1 '3, '3, '3,
MX-C401 SIMULATION 5 – 12
FPRD-C Finisher paper rear edge detector C
2-3
FPRD-R Finisher paper rear edge detector R
Purpose Operation test/check FAPHPS-F Finisher paper alignment plate home position sensor F
Function (Purpose) Used to check the operations of the loads FAPHPS-R Finisher paper alignment plate home position sensor R
in the auto document feed unit and the con- FSTPD Finisher staple tray paper detector
trol circuit. FSHPS Finisher staple home position sensor
Section RSPF FSED Finisher staple empty detector
FSLD Finisher staple lead detector
Operation/Procedure
FSSW Finisher safety swithch
1) Select a target item of the operation check.
2) Press [EXECUTE] key. • 4.3 Inch LCD model
The selected load performs the operation.
When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the operation is terminated.
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
SPFM_F RSPF transport motor (normal rotation) ),16(1625&+(&.
SPFM_R RSPF transport motor (reverse rotation)
)33' )3/' )'78/6 )'7//6
SPUS RSPF paper feed roller solenoid
)'536 )35') )35'& )35'5
• 4.3 Inch LCD model )$3+36) )$3+365 )673' )6+36
)6(' )6/' )66:
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
63)287387&+(&.
6350B) 6350B5
• 8.5 Inch LCD model
6386
(;(&87(
3-3
Purpose Operation test/check
Function (Purpose) Used to check the operation of the load in
the finisher and the control circuit.
Section Finisher
Operation/Procedure
1) Select the item to be operation checked.
2) Press [EXECUTE] key.
3 The selected load performs the operation.
When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the operation is terminated.
3-2
FPGS Finisher paper gate solenoid
Purpose Operation test/check
FPDM Finisher paper delivery motor
Function (Purpose) Used to check the operations of the sen- FPS Finisher paddle solenoid
sors and the detectors in the finisher and FARLS Finisher alignment roller lift solenoid
the control circuit. FPTM Finisher paper transport motor
Section Finisher FDRLM Finisher delivery roller lift motor
Operation/Procedure FPAM-F Finisher paper alignment motor F
FPAM-R Finisher paper alignment motor R
The operating conditions of the sensors and detectors are dis-
FSM Finisher staple motor
played.
FTLM Finisher tray lift motor
The code names of the sensors and the detectors which are active FSCF Finisher stapler cooling fan
are highlighted. FBCF Finisher control board cooling fan
MX-C401 SIMULATION 5 – 13
• 4.3 Inch LCD model • 4.3 Inch LCD model
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12 &/26( ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
7(67
),1/2$'&+(&. ),1,6+(5$'-8670(17
)3*6 )3'0 )36 )$5/6 $˖ ˖)3$0$'-867
$˖
)370 )'5/0 )3$0) )3$05 %˖ ˖)'5/0$'-867
˷̚˹
)60 )7/0 )6&) )%&)
(;(&87(
4
3-10
Purpose Adjustment 4-2
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the finisher. Purpose Operation test/check
Section Finisher Function (Purpose) Used to check the operations of the sen-
Operation/Procedure sors and detectors in the paper feed tray,
1) Select an adjustment target item with [n] [p] key. and the control circuit of those.
2) Enter the set value with 10-key. Section Paper feed tray (Option)
3) Press [OK] key. (For the 4.3 Inch LCD model, press the OSA Operation/Procedure
shortcut key.) (The set value is saved.) The operating conditions of the sensors and detectors are dis-
played.
Setting Default The code names of the sensors and the detectors which are active
Item/Display Content
range value
are highlighted.
A FPAM ADJUST Paper alignment width 40 - 60 50
adjustment *1
D1PPD Paper feed tray 2 paper transport detector
B FDRLM ADJUST Paper delivery roller 40 - 60 50
D1ULD Paper feed tray 2 upper limit detector
descending position
D1PED Paper feed tray 2 paper empty detector
adjustment
D1PQD Paper feed tray 2 paper remaining quantity detector
D1PRED1 Paper feed tray 2 paper rear edge detector 1
Item A: When the adjustment value is increased by 1, the alignment plate
D1PRED2 Paper feed tray 2 paper rear edge detector 2
F/R width is narrowed by 0.419mm in alignment operation.
When the adjustment value is decreased by 1, the alignment plate D1PRED3 Paper feed tray 2 paper rear edge detector 3
F/R width is widened by 0.419mm in alignment operation. D1COCS Paper feed tray 2 cover open/close sensor
The alignment plate F and the alignment plate R cannot be D2MDC Paper feed tray 3 installation detection connector
adjusted separately. The shift amount on the F side and that on D2PPD Paper feed tray 3 paper transport detector
the R side are alternatively corrected everytime the adjustment D2ULD Paper feed tray 3 upper limit detector
value is increased by 1. (Correction with 51 for the F side, and 52 D2PED Paper feed tray 3 paper empty detector
for the R side. ... 59 for the F aide, and 60 for the R side. Similar D2PQD Paper feed tray 3 paper remaining quantity detector
when the set value is decreased.)
D2PRED1 Paper feed tray 3 paper rear edge detector 1
Item B: When the adjustment value is increased by 1, the shift amount of
D2PRED2 Paper feed tray 3 paper rear edge detector 2
the paper delivery roller is changed by 0.11mm toward the
D2PRED3 Paper feed tray 3 paper rear edge detector 3
pressure increasing side (*1).
When the adjustment value is decreased by 1, the shit amount of D2COCS Paper feed tray 3 cover open/close sensor
the paper delivery roller is changed by 0.11mm toward the D3MDC Paper feed tray 4 installation detection connector
pressure decreasing side (*1). D3PPD Paper feed tray 4 paper transport detector
*1: The pressure increasing side means the direction to D3ULD Paper feed tray 4 upper limit detector
increase the paper delivery roller pressure onto paper, and D3PED Paper feed tray 4 paper empty detector
the pressure decrease side means the direction to decrease D3PQD Paper feed tray 4 paper remaining quantity detector
the paper delivery roller pressure onto paper. D3PRED1 Paper feed tray 4 paper rear edge detector 1
D3PRED2 Paper feed tray 4 paper rear edge detector 2
D3PRED3 Paper feed tray 4 paper rear edge detector 3
D3COCS Paper feed tray 4 cover open/close sensor
MX-C401 SIMULATION 5 – 14
• 4.3 Inch LCD model • 8.5 Inch LCD model
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
'6.6(1625&+(&.
'33' '8/' '3(' '34'
4-5
Purpose Operation test/check
Function (Purpose) Used to check the operations of the paper
feed tray unit paper transport clutch
(DTRC).
Section Paper feed tray unit
Operation/Procedure
[Check the ON operation]
Select the button of the code name for checking the ON operation.
Checking is started. When the operation is normal, the button on
the display is highlighted. When it is abnormal, the button is not
highlighted.
[Check the OFF operation]
4-3 Press the highlighted button which is ON.
Purpose Operation test/check • 4.3 Inch LCD model
Function (Purpose) Used to check the operations of the loads
in the paper feed tray, and the control circuit
of those.
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
Section Paper feed tray '(6.6<1&521,=,1*6,*1$/&+(&.
Operation/Procedure '75& '75&2))
1) Select the load item that is required to operation check.
2) Press [EXECUTE] key.
The selected load performs the operation.
When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the operation is terminated.
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
'6./2$'&+(&.
'3)0 '/0 '3)& '37&
'/0 '3)& '37& '/0 When the operation is normal, the highlighted button on the display
'3)& '37& returns to the normal display. When it is abnormal, the highlighted
display is maintained.
(;(&87(
MX-C401 SIMULATION 5 – 15
• 4.3 Inch LCD model
5
5-1 ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
Purpose Operation test/check +($7(5/$03/2$'6(783
Function (Purpose) Used to check the operation of the display, +/B80 +/B/0
LCD in the operation panel, and control cir- +/B(
cuit.
Section Operation panel
Operation/Procedure
(;(&87(
The LCD is changed as shown below.
The contrast changes every 2sec from the current level to MAX o
MIN o the current level. During this period, each LED is lighted.
The LCD display contrast change and the LED lighting status are • 8.5 Inch LCD model
checked.
• 4.3 Inch LCD model
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67
5-3
• 8.5 Inch LCD model
Purpose Operation test/check
Function (Purpose) Used to check the operation of the scanner
lamp and the control circuit.
Section Scanner (reading)
Operation/Procedure
1) Select the item to be operation checked.
2) Press [EXECUTE] key.
The scanner lamp lights up for 10 sec.
When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the operation is terminated.
• 4.3 Inch LCD model
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
&23</$03&+(&.
5-2
2&&23</$03
Purpose Operation test/check
Function (Purpose) Used to check the operation of the heater
lamp and the control circuit.
Section Fusing
Operation/Procedure (;(&87(
1) Select the item to be operation checked.
2) Press [EXECUTE] key.
The selected heater lamp operates ON/OFF.
When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the operation is terminated.
MX-C401 SIMULATION 5 – 16
• 8.5 Inch LCD model
6
6-1
Purpose Operation test/check
Function (Purpose) Used to check the operations of the load in
the paper transport system (clutches and
solenoids) and the control circuits.
Section Paper transport/Paper exit section
Operation/Procedure
1) Select the item to be operation checked.
2) Press [EXECUTE] key.
The selected load performs the operation.
When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the operation is terminated.
5-4 Load operation check method:
Purpose Operation test/check The load operation is checked by the operation sound. However,
there are some loads which cannot be checked with the operation
Function (Purpose) Used to check the operation of the dis- sound.
charge lamp and the control circuit.
Section Process Section Item/Display Content
Operation/Procedure Transport/ RRM Registration motor
process POMF * Paper exit motor (normal rotation)
1) Select a target of the operation check.
POMR * Paper exit motor (reverse rotation)
When [ALL] key is pressed, all the items are selected.
FUM Fusing drive motor
2) Press [EXECUTE] key. CPFM Paper feed motor
The selected discharge lamp is lighted for 30 sec. CPFC Tray vertical transport clutch
When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the operation is terminated. HLPCS Fusing pressure release/pressing
solenoid
DL_K Discharge lamp K Paper feed CLUM1 Paper feed tray 1 lift-up motor
DL_C Discharge lamp C CPUC1 Paper feed tray 1 paper feed clutch
DL_M Discharge lamp M MPFS Manual paper feed solenoid
DL_Y Discharge lamp Y
* If two or more are selected at a time, it makes "Normal rotation."
• 4.3 Inch LCD model • 4.3 Inch LCD model
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26( ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12 &/26(
7(67
',6&+$5*(/$03&+(&. )(('287387&+(&.
'/B. '/B& '/B0 '/B< 550 320) 3205 )80
&3)0 &3)& +/3&6 &/80
&38& 03)6
MX-C401 SIMULATION 5 – 17
6-2 6-3
Purpose Operation test/check Purpose Operation test/check
Function (Purpose) Used to check the operations of each fan Function (Purpose) Used to check the operations of the primary
motor and its control circuit. transfer unit and the control circuit.
Section Others Section Process (Transfer)
Operation/Procedure Operation/Procedure
1) Select the item to be operation checked. 1) Select the operation mode.
2) Press [EXECUTE] key. 2) Press [EXECUTE] key, and the transfer unit repeats opera-
The selected load performs the operation. tions in the mode selected in procedure 1.
When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the operation is terminated. During this operation, the transfer unit status (the operation mode
position) is displayed.
Press [ALL] key to select all the fans collectively.
Load operation check method: Mode Transfer
The load operation is checked by the operation sound. However, Display Operation
select key mode
there are some loads which cannot be checked with the operation TC1 BLACK Black mode The switching Primary
sound. position operations are transfer
COLOR Color mode repeated as (Normal
Item/Display Content postion follows: Black rotation of the
POFM Paper exit cooling fan motor FREE Drum mode position o mode select
PSFM Power PWB cooling fan motor separation Color mode gear)
LSUFM LSU cooling fan motor position position o Black
mode position o
PROFM1 Process fan motor 1
Drum separation
PROFM2 Process fan motor 2
position
FUFM Fusing cooling fan motor
TC1_R BLACK Black mode The switching Primary
HDDFM HDD cooling fan motor position operations are transfer
FREE Drum repeated as (Reverse
• 4.3 Inch LCD model
separation follows: Black rotation of the
position mode position o mode select
Drum separation gear)
COLOR Color mode
position o Color
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12 postion
7(67 &/26(
mode postion
)$1/2$'6(783 TC2 PRINT Print The switching Secondary
32)0 36)0 postion operations are transfer
FREE Drum repeated as (Driven by the
/68)0 352)0
separation follows: Print fusing motor)
352)0 )8)0 position postion o Drum
+'')0 separation
position
$// (;(&87(
• 4.3 Inch LCD model
MX-C401 SIMULATION 5 – 18
• 4.3 Inch LCD model
6-6
Purpose Operation test/check
Function (Purpose) Used to check the operation of the fusing
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
separation.
)86(&87(;(&87,21
Section Fusing
'9&58B. '9&58B& '9&58B0 '9&58B<
Operation/Procedure
)8&58
1) Press [EXCUTE] key, and fusing pressure applying and fusing
pressure release are repeated.
During this period, the status of the fusing roller pressure is dis-
played. (;(&87(
PRINT Fusing pressure Fusing pressure applying o Fusing
applying pressure release o (Fusing pressure
FREE Fusing pressure applying) The operation is repeated. • 8.5 Inch LCD model
release
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
75$16)(5/2$'&+(&.
326,7,21ǂǂǂǂǂ˖ǂ
)86(5 (;(&87(
Item/Display Content
Initial DVCRU_K Developing K initial detection fuse blow-off ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
detection operation $*,1*7(676(77,1*
DVCRU_C Developing C initial detection fuse blow-off
$*,1* ,17(59$/
operation
0,6)(('ǂ',6$%/( )86,1*ǂ',6$%/(
DVCRU_M Developing M initial detection fuse blow-off
operation :$5083ǂ',6$%/( '9ǂ&+(&.ǂ',6$%/(
DVCRU_Y Developing Y initial detection fuse blow-off 6+$',1*ǂ',6$%/( &&'ǂ*$,1ǂ)5((
operation
FUCRU Fusing initial detection fuse blow-off operation (;(&87(
MX-C401 SIMULATION 5 – 19
• 8.5 Inch LCD model
7-8
Purpose Operation display
Function (Purpose) Used to display the warm-up time.
Section
Operation/Procedure
Press [EXECUTE] key.
Counting of the warm-up time is started and the time required for
warm-up is displayed
* Interruption of counting by pressing [EXECUTE] key is inhibited.
• 4.3 Inch LCD model
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
:$50837,0(',63/$<6(77,1*
7-6
6(&21'6
Purpose Setting
Function (Purpose) Used to set the operating intermittent aging
cycle.
Section
Operation/Procedure (;(&87(
1) Enter the intermittent aging operation cycle (unit: sec) with 10-
key.
2) Press [OK] key. • 8.5 Inch LCD model
The time entered in procedure 1) is set.
* The interval time that can be set is 1 to 900 (sec).
The aging operation condition set by this mode is maintained here-
after unless the power is turned off or the setting is changed.
• 4.3 Inch LCD model
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
,17(59$/$*,1*&<&/(7,0(6(783
$˖ ˖&<&/(ǂ7,0(˄6(&˅
$˖
˷̚˹
7-9
Purpose Operation test/check
Function (Purpose) Color setting in the color copy test mode
• 8.5 Inch LCD model (Used to check the copy operation and the
image quality for each color).
Section
Operation/Procedure
1) Select the copy color with the touch panel key.
(Two or more colors can be selected.)
The key of the selected color is highlighted.
2) Press [EXECUTE] key.
Copying is performed with the selected color.
When [CLOSE] key is pressed, the display goes into the copy oper-
ation menu in the simulation mode.
K Setup/cancel of black
C Setup/cancel of cyan
M Setup/cancel of magenta
Y Setup/cancel of yellow
MX-C401 SIMULATION 5 – 20
• 4.3 Inch LCD model
8
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26( 8-1
35,17,1*&2/256(/(&7&2/2502'( Purpose Operation test/check/adjustment
. & 0 <
Function (Purpose) Used to check and adjust the operations of
the developing voltage in each print mode
and the control circuit.
* When the middle speed is adjusted, the
low speed are also adjusted simulta-
(;(&87(
neously.
Section Process (Developing)
Operation/Procedure
• 8.5 Inch LCD model
1) Select the process speed.
2) Select a target item to be adjusted with [n] [p] buttons.
3) Enter the setting value with 10-key. (The value specified on the
label of the high voltage PWB must be entered.)
* When the U V key is pressed, the setting value of each
item can be changed with 1up (1down) collectively.
4) Press [OK] key. (For the 4.3 Inch LCD model, press the OSA
shortcut key.)
When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the voltage inputted in pro-
cedure 3 is outputted for 30sec and the set value is saved.
When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the output is terminated.
Setting
Mode Item/Display Content
range
MIDDLE A MIDDLE SPEED K developing bias set 0-600
7-12
DVB_K value at middle speed
Purpose Operation test/check B MIDDLE SPEED C developing bias set 0-600
Function (Purpose) The document reading number of sheets DVB_C value at middle speed
setting (for aging operation) C MIDDLE SPEED M developing bias set 0-600
DVB_M value at middle speed
Section RSPF D MIDDLE SPEED Y developing bias set 0-600
Operation/Procedure DVB_Y value at middle speed
1) Set document reading quantity with 10-key. LOW A LOW SPEED K developing bias set 0-600
(Setting range:0 - 255) DVB_K value at low speed
B LOW SPEED C developing bias set 0-600
2) Press [OK] key. The set value is saved.
DVB_C value at low speed
The aging operation condition set by this mode is maintained here- C LOW SPEED M developing bias set 0-600
after unless the power is turned off or the setting is changed. DVB_M value at low speed
• 4.3 Inch LCD model D LOW SPEED Y developing bias set 0-600
DVB_Y value at low speed
'˖ ˖0,''/(63((''9%B<
MX-C401 SIMULATION 5 – 21
• 4.3 Inch LCD model
8-2
Purpose Operation test/check/adjustment
Function (Purpose) Used to check and adjust the operation of
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
the main charger grid voltage in each
printer mode and the control circuit. 0+9*5,'6(77,1*$1'287387
* When the middle speed is adjusted, the $˖ ˖0,''/(ǂ63(('ǂ*%B.
low speed are also adjusted simulta- $˖ %˖ ˖0,''/(ǂ63(('ǂ*%B&
neously. ˷̚˹ &˖ ˖0,''/(ǂ63(('ǂ*%B0
Section Process (Charging)
'˖ ˖0,''/(ǂ63(('ǂ*%B<
Operation/Procedure
0,''/( /2: (;(&87(
1) Select the process speed.
2) Select a target item to be adjusted with [n] [p] keys.
3) Enter the adjustment value with 10-key. (The value specified
on the label of the high voltage PWB must be entered.) • 8.5 Inch LCD model
* When the U V key is pressed, the setting value of each
item can be changed with 1up (1down) collectively.
4) Press [OK] key. (For the 4.3 Inch LCD model, press the OSA
shortcut key.)
When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the voltage inputted in pro-
cedure 3 is outputted for 30sec and the set value is saved.
When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the output is terminated.
Setting
Mode Item/Display Content
range
MIDDLE A MIDDLE SPEED K charging/grid bias set 150 - 850
GB_K value at middle speed
B MIDDLE SPEED C charging/grid bias set 150 - 850
GB_C value at middle speed
C MIDDLE SPEED M charging/grid bias set 150 - 850
GB_M value at middle speed 8-6
D MIDDLE SPEED Y charging/grid bias set 150 - 850
Purpose Operation test/check/adjustment
GB_Y value at middle speed
LOW A LOW SPEED K charging/grid bias set 150 - 850 Function (Purpose) Used to check and adjust the operation of
GB_K value at low speed the transfer voltage and the control circuit.
B LOW SPEED C charging/grid bias set 150 - 850 Section Process (Transport)
GB_C value at low speed
Operation/Procedure
C LOW SPEED M charging/grid bias set 150 - 850
GB_M value at low speed 1) Select a target item to be adjusted with [n] [p] buttons.
D LOW SPEED Y charging/grid bias set 150 - 850 2) Enter the set value with 10-key.
GB_Y value at low speed
Enter the default value specified on the following list.
3) Press [OK] key. (For the 4.3 Inch LCD model, press the OSA
shortcut key.)
When [OK] key is pressed, the voltage inputted in procedure 3
is outputted for 30sec and the set value is saved.
When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the output is terminated.
Default value
Adjustment Default Actual output
Item/Display Content of actual
range value setting range
output value
A TC1 LOW SPEED CL K Primary Color mode K Low speed 51 - 255 95 2 - 30PA 8PA
transfer bias mode
B TC1 MIDDLE SPEED CL K adjustment Middle speed 51 - 255 131 2 - 30PA 13PA
value mode
C TC1 LOW SPEED CL C C Low speed 51 - 255 95 2 - 30PA 8PA
mode
D TC1 MIDDLE SPEED CL C Middle speed 51 - 255 131 2 - 30PA 13PA
mode
E TC1 LOW SPEED CL M M Low speed 51 - 255 95 2 - 30PA 8PA
mode
F TC1 MIDDLE SPEED CL M Middle speed 51 - 255 131 2 - 30PA 13PA
mode
G TC1 LOW SPEED CL Y Y Low speed 51 - 255 95 2 - 30PA 8PA
mode
H TC1 MIDDLE SPEED CL Y Middle speed 51 - 255 131 2 - 30PA 13PA
mode
I TC1 LOW SPEED BW K Black/White K Low speed 51 - 255 95 2 - 30PA 8PA
mode mode
J TC1 MIDDLE SPEED BW K Middle speed 51 - 255 131 2 - 30PA 13PA
mode
MX-C401 SIMULATION 5 – 22
Default value
Adjustment Default Actual output
Item/Display Content of actual
range value setting range
output value
K TC2 PLAIN CL SPX Secondary Color mode Standard paper Front surface 51 - 255 111 –2 - –80PA –25PA
transfer bias mode mode
L TC2 PLAIN CL DPX adjustment Back surface 51 - 255 124 –2 - –80PA –30PA
value mode
M TC2 PLAIN BW SPX Black/White Front surface 51 - 255 111 –2 - –80PA –25PA
mode mode
N TC2 PLAIN BW DPX Back surface 51 - 255 111 –2 - –80PA –25PA
mode
O TC2 HEAVY CL SPX Color mode Heavy paper Front surface 51 - 255 93 –2 - –80PA –10PA
mode mode
P TC2 HEAVY CL DPX Back surface 51 - 255 93 –2 - –80PA –10PA
mode
Q TC2 HEAVY BW SPX Black/White Front surface 51 - 255 93 –2 - –80PA –10PA
mode mode
R TC2 HEAVY BW DPX Back surface 51 - 255 93 –2 - –80PA –10PA
mode
S TC2 OHP CL OHP Color mode 51 - 255 85 –2 - –80PA –8PA
T TC2 OHP BW Black/White mode 51 - 255 85 –2 - –80PA –8PA
U TC2 ENVELOPE CL Envelope Color mode 51 - 255 124 –2 - –80PA –30PA
V TC2 ENVELOPE BW Black/White mode 51 - 255 124 –2 - –80PA –30PA
W TC2 THIN CL Thin paper Color mode 51 - 255 111 –2 - –80PA –25PA
X TC2 THIN BW Black/White mode 51 - 255 111 –2 - –80PA –25PA
Y TC2 GLOSSY CL Gloss paper Color mode 51 - 255 72 –2 - –80PA –10PA
Z TC2 GLOSSY BW Black/White mode 51 - 255 72 –2 - –80PA –10PA
AA TC2 CLEANING Cleaning mode 51 - 255 67 –2 - -80PA –8PA
AB TC2 CLEAN LOW SPD Secondary Low speed print mode 0 - 255 16 –100V - 1500V 0V
AC TC2 CLEAN MIDDLE SPD transfer Middle speed print mode 0 - 255 16 –100V - 1500V 0V
AD TC2 CLEAN CLEANING cleaning Cleaning mode 0 - 255 143 –100V - 1500V 800V
bias
adjustment
value
AE PTC LOW SPEED CL PTC current Color mode Low speed mode 0 - 255 133 0PA - –700PA –300PA
AF PTC MIDDLE SPEED CL output Middle speed mode 0 - 255 133 0PA - –700PA –300PA
AG PTC LOW SPEED BW adjustment Black/White mode Low speed mode 0 - 255 133 0PA - –700PA –300PA
AH PTC MIDDLE SPEED BW value Middle speed mode 0 - 255 133 0PA - –700PA –300PA
AI CASE VOLT LOW CL PTC case Color mode Low speed mode 0 - 255 0 0V - –1000V 0V
AJ CASE VOLT MID CL voltage Middle speed mode 0 - 255 0 0V - –1000V 0V
AK CASE VOLT LOW BW adjustment Black/White mode Low speed mode 0 - 255 0 0V - –1000V 0V
AL CASE VOLT MID BW value Middle speed mode 0 - 255 0 0V - –1000V 0V
AM PEEL VOLT LOW CL Separation Color mode Low speed mode 51 - 255 200 –50 - –3000V –2200V
AN PEEL VOLT MIDDLE CL discharge Middle speed mode 51 - 255 200 –50 - –3000V –2200V
AO PEEL VOLT LOW BW adjustment Black/White mode Low speed mode 51 - 255 200 –50 - –3000V –2200V
AP PEEL VOLT MIDDLE BW value Middle speed mode 51 - 255 200 –50 - –3000V –2200V
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
7+96(77,1*$1'287387
$˖ ˖7&/2:63(('&/.
$˖ %˖ ˖7&0,''/(63(('&/.
˷̚˹ &˖ ˖7&/2:63(('&/&
'˖ ˖7&0,''/(63(('&/&
(;(&87(
MX-C401 SIMULATION 5 – 23
• 4.3 Inch LCD model
9
9-2 ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21
7(67
ǂǂ12 &/26(
Purpose Operation test/check $'8/2$'&+(&.
Function (Purpose) Used to check the operations of the sen- $'8&
sors and detectors in the paper reverse
section (duplex section) and its control cir-
cuit.
Section Duplex
(;(&87(
Operation/Procedure
The operating conditions of the sensors and detectors are dis-
played.
The code names of the sensors and the detectors which are active • 8.5 Inch LCD model
are highlighted.
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
$'86(1625&+(&.
$33' $33'
10
10-1
• 8.5 Inch LCD model Purpose Operation test/check
Function (Purpose) Used to check the operations of the toner
supply mechanism (toner motor) and the
related circuit.
Section Process (Developing)
Operation/Procedure
1) Select a target of the operation check.
When [ALL] key is pressed, all the items are selected.
2) Press [EXECUTE] key.
The selected load operation is performed for 10 sec.
When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the operation is terminated.
NOTE: This simulation must be executed without installing the
toner cartridges.
If this simulation is executed with the toner cartridges
9-3 installed, toner will be forcibly supplied to the developing
unit, resulting in overtoner.
Purpose Operation test/check
If this simulation is erroneously executed with the toner car-
Function (Purpose) Used to check the operations of the load in tridges installed, overtoner state may be deleted by mak-
the switchback section (duplex section) and ing a few black background copy in the single color copy
its control circuit. mode of the target color.
Section Duplex
TNM_K Toner motor K
Operation/Procedure
TNM_C Toner motor C
1) Select the item to be operation checked with the touch panel
TNM_M Toner motor M
key.
TNM_Y Toner motor Y
2) Press [EXECUTE] key.
The selected load performs the operation.
When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the operation is terminated.
MX-C401 SIMULATION 5 – 24
• 4.3 Inch LCD model • 8.5 Inch LCD model
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
721(502725$&7,9$7,21
710B. 710B& 710B0 710B<
$// (;(&87(
14
14--
Purpose Clear/Cancel (Trouble etc.)
Function (Purpose) Used to cancel the self-diag H3, H4, H5
troubles.
Section
Operation/Procedure
1) Press [EXECUTE] key.
2) Press [YES] key to execute cancellation of the trouble.
• 4.3 Inch LCD model
13
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
7528%/(&$1&(//$7,2127+(5
13--
Purpose Cancel (Trouble etc.)
Function (Purpose) Used to cancel the self-diag "U1" trouble.
Section
Operation/Procedure
1) Press [EXECUTE] key. 685(" <(6 12 (;(&87(
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
87528%/(&$1&(//$7,21
MX-C401 SIMULATION 5 – 25
• 8.5 Inch LCD model
16
16--
Purpose Clear/Cancel (Trouble etc.)
Function (Purpose) Used to cancel the self-diag "U2" trouble.
Section MFP PWB / PCU PWB / SCU PWB
Operation/Procedure
1) Press [EXECUTE] key.
2) Press [YES] key to execute cancellation of the trouble.
• 4.3 Inch LCD model
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12 &/26(
7(67
87528%/(&$1&(//$7,21
21
21-1
Purpose Setting
Function (Purpose) Used to set the maintenance cycle.
Section
685(" <(6 12 (;(&87(
Operation/Procedure
* Do not change the default setting value of the maintenance
counter on SIM21-1. The replacement timing of the fusing clean-
• 8.5 Inch LCD model ing roller, the filter and PS paper dust removal cleaner may not
clarify.
1) Select a target item of setting with [n] [p] key on the touch
panel.
2) Enter the set value with 10-key.
3) Press [OK] key. (For the 4.3 Inch LCD model, press the OSA
shortcut key.) (The set value is saved.)
Default
Item/Display Content Setting range
value
A MAINTENANCE Maintenance 0 : Default 60K
COUNTER counter 1 - 300: 1K - 300K
(TOTAL) (Total) 999 : Free
B MAINTENANCE Maintenance 0 : Default 30K
COUNTER counter 1 - 300: 1K - 300K
(COLOR) (Color) 999 : Free
Function (Purpose) Used to cancel the self-diag "PF" trouble. $˖ ˖0$,17(1$1&(ǂ&2817(5˄727$/˅
$˖
Section %˖ ˖0$,17(1$1&(ǂ&2817(5˄&2/25˅
˷̚ ˹
Operation/Procedure
1) Press [EXECUTE] key.
2) Press [YES] key to execute cancellation of the trouble.
• 4.3 Inch LCD model
MX-C401 SIMULATION 5 – 26
Display
22 Item
(Counter)
Content NOTE
MX-C401 SIMULATION 5 – 27
• 4.3 Inch LCD model
Display
Item Content NOTE
(Counter)
Developer DEVE LIFE (K) Accumulated 0 - 100 (%)
life meter number of (Unit: r1%) ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
developer &2817(5',63/$<
rotations (K)
727$/287%: 727$/&2/
DEVE LIFE (C) Accumulated 0 - 100 (%)
number of (Unit: r1%) 727$/287&2/ǂ 727$/6*/B&2/
developer 727$/%: &23<%:ǂǂ
rotations (C) 727$/&2/ &23<&2/
DEVE LIFE (M) Accumulated 0 - 100 (%)
727$/&2/ &23<&2/
number of (Unit: r1%)
developer
rotations (M)
DEVE LIFE (Y) Accumulated 0 - 100 (%) • 8.5 Inch LCD model
number of (Unit: r1%)
developer
rotations (Y)
Document DOC FIL(BW) Black and white Billing target
filing (8.5 document filing (excluding self
Inch LCD print counter print)
model) DOC FIL(COL) Color document Billing target
filing print counter (excluding self
print)
DOC FIL 2-color document Billing target
(2COL) filing print counter (excluding self
print)
DOC FIL (SGL Single color Billing target
COL) document filing (excluding self
print counter print)
Toner TONER Toner number 0 - 255
22-2
number NUMBER (K) counter (K)
counter TONER Toner number 0 - 255 Purpose Adjustment/Setting/Operation data check
NUMBER (C) counter (C) Function (Purpose) Used to check the total numbers of misfeed
TONER Toner number 0 - 255 and troubles. (When the number of total
NUMBER (M) counter (M)
jam is considerably great, it is judged as
TONER Toner number 0 - 255
necessary for repair.)
NUMBER (Y) counter (Y)
Toner near TONER NN Toner near end 0 - 255 Section
end number END (K) number counter Operation/Procedure
counter (K)
The paper jam, trouble counter value is displayed.
TONER NN Toner near end 0 - 255
END (C) number counter Display/Item Content
(C)
MACHINE JAM Machine JAM counter
TONER NN Toner near end 0 - 255
RSPF/DSPF JAM SPF JAM counter
END (M) number counter
TROUBLE Trouble counter
(M)
TONER NN Toner near end 0 - 255 • 4.3 Inch LCD model
END (Y) number counter
(Y)
Remaining TONER Remaining toner 0 - 25%
toner RESIDUAL (K) quantity (K) 25 - 50% ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
quantity 50 - 75% -$07528%/(&2817(5',63/$<
75 - 100% 0$&+,1(-$0
TONER Remaining toner 0 - 25% 563)'63)-$0
RESIDUAL (C) quantity (C) 25 - 50%
7528%/(
50 - 75%
75 - 100%
TONER Remaining toner 0 - 25%
RESIDUAL (M) quantity (M) 25 - 50%
50 - 75%
75 - 100% • 8.5 Inch LCD model
TONER Remaining toner 0 - 25%
RESIDUAL (Y) quantity (Y) 25 - 50%
50 - 75%
75 - 100%
MX-C401 SIMULATION 5 – 28
JAM code Content
22-3
TRAY4 Cassette 4 (Paper feed tray lower stage) paper feed
Purpose Adjustment/Setting/Operation data check JAM
Function (Purpose) Used to check misfeed positions and the DPFD2_N4 DPFD2 not-reached JAM
misfeed count of each position. (Paper feed tray lower stage)
* Presumption of the faulty point by this DPFD2_S4 DPFD2 remaining JAM
data is possible. (Paper feed tray lower stage)
MFT Manual feed tray paper feed JAM (PPD1 not-reached)
Section
DPFD3_S4 DPFD3 remaining JAM
Operation/Procedure (Paper feed tray lower stage)
The paper jam and misfeed history is displayed from the latest one LCC Side LCC paper feed JAM (LPFD1 not-reached)
up to 50 items. (The old ones are deleted sequentially.) LPFD_SL LPFD remaining JAM (Side LCC)
SIZE_ILG Size illegal JAM
JAM code Content MTR_ILG Motor driver trouble JAM
TRAY1 Machine cassette 1 paper feed JAM FPPD1_N Finisher inlet port not-reached JAM
(CPFD1 not-reached JAM) FPPD1_S Finisher inlet port remaining JAM
CPFD1_S1 CPFD1 remaining JAM (Machine cassette) FSTPLJ Staple JAM
CPFD1_N2 CPFD1 not-reached JAM (Paper feed tray upper stage) FIN_TIME Finisher paper fast delivery JAM
CPFD1_N3 CPFD1 not-reached JAM (Paper feed tray middle stage) FSTPD_N Finisher paper exit not-reached JAM
CPFD1_N4 CPFD1 not-reached JAM (Paper feed tray lower stage) FSTPD_S Finisher paper exit remaining JAM
CPFD1_S2 CPFD1 remaining JAM (Paper feed tray upper stage) FPRD_N Finisher compiler not-reached JAM
CPFD1_S3 CPFD1 remaining JAM (Paper feed tray middle stage) FPRD_S Finisher compiler remaining JAM
CPFD1_S4 CPFD1 remaining JAM (Paper feed tray lower stage) CPFD1_DESK CPFD1 JAM
TRAY2 Cassette 2 (Paper feed tray upper stage) paper feed (Paper feed tray communication abnormality detection)
JAM PPD2_FIN PPD2 JAM
DPFD1_S2 DPFD1 remaining JAM (Paper feed tray upper stage) (Finisher communication abnormality detection)
DPFD1_N3 DPFD1 not-reached JAM (Paper feed tray middle stage) STOP_JAM Control error JAM
PPD1_N1 PPD1 not-reached JAM (Machine cassette) SPPD1_N SPPD1 not-reached JAM (RSPF)
PPD1_N2 PPD1 not-reached JAM (Paper feed tray upper stage) SPPD1_S SPPD1 remaining JAM (RSPF)
PPD1_N3 PPD1 not-reached JAM (Paper feed tray middle stage) SPPD2_N SPPD2 not-reached JAM (RSPF)
PPD1_N4 PPD1 not-reached JAM (Paper feed tray lower stage) SPPD2_S SPPD2 remaining JAM (RSPF)
PPD1_NM PPD1 not-reached JAM (Manual feed tray) SPSD_SCN Control error JAM (RSPF)
PPD1_NA PPD1 not-reached JAM (ADU again) P_SHORT JAM caused by a short-size document (RSPF)
PPD1_S1 PPD1 remaining JAM (Machine cassette) SDFS_S Double feed detection JAM / Double feed JAM (RSPF)
PPD1_S2 PPD1 remaining JAM (Paper feed tray upper stage) ICU_REQ Control error JAM
PPD1_S3 PPD1 remaining JAM (Paper feed tray middle stage)
PPD1_S4 PPD1 remaining JAM (Paper feed tray lower stage) • 4.3 Inch LCD model
PPD1_SM PPD1 remaining JAM (Manual feed tray)
PPD1_SA PPD1 remaining JAM (ADU again)
PPD2_N1 PPD2 not-reached JAM (Machine cassette)
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
PPD2_N2 PPD2 not-reached JAM (Paper feed tray upper stage)
-$0+,6725<'$7$',63/$<
PPD2_N3 PPD2 not-reached JAM (Paper feed tray middle stage)
PPD2_N4 PPD2 not-reached JAM (Paper feed tray lower stage) 33'B1)673'B1&3)'B'(6.75$<
PPD2_NM PPD2 not-reached JAM (Manual feed tray) 33'B1&3)'B6$33'B6'3)'B6
PPD2_NA PPD2 not-reached JAM (ADU again) /&&33'B35,6,=(B,/*33'B1
PPD2_S1 PPD2 remaining JAM (Machine cassette)
&3)'B133'B6075$<$33'B6
PPD2_S2 PPD2 remaining JAM (Paper feed tray upper stage)
PPD2_S3 PPD2 remaining JAM (Paper feed tray middle stage) 75$<0)7
MX-C401 SIMULATION 5 – 29
• 4.3 Inch LCD model
22-4
Purpose Adjustment/Setting/Operation data check
Function (Purpose) Used to check the trouble (self diag) his-
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
tory.
61
Section
,&80$,1 &2/25352),/(
Operation/Procedure
,&8%227 3&8ǂ
The trouble history is displayed from the latest one up to 30 items.
/$1*8$*( 6&8
(The old ones are deleted sequentially.)
*5$3+,& )$;0$,1
* For the list of the trouble codes: Refer to "[6] SELF DIAG AND
TROUBLE CODE". ,0*'$7$520 '(6.
22-6
Purpose Adjustment/Setting/Operation data check
Function (Purpose) Used to output various adjustment/setting
data (simulations, FAX soft switch counter),
the firmware version, the counter list, the
process control data, and SIM50-24 data.
Section
Operation/Procedure
* When installing or servicing, this simulation is executed to print
the adjustment data and set data for use in the next servicing.
(Memory trouble, PWB replacement, etc.)
22-5
1) Select the print list mode.
Purpose Others
Function (Purpose) Used to check the ROM version of each Print list
Item/Display Print content
mode
unit (section).
A DATA PATTERN 1 Firmware version,
Section Firmware counter data, etc.
Operation/Procedure 2 SIM50-24 data
The ROM version of the installed unit in each section is displayed. 3 Data related to the process
When there is any trouble in the software, use this simulation to control
check the ROM version, and upgrade the version if necessary. 2) Press [EXECUTE] key to start printing the list selected in step
1) .
S/N Serial No.
ICU (MAIN) ICU (Main section) • 4.3 Inch LCD model
ICU (BOOT) ICU (Boot section)
LANGUAGE Language support data version
GRAPHIC Graphic data for LCD
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
IMG DATA ROM ImageASIC Flash ROM data
COLOR PROFILE Color profile '$7$35,1702'(
PCU PCU $˖ ˖'$7$3$77(51
SCU SCU $˖
FAX1 (MAIN) FAX 1-Line (Main section)
˷̚˹
DESK Desk unit
FINISHER Finisher
NIC NIC (;(&87(
POWER-CON Power controller
E-MANUAL Operation manual (HDD storage)
ESCP ESCP font ROM
PDL PDL font ROM
MX-C401 SIMULATION 5 – 30
• 8.5 Inch LCD model
22-9
Purpose Adjustment/Setting/Operation data check
Function (Purpose) Used to check the number of use (print
quantity) of each paper feed section.
Section Paper feed, ADU
Operation/Procedure
The counter values related to paper feed are displayed.
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
25*67$3/(&2817(5',63/$<
63) 2&/$037,0(
6&$1
67$3/(5
&29(5
+3B21
22-10
• 8.5 Inch LCD model
Purpose Adjustment/Setting/Operation data check
Function (Purpose) Used to check the system configuration
(option, internal hardware).
Section
Operation/Procedure
The system configuration is displayed.
(The model names of the installed devices and options are dis-
played.)
MX-C401 SIMULATION 5 – 31
MACHINE MX-C401 Main unit 22-11
MX-C381 Purpose Adjustment/Setting/Operation data check
DX-C401
Function (Purpose) Used to check the use frequency (send/
DX-C381
receive) of FAX.
MX-C400
(Only when FAX is installed)
MX-C380
DX-C400 Section FAX
DX-C380 Operation/Procedure
MX-C311 The values of the FAX send counter and the FAX receive counter
DX-C311 are displayed.
MX-C310
DX-C310 FAX OUTPUT FAX print quantity counter
SPF STANDARD Reversing single pass feeder FAX SEND FAX send counter
DESK MX-CSX1 500 sheet paper feed unit FAX RECEIVED FAX receive counter
MX-CSX2 SEND IMAGES FAX send quantity counter
FINISHER MX-FN12 Inner finisher SEND TIME FAX send time
FAX 1 MX-FXX3 Facsimile expansion kit RECEIVED TIME FAX receive time
FAX MEMORY MX-MMX1 FAX expansion memory (16MB) ACR SEND Number of carrier prefix adding communications
PS MX-PKX5/ PS expansion kit
STANDARD • 4.3 Inch LCD model
XPS MX-PUX1 XPS expansion kit
SECURITY MX-FR12U Data security kit
(commercial version)
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12 &/26(
MX-FR12 Data security kit 7(67
(authentication version) )$;&2817(5',63/$<
AIM MX-AMX1 Application integration module )$;287387 5&97,0(
SDRAM (SYS) *****MB SDRAM capacity
)$;6(1'ǂǂ
$&56(1'
SDRAM (ICU) *****MB SDRAM capacity
)$;5(&(,9('
HDD *****MB Hard disk capacity
NIC STANDARD NIC 6(1',0$*(6
BARCODE AR-PF1 Bar code font 6(1'7,0(
INTERNET-FAX MX-FWX1 Internet fax expansion kit
ACM (*) MX-AMX2 Application communication module
EAM (*) MX-AMX3 External account module
• 8.5 Inch LCD model
(*): Displayed in the OSA model only.
• 4.3 Inch LCD model
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
0$&+,1(6<67(0
0$&+,1(0;& )$;0(025<0;00;
63)67$1'$5' 360;3.;
'(6.0;&6; ;360;38;
),1,6+(50;)1 6(&85,7<0;)58
)$;0;);; $,00;$0;
MX-C401 SIMULATION 5 – 32
• 4.3 Inch LCD model DEVE RANGE Y Developer cartridge accumulated traveling distance
(cm) (Y)
DEVE TURN K Developer cartridge accumulated rotation number
(K)
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12 &/26(
7(67 DEVE TURN C Developer cartridge accumulated rotation number
63)-$0+,6725<'$7$',63/$< (C)
DEVE TURN M Developer cartridge accumulated rotation number
(M)
DEVE TURN Y Developer cartridge accumulated rotation number
(Y)
DEVE DAY K Number of day that used Developer (Day) (K)
DEVE DAY C Number of day that used Developer (Day) (C)
DEVE DAY M Number of day that used Developer (Day) (M)
DEVE DAY Y Number of day that used Developer (Day) (Y)
TONER MOTOR K Toner motor print counter (K)
• 8.5 Inch LCD model TONER MOTOR C Toner motor print counter (C)
TONER MOTOR M Toner motor print counter (M)
TONER MOTOR Y Toner motor print counter (Y)
TONER TURN K Toner motor accumulated rotation time (sec) (K)
TONER TURN C Toner motor accumulated rotation time (sec) (C)
TONER TURN M Toner motor accumulated rotation time (sec) (M)
TONER TURN Y Toner motor accumulated rotation time (sec) (Y)
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21 ǂǂ12 &/26(
7(67
352&(66&$575,'*(',63/$<
'580&75*. '5805$1*(.ǂ
'580&75*& '5805$1*(&ǂ
'580&75*0 '5805$1*(0ǂ
22-13 '580&75*< '5805$1*(<ǂ
Purpose Adjustment/Setting/Operation data check
Function (Purpose) Used to check the operating time of the
process section (OPC drum, DV unit, toner
cartridge).
• 8.5 Inch LCD model
Section Process
Operation/Procedure
The rotating time and the print quantity of the process section are
displayed.
MX-C401 SIMULATION 5 – 33
INTERNET FAX Number of internet FAX output Print hold PRINT HOLD FOLDER LIST (*)
OUTPUT (Document filling)
INTERNET FAX SEND Number of internet FAX sending page System setting list ADMIN. SETTINGS LIST (COPY)
OUTPUT ADMIN. SETTINGS LIST (PRINT)
INTERNET FAX Number of internet FAX receive ADMIN. SETTINGS LIST (IMAGE SEND)
RECEIVE ADMIN. SET LIST (PRTHLD)
INTERNET FAX SEND Number of internet FAX send ADMIN. SETTINGS LIST (SECURITY)
MAIL COUNTER Number of times of E-MAIL send ADMIN. SETTINGS LIST (COMMON)
FTP COUNTER Number of FTP send ALL ADMINISTRATOR SETTINGS LIST
SMB SEND Number of SMB send Receive rejection number ANTI JUNK FAX NUMBER LIST
USB CNT Number of times of USB storage table
TRIAL MODE_B&C Trial mode counter (B/W & COLOR scan job) Receive rejection/allow ANTI JUNK MAIL/DOMAIN NAME LIST
SCAN TO HDD_B/W SCAN TO HDD record quantity (B/W) address domain table
SCAN TO HDD_CL SCAN TO HDD record quantity (COLOR) To Email Transfer table list INBOUND ROUTING LIST
SCAN TO HDD_2CL SCAN TO HDD record quantity (2-COLOR) To administrator Transfer list DOCUMENT ADMIN LIST
SCAN TO HDD_SGL SCAN TO HDD record quantity (SINGLE color) Web setting list WEB SETTING LIST
Meta data set list METADATA SET LIST
• 4.3 Inch LCD model
* Since the 4.3 inch LCD model is not provided with the document
filing function, there is no data.
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21
7(67
ǂǂ12 &/26( 8.5 Inch LCD model
1(7:25.6&$11(5&2817(5',63/$< All setting list ALL CUSTOM SETTING LIST (*)
1(76&125*B%: Printer test page PCL SYMBOL SET LIST
1(76&125*B&/
PCL INTERNAL FONT LIST
PCL EXTENDED FONT LIST
1(76&125*B&/
PS FONT LIST
1(76&125*B6*/ PS KANJI FONT LIST
PS EXTENDED FONT LIST
NIC PAGE
Address registration list (*) INDIVIDUAL LIST
GROUP LIST
• 8.5 Inch LCD model PROGRAM LIST
MEMORY BOX LIST
ALL SENDING ADDRESS LIST
Document filing list DOCUMENT FILING FOLDER LIST
System setting list ADMIN. SETTINGS LIST (COPY)
ADMIN. SETTINGS LIST (PRINT)
ADMIN. SETTINGS LIST (IMAGE SEND)
ADMIN. SETTINGS LIST (DOC FILING)
ADMIN. SETTINGS LIST (SECURITY)
ADMIN. SETTINGS LIST (COMMON)
ALL ADMINISTRATOR SETTINGS LIST
Receive rejection number ANTI JUNK FAX NUMBER LIST
table
Receive rejection/allow ANTI JUNK MAIL/DOMAIN NAME LIST
address domain table
To Email Transfer table list INBOUND ROUTING LIST
To administrator Transfer list DOCUMENT ADMIN LIST
22-90 Web setting list WEB SETTING LIST
Purpose Adjustment/Setting/Operation data check Meta data set list METADATA SET LIST
Function (Purpose) Used to output the various set data lists. * When the data list print of system setting is inhibition in DSK
Section model, this setting is invalid.
Operation/Procedure • 4.3 Inch LCD model
1) Change the display with [n] [p] key.
2) Select the print target with the keys on the touch panel.
3) Press [EXECUTE] key to start print of the list. ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21
7(67
ǂǂ12 &/26(
MX-C401 SIMULATION 5 – 34
• 8.5 Inch LCD model
23-80
Purpose Operation test/check
Function (Purpose) Used to check the operation of paper feed
and paper transport in the paper feed sec-
tion and the paper transport section. Used
to output the list of the operation status of
the sensor and the detectors in the paper
feed section and the paper transport sec-
tion.
Section Paper feed, Paper transport
Operation/Procedure
When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the timing list of paper feed and
paper transport is outputted.
Used to print the operations timing list of the sensors and detectors
in the paper feed and transport section.
The timing list of paper feed and paper transport operations of the
23 latest job (copy or print) on the final paper is printed.
Since the paper feed and paper transport routes differ depending
23-2 on the used paper feed tray and the print operation mode, the sen-
Purpose Adjustment/Setting/Operation data check sor and the detectors and the operation timing also differ.
Function (Purpose) Used to output the trouble history list of SECTION Operation content (Trigger name - Detection
paper jam and misfeed. (If the number of operation or load operation name)
troubles of misfeed is considerably great, STANDARD Reference value (ms)
the judgment is made that repair is CURRENT (*1) Operation timing (ms) of the latest job on the
required.) final paper
Section PREVIOUS (*1) Operation timing (ms) of the second latest job
on the final paper
Operation/Procedure
MAXIMUM (*1) Max. operation timing (ms) of all the jobs
Press [EXECUTE] key to execute print. MINIMUM (*1) Min. operation timing (ms) of all the jobs
The trouble history of paper jams and misfeed is printed.
*1: The value without unit on the left side of each item on the list
• 4.3 Inch LCD model
has no relation to the operation timing. It is not used in the market.
• 4.3 Inch LCD model
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21 ǂǂ12 &/26(
7(67
-$07528%/('$7$35,1702'(
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21 ǂǂ12 &/26(
7(67
ǂǂǂ35(66>(;(&87(@7235,177+(-$0 7528%/(35,17
'$7$35,1702'(3$3(5)(('
3$3(5)(('7,0(/,67
(;(&87(
(;(&87(
• 8.5 Inch LCD model
MX-C401 SIMULATION 5 – 35
MFT ENV Manual paper feed counter (Envelope)
24 ADU ADU paper path counter
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
-$07528%/(&2817(5'$7$&/($5
0$&+,1( 63) 7528%/(
TRAY1 Tray 1 paper feed counter +3B21 2&/$03
TRAY2 Tray 2 paper feed counter
TRAY3 Tray 3 paper feed counter
TRAY4 Tray 4 paper feed counter
MFT TOTAL Manual paper feed counter (Total) 685(" <(6 12 (;(&87(
MFT HEAVY Manual paper feed counter (Heavy paper)
MFT OHP Manual paper feed counter (OHP)
MX-C401 SIMULATION 5 – 36
• 8.5 Inch LCD model
24-5
Purpose Data clear
Function (Purpose) Used to clear the developer counter. (After
replacement of developer, clear the
counter.)
Section
Operation/Procedure
1) Select the item to be cleared.
2) Press [EXECUTE] key.
3) Press [YES] key.
The target counter is cleared.
NOTE: When SIM25-2 is executed, this counter is also cleared
automatically.
24-4
Purpose Data clear Developer cartridge print counter (K)
K Developer cartridge accumulated traveling distance (cm) (K)
Function (Purpose) Used to clear the maintenance counter, the
Number of day that used developer (Day) K
printer counters of the transport unit and
Developer cartridge print counter (C)
the fusing unit. (After completion of mainte-
C Developer cartridge accumulated traveling distance (cm) (C)
nance, clear the counters.)
Number of day that used developer (Day) C
Section Developer cartridge print counter (M)
Operation/Procedure M Developer cartridge accumulated traveling distance (cm) (M)
1) Select the item to be cleared. Number of day that used developer (Day) M
2) Press [EXECUTE] key. Developer cartridge print counter (Y)
Y Developer cartridge accumulated traveling distance (cm) (Y)
3) Press [YES] key.
Number of day that used developer (Day) Y
The target counter is cleared.
• 4.3 Inch LCD model
MAINT ALL Maintenance counter (Total)
MAINT COL Maintenance counter (Color)
TC1 UNIT Primary transport unit print counter
TC1 UNIT RN Primary transport unit accumulated traveling distance ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
(cm) '(9(/23(5&2817(5'$7$&/($5
TC1 UNIT DY Use day of primary transport unit (Day)
. & 0 <
TC2 UNIT Secondary transport unit print counter
TC2 UNIT RN Secondary transport unit accumulated traveling distance
(cm)
TC2 UNIT DY Use day of secondary transport unit (Day)
FUS UN(U) Fusing unit (heat roller upper) print counter
685(" <(6 12 (;(&87(
FUS UN(E) Fusing unit (heat roller lower & external) print counter
FUS DY(U) Use day of fusing unit (heat roller upper) (Day)
FUS DYÅiE) Use day of fusing unit (heat roller lower & external) (Day)
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
0$,17(1$1&(&2817(5&/($5
0$,17$// 0$,17&2/ 7&%(/7 7&%751
7&%7'< 7&%(/7 7&%751 7&%7'<
)86818 )8681( )86'<8 )86'<(
MX-C401 SIMULATION 5 – 37
24-6 Drum cartridge print counter (Y)
Y Drum cartridge accumulated traveling distance (cm) (Y)
Purpose Data clear Number of day that used drum (Day) Y
Function (Purpose) Used to clear the copy counter.
• 4.3 Inch LCD model
Section
Operation/Procedure
1) Select the item to be cleared.
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
2) Press [EXECUTE] key.
'580&75*&2817(5&/($5
3) Press [YES] key.
. & 0 <
The target counter is cleared.
• 4.3 Inch LCD model
24-9
Purpose Data clear
Function (Purpose) Used clear the printer mode print counter
and the self print mode print counter.
Section
Operation/Procedure
1) Select the item to be cleared.
2) Press [EXECUTE] key.
3) Press [YES] key.
The target counter is cleared.
MX-C401 SIMULATION 5 – 38
• 8.5 Inch LCD model
24-15
Purpose Data clear
Function (Purpose) Used to clear the counters related to the
scan mode and the image send.
Section
Operation/Procedure
1) Select the item to be cleared.
2) Press [EXECUTE] key.
3) Press [YES] key.
The target counter is cleared.
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26( ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21 ǂǂ12 &/26(
7(67
)$;&2817(5'$7$&/($5 1(7:25.6&$11(5&2817(5'$7$&/($5
)$;287 )$;6(1' )$;5&9 6(1',0* 1(76&125*B%: 1(76&125*B&/
6(1'7,0( 5&97,0( $&56(1' 1(76&125*B&/ 1(76&125*B6*/
,17(51(7)$; ǂ287387 ,17(51(7)$;6(1'
,17(51(7)$; ǂ5(&(,9( ,17(51(7ǂ)$;ǂ6(1'
MX-C401 SIMULATION 5 – 39
• 8.5 Inch LCD model
24-30
Purpose Data clear
Function (Purpose) Used to initialize the administrator pass-
word.
Section
Operation/Procedure
1) Press [EXECUTE] key.
2) Press [YES] key.
The administrator password is initialized.
If the administrator password of system setting and Web page is
forgotten, execute this simulation to set the password to "admin"
(default).
• 4.3 Inch LCD model
25
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
$'0,13$66:25',1,7,$/,=(
25-1
Purpose Operation test/check
Function (Purpose) Used to check the operations of the devel-
oping section.
Section Process (Developing section)
685(" <(6 12 (;(&87( Operation/Procedure
1) Select the process speed.
• 8.5 Inch LCD model 2) Press [EXECUTE] key.
The developing motor and the OPC drum motor rotate for 3
minutes and the output level of the toner density sensor is dis-
played.
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
6(59,&(3$66:25',1,7,$/,=(
MX-C401 SIMULATION 5 – 40
• 8.5 Inch LCD model Display and condition in case of an error
Error
Error name Error details
display
EE-EL EL error The sensor output level is lower than 77, or
the control voltage level is higher than 207.
EE-EU EU error The sensor output level is higher then 177,
or the control voltage level is lower than 52.
EE-EC EC error The sensor output level is out of 128r10.
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
$8720$7,&'(9(/23(5$'-8670(17
$7'(9($'-B/B. $7'(9($'-B0B.
$7'(9($'-B/B& $7'(9($'-B0B&
25-2
$7'(9($'-B/B0 $7'(9($'-B0B0
Purpose Setting
$7'(9($'-B/B< $7'(9($'-B0B<
Function (Purpose) Used to make the initial setting of toner
density when replacing developer. (Auto- . & 0 < (;(&87(
matic adjustment)
Section Image process (Photoconductor/Develop-
ing/Transfer/Cleaning) • 8.5 Inch LCD model
Operation/Procedure
1) Select a color to be adjusted.
2) Press [EXECUTE] key.
The developing motor rotates for 3 minutes, and the toner density
sensor makes sampling of the toner density. The detected level is
displayed.
After stopping the developing motor, the average value of the toner
density sampling results is set as the reference toner density con-
trol level.
NOTE: When the above operation is interrupted on the way, the
reference toner concentration level is not set. Also when
error code of EE-EC, EE-EL or EE-EU is displayed, the ref-
erence toner density level is not set normally.
Do not execute this simulation except when new developer is sup-
plied. If it is executed in other cases, undertoner or overtone may
occur, causing a trouble. 26
Display during operation
TCD_K Toner density sensor control voltage level K 26-2
TCD_C Toner density sensor control voltage level C Purpose Setting
TCD_M Toner density sensor control voltage level M
Function (Purpose) Used to set the paper weight type.
TCD_Y Toner density sensor control voltage level Y
TCV_K Toner density sensor control level K Section Paper feed
TCV_C Toner density sensor control level C Operation/Procedure
TCV_M Toner density sensor control level M Select a paper type to be changed.
TCV_Y Toner density sensor control level Y
G/LBS SET 0 GRAM
Display after completion of the adjustment 1 LBS
Mode Display Range
This setting is linked with SIM26-6. When the set value (destina-
Toner density control AT DEVE ADJ_L_K 1 - 255
tion) of SIM26-6 is changed, this setting is also changed accord-
adjustment value in the low AT DEVE ADJ_L_C 1 - 255
speed process mode ingly.
AT DEVE ADJ_L_M 1 - 255
AT DEVE ADJ_L_Y 1 - 255 To set a desirable type without linking with the destination, use this
Toner density control AT DEVE ADJ_M_K 1 - 255 simulation.
adjustment value in the medium AT DEVE ADJ_M_C 1 - 255
speed process mode Set value
AT DEVE ADJ_M_M 1 - 255 Destinations
G/LBS SET
AT DEVE ADJ_M_Y 1 - 255
U.S.A. LBS
Toner density sensor control AT DEVE VO_L_K 1 - 255
CANADA LBS
voltage level in the low speed AT DEVE VO_L_C 1 - 255
process mode INCH LBS
AT DEVE VO_L_M 1 - 255
JAPAN GRAM
AT DEVE VO_L_Y 1 - 255
AB_B GRAM
Toner density sensor control AT DEVE VO_M_K 1 - 255
EUROPE GRAM
voltage level in the medium AT DEVE VO_M_C 1 - 255
speed process mode U.K. GRAM
AT DEVE VO_M_M 1 - 255
AUS. GRAM
AT DEVE VO_M_Y 1 - 255
AB_A GRAM
CHINA GRAM
MX-C401 SIMULATION 5 – 41
• 4.3 Inch LCD model Default
Item/Display Content
value
PF ADJ ON Continuous printing is OFF
performed in the duplex
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26( print mode.
6,=(6(783 If the remaining money
expires during continuous
*/%66(7 *5$0 /%6
printing, the sheets in the
machine are discharged
without being printed on the
back surfaces.
OFF Continuous printing is not
performed in the duplex
print mode. (The remaining
amount is checked for
printing every surface in all
• 8.5 Inch LCD model the printing process.)
If the remaining money
expires during printing, the
sheet is discharged without
printing on the back
surface.
VENDOR MODE1 Vendor mode 1 MODE
MODE ( ) MODE2 Vendor mode 2 3
MODE3 Vendor mode 3
COUNTUP FUSER_IN When the paper lead edge EXIT_
TIMING passes the fusing rear OUT
sensor.
FUSER_OUT When the paper rear edge
passes the fusing rear
sensor.
EXIT_OUT When the paper rear edge
passes the paper exit
sensor in the main unit, the
26-3 right tray, and the after
process unit.
Purpose Setting
Function (Purpose) Used to set the specifications of the auditor. (*) Displayed only when EQUITRAC is used.
(Setting must be made according to the ( ) Details of the vendor mode
auditor use conditions.)
Completion Insufficient money during Completion
Section Auditor of the copy job of the
Operation/Procedure specified specified
BW/Color Color
Select a setting target and a setting condition. quantity. quantity.
(no money (Money
(Money (No money
remaining) remaining)
Default remaining) remaining)
Item/Display Content Condition 1 Condition 2 Condition 3 Condition 4
value
BUILT-IN P10 Built-in auditor mode P10 MODE1 Operation 1 Operation 2 Operation 2 Operation 1
AUDITOR (standard mode) operation. MODE2 Operation 1 Operation 1 Operation 2 Operation 1
EC1 EC1 mode operation MODE3 Operation 1 Operation 3 Operation 2 Operation 3
OUTSIDE NONE No external connection NONE
AUDITOR vendor is used. Operation 1:
P VENDOR1 Coin vendor mode Standby during setting time of auto clear. Default is 60 seconds,
(Only the copy mode can which can be changed in the system setting.
be controlled.) Operation 2:
P VENDOR2 Vendor mode Auto clear is not made.
communicating with the
parallel I/F (for DocuLyzer)
Operation 3:
(Japan only) The display is shifted to the initial screen.
P OTHER NOT USED • 4.3 Inch LCD model
VENDOR-EX* Vendor I/F specifications for
EQUITRAC (Multi job cuing
Disable mode)
VND_EX_MT* Vendor I/F specifications for ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
EQUITRAC (Multi job cuing $8',7256(783
Enable mode)
%7,1$8' 3 (& 32)0
S_VENDOR Serial vendor mode
26,'($8' 121( 39(1'25 39(1'25
DOC ADJ (8.5 ON Support for auditor in OFF
Inch LCD document filing print ǂ 327+(5 9(1'25(; 91'B(;B07
model only) OFF No support for auditor in ǂ 6B9(1'25 2)) 32)0
document filing print
357+/'$'- 21 2)) 32)0
PRTHLD ADJ ON Print hold function Enable OFF
(4.3 Inch LCD OFF Print hold function Disable
model only)
MX-C401 SIMULATION 5 – 42
• 8.5 Inch LCD model
26-10
Purpose Setting
Function (Purpose) Used to set the trial mode of the network
scanner.
Section
Operation/Procedure
1) Enter the set value with 10-key.
2) Press [OK] key. (For the 4.3 Inch LCD model, press the OSA
shortcut key.)
The set value in step 1) is saved.
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
'(67,1$7,216(783
86$ &$1$'$ ,1&+ -$3$1
$%B% (8523( 8. $86
$%B$ &+,1$ 26-18
Purpose Setting
(;(&87( Function (Purpose) Used to set Disable/Enable of the toner
save mode operation.
(For the Japan and the UK versions.)
Default
Item Display Content
value
A COPY 0 Copy toner save mode is inhibited.
0
1 Copy toner save mode is allowed
B PRINTER 0 Printer toner save mode is
inhibited.
0
1 Printer toner save mode is
allowed.
MX-C401 SIMULATION 5 – 43
• 4.3 Inch LCD model • 8.5 Inch LCD model
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21
7(67 ǂǂ12 &/26(
721(56$9(02'(6(783
$˖ ˖&23< <(612
$˖ %˖ ˖35,17(5 <(612
˷̚ ˹
26-35
Purpose Setting
Function (Purpose) Used to set the display mode of SIM 22-4
trouble history when a same trouble
occurred repeatedly. There are two display
modes: display as one trouble and display
as several series of troubles.
Section
Operation/Procedure
1) Enter the set value with 10-key.
26-30 2) Press [OK] key. (For the 4.3 Inch LCD model, press the OSA
shortcut key.)
Purpose Setting
The set value in step 1) is saved.
Function (Purpose) Used to set the operation mode corre-
sponding to the CE mark (Europe safety • 4.3 Inch LCD model
standards). (For slow start to drive the fus-
ing heater lamp)
Section ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
Operation/Procedure 7528%/(0(025<02'(6(783
1) Enter the set value with 10-key. $˖ ˖21&($1<
$˖
0 Control allowed
1 Control inhibited ˷̚˹
2) Press [OK] key. (For the 4.3 Inch LCD model, press the OSA
shortcut key.)
The set value in step 1) is saved.
* Even in Enable state, the control may not be executed due
to the power frequency, etc. • 8.5 Inch LCD model
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21
7(67 ǂǂ12 &/26(
&(0$5.&21752/6(77,1*
$˖ ˖<(6 12
$˖
˷̚ ˹
MX-C401 SIMULATION 5 – 44
26-38 26-41
Purpose Setting Purpose Setting
Function (Purpose) Used to set Continue/Stop of print when the Function (Purpose) Used to set Enable/Disable of the magnifi-
maintenance life is reached. cation ratio automatic select function (AMS)
Section in the center binding mode.
Operation/Procedure Section
1) Enter the set value with 10-key. Operation/Procedure
2) Press [OK] key. (For the 4.3 Inch LCD model, press the OSA 1) Enter the set value with 10-key.
shortcut key.)
0 AMS Disable
The set value in step 1) is saved.
1 AMS Enable
Default 2) Press [OK] key. (For the 4.3 Inch LCD model, press the OSA
Item Display Content
value
shortcut key.)
A M LIFE OVER 0 Print Enable/Disable setting 0
(0: CONTINUE when the maintenance timing is The set value in step 1) is saved.
1: STOP) over (Print Continue) <Default value of each destination>
1 Print Enable/Disable setting
when the maintenance timing is U.S.A 0 (Disable) EUROPE 1 (Enable)
over (Print Stop) CANADA 0 (Disable) U.K. 1 (Enable)
B TC1 LIFE OVER 0 Print Enable when the primary 0 INCH 0 (Disable) AUS. 0 (Disable)
(0: CONTINUE transfer unit life is over. JAPAN 0 (Disable) AB_A 0 (Disable)
1: STOP) (Print Continue) AB_B 0 (Disable) CHINA 0 (Disable)
1 Print Disable when the primary
transfer unit life is over. • 4.3 Inch LCD model
(Print Stop)
C TC2 LIFE OVER 0 Print Enable when the 0
(0: CONTINUE secondary transfer unit life is
1: STOP) over. (Print Continue) ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
1 Print Disable when the 3$03+/(702'($066(77,1*
secondary transfer unit life is
$˖ ˖<(612
over. (Print Stop) $˖
D FUS LIFE OVER 0 Print Enable when the fusing 0
(0: CONTINUE unit life is over. (Print Continue) ˷̚˹
1: STOP) 1 Print Disable when the fusing
unit life is over. (Print Stop)
E DR LIFE OVER 0 Print Enable when the drum 0
(0: CONTINUE unit life is over. (Print Continue)
1: STOP) 1 Print Disable when the drum
unit life is over. (Print Stop)
• 8.5 Inch LCD model
F DV LIFE OVER 0 Print Enable when the DV unit 0
(0: CONTINUE life is over. (Print Continue)
1: STOP) 1 Print Disable when the DV unit
life is over. (Print Stop)
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
(1*,1(/,)(29(56(77,1*
$˖ ˖0/,)(29(5&217,18(6723
$˖ %˖ ˖7&/,)(29(5&217,18(6723
˷̚˹ &˖ ˖7&/,)(29(5&217,18(6723
26-49
Purpose Setting
• 8.5 Inch LCD model Function (Purpose) Used to set the print speed of postcards
mode.
Section
Operation/Procedure
Select the copy speed mode. (Default: LOW)
Default
Display/Item Content
value
POSTCARD LOW Low seed of postcard printing LOW
HIGH High speed of postcard printing
MX-C401 SIMULATION 5 – 45
• 4.3 Inch LCD model (*1) Default values for each destination of item A/B/D
(*3)
When set to 0:
Postcard 100 sheets
Envelope 20 sheets
26-50 When set to 1:
Purpose Setting Stops when the paper exit tray lower sensor detects the lower limit
of the paper exit tray (paper full).
Function (Purpose) Used to set functions.
• 4.3 Inch LCD model
Section
Operation/Procedure
1) Select a target item of setting with [n] [p] key.
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
2) Enter the set value with 10-key.
)81&7,216(77,1*
3) Press [OK] key. (For the 4.3 Inch LCD model, press the OSA
shortcut key.) (The set value is saved.) $˖ ˖%:5(9(56(<(6
$˖ %˖ ˖&2/2502'(
Default
Item/Display Content ˷̚˹ &˖ ˖),1,6+(5)81&7,21<(6
value
A BW REVERSE 0 BW reverse copy Disable Refer '˖ ˖&2/2502'(35,17(5
1 BW reverse copy Enable to *1
B COLOR MODE 2-color/Single color copy mode Refer
Enable/Disable setting to *1/*2
C FINISHER 0 Finisher special paper 0
FUNCTION The number of paper exit is Refer • 8.5 Inch LCD model
limited. to *3
1 Finisher special paper
The number of paper exit is
not limited.
D COLOR MODE 0 All colors and monochrome Refer
(PRINTER) counters are displayed. to *1
1 All are displayed except for
the 3-color print counter.
2 Monochrome and full color
print counters are displayed.
E FEED TRAY 0 Paper feed tray color display 0
COLOR ON during paper feed
1 Paper feed tray color display
OFF during paper feed
MX-C401 SIMULATION 5 – 46
26-52 26-53
Purpose Setting Purpose Setting
Function (Purpose) Used to set whether non-printed paper Function (Purpose) User auto color calibration (color balance
(insertion paper, cover paper) is counted up adjustment) Inhibit/Allow setting
or not. (copy mode)
Section Section
Operation/Procedure Operation/Procedure
1) Enter the set value with 10-key. 1) Enter the set value with 10-key.
0 Count up 0 Inhibit
1 No count up 1 Allow (Default)
2) Press [OK] key. (For the 4.3 Inch LCD model, press the OSA 2) Press [OK] key. (For the 4.3 Inch LCD model, press the OSA
shortcut key.) shortcut key.)
The set value in step 1) is saved. The set value in step 1) is saved.
• 4.3 Inch LCD model
Item/Display Set value Content
A (0: YES 1: NO) 0 White sheet count-up setting
(Count)
1 White sheet count-up setting ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
(Not Count)
(1$%/,1*2)$8720$7,&&2/25&2/,%5$7,21
This setting is linked with SIM26-6. When the set value (destina- $˖ ˖<(612
tion) of SIM26-6 is changed, this setting is also changed accord- $˖
ingly.
˷̚˹
To set a desirable operation without linking with the destination, use
this simulation.
Destination Default
U.S.A 0 (Counted)
CANADA 0 (Counted)
INCH 0 (Counted) • 8.5 Inch LCD model
JAPAN 1 (Not counted)
AB_B 0 (Counted)
EUROPE 0 (Counted)
U.K. 0 (Counted)
AUS. 1 (Not counted)
AB_A 0 (Counted)
CHINA 0 (Counted)
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
$%/$1.3$3(5&281702'(6(783
$˖ ˖<(612
$˖
26-54
˷̚˹
Purpose Setting
Function (Purpose) User auto color calibration (color balance
adjustment) Inhibit/Allow setting
(printer mode)
Section
• 8.5 Inch LCD model Operation/Procedure
1) Enter the set value with 10-key.
0 Inhibit
1 Allow (Default)
MX-C401 SIMULATION 5 – 47
• 4.3 Inch LCD model • 4.3 Inch LCD model
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26( ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
(1$%/,1*2)$872&2/25&$/,%5$7,212)35,17(5 (1$%/,1*2)$872&2/25&$/,%5$7,21,1,7,$/
$˖ ˖<(612 '9 '5 7& 7&
$˖ )86(5
˷̚˹
(;(&87(
26-55 26-65
Purpose Setting Purpose Setting
Function (Purpose) Used to set Enable/Disable of the auto- Function (Purpose) Used to set the staple process restriction.
matic color calibration (automatic color bal- Section
ance adjustment) when replacing a
Operation/Procedure
consumable part.
Select a setting item and a setting condition.
Section
Operation/Procedure Set Default
Item Content
1) Select the replacement condition of a target consumable part value value
to which the auto color calibration (color balance adjustment) LIMIT COPIES ON Number of sets of stapling: Limited ON
is applied. OFF Number of sets of stapling:
Not Limited
2) Press [EXECUTE] key.
LIMIT SHT (L) 15 or 30 Number of sheets of stapling: 30
Max. 15
Default
Display Content Set value
value [Target paper size]
DV Enable/Disable setting when Normal Disable
8.5 x 14, 8.5 x 13.5, 8.5 x 13.4, 8.5 x 13
replacing developer (Disable: 1:
DR Enable/Disable setting when NO) Disable The staplable capacity other than the above is fixed to 30 sheets.
replacing the OPC drum • 4.3 Inch LCD model
TC1 Enable/Disable setting when Reverse Disable
replacing the primary transfer unit (Enable: 0:
TC2 Enable/Disable setting when YES) Disable
replacing the secondary transfer unit ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
FUSER Enable/Disable setting when Disable ),1,6+(5$/$5002'(6(78367$3/(/,0,7
replacing the fusing unit
/,0,7&23,(6 21 2))
When it is set to Enable, the guidance for execution of the auto /,0,76+7/
color calibration (auto color balance adjustment) is displayed after
replacing the target consumable part.
Follow the guidance and perform the auto color calibration (auto
color balance adjustment).
MX-C401 SIMULATION 5 – 48
• 8.5 Inch LCD model Default
Item/Display Content
value
J FUS NEAR END 0 The fusing near end message is 1
DISP displayed.
(0: YES 1: NO) 1 The fusing near end message is
not displayed.
MX-C401 SIMULATION 5 – 49
• 4.3 Inch LCD model • 8.5 Inch LCD model
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21
7(67 ǂǂ12 &/26(
721(51($5(1'6(77,1*
$˖ ˖721(535(3$5$7,21 <(612
$˖ %˖ ˖721(51($5(1' <(612
˷̚ ˹ &˖ ˖721(5(1'
'˖ ˖721(5(1'&2817
26-74
Purpose Setting
Function (Purpose) Used to set the OSA trial mode.
Section
Operation/Procedure
1) Enter the set value with 10-key.
2) Press [OK] key. (For the 4.3 Inch LCD model, press the OSA
shortcut key.)
Setting Default
Item/Display Content
range value
A OSA TRIAL 0 Used to set the 0-1 1
MODE OSA trial mode.
(0 : YES 1 : NO) 1 OSA trial mode is
26-73 canceled.
Purpose Setting
The functions other than OPEN USB can be used.
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the image loss (shade
Use limit: 18,000 sheets JOB
delete amount) in the name card copy
mode. • 4.3 Inch LCD model
Section
Operation/Procedure
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
1) Select an item to be set with [n] [p] keys.
26$75,$/02'(6(77,1*
2) Enter the set value with 10-key.
$˖ ˖26$75,$/02'(˄<(6˖12˅
3) Press [OK] key. (For the 4.3 Inch LCD model, press the OSA
$˖
shortcut key.)
When the adjustment value is increased, the image loss ˷̚˹
(shade delete quantity) is increased.
Setting
Item/Display Content Default value
range
A DELETING Rear frame side 0 - 50 0
SHADOW ADJ image loss quantity (Adjustment
(M) (shade delete amount: • 8.5 Inch LCD model
quantity) adjustment 0.1mm/step)
B DELETING Lead edge image 0 - 50 0
SHADOW ADJ loss quantity (shade (Adjustment
(S) delete quantity) amount:
adjustment 0.1mm/step)
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
'(/(7,1*6+$'2:$'-8670(17
$˖ ˖'(/(7,1*6+$'2:$'-0
$˖ %˖ ˖'(/(7,1*6+$'2:$'-6
˷̚˹
MX-C401 SIMULATION 5 – 50
• 4.3 Inch LCD model
26-78
Purpose Setting
Function (Purpose) Used to set the password of the remote
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
operation panel.
',6$%/,1*2)87528%/(
Section
$˖ ˖',6$%/(<(6
Operation/Procedure $˖
1) Enter a password with 10 key. (5 - 8 digits)
˷̚˹
The entered password is displayed on the column of "NEW”.
In order to correct the entered password, press the [clear] key
to delete the entered value one digit by one digit.
2) Press [SET] key.
• 4.3 Inch LCD model
• 8.5 Inch LCD model
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
523(3$66:25'6(77,1*
35(6(17
1(: 6(7
27-2
Purpose Setting
Function (Purpose) Used to set the sender's registration num-
ber and the HOST server telephone num-
ber. (FSS function)
Section
Operation/Procedure
1) Select an item to be set. [USER FAX NO] [SERVA TEL NO]
2) Enter the set value with 10-key.
3) Press [SET] key.
The set value in step 2) is saved.
35(6(17
2) Press [OK] key. (For the 4.3 Inch LCD model, press the OSA
6(7
shortcut key.) 1(:
3$86(
MX-C401 SIMULATION 5 – 51
• 8.5 Inch LCD model
27-4
Purpose Setting
Function (Purpose) Used to set the initial call and toner order
auto send. (FSS function)
Section
Operation/Procedure
1) Select an item to be set with [n] [p] keys.
2) Enter the set value with 10-key.
3) Press [OK] key. (For the 4.3 Inch LCD model, press the OSA
shortcut key.)
The set value in step 2) is saved.
Setting
Item/Display Content Default value Remarks
range
A FSS MODE NEB1 Set the FSS MODE Exclusive for 0-3 0 1
send in NE-B
mode
NEB2 Send/Receive in 1
NE-B mode
NFB1 Exclusive for 2
send in NE-F
mode
NFB2 Send/Receive in 3
NE-F mode
B RETRY_BUSY Resend number setting when busy 0 - 15 2 * 0: No retry
C TIMER (MINUTE) _BUSY Resend timer setting (minute) when busy 1 - 15 3
D RETRY_ERROR Resend number setting when error 0 - 15 1 * 0: No retry
E TIMER (MINUTE) _ERROR Resend timer setting (minute) when error 1 - 15 1
F TONER ORDER 100% - 75% Toner order auto send 100% - 75% 0-5 5 3 (49%-25%)
TIMING (K) 74% - 50% timing setting (K) 74% - 50% 4
49% - 25% 49% - 25% 3
LOWER 25 25% or less 2
NEAREND NEAREND 1
EMPTY EMPTY 0
G TONER ORDER 100% - 75% Toner order auto send 100% - 75% 0-5 5 3 (49%-25%)
TIMING (C) 74% - 50% timing setting (C) 74% - 50% 4
49% - 25% 49% - 25% 3
LOWER 25 25% or less 2
NEAREND NEAREND 1
EMPTY EMPTY 0
H TONER ORDER 100% - 75% Toner order auto send 100% - 75% 0-5 5 3 (49%-25%)
TIMING (M) 74% - 50% timing setting (M) 74% - 50% 4
49% - 25% 49% - 25% 3
LOWER 25 25% or less 2
NEAREND NEAREND 1
EMPTY EMPTY 0
I TONER ORDER 100% - 75% Toner order auto send 100% - 75% 0-5 5 3 (49%-25%)
TIMING (Y) 74% - 50% timing setting (Y) 74% - 50% 4
49% - 25% 49% - 25% 3
LOWER 25 25% or less 2
NEAREND NEAREND 1
EMPTY EMPTY 0
MX-C401 SIMULATION 5 – 52
• 4.3 Inch LCD model • 8.5 Inch LCD model
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
)66)81&7,216(783
$˖ ˖)66ǂ02'(1(%
$˖ %˖ ˖5(75<B%86<
˷̚˹ &˖ ˖7,0(50,187(B%86<
'˖ ˖5(75<B(5525
0 Allow (Default)
1 Inhibit
2) Press [OK] key. (For the 4.3 Inch LCD model, press the OSA
shortcut key.)
The set value in step 1) is saved.
27-5 • 4.3 Inch LCD model
Purpose Setting
Function (Purpose) Used to set the machine tag No. (This func-
tion allows the host computer to check the ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
machine tag No.) (FSS function) 0$18$/6(59,&(&$//6(783
Section Communication (RIC/MODEM) $˖ ˖<(612
Operation/Procedure $˖
1) Enter the password (max. 8 digits) with 10-key. ˷̚˹
The entered password is displayed on the column of "NEW”.
In order to correct the entered password, press the [clear] key
to delete the entered value one digit by one digit.
2) Press [SET] key.
• 4.3 Inch LCD model
• 8.5 Inch LCD model
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
7$*6(77,1*
35(6(17
1(: 6(7
MX-C401 SIMULATION 5 – 53
27-7 27-9
Purpose Setting Purpose Setting
Function (Purpose) Used to set of the enable, alert callout. Function (Purpose) Used to set the paper transport time record-
(FSS function) ing YES/NO threshold value and shading
Section gain adjustment retry number.
(FSS function)
Operation/Procedure
Section
1) Select an item to be set with [n] [p] keys.
Operation/Procedure
2) Enter the set value with 10-key.
1) Select an item to be set with [n] [p] keys.
3) Press [OK] key. (For the 4.3 Inch LCD model, press the OSA
shortcut key.) 2) Enter the set value with 10-key.
The set value in step 2) is saved. 3) Press [OK] key. (For the 4.3 Inch LCD model, press the OSA
shortcut key.)
A FSS 0 FSS function enable The set value in step 2) is saved.
FUNCTION 1 FSS function disable (*1) (Default)
B ALERT 0 Alert call enable (*2) (Default) A FEED TIME 1 0 - 100 Threshold value of the paper
1 Alert call disable transport time between sensors
(Main unit) (50: Default)
*1 The FSS function setting can be changed only from Disable to B FEED TIME 2 0 - 100 Threshold value of the paper
Enable. (Cannot be changed from Enable to Disable.) transport time between sensors
*2 Alert send timing (RSPF) (50: Default)
C GAIN 1 - 20 Threshold value of the gain
No alert cause Initial state / Trouble / Continuous JAM alert ADJUSTMENT adjustment retry number
Maintenance When the maintenance timing is reached. RETRY (11: Default)
Service call When pressing Service call. D JAM ALERT 1 - 100 Alert judgment threshold value
for occurrence of continuous
Toner send request When the toner order automatic send setting is
jams
reached.
Alert judgment threshold value
Toner collection request Revision of the toner installation date (only for
for occurrence of continuous
a new product)
jams (Setting of the number of
Alert resend times of continuous jams as the
alert for continuous jams)
• 4.3 Inch LCD model
(Default: 10 times)
˷̚˹
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
)66)81&7,21$'-8670(17
$˖ ˖)(('7,0(
$˖ %˖ ˖)(('7,0(
˷̚˹ &˖ ˖*$,1$'-8670(175(75<
• 8.5 Inch LCD model
'˖ ˖-$0$/(57
MX-C401 SIMULATION 5 – 54
27-10 Display Item
Purpose Data clear Occurrence Retry Content
Item name
date (Display) number
Function (Purpose) Used to clear the trouble prediction history LSU1 99/99/99 8 digits Serial communication
information. (FSS function) 99:99:99 retry number history
Section LSU2 99/99/99 8 digits display
Operation/Procedure 99:99:99
DESK1 99/99/99 8 digits
1) Press [EXECUTE] key. 99:99:99
2) Press [YES] key. DESK2 99/99/99 8 digits
The history information of trouble prediction is cleared. 99:99:99
FINISHER1 99/99/99 8 digits
Target history Serial communication retry number history 99:99:99
High density process control error history FINISHER2 99/99/99 8 digits
Half tone process control error history 99:99:99
Automatic registration adjustment error history SCAN GAIN 99/99/99 8 digits Scanner gain
Gain adjustment retry history ADJ1 99:99:99 adjustment retry history
Paper transport time between sensors SCAN GAIN 99/99/99 8 digits
ADJ2 99:99:99
• 4.3 Inch LCD model SCAN GAIN 99/99/99 8 digits
ADJ3 99:99:99
SCAN GAIN 99/99/99 8 digits
ADJ4 99:99:99
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26( SCAN GAIN 99/99/99 8 digits
7528%/(35(&2*1,7,21+,6725<&/($5 ADJ5 99:99:99
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
7528%/(35(&2*1,7,215(68/7
685(" <(6 12 (;(&87(
'$7(5(75<
/68
/68
• 8.5 Inch LCD model '(6.
'(6.
),1,6+(5
),1,6+(5
27-11
Purpose Others
Function (Purpose) Used to check the serial communication
retry number and the scanner gain adjust-
ment retry number history. (FSS function)
Section
Operation/Procedure
The serial communication retry number history and the scanner
gain adjustment retry number history are displayed.
MX-C401 SIMULATION 5 – 55
• 4.3 Inch LCD model
27-12
Purpose Others
Function (Purpose) Used to check the high-density, half-tone
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
process control and the automatic registra-
tion adjustment error history. 7528%/(35(&2*1,7,215(68/7$'-8670(17B(5525
'$7((5525&2'(
(FSS Function)
+9B(55
Section
Operation/Procedure +9B(55
The high density, the half tone, and the automatic registration +9B(55
adjustment error history are displayed. +9B(55
27-13
Purpose Others
Function (Purpose) Used to check the history of paper transport
time between sensors. (FSS function)
Section
Operation/Procedure
Change the display with [n] [p] key.
Code
Reference
Item/Display Content Occurrence date between Passing time
passing time
sensors
Main FEED TIME1 History of paper transport time between sensors 1 99/99/99 99:99:99 5 digits 5 digits (ms) 5 digits (ms)
unit FEED TIME2 History of paper transport time between sensors 2 99/99/99 99:99:99 5 digits 5 digits (ms) 5 digits (ms)
FEED TIME3 History of paper transport time between sensors 3 99/99/99 99:99:99 5 digits 5 digits (ms) 5 digits (ms)
FEED TIME4 History of paper transport time between sensors 4 99/99/99 99:99:99 5 digits 5 digits (ms) 5 digits (ms)
FEED TIME5 History of paper transport time between sensors 5 99/99/99 99:99:99 5 digits 5 digits (ms) 5 digits (ms)
FEED TIME6 History of paper transport time between sensors 6 99/99/99 99:99:99 5 digits 5 digits (ms) 5 digits (ms)
FEED TIME7 History of paper transport time between sensors 7 99/99/99 99:99:99 5 digits 5 digits (ms) 5 digits (ms)
FEED TIME8 History of paper transport time between sensors 8 99/99/99 99:99:99 5 digits 5 digits (ms) 5 digits (ms)
FEED TIME9 History of paper transport time between sensors 9 99/99/99 99:99:99 5 digits 5 digits (ms) 5 digits (ms)
FEED TIME10 History of paper transport time between sensors 10 99/99/99 99:99:99 5 digits 5 digits (ms) 5 digits (ms)
MX-C401 SIMULATION 5 – 56
Code
Reference
Item/Display Content Occurrence date between Passing time
passing time
sensors
RSPF FEED TIME1(SPF) History of paper transport time between SPF 99/99/99 99:99:99 5 digits 5 digits (ms) 5 digits (ms)
sensors 1
FEED TIME2(SPF) History of paper transport time between SPF 99/99/99 99:99:99 5 digits 5 digits (ms) 5 digits (ms)
sensors 2
FEED TIME3(SPF) History of paper transport time between SPF 99/99/99 99:99:99 5 digits 5 digits (ms) 5 digits (ms)
sensors 3
FEED TIME4(SPF) History of paper transport time between SPF 99/99/99 99:99:99 5 digits 5 digits (ms) 5 digits (ms)
sensors 4
FEED TIME5(SPF) History of paper transport time between SPF 99/99/99 99:99:99 5 digits 5 digits (ms) 5 digits (ms)
sensors 5
FEED TIME6(SPF) History of paper transport time between SPF 99/99/99 99:99:99 5 digits 5 digits (ms) 5 digits (ms)
sensors 6
FEED TIME7(SPF) History of paper transport time between SPF 99/99/99 99:99:99 5 digits 5 digits (ms) 5 digits (ms)
sensors 7
FEED TIME8(SPF) History of paper transport time between SPF 99/99/99 99:99:99 5 digits 5 digits (ms) 5 digits (ms)
sensors 8
FEED TIME9(SPF) History of paper transport time between SPF 99/99/99 99:99:99 5 digits 5 digits (ms) 5 digits (ms)
sensors 9
FEED TIME10(SPF) History of paper transport time between SPF 99/99/99 99:99:99 5 digits 5 digits (ms) 5 digits (ms)
sensors 10
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
7528%/(35(&2*1,7,215(68/7)(('7,0(
'$7(&2'(3$6667'
)(('7,0(
)(('7,0(
)(('7,0(
)(('7,0(
)(('7,0(
)(('7,0(
2) Press [OK] key. (For the 4.3 Inch LCD model, press the OSA
shortcut key.)
The set value in step 1) is saved.
• 8.5 Inch LCD model
MX-C401 SIMULATION 5 – 57
30-2
30
Purpose Operation test/check
Function (Purpose) Used to check the operations of the sen-
30-1
sors and the detectors in the paper feed
Purpose Operation test/check section and the control circuits.
Function (Purpose) Used to check the operations of the sen- Section
sors and the detectors in other than the
Operation/Procedure
paper feed section and the control circuits.
The operating conditions of the sensors and detectors are dis-
Section played.
Operation/Procedure The sensors and the detectors which are turned ON are high-
The operating conditions of the sensors and detectors are dis- lighted.
played.
The sensors and the detectors which are turned ON are high- CPFD1 Paper feed tray 1 paper transport detection
lighted. CLUD1 Paper feed tray 1 upper limit detection
CPED1 Paper feed tray 1 paper empty detection
PPD1 Resist pre-detection CSPD1 Paper feed tray 1 paper remaining quantity detection
PPD2 Resist detection CSS1 Paper feed tray 1 paper size detection 1
POD1 Detects the paper exit from fusing. CSS2 Paper feed tray 1 paper size detection 2
POD2 Main unit paper exit detection CSS3 Paper feed tray 1 paper size detection 3
TFD2 Paper exit tray full detection MPLD Manual paper feed tray paper length detection
DSW_R Right door open/close detection MPED Manual paper feed tray paper empty detection
DSW_F Front cover open/close detection
DHPD_K OPC drum phase detection (K)
• 4.3 Inch LCD model
DHPD_CL OPC drum phase detection (Color)
1TNFD Waste toner full detection
HLPCD Fusing roller pressure release detection ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12 &/26(
7(67
1TUD_CL Primary transfer belt separation detection (Color)
75$<6(1625&+(&.0$,1
1TUD_K Primary transfer belt separation detection (K)
&3)' &/8' &3(' &63'
DRSET Drum detection
DRCRU_K Drum K initial detection &66 &66 &66 03/'
DRCRU_C Drum C initial detection 03('
DRCRU_M Drum M initial detection
ǂ
DRCRU_Y Drum Y initial detection
DVCRU_K Developer K initial detection
DVCRU_C Developer C initial detection
DVCRU_M Developer M initial detection
DVCRU_Y Developer Y initial detection
FUCRU Fusing initial detection • 8.5 Inch LCD model
2TCCRU Secondary transfer initial detection
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
0$,181,76(1625&+(&.
33' 33' 32' 32'
MX-C401 SIMULATION 5 – 58
33
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
33-1 &$5',''$7$&/($5
Purpose Operation test/check
Function (Purpose) Used to check the operations of the card
reader sensor and the control circuit.
Section
Operation/Procedure
685(" <(6 12 (;(&87(
The operating conditions of the sensors and detectors are dis-
played.
The sensors and the detectors which are turned ON are high-
lighted.
Display Content
COMPLETE Adjustment completed
ERROR Adjustment error
33-2
Purpose Data clear • 4.3 Inch LCD model
Operation/Procedure %<3$6675$<$'-8670(17
(;(&87(
MX-C401 SIMULATION 5 – 59
• 8.5 Inch LCD model • 4.3 Inch LCD model
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
%<3$6675$<9$/8(6(77,1*
$˖ ˖0$;ǂ326,7,21%B.
$˖ %˖ ˖3ǂ326,7,21
˷̚˹ &˖ ˖3ǂ326,7,21
'˖ ˖0,1ǂ326,7,21
40-7
Purpose Adjustment/Setup
Function (Purpose) Used to set the adjustment value of the
manual paper feed tray paper width sensor.
Section Paper feed
Operation/Procedure
1) Select a target item to be adjusted with [n] [p] buttons.
2) Enter the set value with 10-key.
3) Press [OK] key. (For the 4.3 Inch LCD model, press the OSA
shortcut key.)
The set value in step 2) is saved.
Default
Item
value
A MAX POSITION Manual paper feed guide maximum
width position
193
43
B P1 POSITION Manual paper feed guide P1 width 187
position (A4R) 43-1
C P2 POSITION Manual paper feed guide P2 width 133
position (A5R)
Purpose Setting
D MIN POSITION Manual paper feed guide minimum 84 Function (Purpose) Used to set the fusing reference tempera-
width position ture of each operation mode.
Section
Operation/Procedure
1) Select an item to be set with [n] [p] keys.
2) Enter the set value with 10-key.
3) Press [OK] key. (For the 4.3 Inch LCD model, press the OSA
shortcut key.)
The set value in step 2) is saved.
NOTE: The set value is the reference value, and it may differ from
the actual fusing temperature depending on the operating
conditions.
MX-C401 SIMULATION 5 – 60
Setting Group A Group B Group C
Item/Display Content
range SW-A SW-B SW-A SW-B SW-A SW-B
P HL_UM OHP PAPER OHP-TH_UM set value 70 - 230 180
Q HL_LM OHP PAPER OHP-TH_LM set value 30 - 200 140
R HL_E OHP PAPER OHP-TH_E set value 70 - 230 220
S HL_UM ENV PAPER Envelope TH_UM set value 70 - 230 200
T HL_LM ENV PAPER Envelope TH_LM set value 30 - 200 140
U HL_E ENV PAPER Envelope TH_E set value 70 - 230 220
V HL_UM GLOSS PAPER Glossy paper TH_UM set value 70 - 230 185
W HL_LM GLOSS PAPER Glossy paper TH_LM set value 30 - 200 140
X HL_E GLOSS PAPER Glossy paper TH_E set value 70 - 230 220
Y HL_UM E-STAR Preheating TH_UM set value 30 - 200 165 165 165
Z HL_E E-STAR Preheating TH_E set value 30 - 200 165 165 165
AA HL_UM PRE-JOB Resetting from preheating TH_UM set value (Job Ready 30 - 200 170 170 170
temperature)
AB HL_LM E-STAR Preheating TH_LM set value 30 - 200 115 115 115
AC HL_UM WARMUP_120L Warm-up TH_UM set value (when the fusing temperature is 70 - 230 175 190 185 190 185 190
120qC or less)
AD HL_LM WARMUP_120L Warm-up TH_LM set value (when the fusing temperature is 30 - 200 120 135 130 135 130 135
120qC or less)
AE HL_E WARMUP_120L Warm-up TH_E set value (when the fusing temperature is 70 - 230 225 225 225 225 225 225
120qC or less)
AF LO_WARMUP_TIME AC - AE applying time (Time (sec) for shifting from the 0 - 255 5
control temperature in warm-up to the normal control
temperature)
AG HL_UM WARMUP_120H Warm-up TH_UM set value (when the fusing temperature is 70 - 230 175 190 185 190 185 190
120qC or above)
AH HL_LM WARMUP_120H Warm-up TH_LM set value (when the fusing temperature is 30 - 200 120 135 130 135 130 135
120qC or above)
AI HL_E WARMUP_120H Warm-up TH_E set value (when the fusing temperature is 70 - 230 220 225 225 225 225 225
120qC or above)
AJ HI_WARMUP_TIME AG - AI applying time (Timer from completion of Ready) 0 - 255 5
AK HI_WU_FM_ON_TMP Fusing roller rotation start TH_E (when the fusing 30 - 200 130 130 130 130 130 130
temperature in warm-up is alpha qC or above)
AL HI_WU_END_TIME Warm-up complete time (sec) (when the fusing temperature 0 - 255 40 40 40 40 40 40
in warm-up is alpha qC or above)
AM HI_WU_JOB_SET_TMP Job Ready TH_UM temperature (when the fusing 70 - 230 170 185 180 185 170 185
temperature in warm-up is alpha qC or above)
AN HI_WARMUP_BORDER Threshold value applied to Sim43-1-AM - AK 1 - 119 70
AO LO_WU_JOB_SET_TMP Warm-up complete time (sec) (When the fusing temperature 70 - 230 175 195 185 195 180 195
in warming up is alpha qC or below.)
AP JOBEND_FUMON_TIME Fusing roller rotation time (sec) after completion of a job 0 - 255 15
<Code descriptions>
Group Destination
Group A Japan China AB_B –
Group B U.S.A. Canada Inch –
Group C Europe U.K. AUS AB_A
Destination link item (When the destination setting is changed with SIM26-6, the set value is changed linking with the destination.)
SW-A Setting value when plain paper is selected in the system setting/device setting/fusing control setting.
SW-B Set value when heavy paper is selected in the system setting/device setting/fusing control setting.
The set value displayed in this simulation differs depending on plain paper or heavy paper which is selected in the system setting/
device setting/fusing control setting.
(Example) When plain paper is selected in the system setting/device setting/fusing control setting, the value of SW-A is displayed.
NOTE: When the destination is changed with SIM26-6 after changing this set value, the set values of the destination link items are reset to the
default.
MX-C401 SIMULATION 5 – 61
• 4.3 Inch LCD model • 8.5 Inch LCD model
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
)86(57(036(783)253$3(5
$˖ ˖+/B805($'<
$˖ %˖ ˖+/B/05($'<
˷̚˹ &˖ ˖+/B(5($'<
'˖ ˖+/B803/$,13$3(5%:
43-4
Purpose Setting
Function (Purpose) Used to set the fusing temperature 2 in
each mode. (Continued from SIM 43-1.)
Section
Operation/Procedure
1) Select an item to be set with [n] [p] keys.
2) Enter the set value with 10-key.
3) Press [OK] key. (For the 4.3 Inch LCD model, press the OSA
shortcut key.)
The set value in step 2) is saved.
NOTE: The set value is the reference value, and it may differ from
the actual fusing temperature depending on the operating
conditions.
Default value
Setting
Item/Display Content Group A Group B Group C
range
SW-A SW-B SW-A SW-B SW-A SW-B
A HL_UM PLAIN PAPER BW DUP Black-White plain paper duplex TH_UM set value 70 - 230 175 190 185 190 185 190
B HL_LM PLAIN PAPER BW DUP Black-White plain paper duplex TH_LM set value 30 - 200 110 125 120 125 120 125
C HL_E PLAIN PAPER BW DUP Black-White plain paper duplex TH_E set value 70 - 230 220 220 220 220 220 220
D PLAIN PAPER BW DUP APP CNT Black-White plain paper duplex fusing temperature 0 - 60 0 0 0 0 0 0
application start image screen number
E HL_UM PLAIN PAPER CL DUP Color plain paper duplex TH_UM set value 70 - 230 175 190 185 190 185 190
F HL_LM PLAIN PAPER CL DUP Color plain paper duplex TH_LM set value 30 - 200 110 125 120 125 120 125
G HL_E PLAIN PAPER CL DUP Color plain paper duplex TH_E set value 70 - 230 220 220 220 220 220 220
H PLAIN PAPER CL DUP APP CNT Color plain paper duplex fusing temperature 0 - 60 0 0 0 0 0 0
application start image screen number
I HL_UM HEAVY PAPER BW DUP Black-White heavy paper duplex TH_UM set value 70 - 230 185
J HL_LM HEAVY PAPER BW DUP Black-White heavy paper duplex TH_LM set value 30 - 200 120
K HL_E HEAVY PAPER BW DUP Black-White heavy paper duplex TH_E set value 70 - 230 220
L HEAVY PAPER BW DUP APP CNT Black-White heavy paper duplex fusing 0 - 60 1
temperature application start image screen
number
M HL_UM HEAVY PAPER CL DUP Color heavy paper duplex TH_UM set value 70 - 230 185
N HL_LM HEAVY PAPER CL DUP Color heavy paper duplex TH_LM set value 30 - 200 120
O HL_E HEAVY PAPER CL DUP Color heavy paper duplex TH_E set value 70 - 230 220
P HEAVY PAPER CL DUP APP CNT Color heavy paper duplex fusing temperature 0 - 60 1
application start image screen number
<Code descriptions>
Group Destination
Group A Japan China AB_B –
Group B U.S.A. Canada Inch –
Group C Europe U.K. AUS AB_A
MX-C401 SIMULATION 5 – 62
• 4.3 Inch LCD model • 8.5 Inch LCD model
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
)86(57(036(783)253$3(5
$˖ ˖+/B803/$,13$3(5%:'83
$˖ %˖ ˖+/B/03/$,13$3(5%:'83
˷̚˹ &˖ ˖+/B(3/$,13$3(5%:'83
'˖ ˖3/$,13$3(5%:'83$33&17
43-20
Purpose Adjustment/Setup
Function (Purpose) Used to set the environmental correction
under low temperature and low humidity (L/
L) for the fusing temperature setting (SIM
43-1) in each paper mode.
Section
Operation/Procedure
1) Select an item to be set with [n] [p] keys. Correction value: -49 - +49, 1 Count = 1qC Change
2) Enter the set value with 10-key. Correction value -49 -25 -5 0 5 25 49
3) Press [OK] key. (For the 4.3 Inch LCD model, press the OSA Input value 1 25 45 50 55 75 99
shortcut key.)
The set value in step 2) is saved.
MX-C401 SIMULATION 5 – 63
Setting Group Group Group
Item/Display Content
range A B C
AH HL_LM WARMUP_120H LL Warm-up TH_LM set value (when the fusing temperature is 120qC or above) 1 - 99 55
AI HL_E WARMUP_120H LL Warm-up TH_E set value (when the fusing temperature is 120qC or above) 1 - 99 50
AJ HI_WARMUP_TIME LL AG - AI applying time (Timer from completion of Ready) 1 - 99 50
AK HI_WU_FM_ON_TMP LL Fusing roller rotation start TH_E (when the fusing temperature in warm-up is 1 - 99 45
alpha qC or above)
AL HI_WU_END_TIME LL Warm-up complete time (sec) (when the fusing temperature in warm-up is 1 - 99 50
(*1) alpha qC or above)
AM HI_WU_JOB_SET_TMP LL Job Ready TH_UM temperature (when the fusing temperature in warm-up is 1 - 99 55
alpha qC or above)
AN HI_WARMUP_BORDER LL Threshold value applied to Sim43-1-AM - AK 1 - 99 50
AO LO_WU_JOB_SET_TMP LL Warm-up complete time (sec) (when the fusing temperature in warming up is 1 - 99 55
(*1) alpha qC or below.)
AP JOBEND_FUMON_TIME LL Fusing roller rotation time (sec) after completion of a job 1 - 99 50
(*1)
Group Destination
Group A Japan China AB_B –
Group B U.S.A. Canada Inch –
Group C Europe U.K. AUS AB_A
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
)86(57(03$'-8670(17//
$˖ ˖+/B805($'<//
$˖ %˖ ˖+/B/05($'<//
˷̚˹ &˖ ˖+/B(5($'<//
'˖ ˖+/B803/$,13$3(5%://
43-21
Purpose Adjustment/Setup
Function (Purpose) Used to set the environment correction
under high temperature and high humidity
(H/H) for the fusing temperature setting
(SIM 43-1) in each paper mode.
Section
Operation/Procedure Correction value: -49 - +49, 1 Count = 1qC Change
1) Select an item to be set with [n] [p] keys. Correction -49 -25 -5 0 5 25 49
2) Enter the set value with 10-key. value
3) Press [OK] key. (For the 4.3 Inch LCD model, press the OSA Input value 1 25 45 50 55 75 99
shortcut key.)
The set value in step 2 is saved.
MX-C401 SIMULATION 5 – 64
Setting Group Group Group
Item/Display Content
range A B C
H HL_LM PLAIN PAPER CL HH Color plain paper TH_LM set value 1 - 99 50 50 50
I HL_E PLAIN PAPER CL HH Color plain paper TH_E set value 1 - 99 50 50 50
J WARMUP FUMON HL_E T HH Fusing motor pre-rotation start TH_UM set value 1 - 99 50
K WARMUP FUMOFF HH Fusing motor pre-rotation end TH_LM set value 1 - 99 50
L WARMUP END TIME HH Warm-up complete time (warm-up time (sec)) 1 - 99 50
(*1)
M HL_UM HEAVY PAPER HH Heavy paper TH_UM set value 1 - 99 50
N HL_LM HEAVY PAPER HH Heavy paper TH_LM set value 1 - 99 50
O HL_E HEAVY PAPER HH Heavy paper TH_E set value 1 - 99 50
P HL_UM OHP PAPER HH OHP-TH_UM set value 1 - 99 50
Q HL_LM OHP PAPER HH OHP-TH_LM set value 1 - 99 50
R HL_E OHP PAPER HH OHP-TH_E set value 1 - 99 50
S HL_UM ENV PAPER HH Envelope TH_UM set value 1 - 99 50
T HL_LM ENV PAPER HH Envelope TH_LM set value 1 - 99 50
U HL_E ENV PAPER HH Envelope TH_E set value 1 - 99 50
V HL_UM GLOSS PAPER HH Glossy paper TH_UM set value 1 - 99 50
W HL_LM GLOSS PAPER HH Glossy paper TH_LM set value 1 - 99 50
X HL_E GLOSS PAPER HH Glossy paper TH_E set value 1 - 99 50
Y HL_UM E-STAR HH Preheating TH_UM set value 1 - 99 50
Z HL_E E-STAR HH Preheating TH_E set value 1 - 99 50
AA HL_UM PRE-JOB HH Resetting from preheating TH_UM set value (Job Ready temperature) 1 - 99 50
AB HL_LM E-STAR HH Preheating TH_LM set value 1 - 99 50
AC HL_UM WARMUP_120L HH Warm-up TH_UM set value (when the fusing temperature is 120qC or less) 1 - 99 50
AD HL_LM WARMUP_120L HH Warm-up TH_LM set value (when the fusing temperature is 120qC or less) 1 - 99 50
AE HL_E WARMUP_120L HH Warm-up TH_E set value (when the fusing temperature is 120qC or less) 1 - 99 50
AF LO_WARMUP_TIME HH AC - AE applying time (Time (sec) for shifting from the control temperature in 1 - 99 50
(*1) warm-up to the normal control temperature)
AG HL_UM WARMUP_120H HH Warm-up TH_UM set value (when the fusing temperature is 120qC or above) 1 - 99 50
AH HL_LM WARMUP_120H HH Warm-up TH_LM set value (when the fusing temperature is 120qC or above) 1 - 99 50
AI HL_E WARMUP_120H HH Warm-up TH_E set value (when the fusing temperature is 120qC or above) 1 - 99 50
AJ HI_WARMUP_TIME HH AG - AI applying time (Timer from completion of Ready) 1 - 99 50
AK HI_WU_FM_ON_TMP HH Fusing roller rotation start TH_E (when the fusing temperature in warm-up is 1 - 99 50
alpha qC or above)
AL HI_WU_END_TIME HH Warm-up complete time (sec) (when the fusing temperature in warm-up is 1 - 99 50
(*1) alpha qC or above)
AM HI_WU_JOB_SET_TMP HH Job Ready TH_UM temperature (when the fusing temperature in warm-up is 1 - 99 50
alpha qC or above)
AN HI_WARMUP_BORDER HH Threshold value applied to Sim43-1-AM - AK 1 - 99 50
AO LO_WU_JOB_SET_TMP HH Warm-up complete time (sec) (When the fusing temperature in warming up is 1 - 99 50
(*1) alpha qC or below.)
AP JOBEND_FUMON_TIME HH Fusing roller rotation time (sec) after completion of a job 1 - 99 50
(*1)
Group Destination
Group A Japan China AB_B –
Group B U.S.A. Canada Inch –
Group C Europe U.K. AUS AB_A
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
)86(57(03$'-8670(17++
$˖ ˖+/B805($'<++
$˖ %˖ ˖+/B/05($'<++
˷̚˹ &˖ ˖+/B(5($'<++
'˖ ˖+/B803/$,13$3(5%:++
MX-C401 SIMULATION 5 – 65
43-22
Purpose Adjustment/Setup
Function (Purpose) Used to set the environment correction
under low temperature and low humidity (L/
L) for the fusing temperature setting (SIM
43-4) in each paper mode.
Section
Operation/Procedure
1) Select an item to be set with [n] [p] keys.
2) Enter the set value with 10-key. Correction value: -49 - +49, 1 Count = 1qC Change
3) Press [OK] key. (For the 4.3 Inch LCD model, press the OSA Correction -49 -25 -5 0 5 25 49
shortcut key.) value
The set value in step 2 is saved. Input value 1 25 45 50 55 75 99
<Code descriptions>
Group Destination
Group A Japan China AB_B –
Group B U.S.A. Canada Inch –
Group C Europe U.K. AUS AB_A
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
)86(57(03$'-8670(17//'83
$˖ ˖+/B803/$,13$3(5%:'83//
$˖ %˖ ˖+/B/0ǂ3/$,13$3(5%:'83//
˷̚˹ &˖ ˖+/B(3/$,13$3(5%:'83//
'˖ ˖3/$,13$3(5%:'83$33&17//
MX-C401 SIMULATION 5 – 66
43-23
Purpose Adjustment/Setup
Function (Purpose) Used to set the environment correction
under high temperature and high humidity
(H/H) for the fusing temperature setting
(SIM 43-4) in each paper mode.
Section
Operation/Procedure
1) Select an item to be set with [n] [p] keys. Correction value: -49 - +49, 1 Count = 1qC Change
2) Enter the set value with 10-key. Correction -49 -25 -5 0 5 25 49
3) Press [OK] key. (For the 4.3 Inch LCD model, press the OSA value
shortcut key.) Input value 1 25 45 50 55 75 99
The set value in step 2) is saved.
<Code descriptions>
Group Destination
Group A Japan China AB_B –
Group B U.S.A. Canada Inch –
Group C Europe U.K. AUS AB_A
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
)86(57(03$'-8670(17++'83
$˖ ˖+/B803/$,13$3(5%:'83++
$˖ %˖ ˖+/B/03/$,13$3(5%:'83++
˷̚˹ &˖ ˖+/B(3/$,13$3(5%:'83++
'˖ ˖3/$,13$3(5%:'83$33&17++
MX-C401 SIMULATION 5 – 67
43-24
Purpose Adjustment/Setup
Function (Purpose) Used to set the correction of the tempera-
ture adjustment value of SIM 43-1 and 43-
4.
Section
Operation/Procedure
Correction value: -49 - +49, 1 Count = 1qC Change
1) Select an item to be set with [n] [p] keys.
2) Enter the set value with 10-key. Correction value -49 -25 -5 0 5 25 49
3) Press [OK] key. (For the 4.3 Inch LCD model, press the OSA Input value 1 25 45 50 55 75 99
shortcut key.)
The set value in step 2 is saved.
MX-C401 SIMULATION 5 – 68
Group Destination
Group A Japan China AB_B –
Group B U.S.A. Canada Inch –
Group C Europe U.K. AUS AB_A
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
)86(57(035(6(7
$˖ ˖11BB)86B'83B+/B80
$˖ %˖ ˖11BB)86B'83B+/B/0
˷̚˹ &˖ ˖//BB)86B'83B+/B80
'˖ ˖//BB)86B'83B+/B/0
Setting Default
44 Item/Display Content
range value
NOTE
MX-C401 SIMULATION 5 – 69
• 4.3 Inch LCD model Setting Default
Item/Display Content
range value
K REG_F GRND Belt substrate when 0 - 255 0
the item I adjustment
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26( is completed.
02'(6(77,1* L REG_R LED ADJ Registration sensor 1 - 255 56
light emitting
+9 +7 7& 0'ǂ9*
quantity adjustment
0'/' 0'(9 0''/ 0''/(91 value R
71B+80 71B$5($ 71B/,)( 71B&29 M REG_R DARK Registration sensor 0 - 255 0
dark voltage R
71B352&21 71B(19 71B'5,3 71B63(1'
N REG_R GRND Belt substrate when 0 - 256 0
(;(&87( the item J adjust-
ment is completed.
O REG_F BELT MAX Belt substrate input 0 - 255 0
max. value (F side)
• 8.5 Inch LCD model P REG_F BELT MIN Belt substrate input 0 - 255 0
min. value (F side)
Q REG_F BELT DIF Belt substrate input 0 - 255 0
difference
(Item O - Item P)
R REG_R BELT MAX Belt substrate input 0 - 255 0
max. value (R side)
S REG_R BELT MIN Belt substrate input 0 - 255 0
min. value (R side)
T REG_R BELT DIF Belt substrate input 0 - 255 0
difference
(Item R - Item S)
U REG_F PATCH (K) Patch light receiving 0 - 255 0
potential F(K)
V REG_F PATCH (C) Patch light receiving 0 - 255 0
potential F(C)
W REG_F PATCH (M) Patch light receiving 0 - 255 0
potential F(M)
44-2
X REG_F PATCH (Y) Patch light receiving 0 - 255 0
Purpose Adjustment/Setup potential F(Y)
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the sensitivity of the image Y REG_R PATCH (K) Patch light receiving 0 - 255 0
potential R(K)
density sensor (registration sensor).
Z REG_R PATCH (C) Patch light receiving 0 - 255 0
Section Process potential R(C)
Operation/Procedure AA REG_R PATCH (M) Patch light receiving 0 - 255 0
When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the adjustment is executed auto- potential R(M)
matically. AB REG_R PATCH (Y) Patch light receiving 0 - 255 0
potential R(Y)
After completion of the adjustment, the adjustment result is dis-
played.
Error name Error content
If the adjustment is not executed normally, "ERROR" is displayed.
Black sensor adjustment PCS_K LED ADJ error
abnormality The target is not reached by 3 times of
Setting Default
Item/Display Content retry.
range value
Color sensor adjustment PCS_CL LED ADJ error
A PCS_CL LED ADJ Color sensor light 1 - 255 21
abnormality The target is not reached by 3 times of
emitting quantity
retry.
adjustment value
Substrate scan abnormality PCS_K GRND error
B PCS_K LED ADJ Black sensor light 1 - 255 21
Effective difference between the upper
emitting quantity
and lower values of the belt substrate
adjustment value
circuit, outside the range
C PCS_CL DARK Dark voltage of color 0 - 255 0
Registration sensor F REG_F LED ADJ error
D PCS_K DARK Dark voltage of black 0 - 255 0 adjustment abnormality The target is not reached by 3 times of
E PCS_K GRND Belt substrate when 0 - 255 0 retry.
the item B Registration sensor R REG_R LED ADJ error
adjustment is adjustment abnormality The target is not reached by 3 times of
completed. retry.
F PCS_K BELT MAX Belt substrate input 0 - 255 0 Registration substrate F REG_F GRND error
max. value scan abnormality Effective difference between the upper
G PCS_K BELT MIN Belt substrate input 0 - 255 0 and lower values of the belt substrate
min. value circuit, outside the range
H PCS_K BELT DIF Belt substrate input 0 - 255 0 Registration substrate R REG_R GRND error
difference scan abnormality Effective difference between the upper
(Item E - Item F) and lower values of the belt substrate
I REG_F LED ADJ Registration sensor 1 - 255 56 circuit, outside the range
light emitting
quantity adjustment
value F
J REG_F DARK Registration sensor 0 - 255 0
dark voltage F
MX-C401 SIMULATION 5 – 70
• 4.3 Inch LCD model Setting Default
Item/Display Content
range value
J Y_PAT TARGET ID Patch density standard 1 - 255 129
value (yellow)
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
K M_PAT TARGET ID Patch density standard 1 - 255 140
352&21*$,1$'-8670(17 value (magenta)
3&6B&//('$'- 3&6B.*51' L C_PAT TARGET ID Patch density standard 1 - 255 115
value (cyan)
3&6B./('$'- 3&6B.%(/70$;
M K_PAT TARGET ID Patch density standard 1 - 255 4
3&6B&/'$5. 3&6B.%(/70,1 value (black)
3&6B.'$5. 3&6B.%(/7',) N HV BK_GROUND Patch position substrate 1 - 255 29
LIMIT light receiving effective
(;(&87( range value
㩷㪈㪆㩷㪊
• 4.3 Inch LCD model
'˖ ˖/('B.287387
44-4
Purpose Setting
Function (Purpose) Used to set the conditions of the high den-
sity process control operation.
Section Process
Operation/Procedure
1) Select an item to be set with [n] [p] keys.
2) Enter the set value with 10-key.
3) Press [OK] key. (For the 4.3 Inch LCD model, press the OSA
shortcut key.)
NOTE: Set the items to the default values unless a change is spe-
cially required. 44-6
Purpose Adjustment
Setting Default
Item/Display Content Function (Purpose) Used to execute the high density process
range value
A PCS_CL TARGET Color sensor target set 1 - 255 98 control forcibly.
value Section Process
B PCS_K TARGET Black sensor target set 1 - 255 208
Operation/Procedure
value
C LED_CL OUTPUT Color sensor light 1 - 255 21 Press [EXECUTE] key.
emitting quantity set In case of a normal completion, the result is saved.
value
In case of an abnormal completion, "ERROR" is displayed.
D LED_K OUTPUT Black sensor light 1 - 255 21
(Refer to the table below.)
emitting quantity set
value In case of an ERROR, the previous correction data are saved.
E PCS ADJSTMENT Sensor adjustment 1 - 255 4
LIMIT target limit value Result display Content description
F BELT GROUND DIF Effective difference 1 - 255 1 COMPLETE Normal complete
between the belt 1 ERROR Abnormal end
circuit substrate upper INTERRUPTION Forcible interruption
and lower limit values
G BIAS_CL Bias (for color) 0 - 255 60 Details of error display Content description
STANDARD DIF reference calculation
CL_SEN_ADJ_ERR Color sensor adjustment abnormality
difference
BK_SEN_ADJ_ERR Black sensor adjustment abnormality
H BIAS_BK Bias (for black) 0 - 255 0
K_HV_ERR K high density process control abnormality
STANDARD DIF reference calculation
difference C_HV_ERR C high density process control abnormality
I BIAS PATCH Patch bias output 1 - 255 60 M_HV_ERR M high density process control abnormality
INTERVAL interval Y_HV _ERR Y high density process control abnormality
TIMEOUT_ERR Time out
MX-C401 SIMULATION 5 – 71
• 4.3 Inch LCD model • 8.5 Inch LCD model
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
352&21&2038/625<(;(&87,21
35(66>(;(&87(@7267$57
(;(&87(
44-9
Purpose Operation data display
Function (Purpose) Used to display the result data of the high
density process control operation.
Section Image process (Photoconductor/Develop-
ing/Transfer/Cleaning)
Operation/Procedure
1) Select a target display mode.
2) Press [OK] key.
(For the 4.3 Inch LCD model, press the OSA shortcut key.)
Default
Mode Item/Display (*: Correction value) Content Display range
value
CPY/PRN P (PROCON) BLACK : GB ***/*** DV ***/*** High density process control GB/DV data GB: 230 - 850 GB: 630
(*2) CYAN : GB ***/*** DV ***/*** (KCMY) DV: 0 - 700 DV: 430
MAGENTA : GB ***/*** DV ***/*** (Actual output voltage level/base voltage
YELLOW : GB ***/*** DV ***/*** level)
N(M) BLACK : GB ***/*** DV ***/*** High density normal (Medium speed GB: 230 - 850 GB: 630
(NORMAL (MIDDLE)) CYAN : GB ***/*** DV ***/*** display) GB/DV data (KCMY) DV: 0 - 700 DV: 430
MAGENTA : GB ***/*** DV ***/*** (Actual output voltage level/base voltage
YELLOW : GB ***/*** DV ***/*** level)
N(L) BLACK : GB ***/*** DV ***/*** High density normal (Low speed display) GB: 230 - 850 GB: 600
(NORMAL (LOW)) CYAN : GB ***/*** DV ***/*** GB/DV data (KCMY) DV: 0 - 700 DV: 400
MAGENTA : GB ***/*** DV ***/*** (Actual output voltage level/base voltage
YELLOW : GB ***/*** DV ***/*** level)
OTHER TN/TC TN HUD AREA Toner control display humidity area 1 - 14 9
TN HUD DATA Toner control display humidity AD value 0 - 1023 0
TC TMP AREA Transfer display temperature area 1-9 4
TC TMP DATA Transfer display temperature AD value 0 - 1023 0
TC HUD AREA Transfer display humidity area 1-9 4
TC HUD DATA Transfer display humidity AD value 0 - 1023 0
MD HUD AREA Membrane decrease display humidity area 1 - 14 9
MD HUD DATA Membrane decrease display humidity AD 0 - 1023 0
value
DRUM MD K STEP Drum membrane decrease correction STEP 0-4 0
MD C STEP display (KCMY)
MD M STEP
MD Y STEP
MD K DRUM COUNTER Membrane decrease drum traveling 0 - 20 0
MD C DRUM COUNTER distance area (KCMY)
MD M DRUM COUNTER
MD Y DRUM COUNTER
VG MD K REVISE(VG) : L *** M *** Drum membrane decrease grid voltage 0 - 255 0
MD C REVISE(VG) : L *** M *** correction display (KCMY)
MD M REVISE(VG) : L *** M ***
MD Y REVISE(VG) : L *** M ***
LD MD K REVISE(LD) : L *** M *** Drum membrane decrease laser power 0 - 255 0
MD C REVISE(LD) : L *** M *** voltage correction (KCMY)
MD M REVISE(LD) : L *** M ***
MD Y REVISE(LD) : L *** M ***
MX-C401 SIMULATION 5 – 72
Default
Mode Item/Display (*: Correction value) Content Display range
value
OTHER HV MD K REVISE(HV) : L *** M *** High density membrane decrease 0 - 255 0
MD C REVISE(HV) : L *** M *** environment GB correction display (KCMY)
MD M REVISE(HV) : L *** M ***
MD Y REVISE(HV) : L *** M ***
CP MD K REVISE(CP) : L *** M *** Drum membrane decrease environment 0 - 255 0
MD C REVISE(CP) : L *** M *** grid voltage correction display (KCMY)
MD M REVISE(CP) : L *** M ***
MD Y REVISE(CP) : L *** M ***
DL MD K REVISE COL (DL): L *** M *** Drum membrane decrease discharge light 0 - 100 50
MD C REVISE COL (DL): L *** M *** quantity correction (%)
MD M REVISE COL (DL): L *** M ***
MD Y REVISE COL (DL): L *** M ***
DL EV MD K REVISE COL (DL EV): L *** M *** Drum membrane decrease environment -100 - 100 0
MD C REVISE COL (DL EV): L *** M *** discharge light quantity correction (%)
MD M REVISE COL (DL EV): L *** M ***
MD Y REVISE COL (DL EV): L *** M ***
CRUM DESTINATION Machine side management CRUM - CRUM
destination (Main unit data) information
(*1)
MODEL TYPE Machine model type 0-1 0
CRUM DEST_K CRUM destination (CRUM data) - CRUM
CRUM DEST_C information
CRUM DEST_M (*1)
CRUM DEST_Y
CNT PROCON COUNT HV High density process control number of 0 - 99999999 0
executions
PROCON COUNT HT Half tone process control number of 0 - 99999999 0
executions
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
352&21'$7$',63352&21
.B3*%'9
&B3*%'9
0B3*%'9
<B3*%'9
&3<351 27+(5
MX-C401 SIMULATION 5 – 73
Display Default
Mode Item/Display Content 44-13
range value
PATCH n-1 High density process 0 - 255 0 Purpose Adjustment/Setup
1-5 control nth time patch Function (Purpose) Used to perform the color image sensor
(Page 1-2) density level 1 (n=1- (image registration sensor F) calibration.
5)
n-2 Patch data nth time 0 - 255 0
Section
patch 2 (n=1-5) Operation/Procedure
n-3 Patch data nth time 0 - 255 0 1) Press [EXECUTE] key.
patch 3 (n=1-5)
The shutter plate of the color image density sensor (image reg-
n-4 Patch data nth time 0 - 255 0
istration sensor F) is opened, and the message indicating that
patch 4 (n=1-5)
• BK only
the primary transfer unit is removed is displayed.
n-5 Patch data nth time 0 - 255 0 2) Open the front cabinet of the machine and remove the waste
patch 5 (n=1-5) toner box and the primary transfer unit.
• BK only 3) Install the calibration jig (UKOG-0318FCZZ) of the color image
PATCH n-1 Patch data nth time 0 - 255 0 density sensor (image registration sensor F) to the sensor
6-10 patch 1 (n=6-10)
housing section.
(Page 1-2) n-2 Patch data nth time 0 - 255 0
patch 2 (n=6-10)
4) Set the waste toner box, and close the right cover unit (sec-
n-3 Patch data nth time 0 - 255 0
ondary transfer unit section) and the front cabinet of the
patch 3 (n=6-10) machine.
n-4 Patch data nth time 0 - 255 0 5) Press [EXECUTE] key.
patch 4 (n=6-10) Calibration of the color image density sensor (image registration
• BK only
sensor F) is automatically performed. After completion of the oper-
n-5 Patch data nth time 0 - 255 0 ation, the adjustment result is displayed and [EXECUTE] key is
patch 5 (n=6-10)
returned to the normal display.
• BK only
• 4.3 Inch LCD model
(;(&87(
㩷㪈㪆㩷㪈
MX-C401 SIMULATION 5 – 74
44-14 44-16
Purpose Operation data display Purpose Operation data display
Function (Purpose) Used to display the output level of the tem- Function (Purpose) Used to display the toner density control
perature and humidity sensor. data.
Section Process (OPC drum, development)/Fusing/ Section Developing system
LSU Operation/Procedure
Operation/Procedure 1) Select a target color.
The output levels of the fusing temperature sensor, the machine The toner density control data are displayed.
temperature sensor, and the humidity sensor are displayed. Select the display category with [NEXT] key.
Item/Display Content Display range
Item/ Setting Default
TH_UM Fusing upper heat roller Temperature: Content
Display range value
thermister (center section) 0 - 255qC (r1qC)
TONER The current toner density sensor 1 - 255 129
detection temperature (qC), AD value: 0 - 1023
DEN_LT (M) output value (final value) at the
differential input AD value
medium speed
TH_UM_AD1 Fusing upper heat roller Temperature:
TONER The current toner density reference 128
thermister compensation 0.0 - 255.0qC (r0.2qC)
DEN_ST (M) value display (including all the
sensor (center section) AD value: 0 - 1023
correction values) at the medium
detection temperature (qC),
speed
AD value
TONER The current toner density sensor 129
TH_UM_AD2 Fusing upper heat roller AD value: 0 - 1023
DEN_LT (L) output value (final value) at the low
thermister detection sensor
speed
(center section) AD value
TONER The current toner density reference 128
TH_LM Fusing lower heat roller Temperature:
DEN_ST (L) value display (including all the
thermister (side section) A/D 0 - 255qC (r1qC)
correction values) at the low speed
value, temperature (qC) AD value: 0 - 1023
TH_EX1 Fusing external heat roller Temperature:
thermister (center section) A/D 0 - 255qC (r1qC) Setting Default
Item/Display Content
value, temperature (qC) AD value: 0 - 1023 range value
TH_EX2 Fusing external heat roller Temperature: AUTO DEVE Auto Sensor output value 1 - 255 128
thermister (side section) A/D 0 - 255qC (r1qC) (M) development after completion of
value, temperature (qC) AD value: 0 - 1023 adjustment SIM25-02
TH_M Temperature sensor A/D Temperature: value (at the medium
value, temperature (qC) -40.0qC - 60.0 (r1qC) (At the speed)
AD value: 0 - 1023 medium
HUD_M Temperature sensor A/D Humidity: speed)
value, humidity (%) 5.0 - 90.0% (r0.1%) ALL (M) All the Correction reference
AD value: 0 - 255 correction value which
TH1_LSU LSU thermister 1 A/D value, Temperature: reference calculated all the
temperature (qC) 5.0 - 60.0qC (r0.1qC) values correction values for
AD value: 0 - 255 (At the the auto
medium development
• 4.3 Inch LCD model speed) adjustment value
(at the medium
speed)
AUTO DEVE Auto Sensor output value
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12 &/26( (L) development after completion of
7(67
adjustment SIM25-02
6(1625'$7$',63/$<021,725
value (at the low speed)
7+B80GHJ;;; (At the low
7+B80B$'GHJ;;; speed)
ALL (L) All the Correction reference
7+B80B$';;;
correction value which
7+B/0GHJ;;; reference calculated all the
7+B(;GHJ;;; values correction values for
(At the low the auto
speed) development
adjustment value
(at the low speed)
• 8.5 Inch LCD model
AREA Area Correction value for -127 - 0
correction the environment 127
value area
HUD Humidity Correction value for
correction change in humidity
value
PRINT RATE Print ratio Correction value for
correction document print ratio
value
PROCON Process Correction value for
control high density process
correction control result
value
LIFE Life Correction value for
correction the developer life
value
MX-C401 SIMULATION 5 – 75
Setting Default • 4.3 Inch LCD model
Item/Display Content
range value
SENSITIVITY Sensitivity Correction for the 1 - 999 500
correction toner density
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12 &/26(
value sensitivity 7(67
AUTO DEVE Auto Sensor control 1 - 255 128 721(5&21752/'$7$',63/$<
VO (M) development voltage value after 721(5'(1B/70
adjustment completion of
721(5'(1B670
control SIM25-02
voltage (at the medium 721(5'(1B/7/
(at the speed) 721(5'(1B67/
medium
speed) . & 0 <
ALL VO (M) All the Control voltage 1(;7
correction reference value
reference which calculated all
control the correction values • 8.5 Inch LCD model
voltages for the auto
(at the development
medium adjustment value
speed) (at the medium
speed)
AUTO DEVE Auto Sensor control
VO (L) development voltage value after
adjustment completion of
control SIM25-02
voltage (at the low speed)
(at the low
speed)
ALL VO (L) All the Control voltage 1 - 255 128
correction reference value
reference which calculated all
control the correction values
voltages for the auto
(at the low development
44-21
speed) adjustment value
(at the low speed) Purpose Adjustment/Setup
AREA VO Area Control voltage -127 - 0 Function (Purpose) Used to set the half tone process control
correction correction value for 127 target.
control the environment
voltage area Section Process
HUD VO Humidity Control voltage Operation/Procedure
correction correction value for Press [EXECUTE] key.
control change in humidity
voltage The half tone process control target is set and the operation data
PRINT RATE Print ratio Control voltage are displayed.
VO correction correction value for
control the document print Display Content
voltage ratio COMPLETE Normal complete
PROCON VO Process Control voltage ERROR COLOR SENSOR Color image density sensor
control correction value for ADJUSTMENT sensitivity adjustment error
correction the high density ERROR BLACK SENSOR Black image density sensor
control process control ADJUSTMENT sensitivity adjustment error
voltage result [YMCK] High density process control error
LIFE VO Life Control voltage [YMCK]
correction correction value for OTHER Other errors
value control the developer life
voltage • 4.3 Inch LCD model
SENSITIVITY Sensitivity Control voltage 1 - 999 500
VO correction correction value for
control the toner density
voltage sensor ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
ENV VO Environment Control voltage -127 - 0 +$/)721(352&2167$1'$5'9$/8(5(*,67(5
correction correction value for 127
728&+>(;(&87(@7+(1(;(&87,2167$57
control the high humidity
voltage environment
Setting Default
Item/Display Content
range value
AUTO DEVE Area in the Humidity area 1 - 14 8 (;(&87(
AREA auto display in the
development automatic developer
adjustment adjustment
AREA Current area Current humidity
area display
MX-C401 SIMULATION 5 – 76
• 8.5 Inch LCD model
44-24
Purpose Operation data display
Function (Purpose) Used to display the correction target and
the correction level in the half tone process
control operation.
Section Process
Operation/Procedure
1) Select the display category with [NEXT] key.
2) Select a target adjustment color.
. & 0 <
1(;7
MX-C401 SIMULATION 5 – 77
44-25 44-26
Purpose Setting Purpose Adjustment/Setup
Function (Purpose) Used to set the calculating conditions of the Function (Purpose) Used to execute the half tone process con-
correction value for the half tone process trol compulsorily.
control. Section Process
Section Process Operation/Procedure
Operation/Procedure Press [EXECUTE] key.
1) Select a target adjustment color. The half tone process control is performed and the operation data
2) Select a target adjustment density level with [n] [p] key. are displayed.
3) Enter the set value with 10-key.
INTERRUPTION Forcible interruption
4) Press [OK] key. (For the 4.3 Inch LCD model, press the OSA
COMPLETE Normal complete
shortcut key.)
ERROR COLOR SENSOR Color sensor adjustment error
NOTE: Set the items to the default values unless a change is spe- ADJUSTMENT
cially required. ERROR BLACK SENSOR Black sensor adjustment error
ADJUSTMENT
Setting Default value [YMCK] High density process control [YMCK] error
Item/Display Content
range K CMY OTHER Other error
A LOW FIELD Low density 0 - 255 98 2
LOWER LIMIT approximate • 4.3 Inch LCD model
expression data
lower limit value
B LOW FIELD Low density 0 - 255 60 40
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12 &/26(
UPPER LIMIT approximate 7(67
expression data +$/)721('(16,7<&255(&7(;(&87,21
upper limit value 728&+>(;(&87(@7+(1(;(&87,2167$57
C MID FIELD Medium density 0 - 255 90 15
LOWER LIMIT approximate
expression data
lower limit value
D MID FIELD Medium density 0 - 255 6 144
UPPER LIMIT approximate (;(&87(
expression data
upper limit value
E HIGHLIGHT Reference point of 1-8 7 7
POINT the highlight • 8.5 Inch LCD model
correction amount
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
+$/)721(352&21,1,7,$/9$/8(',63/$<
$˖ ˖/2:),(/'/2:(5/,0,7
$˖ %˖ ˖/2:),(/'833(5/,0,7
˷̚˹ &˖ ˖0,'),(/'/2:(5/,0,7
'˖ ˖0,'),(/'833(5/,0,7
. & 0 <
44-27
• 8.5 Inch LCD model
Purpose Data clear
Function (Purpose) Used to clear the correction data of the half
tone process control.
Section Process
Operation/Procedure
1) Press [EXECUTE] key.
2) Press [YES] key.
The correction data of the half tone process control are
cleared.
MX-C401 SIMULATION 5 – 78
• 4.3 Inch LCD model • 8.5 Inch LCD model
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
+$/)721(352&21$'-8670(17'$7$&/($5
44-28
Purpose Adjustment/Setup
Function (Purpose) Used to set the process control execution
conditions.
Section Process
Operation/Procedure
1) Select a target item of setting with [n] [p] key on the touch
panel.
2) Enter the set value with 10-key.
3) Press [OK] key. (For the 4.3 Inch LCD model, press the OSA
shortcut key.) (The set value is saved.)
NOTE: Set the items to the default values unless a change is spe-
cially required.
Default
Mode Item/Display Content Setting range
value
Process control A INITIAL YES When warm-up after clearing the Enable 0-1 0 0
Enable/Disable NO counter of the OPC drum and the Disable 1
setting developer unit
MX-C401 SIMULATION 5 – 79
Default
Mode Item/Display Content Setting range
value
Process control E HUM The temperature and humidity in side Color process 0-2 0 0
Enable/Disable the machine are monitored only control Enable
setting during a job for every 2hours (set by Process control 1
item N). When the changes in the Disable
temperature and the humidity are BK process control 2
greater than the specified level (the Enable
set value of item O) in comparison
with the previous process control.
F REV1 YES The accumulated traveling distance Enable 0-1 0 0
NO of BK or M position OPC unit Inhibit 1
reaches the specified level after
turning the power.
G REV2_BK YES The accumulated traveling distance Enable 0-1 0 0
NO of BK position OPC drum unit Inhibit 1
reaches the specified level from
execution of the previous density
correction.
H REV2_CL YES The accumulated traveling distance Enable 0-1 0 0
NO of M position OPC drum unit reaches Inhibit 1
the specified level from execution of
the previous density correction.
I REFRESH YES Select of YES/NO of the manual Key operation 0-1 0 1
MODE(*1) process control key with key display
NO operation Key operation NO 1
display
Process control J DAY When the next warm-up if there is no Disable of the 0 - 999 0 1
conditions color job after a color job after specified days
setting passing the specified days from judgment
execution of the previous color 1 - 999 days passing 1-
process control 999
K PIX_RATIO_BK Magnification ratio setting (%) of the BK toner count specified 1 - 999 10
value entry of 100 corresponds to 1k of A4 5% print.
L PIX_RATIO_CL Magnification ratio setting (%) of the color (CMY) toner count 1 - 999 10
specified value entry of 100 corresponds to 1k of A4 5% print.
M INTERVAL TIME Passing time setting of "TIME"(h: hour) 1-255 12
(1-255: 1-255h passed)
N HUM HOUR Interval setting of the temperature and humidity monitoring 1 - 24 2
time of "HUM" (h: hour)
O HUM_DIF Area difference specified value when compared with the 1-9 2
execution of the previous process control of "HUM”
P BK_RATIO Magnification ratio setting (%) of the specified value of the 1-999 15
BK position OPC drum traveling distance of "REV2_BK” (Entry of 20 corresponds
to 100,000mm.)
Q M_RATIO Magnification ratio setting (%) of the M position OPC drum 1-999 15
traveling distance of "REV2_CL” (Entry of 20 corresponds
to 100,000mm.)
R COLOR BORDER Magnification ratio setting (%) of the BK process control 0 - 999 0 20
M position OPC drum traveling is executed without
distance when executing the BK judgment of ratio of
process control the M OPC drum
traveling distance.
(Addition)
1 - 999(%) 1-
999
S BK ONLY Disable/Enable setting and setting of Enable 5 time 0-6 0 5
the number of repetition of the BK Disable 1-5 times 1-5
process control when monochrome Inhibit 6
print is continued.
T HT_DIF Bias change difference value used for judgment of HT 1 - 255 40
process control
Registration U RG_ON_SYNC CL Select of synchronous/asynchronous of the power ON 0-2 0 2
adjustment ALL process control 1
setting CL/BK 2
V RG_TEMP_TIMER Execution timing setting after turning ON the power 0 - 240 (MINUTE) 0
W RG_PERM_TIMER Span setting from execution Disable to Enable 0 - 15 (HOUR) 1
X RG_HOUR_TIMER Span setting of timer execution 0-15 (Above)+(HOUR) 5
Secondary Y 2TRAN_CLEAN_TIME1 Secondary transfer cleaning process time judgment 1 - 999 200
transfer threshold value 1
cleaning setting Z 2TRAN_CLEAN_TIME2 Secondary transfer cleaning process time judgment 1 - 999 300
threshold value 2
AA 2TRAN_CLEAN_TIME3 Secondary transfer cleaning process time judgment 1 - 999 500
threshold value 3
MX-C401 SIMULATION 5 – 80
*1: When REFRESH MODE setting is enabled (0), the menu of the • 4.3 Inch LCD model
user process control execution button is displayed on the user sys-
tem setting menu.
When the color balance or the density change is not within the
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
allowable range, the user can perform the process control manually
and forcibly. However, toner is consumed grater than as usual. This +$/)721(6(77,1*
point must be explained to the user clearly. $˖ ˖&23<+9ė3+7ė+7
$˖
• 4.3 Inch LCD model %˖ ˖35,17(5+9ė3+7ė+7
˷̚˹ &˖ ˖)$;+9ė3+7ė+7
'˖ ˖6(/)ǂ35,17+9ė3+7ė+7
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
352&217,0,1*$'-8670(17
$˖ ˖,1,7,$/<(6
$˖ %˖ ˖6:21 • 8.5 Inch LCD model
˷̚˹ &˖ ˖7,0(
'˖ ˖+80B/,0,7
44-31
Purpose Adjustment/Setup
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the OPC drum phase. (Man-
ual adjustment)
Section Process
Operation/Procedure
44-29 NOTE: For the OPC drum phase adjustment, do not use this simu-
Purpose Setting lation, but use SIM50-22 (auto adjustment).
Function (Purpose) Used to set the operating conditions of the 1) Select item A with [n] [p] key.
process control during a job. 2) Enter the value corresponding to the adjustment pattern with
10 key.
Section Process
3) Press [EXCUTE] key. (The adjustment pattern is printed out.)
Operation/Procedure
4) Select an adjustment pattern whose deflection is within two
1) Select a target item of setting with [n] [p] key on the touch
panel. scale lines on the adjustment pattern of C,M, Y colors.
2) Enter the set value with 10-key. 5) Select item B with [n] [p] key.
3) Press [OK] key. 6) Enter the adjustment pattern sheet number selected in proce-
(For the 4.3 Inch LCD model, press the OSA shortcut key.) dure 4).
7) Press [EXECUTE] key.
Default 8) The adjusted adjustment pattern is printed.
Item/Display Content Setting range
value
A COPY During copy 0-4 0 No 4
job execution
B PRINTER During print job 1 HV only 4
C FAX During FAX 2 HV o PHT 4
print job
D SELF During self 3 HV o HT 4
PRINT print 4 HV o PHT
o HT
MX-C401 SIMULATION 5 – 81
Default
Item/Display Content Setting range
value
A PRINT MODE 45deg Print mode 45 Deflection check pattern print for every 45 degrees (8-sheet 1 1-3 3
degrees print) (SET
(1)0q (2)45q (3)90q(4)135q (5)180q (6)225q (7)270q (8)315q VALUE)
* The number in () is printed on the output pattern.
90deg 90 Deflection check pattern print for every 90 degrees (4-sheet 2
degrees print)
(1)0q (2)90q (3)180q (4)270q
* The number in () is printed on the output pattern.
SET SET Deflection check pattern print at the set value (1-sheet print) 3
VALUE VALUE
B COLOR Phase adjustment value Angle step 0q (1) o 45q (2) o 90q (3) o 135q (4) o 180q (5) 1-8 1
BKoCL o 225q (6) o 270q (7) o 315q (8)
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
'580326,7,216(77,1*
$˖ ˖35,1702'(6(79$/8(
$˖ %˖ ˖&2/25
˷̚˹ &˖ ˖3$3(5&6
(;(&87(
44-37
Purpose Adjustment/Setup
Function (Purpose) Used to set the development bias correc-
tion level in the continuous printing opera-
tion.
Section
Operation/Procedure
1) Select a set target color.
2) Select a target item with [n] [p] buttons.
3) Enter the set value with 10-key.
4) Press [OK] key.
(For the 4.3 Inch LCD model, press the OSA shortcut key.)
NOTE: When the print density is varied in the continuous printing
operation, this simulation is used.
MX-C401 SIMULATION 5 – 82
Item/Display Default value
Black CMY Black CMY Variable range
Time (T) from Low speed mode Less than 10 [sec] & after process control JOB J G 4 4 1-12
termination of Heavy paper mode 10 [sec] or more, less than 60 [sec] K H 3 3
continuous outputs 60 [sec] or more, less than 240 [sec] L I 1 1
to start of the next 240 [sec] or more M J 1 1
output operation
Middle speed mode Less than 10 [sec] & after process control JOB N K 4 4
10 [sec] or more, less than 60 [sec] O L 3 3
60 [sec] or more, less than 240 [sec] P M 1 1
240 [sec] or more Q N 1 1
High speed mode Less than 10 [sec] & after process control JOB R - 4 -
(Not used) 10 [sec] or more, less than 60 [sec] S - 3 -
60 [sec] or more, less than 240 [sec] T - 1 -
240 [sec] or more U - 1 -
<Use example>
44-43
(*1)
Purpose Data display
Make multi copy of 10 sheets. If the density of 10th sheet is greater
than that of the first sheet, decrease the set value. Function (Purpose) Used to display the identification informa-
tion of the developing unit.
Make multi copy of 10 sheets. If the density of 10th sheet is smaller
than that of the first sheet, increase the set value. Section Developing system
When the set value is 0 (Default), the correction level does not Operation/Procedure
work. The identification number and the identification signal level of the
• 4.3 Inch LCD model developing unit are displayed.
Display
Item/Display Content
range
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26( A DVCH KIND K K color development unit 1-9
identification number
,0$*('(16,7<'9%$'-8670(176(77,1*
B DVCH KIND C C color development unit 1-9
$˖ ˖'9B$'-B&/B.B/B'$7$B identification number
$˖ C DVCH KIND M M color development unit 1-9
%˖ ˖'9B$'-B&/B.B/B'$7$B
˷̚˹ identification number
&˖ ˖'9B$'-B&/B.B/B'$7$B
D DVCH KIND Y Y color development unit 1-9
'˖ ˖'9B$'-B&/B.B0B'$7$B identification number
. & 0 < E DVCH_AD_K K color developing unit identification 0 - 255
number AD value
F DVCH_AD_C C color developing unit identification 0 - 255
number AD value
• 8.5 Inch LCD model G DVCH_AD_M M color developing unit 0 - 255
identification number AD value
H DVCH_AD_Y Y color developing unit identification 0 - 255
number AD value
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
'(9(/23(581,7$'021,725
'9&+.,1'.
'9&+B$'B.
'9&+.,1'&
'9&+B$'B&ǂ
'9&+.,1'0
'9&+B$'B0ǂǂ
'9&+.,1'<
'9&+B$'B<ǂǂ
MX-C401 SIMULATION 5 – 83
* When the U V key is pressed, the setting value of each
44-61
item can be changed with 1up (1down) collectively.
Purpose Adjustment/Setup 3) Press [OK] key. (For the 4.3 Inch LCD model, press the OSA
Function (Purpose) Used to set the calibration data of the color shortcut key.) (The set value is saved.)
image sensor (image registration sensor F). To adjust the copy density in the low density area, select the "LOW"
Section mode and change the adjustment value. To adjust the copy density
Operation/Procedure in the high density area, select the "HIGH" mode and change the
adjustment value.
1) Select an item to be set.
When the adjustment value is increased, the copy density is
2) Enter the set value with 10-key.
increased. When the adjustment value is decreased, the copy den-
The set value is indicated on the label attached to the registra- sity is decreased.
tion sensor unit.
3) Press [OK] key. Item/Display Content
Setting Default
(For the 4.3 Inch LCD model, press the OSA shortcut key.) range value
A AUTO Auto LOW 1 - 99 50
Setting Default HIGH 1 - 99 50
Item/Display Content
range value B TEXT Text LOW 1 - 99 50
A PCS_CL CARB OUT Calibration plate sensor 1 - 255 108 HIGH 1 - 99 50
value C TEXT/PRINTED Text/Printed LOW 1 - 99 50
B PCS_CL LED ADJ Color sensor light 1 - 255 21 PHOTO Photo HIGH 1 - 99 50
emitting quantity D TEXT/PHOTO Text/Photograph LOW 1 - 99 50
adjustment value
HIGH 1 - 99 50
NOTE: This simulation is executed when the registration sensor E PRINTED PHOTO Printed Photo LOW 1 - 99 50
unit is replaced. When only the color image density sensor HIGH 1 - 99 50
is replaced, use SIM44-13 to perform calibration. F PHOTOGRAPH Photograph LOW 1 - 99 50
HIGH 1 - 99 50
When the set value is changed with this simulation, the
G MAP Map LOW 1 - 99 50
newly changed set value of this simulation is written over
HIGH 1 - 99 50
the calibration value set with SIM44-13.
H LIGHT Light document LOW 1 - 99 50
• 4.3 Inch LCD model HIGH 1 - 99 50
I TEXT(COPY TO Text (Copy LOW 1 - 99 50
COPY) document) HIGH 1 - 99 50
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26( J TEXT/PRINTED Text/Printed LOW 1 - 99 50
PHOTO (COPY TO Photo (Copy HIGH 1 - 99 50
3$7&+6($/$'-8670(17˄,1387
COPY) document)
$˖ ˖3&6B&/&$5%287 K PRINTED PHOTO Printed Photo LOW 1 - 99 50
$˖ %˖ ˖3&6B&//('$'- (COPY TO COPY) (Copy HIGH 1 - 99 50
˷̚˹ document)
L TEXT (COLOR Text (Color tone LOW 1 - 99 50
TONE enhancement) HIGH 1 - 99 50
ENHANCEMENT)
M TEXT/PRINTED Text/Printed LOW 1 - 99 50
PHOTO (COLOR Photo HIGH 1 - 99 50
TONE (Color tone
• 8.5 Inch LCD model ENHANCEMENT) enhancement)
N TEXT/PHOTO Text/Photograph LOW 1 - 99 50
(COLOR TONE (Color tone HIGH 1 - 99 50
ENHANCEMENT) enhancement)
O PRINTED PHOTO Printed Photo LOW 1 - 99 50
(COLOR TONE (Color tone HIGH 1 - 99 50
ENHANCEMENT) enhancement)
P PHOTOGRAPH Photograph LOW 1 - 99 50
(COLOR TONE (Color tone HIGH 1 - 99 50
ENHANCEMENT) enhancement)
Q MAP (COLOR Map LOW 1 - 99 50
TONE (Color tone HIGH 1 - 99 50
ENHANCEMENT) enhancement)
R SINGLE COLOR Single color LOW 1 - 99 50
HIGH 1 - 99 50
S SINGLE COLOR Single color LOW 1 - 99 50
(COPY TO COPY) (Copy HIGH 1 - 99 50
document)
46 T TWO COLOR 2-color (red/ LOW 1 - 99 50
black) copy HIGH 1 - 99 50
U TWO COLOR 2-color (red/ LOW 1 - 99 50
46-1
(COPY TO COPY) black) copy HIGH 1 - 99 50
Purpose Adjustment (Color copy mode) (copy document)
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the copy density in the copy
mode.
Section
Operation/Procedure
1) Select an adjustment target item with [n] [p] key.
2) Enter the set value with 10-key.
MX-C401 SIMULATION 5 – 84
• 4.3 Inch LCD model Setting Default
Item/Display Content
range value
I TEXT (COPY TO Text (Copy LOW 1 - 99 50
COPY) document) HIGH 1 - 99 50
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26( J TEXT/PRINTED Text/Printed LOW 1 - 99 50
(;32685($'-8670(17&2/25>&23<@ PHOTO (COPY TO Photo (Copy HIGH 1 - 99 50
$˖ ˖$872 COPY) document)
$˖ K PRINTED PHOTO Printed Photo LOW 1 - 99 50
%˖ ˖7(;7 (COPY TO COPY) (Copy HIGH 1 - 99 50
˷̚˹ &˖ǂ ˖7(;735,17('ǂ3+272 document)
'˖ ˖7(;73+272 L LIGHT Light LOW 1 - 99 50
document HIGH 1 - 99 50
/2: +,*+
• 4.3 Inch LCD model
'˖ ˖7(;735,17('3+272
/2: +,*+
46-2
Purpose Adjustment (Monochrome copy mode)
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the copy density in the copy
mode.
Section
Operation/Procedure
1) Select an adjustment target item with [n] [p] key.
2) Enter the set value with 10-key.
* When the U V key is pressed, the setting value of each
item can be changed with 1up (1down) collectively.
3) Press [OK] key. (For the 4.3 Inch LCD model, press the OSA
46-4
shortcut key.) (The set value is saved.)
Purpose Adjustment (Color scanner mode)
To adjust the copy density in the low density area, select the "LOW"
mode and change the adjustment value. To adjust the copy density Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the density in the image
in the high density area, select the "HIGH" mode and change the send mode.
adjustment value. Section
When the adjustment value is increased, the copy density is Operation/Procedure
increased. When the adjustment value is decreased, the copy den- 1) Select an adjustment target item with [n] [p] key.
sity is decreased.
2) Enter the set value with 10-key.
Setting Default * When the U V key is pressed, the setting value of each
Item/Display Content
range value item can be changed with 1up (1down) collectively.
A AUTO1 Auto 1 LOW 1 - 99 50 3) Press [OK] key. (For the 4.3 Inch LCD model, press the OSA
HIGH 1 - 99 50 shortcut key.) (The set value is saved.)
B AUTO2 Auto 2 LOW 1 - 99 50
When the adjustment value is increased, the image density is
HIGH 1 - 99 50
increased, and vice versa.
C TEXT Text LOW 1 - 99 50
HIGH 1 - 99 50 Setting Default
D TEXT/PRINTED Text/Printed LOW 1 - 99 50 Item/Display Content
range value
PHOTO Photo HIGH 1 - 99 50 A AUTO Auto 1 - 99 50
E TEXT/PHOTO Text/ LOW 1 - 99 50 B TEXT Text 1 - 99 50
Photograph HIGH 1 - 99 50 C TEXT/PRINTED Text/Printed Photo 1 - 99 50
F PRINTED PHOTO Printed Photo LOW 1 - 99 50 PHOTO
HIGH 1 - 99 50 D TEXT/PHOTO Text/Photograph 1 - 99 50
G PHOTOGRAPH Photograph LOW 1 - 99 50 E PRINTED PHOTO Printed Photo 1 - 99 50
HIGH 1 - 99 50 F PHOTOGRAPH Photograph 1 - 99 50
H MAP Map LOW 1 - 99 50 G MAP Map 1 - 99 50
HIGH 1 - 99 50
MX-C401 SIMULATION 5 – 85
• 4.3 Inch LCD model • 8.5 Inch LCD model
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
(;32685($'-8670(17&2/25>6&$11(5@
$˖ ˖$872
$˖ %˖ ˖7(;7
˷̚˹ &˖ǂ ˖7(;735,17('ǂ3+272
'˖ ˖7(;73+272
46-8
Purpose Adjustment (Color scanner mode)
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the image send mode color
balance RGB.
Section
Operation/Procedure
1) Select an adjustment target.
2) Select an adjustment target item with [n] [p] key.
3) Enter the set value with 10-key.
4) Press [OK] key. (For the 4.3 Inch LCD model, press the OSA
shortcut key.) (The set value is saved.)
The color balance can be adjusted separately for the low density
46-5 area and the high density area.
Purpose Adjustment (Monochrome scanner mode) When the adjustment value is increased, the image density of the
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the density in the image target color is increased, and vice versa.
send mode.
Default
Section Item/Display Content
value
Operation/Procedure A LOW DENSITY POINT Low density correction 50
amount
1) Select an adjustment target item with [n] [p] key.
B HIGH DENSITY POINT High density correction 50
2) Enter the set value with 10-key. amount
* When the U V key is pressed, the setting value of each
item can be changed with 1up (1down) collectively. • 4.3 Inch LCD model
3) Press [OK] key. (For the 4.3 Inch LCD model, press the OSA
shortcut key.) (The set value is saved.)
When the adjustment value is increased, the image density is ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
increased, and vice versa. 6&$11(5&2/25%$/$1&($'-&2/256&$11(502'(
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
(;32685($'-8670(17%:>6&$11(5@
$˖ ˖$872
$˖ %˖ ˖7(;7
˷̚˹ &˖ǂ ˖7(;735,17('ǂ3+272
'˖ ˖7(;73+272
MX-C401 SIMULATION 5 – 86
46-9 46-10
Purpose Adjustment (RSPF mode) Purpose Adjustment
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the scan image density. Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the copy color balance and
Section the gamma (for each color copy mode).
Operation/Procedure Section
1) Select an adjustment target mode with [OC] and [RSPF] keys. Operation/Procedure
2) Select an adjustment target item with [n] [p] key. 1) Select an adjustment target mode.
3) Enter the set value with 10-key. 2) Select an adjustment target color.
* When the U V key is pressed, the setting value of each 3) Select an adjustment target item with [n] [p] key.
item can be changed with 1up (1down) collectively. 4) Enter the set value with 10-key.
4) Press [OK] key. (For the 4.3 Inch LCD model, press the OSA * When the U V key is pressed, the setting value of each
shortcut key.) (The set value is saved.) item can be changed with 1up (1down) collectively.
This adjustment result affects the image send mode, the copy 5) Press [OK] key. (For the 4.3 Inch LCD model, press the OSA
mode, and the fax mode. shortcut key.) (The set value is saved.)
When the adjustment value is increased, the image density is When the adjustment value is increased, the image density is
increased, and vice versa. increased, and vice versa.
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ
7(67 &/26(
(1*,1(&2/25%$/$1&(0$18$/$'-8670(17
• 8.5 Inch LCD model
7(;7 7;7353+ 35,173+ 3+7;73+
0$3 /,*+7 &23<25*
MX-C401 SIMULATION 5 – 87
• 8.5 Inch LCD model • 8.5 Inch LCD model
46-16 46-19
Purpose Adjustment Purpose Setting
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the monochrome copy den- Function (Purpose) Used to set the operating conditions for the
sity and the gamma (for each monochrome density scanning (exposure) of mono-
copy mode). chrome auto copy mode documents.
Section Section
Operation/Procedure Operation/Procedure
1) Select an adjustment target item with [n] [p] key. Select an item to be set.
2) Enter the set value with 10-key. When an item is selected, it is highlighted and the setting change is
* When the U V key is pressed, the setting value of each saved.
item can be changed with 1up (1down) collectively.
Default
3) Press [OK] key. (For the 4.3 Inch LCD model, press the OSA Item/Display Content Set value
value
shortcut key.) (The set value is saved.) AE_MODE Auto exposure mode MODE1, MODE1
When the adjustment value is increased, the image density is MODE2
increased, and vice versa. AE_STOP_COPY Auto B/W exposure REALTIME/ STOP
Stop (for copy) STOP/
Density level Default PRESCAN
Item/Display Setting range
(Point) value AE_STOP_FAX Auto B/W exposure ON/OFF ON
A POINT1 Point 1 373 - 627 500 Stop (for FAX)
B POINT2 Point 2 373 - 627 500 AE_STOP_SCAN Auto B/W exposure REALTIME/ STOP
C POINT3 Point 3 373 - 627 500 Stop (for scanner) STOP/
D POINT4 Point 4 373 - 627 500 PRESCAN
E POINT5 Point 5 373 - 627 500 AE_FILTER Auto exposure filter SOFT NORMAL
F POINT6 Point 6 373 - 627 500 setting NORMAL
G POINT7 Point 7 373 - 627 500 SHARP
H POINT8 Point 8 373 - 627 500 AE_WIDTH AE exposure width FULL/PART PART
I POINT9 Point 9 373 - 627 500
NOTE:
J POINT10 Point 10 373 - 627 500
K POINT11 Point 11 373 - 627 500 MODE 1 High gamma (high contrast images)
L POINT12 Point 12 373 - 627 500 MODE 2 Normal gamma
M POINT13 Point 13 373 - 627 500 STOP The image density in 3 - 7mm area at the lead edge is
N POINT14 Point 14 373 - 627 500 scanned, and the output image density is determined
O POINT15 Point 15 373 - 627 500 according to the scanned density. (The output image
P POINT16 Point 16 373 - 627 500 density is even for all the surface.)
Q POINT17 Point 17 373 - 627 500 REALTIME The densities of the document width are scanned
sequentially, and the output image density is
• 4.3 Inch LCD model determined according to the density in each area of
document. (The output image density may not be
even for all the surface.)
PRESCAN The densities of the all surface of document are
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21
7(67 ǂǂ12 &/26( scanned sequentially, and the output image density is
(1*,1(&2/25%$/$1&(0$18$/$'->$//%:@3* determined according to the average of the scanned
densities. (The output image density is even for all the
$˖ ˖32,17
surface.)
$˖ %˖ ˖32,17 AE WIDTH FULL The document density scan area in the monochrome
˷̚ ˹ &˖ ˖32,17 auto mode is 3 - 7mm at the document lead edge x
the document width. This is not related to the prescan
'˖ ˖32,17 mode.
AE WIDTH PART The document density scan area in the monochrome
(;(&87(
auto mode is 3 - 7mm at the document lead edge x
100mm width. This is not related to the PRESCAN
mode.
MX-C401 SIMULATION 5 – 88
• 4.3 Inch LCD model • 4.3 Inch LCD model
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26( ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21
7(67 ǂǂ12 &/26(
(;32685(02'(6(783%:$( (1*,1(&2/25%$/$1&(0$18$/$'->$//&2/25@
$(B02'( 02'( 02'( $˖ ˖32,17
$(B63B&3 5($/7,0( 6723 35(6&$1
$˖ %˖ ˖32,17
$(B63B)$; 2)) 21 ˷̚ ˹ &˖ ˖32,17
$(B63B6&$1 5($/7,0( 6723 35(6&$1 '˖ ˖32,17
$(B),/7(5 62)7 1250$/ 6+$53
. & 0 < (;(&87(
46-21 46-23
Purpose Adjustment Purpose Adjustment/Setup
Function (Purpose) Copy color balance adjustment (Manual Function (Purpose) Used to set the density correction of copy
adjustment) high density section (High density tone gap
Section supported).
Operation/Procedure Section
1) Select an adjustment target color. Operation/Procedure
2) Use [n] [p] keys to select a density level to be adjusted. 1) Enter the set value with 10-key.
3) Enter the set value with 10-key.
0 Enable
* When the U V key is pressed, the setting value of each 1 Inhibit
item can be changed with 1up (1down) collectively.
4) Press [OK] key. (For the 4.3 Inch LCD model, press the OSA 2) Press [OK] key. (For the 4.3 Inch LCD model, press the OSA
shortcut key.) (The set value is saved.) shortcut key.) (The set value is saved.)
When the adjustment value is increased, the image density is Setting Default
increased, and vice versa. Item/Display Content
range value
When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the check pattern in printed in A CMY 0 CMY engine 0-1 0
the color balance and density corresponding to the adjustment (0 : ENABLE highest density
value. 1 : DISABLE) correction mode :
Enable
Density level Default 1 CMY engine
Item/Display Setting range highest density
(Point) value
A POINT1 Point 1 245 - 755 500 correction mode :
B POINT2 Point 2 245 - 755 500 Disable
C POINT3 Point 3 245 - 755 500 B K 0 K engine highest 0-1 1
(0 : ENABLE density correction
D POINT4 Point 4 245 - 755 500
1 : DISABLE) mode : Enable
E POINT5 Point 5 245 - 755 500
1 K engine highest
F POINT6 Point 6 245 - 755 500
density correction
G POINT7 Point 7 245 - 755 500 mode : Disable
H POINT8 Point 8 245 - 755 500 C CYAN MAX Scanner target value for 0 - 999 629
I POINT9 Point 9 245 - 755 500 TARGET CYAN maximum
J POINT10 Point 10 245 - 755 500 density correction
K POINT11 Point 11 245 - 755 500 D MAGENTA MAX Scanner target value for 0 - 999 532
L POINT12 Point 12 245 - 755 500 TARGET MAGENTA maximum
M POINT13 Point 13 245 - 755 500 density correction
N POINT14 Point 14 245 - 755 500 E YELLOW MAX Scanner target value for 0 - 999 500
O POINT15 Point 15 245 - 755 500 TARGET YELLOW maximum
P POINT16 Point 16 245 - 755 500 density correction
Q POINT17 Point 17 245 - 755 500
MX-C401 SIMULATION 5 – 89
Setting Default • 4.3 Inch LCD model
Item/Display Content
range value
F BLACK MAX Scanner target value for 0 - 999 500
TARGET BLACK maximum
density correction ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
(1*,1(+$/)721($872$'-8670(1702'(5(*8/$5
* When tone gap is generated in the high density area, set items A
35(66>(;(&87(@72352&21(;($1'35,177+(7(673$7&+
and B to "0.
3/($6(86(63(&,),('7<3(2)$25h6,=(3$3(5
The density of high density part decreases. However, the tone
gap is better. )257+,6$'-
* To increase the density in the high density area further, set items
A and B to "1.
(;(&87(
The tone gap may occur in high density part.
NOTE: Do not change the values of items C, D, E, and F. If these
values are changed, the density in the high density area is
changed. • 8.5 Inch LCD model
• 4.3 Inch LCD model
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21
7(67 ǂǂ12 &/26(
(1*,1(0$;,080'(16,7<$'-8670(1702'(
$˖ ˖&0<˄(1$%/( ǂ˖',6$%/(˅
$˖ %˖ ˖.˄(1$%/( ǂ˖',6$%/(˅
˷̚ ˹ &˖ ˖&<$1ǂ0$; ǂ7$5*(7
'˖ ˖&<$1
& 0 <
MX-C401 SIMULATION 5 – 90
• 8.5 Inch LCD model
46-27
Purpose Adjustment/Setup
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the gamma/density of copy
images, texts, and line image edges.
Section
Operation/Procedure
1) Select a target item of setting with [n] [p] key.
2) Enter the set value with 10-key.
3) Press [OK] key. (For the 4.3 Inch LCD model, press the OSA
shortcut key.) (The set value is saved.)
MX-C401 SIMULATION 5 – 91
46-30 46-32
Purpose Adjustment/Setup Purpose Adjustment/Setup
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the resolution in the sub Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the document background
scanning direction in the copy mode. density reproducibility in the monochrome
Section auto copy mode.
Operation/Procedure Section
1) Refer to the following table, and enter the set value corre- Operation/Procedure
sponding to the resolution mode with 10 key. 1) Select a target item of setting with [n] [p] key.
2) Press [OK] key. (For the 4.3 Inch LCD model, press the OSA 2) Enter the set value with 10-key.
shortcut key.) (The set value is saved.) 3) Press [OK] key. (For the 4.3 Inch LCD model, press the OSA
shortcut key.) (The set value is saved.)
Setting Default
Item/Display Content When the adjustment value is increased, reproducibility of the
range value
A SCAN Scan resolution Mode1 0-1 0 0 background and the low density image is increased. When the
RESOLUTION selection Mode2 1 adjustment value is decreased, reproducibility of the background
SW (COPY: COLOR) and the low density image is decreased.
Setting Default
Resolution in the sub scanning direction Item/Display Content
range value
(DPI)
A COPY : OC Copy mode (for OC) 1 - 250 196
Mode Scan mode 25-99% 100-200% 201-400%
B COPY : RSPF Copy mode (for RSPF) 1 - 250 196
[Magnifica- [Magnifica- [Magnifica-
C SCAN : OC Scanner mode (for OC) 1 - 250 196
tion ratio] tion ratio] tion ratio]
D SCAN : RSPF Scanner mode 1 - 250 196
Mode1 OC 600 600 1200
(for RSPF)
RSPF 600 600 1200
E FAX : OC FAX mode (for OC) 1 - 250 196
Mode2 OC 300 600 1200
F FAX : RSPF FAX mode (for RSPF) 1 - 250 196
RSPF 300 600 1200
• 4.3 Inch LCD model
• 4.3 Inch LCD model
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
/,0,72)$(5($&7,216(77,1*
6&$15(62/87,216(77,1*
$˖ ˖&23<˖2&
$˖ ˖6&$15(62/87,216:
$˖ $˖
%˖ ˖&23<˖563)
˷̚˹ &˖ ˖6&$1˖2&
˷̚˹
'˖ ˖6&$1˖563)
MX-C401 SIMULATION 5 – 92
46-36 Setting Default
Item/Display Content
range value
Purpose Adjustment/Setup
A R-Ratio Gray making setting (R) 0 - 1000 21
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the colors in the 2-color B G-Ratio Gray making setting (G) 0 - 1000 828
copy mode.
Section When [DEFAULT] key is pressed, it is set to the default value.
Operation/Procedure When the adjustment values of items A and B are decreased, the
copy density of yellow images is increased. When the adjustment
1) Select a target adjustment item with [n] [p] key.
values are increased, the density is decreased.
2) Enter the set value with 10-key.
When the adjustment value of item A is decreased and the adjust-
3) Press [OK] key. (For the 4.3 Inch LCD model, press the OSA ment value of item B is increased, the copy density of red images is
shortcut key.) (The set value is saved.) increased. When the adjustment value of item A is increased and
By changing the density level of each color, the color adjustment in the adjustment value of item B is decreased, the copy density is
the 2-color copy mode can be performed. decreased.
• 4.3 Inch LCD model
Setting Default value
Item/Display Content
range C M Y
A RED R output color 0 - 255 0 255 200
B GREEN G output color 0 - 255 255 0 255 ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12 &/26(
7(67
C BLUE B output color 0 - 255 255 200 0
% :,0$*(&5($7($'-8670(17%5DWLR
D CYAN C output color 0 - 255 255 0 0
$˖ ˖55DWLR
E MAGENTA M output color 0 - 255 0 255 0
$˖
F YELLOW Y output color 0 - 255 0 0 255 %˖ ˖*5DWLR
˷̚˹
• 4.3 Inch LCD model
5('%/$&.&2/25&23<$'-8670(17
$˖ ˖5(' • 8.5 Inch LCD model
$˖ %˖ ˖*5((1
˷̚ ˹ &˖ ˖%/8(
& 0 <
46-38
Purpose Adjustment/Setup
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the black component
amount in the color copy mode.
Section
Operation/Procedure
1) Select the AUTO MODE or the MANUAL MODE with the mode
key.
46-37
2) Select the mode to be adjusted with [n] [p] key.
Purpose Adjustment/Setup
3) Select the black component amount.
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the color document repro-
This adjusts black ingredient amount in the color copy mode.
ducibility in the monochrome copy mode.
(except character and line image)
Section
As a result of this adjustment, the gradation of the shade part
Operation/Procedure changes.
1) Select a target item with [n] [p] keys.
Select Default
2) Enter the set value with 10-key. Item/Display (Copy mode) Content
button value
3) Press [EXECUTE] key. MANUAL TEXT PRT (-) LUT2 Text print NORMAL
4) Press [YES] key. (-) LUT1 (Manual)
This simulation is used to adjust the reproducibility of red and yel- NOMAL
low images when copy a color document of red and yellow images (+) LUT1
in the monochrome mode. (+) LUT2
MX-C401 SIMULATION 5 – 93
Select Default Select Default
Item/Display (Copy mode) Content Item/Display (Copy mode) Content
button value button value
MANUAL TEXT (-) LUT2 Text (Manual) NORMAL AUTO AUTO5 (-) LUT2 Auto mode NORMAL
(-) LUT1 (-) LUT1 judgment 5
NOMAL NOMAL
(+) LUT1 (+) LUT1
(+) LUT2 (+) LUT2
PRINTED (-) LUT2 Printed photo NORMAL AUTO6 (-) LUT2 Auto mode NORMAL
PHT (-) LUT1 (Manual) (-) LUT1 judgment 6
NOMAL NOMAL
(+) LUT1 (+) LUT1
(+) LUT2 (+) LUT2
PHOTO (-) LUT2 Photographic NORMAL
paper • 4.3 Inch LCD model
(-) LUT1
NOMAL (Manual)
(+) LUT1
(+) LUT2 ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12 &/26(
7(67
TEXT (-) LUT2 Text/ NORMAL
%/$&.,0$*(&5($7($'-8670(17
PHOTO (-) LUT1 Photograph
(Manual) 7(;7ǂ357 ˄˅/87 ˄˅/87 120$/
NOMAL
(+) LUT1 ˄˅/87 ˄˅/87
(+) LUT2 7(;7 ˄˅/87 ˄˅/87 120$/
MAP (-) LUT2 Map (Manual) (+) LUT1
˄˅/87 ˄˅/87
(-) LUT1
NOMAL 0$18$/ $872
(+) LUT1
(+) LUT2
CP ORG/ (-) LUT2 Copy NORMAL
TEXT PR document/ • 8.5 Inch LCD model
(-) LUT1
NOMAL Text printed
(+) LUT1 (Manual)
(+) LUT2
COPY ORG/ (-) LUT2 Copy NORMAL
TXT (-) LUT1 document/
NOMAL Text (Manual)
(+) LUT1
(+) LUT2
COPY ORG/ (-) LUT2 Copy NORMAL
PHT (-) LUT1 document/
NOMAL Printed photo
(+) LUT1 (Manual)
(+) LUT2
LIGHT ORG (-) LUT2 Light (+) LUT1
(-) LUT1 document
NOMAL (Manual)
46-39
(+) LUT1
(+) LUT2 Purpose Adjustment/Setup
AUTO AUTO0 (-) LUT2 Auto mode NORMAL Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the sharpness of FAX send
(-) LUT1 judgment 0 images.
NOMAL Section
(+) LUT1
Operation/Procedure
(+) LUT2
AUTO1 (-) LUT2 Auto mode NORMAL 1) Select a target item with [n] [p] keys.
(-) LUT1 judgment 1 2) Enter the set value with 10-key.
NOMAL 3) Press [OK] key. (For the 4.3 Inch LCD model, press the OSA
(+) LUT1 shortcut key.) (The set value is saved.)
(+) LUT2 Input small numeric value to obtain crispy image. Input large
AUTO2 (-) LUT2 Auto mode NORMAL numeric value to decrease moire.
(-) LUT1 judgment 2
NOMAL Setting Default
Item/Display Content
(+) LUT1 range value
(+) LUT2 A 200 x 100 [DPI] 200 x 100 [DPI] 0-2 1
AUTO3 (-) LUT2 Auto mode NORMAL OFF half tone OFF
(-) LUT1 judgment 3 B 200 x 200 [DPI] 200 x 200 [DPI] 0-2 1
NOMAL OFF half tone OFF
(+) LUT1 C 200 x 200 [DPI] 200 x 200 [DPI] 0-2 1
(+) LUT2 ON half tone ON
AUTO4 (-) LUT2 Auto mode NORMAL D 200 x 400 [DPI] 200 x 400 [DPI] 0-2 1
judgment 4 OFF half tone OFF
(-) LUT1
E 200 x 400 [DPI] 200 x 400 [DPI] 0-2 1
NOMAL
ON half tone ON
(+) LUT1
F 400 x 400 [DPI] 400 x 400[DPI] 0-2 1
(+) LUT2
OFF half tone OFF
MX-C401 SIMULATION 5 – 94
Setting Default • 4.3 Inch LCD model
Item/Display Content
range value
G 400 x 400 [DPI] 400 x 400[DPI] 0-2 1
ON half tone ON
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21
7(67 ǂǂ12 &/26(
H 600 x 600 [DPI] 600 x 600[DPI] 0-2 1
OFF half tone OFF (;32685($'-8670(17)$;$//
I 600 x 600 [DPI] 600 x 600[DPI] 0-2 1 $˖ ˖(;32685(/(9(/ $//
ON half tone ON $˖
• 4.3 Inch LCD model ˷̚ ˹
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21 ǂǂ12 (;(&87(
7(67 &/26(
,0$*(6(1'6+$531(66$'-8670(17
$˖ ˖h >'3,@2))
• 8.5 Inch LCD model
$˖ %˖ ˖h >'3,@2))
˷̚ ˹ &˖ ˖h >'3,@21
46-41
Purpose Adjustment/Setup
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the FAX send image density.
(Normal)
Section
Operation/Procedure
1) Set the original on the original table.
46-40 2) Enter the set value with 10-key.
Purpose Adjustment/Setup 3) Press [OK] key (For the 4.3 Inch LCD model, press the OSA
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the FAX send image density. shortcut key.)
(Collective adjustment of all the modes) When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the adjustment value is set
Section and the scanned document image is outputted.
MX-C401 SIMULATION 5 – 95
• 4.3 Inch LCD model Setting Default
Item/Display Content
range value
M EXECUTE AUTO Print Fine/Auto 1- 1 1
MODE EXP1 mode Fine/ 12 2 (AUTO)
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21
7(67 ǂǂ12 &/26( Exposure 1
(;(32685($'-8670(17)$;1250$/ EXP2 Fine/ 3
$˖ ˖$872 Exposure 2
$˖ EXP3 Fine/ 4
%˖ ˖(;32685(
Exposure 3
˷̚ ˹ &˖ ˖(;32685( EXP4 Fine/ 5
'˖ ˖(;32685( Exposure 4
EXP5 Fine/ 6
(;(&87( Exposure 5
AUTO Fine/ 7
H_TONE Automatic/
halftone
• 8.5 Inch LCD model
EXP1 Fine/ 8
H_TONE Exposure 1
/Half tone
EXP2 Fine/ 9
H_TONE Exposure 2
/Half tone
EXP3 Fine/ 10
H_TONE Exposure 3
/Half tone
EXP4 Fine/ 11
H_ONE Exposure 4
/Half tone
EXP5 Fine/ 12
H_TONE Exposure 5
/Half tone
MX-C401 SIMULATION 5 – 96
• 4.3 Inch LCD model
46-43
Purpose Adjustment/Setup
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the FAX send image density.
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
(Super Fine)
(;(32685($'-8670(17)$;683(5),1(
Section
$˖ ˖$872
Operation/Procedure $˖ %˖ ˖(;32685(
1) Set the original on the original table.
˷̚˹ &˖ ˖(;32685(
2) Enter the set value with 10-key.
3) Press [OK] key. (For the 4.3 Inch LCD model, press the OSA '˖ ˖(;32685(
MX-C401 SIMULATION 5 – 97
Setting Default
Item/Display Content 46-45
range value
M EXECUTE AUTO Print Ultra Fine/ 1- 1 1 Purpose Adjustment/Setup
MODE mode Auto 12 (AUTO) Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the FAX send image density.
EXP1 Ultra Fine/ 2 (600dpi).
Exposure 1
Section
EXP2 Ultra Fine/ 3
Exposure 2 Operation/Procedure
EXP3 Ultra Fine/ 4 1) Set the original on the original table.
Exposure 3 2) Enter the set value with 10-key.
EXP4 Ultra Fine/ 5
Exposure 4
3) Press [OK] key. (For the 4.3 Inch LCD model, press the OSA
EXP5 Ultra Fine/ 6 shortcut key.)
Exposure 5 When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the adjustment value is set
AUTO Ultra Fine/ 7 and the scanned document image is outputted.
H_TONE Auto/Half
tone Setting Default
Item/Display Content
EXP1 Ultra Fine/ 8 range value
H_TONE Exposure A AUTO 600dpi/Auto 1 1 - 99 50
1/Half tone B EXPOSURE1 600dpi/Exposure 1 1 - 99 50
EXP2 Ultra Fine/ 9 C EXPOSURE2 600dpi/Exposure 2 1 - 99 50
H_TONE Exposure 2 D EXPOSURE3 600dpi/Exposure 3 1 - 99 50
/Half tone E EXPOSURE4 600dpi/Exposure 4 1 - 99 50
EXP3 Ultra Fine/ 10 F EXPOSURE5 600dpi/Exposure 5 1 - 99 50
H_TONE Exposure 3
G AUTO H_TONE 600dpi/Auto 1 - 99 50
/Half tone
/Half tone 1
EXP4 Ultra Fine/ 11
H EXPOSURE1 H_TONE 600dpi/Exposure 1 1 - 99 50
H_TONE Exposure 4
/Half tone
/Half tone
I EXPOSURE2 H_TONE 600dpi/Exposure 2 1 - 99 50
EXP5 Ultra Fine/ 12
/Half tone
H_TONE Exposure 5
J EXPOSURE3 H_TONE 600dpi/Exposure 3 1 - 99 50
/Half tone
/Half tone
To check the adjustment density level of items A - L, set the docu- K EXPOSURE4 H_TONE 600dpi/Exposure 4 1 - 99 50
ment and set the setting value of item M according to items A - L, /Half tone
and press [EXECUTE] key. L EXPOSURE5 H_TONE 600dpi/Exposure 5 1 - 99 50
/Half tone
• 4.3 Inch LCD model
M EXECUTE AUTO Print 600dpi/Auto 1- 1 1
MODE EXP1 mode 600dpi/ 12 2 (AUTO)
Exposure 1
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12 &/26(
EXP2 600dpi/ 3
7(67
Exposure 2
(;(32685($'-8670(17)$;8/75$),1(
EXP3 600dpi/ 4
$˖ ˖$872 Exposure 3
$˖ EXP4 600dpi/ 5
%˖ ˖(;32685(
Exposure 4
˷̚˹ &˖ ˖(;32685(
EXP5 600dpi/ 6
'˖ ˖(;32685( Exposure 5
AUTO 600dpi/Auto/ 7
(;(&87( H_TONE Half tone
EXP1 600dpi/ 8
H_TONE Exposure 1
• 8.5 Inch LCD model /Half tone
EXP2 600dpi/ 9
H_TONE Exposure 2
/Half tone
EXP3 600dpi/ 10
H_TONE Exposure 3
/Half tone
EXP4 600dpi/ 11
H_TONE Exposure 4
/Half tone
EXP5 600dpi/ 12
H_TONE Exposure 5
/Half tone
MX-C401 SIMULATION 5 – 98
• 4.3 Inch LCD model Operation Setting Default
Item/Display Content
mode range value
COPY B COPY LOW Low 0 0
(GRAY) (G) compres (LOW)
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21 ǂǂ12 &/26(
7(67 (COPY sion
(;(32685($'-8670(17)$;'3, (Monochrome (Gray)
half-tone MIDDLE Medium 1
$˖ ˖$872
$˖ mode)) compres
%˖ ˖(;32685( sion
˷̚ ˹ &˖ ˖(;32685( (Gray)
HIGH High 2
'˖ ˖(;32685(
compres
(;(&87(
sion
(Gray)
LOWER Super 3
low
• 8.5 Inch LCD model compres
sion
(Gray)
PUSH SCAN C SCAN MIDDLE Medium 0 0
(COLOR) (C) (*1) 1 compres (MID
(Scanner sion DLE1)
(Color mode)) mode 1
Low
compres
sion
MIDDLE Medium 1
2 compres
sion
mode 2
Medium
compres
sion
MIDDLE Medium 2
46-47 3 compres
sion
Purpose Adjustment/Setup mode 3
Function (Purpose) Used to set the compression rate of copy High
and scan images (JPEG). compres
sion
Section
PUSH SCAN D SCAN MIDDLE Medium 0 0
Operation/Procedure (GRAY) (G) (*1) 1 compres (MID
1) Select a target item with [n] [p] keys. (Scanner sion DLE1)
(Monochrome mode 1
2) Enter the set value with 10-key.
half-tone Low
3) Press [OK] key. mode)) compres
(For the 4.3 Inch LCD model, press the OSA shortcut key.) sion
The set value is saved. MIDDLE Medium 1
2 compres
Operation Setting Default sion
Item/Display Content mode 2
mode range value
COPY A COPY LOW Low 0 0 Medium
(COLOR) (C) compres (LOW) compres
(COPY sion sion
(COLOR (Color) MIDDLE Medium 2
mode)) MIDDLE Medium 1 3 compres
compres sion
sion mode 3
(Color) High
compres
HIGH High 2
sion
compres
sion *1: Setting of compression rate for images when the image com-
(Color)
pression rate is set to "Medium" in the user mode.
LOWER Super 3
low
NOTE: When the compression rate is increased, the HDD capacity
compres in the document filing mode is decreased. On the other hand, how-
sion ever, the image quality of some documents may be remarkably
(Color) reduced.
MX-C401 SIMULATION 5 – 99
• 4.3 Inch LCD model Density level Default
Item/Display Setting range
(Point) value
F POINT6 Point 6 245 - 755 500
G POINT7 Point 7 245 - 755 500
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
H POINT8 Point 8 245 - 755 500
&23<6&$1&2035(665$7($'-8670(17 I POINT9 Point 9 245 - 755 500
$˖ ˖&23<&/2: J POINT10 Point 10 245 - 755 500
$˖ K POINT11 Point 11 245 - 755 500
%˖ ˖&23<*/2:
L POINT12 Point 12 245 - 755 500
˷̚˹ &˖ ˖6&$1&0,''/(
M POINT13 Point 13 245 - 755 500
'˖ ˖6&$1*0,''/( N POINT14 Point 14 245 - 755 500
O POINT15 Point 15 245 - 755 500
P POINT16 Point 16 245 - 755 500
Q POINT17 Point 17 245 - 755 500
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21
7(67 ǂǂ12 &/26(
&23,(5+($9<3$3(5*$00$$'-8670(17+($9<
$˖ ˖32,17
$˖ %˖ ˖32,17
˷̚ ˹ &˖ ˖32,17
46-51
Purpose Adjustment/Setup
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the gamma for the copy
mode heavy paper mode and the image
process mode. (Manual adjustment)
Section
Operation/Procedure
1) Select a target adjustment mode.
Select the gamma adjustment of PAPER (heavy paper mode)
or DITHER (image process mode).
To select the kind of DITHER in the 4.3 Inch LCD model, select
[PAPER/DITHER] and press [OK] key. Everytime when [OK]
key is pressed, the kind of DITHER is switched. NOTE: The adjustment values can be reset to the default values
with SIM46-52.
2) Select an adjustment target color.
3) Select a target adjustment density level with [n] [p] key.
46-52
4) Enter the set value with 10-key.
Purpose Adjustment/Setup
5) Press [OK] key. (For the 4.3 Inch LCD model, press the OSA
shortcut key.) Function (Purpose) Used to reset the copy color balance
adjustment (adjustment for each dither) to
When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the adjustment pattern is
the default value. (The set values of SIM46-
printed.
51 and SIM46-54 are set to the default val-
When the image density is insufficient or a background copy is ues.)
made in heavy paper copy, change this adjustment value to adjust
the image density. Section
Operation/Procedure
Item/Display Content Color 1) Select an item to be reset to the default (for each dither).
HEAVY Copier heavy paper gamma KCMY
To reset the adjustment values of all the items, select [ALL].
DITH1 Black edge K
DITH2 Color edge KCMY Select item
DITH3 Color error diffusion KCMY Content
(Mode/Image)
DITH4 Monochrome error diffusion K Heavy Paper Adjustment item to improve the color balance in the
heavy paper mode
Density level Default Black Edge Adjustment item (K) to improve the reproduction of lines,
Item/Display Setting range text density, and thickness
(Point) value
A POINT1 Point 1 245 - 755 500 Color Edge Adjustment item (Color) to improve the reproduction of
lines, text density, and thickness
B POINT2 Point 2 245 - 755 500
C POINT3 Point 3 245 - 755 500 B/W Adjustment item to improve the density and gradation in
the monochrome mode
D POINT4 Point 4 245 - 755 500
E POINT5 Point 5 245 - 755 500
Section 3/($6(86(63(&,),('7<3(2)$25h6,=(3$3(5
Operation/Procedure ǂ)257+,6$'-
The color balance, the density, and the gradation are adjusted for
the monochrome mode, the heavy paper mode, the text, and the (;(&87(
line image edges.
This simulation is used to improve image quality in these modes
and images.
1) Press [EXECUTE] key. (A4 or 11" x 8.5" paper is automatically • 8.5 Inch LCD model
selected.) The color patch image (adjustment pattern) is
printed.
2) Set the color patch image (adjustment pattern) printed in the
procedure 1) on the document table so that the thin lines on
the printed color patch image (adjustment pattern) are on the
left side. Place 5 sheets of white paper on the printed color
patch image (adjustment pattern).
3) Press [EXECUTE] key.
The color balance adjustment is automatically performed.
The adjustment pattern is printed out. Check it for any abnor-
mality.
4) Press [OK] key. (For the 4.3 Inch LCD model, press the OSA
shortcut key.)
The list of the adjustment items (for each dither) is displayed.
Setting
Item/Display Content Default value Remarks
range
A SCREEN FILTER H Sharpness (filter) adjustment of dot pattern Strong 1 3 (Auto) Applied to the auto copy
LEVEL image in auto copy mode emphasis mode only.
L Soft 2
emphasis
AUTO Auto 3
B AUTOMODE SOFT Sharpness (filter) adjustment for the auto SOFT 1 2 (CENTER) Applied to the auto copy
FILTER LEVEL CENTER copy mode CENTER 2 mode only.
HIGH HIGH 3
C COLOR COPY : OFF Soft filter applying setting to C, M, Y image OFF 0 1 (ON) When it is set to ON, the
CMY ON in color copy mode ON 1 soft filter is applied and the
D COLOR COPY : K OFF Soft filter applying setting to K image in color OFF 0 1 (ON) smoothness in the dark
ON copy mode ON 1 image area is improved.
(Roughness is reduced.)
E SINGLE COLOR : OFF Soft filter applying setting to C, M, Y image OFF 0 1 (ON)
CMY ON in sigle color copy mode ON 1
F 2 COLOR COPY : OFF Setting of YES/NO of applying the soft filter OFF 0 1 (ON)
CMY ON to C/M/Y images of the 2-color copy mode ON 1
G 2 COLOR COPY : K OFF Setting of YES/NO of applying the soft filter OFF 0 1 (ON)
ON to K images of the 2-color copy mode ON 1
H B/W COPY OFF Soft filter applying setting in monochrome OFF 0 1 (ON)
ON copy mode ON 1
I COLOR PUSH : OFF Soft filter applying setting to image in push OFF 0 1 (ON)
RGB ON scan color mode ON 1
J B/W PUSH OFF Soft filter applying setting to image in push OFF 0 1 (ON)
ON scan monochrome mode ON 1
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
&2/25$87202'(ǂ),/7(5ǂ$'-8670(17
$˖ ˖6&5((1),/7(5/(9(/$872
$˖ %˖ ˖$87202'(),/7(5/(9(/&(17(5
˷̚˹ &˖ ˖&2/25&23<&0<21
'˖ ˖&2/25&23<.21
46-62
Purpose Adjustment/Setup
Function (Purpose) Used to set the operating conditions of the
ACS, the area separation, the background
image process, and the auto exposure
mode.
Section
Operation/Procedure
1) Select a target adjustment item with [n] [p] key.
2) Enter the adjustment value using the 10-key.
3) Press [OK] key. (For the 4.3 Inch LCD model, press the OSA
shortcut key.)
NOTE: This must be set to the default unless any change is spe-
cially required.
When the adjustment value is set to a value greatly different from
the default value, image quality trouble may occur for some docu-
ments.
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
09,(:-8'*(0(17/(9(/$'-8670(17
$˖ ˖6:B$&6
$˖ %˖ ˖7(;7B,0$*(
˷̚˹ &˖ ˖7(;7B%/$1.
'˖ ˖+7B/9
Setting Default
46-63 Item/Display Content
range value
Purpose Adjustment/Setup F COLOR COPY : Map 1-9 5
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the density in the copy low MAP (color copy)
density section. G COLOR COPY : Light document 1-9 6
LIGHT (color density)
Section
H COLOR COPY : Copy document, 1-9 5
Operation/Procedure TEXT/PRINTED Character print
1) Select a target adjustment item with [n] [p] key. PHOTO (color copy)
(COPY TO COPY)
2) Enter the adjustment value using the 10-key.
I COLOR COPY : Copy document, 1-9 5
3) Press [OK] key. (For the 4.3 Inch LCD model, press the OSA TEXT Character
shortcut key.) (COPY TO COPY) (color copy)
When the adjustment value is increased, reproducibility of the J COLOR COPY : Copy document, 1-9 5
background and the low density image is increased. When the PRINTED PHOTO Printed photo
adjustment value is decreased, reproducibility of the background (COPY TO COPY) (color copy)
and the low density image is decreased. K COLOR PUSH : Text print 1-9 3
TEXT/PRINTED (color PUSH)
Setting Default PHOTO
Item/Display Content L COLOR PUSH : Text 1-9 3
range value
A COLOR COPY : Text print 1-9 3 TEXT (color PUSH)
TEXT/PRINTED (color copy) M COLOR PUSH : Printed photo 1-9 5
PHOTO PRINTED PHOTO (color PUSH)
B COLOR COPY : Text 1-9 3 N COLOR PUSH : Photograph 1-9 5
TEXT (color copy) PHOTOGRAPH (color PUSH)
C COLOR COPY : Printed photo 1-9 5 O COLOR PUSH : Text/Photograph 1-9 3
PRINTED PHOTO (color copy) TEXT/PHOTO (color PUSH)
D COLOR COPY : Photograph 1-9 5 P COLOR PUSH : Map 1-9 5
PHOTOGRAPH (color copy) MAP color PUSH)
E COLOR COPY : Text/Photograph 1-9 3
TEXT/PHOTO (color copy)
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26( ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
%*5(029($'-8670(17 (1*,1($872$'-8670(176(59,&(
$˖ ˖&2/25&23<7(;735,17('3+272 35(66>(;(&87(@72352&21(;($1'35,177+(7(673$7&+
$˖
%˖ ˖&2/25&23<7(;7
˷̚˹ &˖ ˖&2/25&23<35,17('3+272 3/($6(86(63(&,),('7<3(2)$25h6,=(3$3(5
(;(&87(
46-74
Purpose Adjustment 48
Function (Purpose) Copy color balance adjustment (Auto
adjustment)/Printer color balance adjust- 48-1
ment (Auto adjustment) Purpose Adjustment
Section Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the scan image magnifica-
Operation/Procedure tion ratio (in the main scanning direction
This simulation is used to perform SIM46-24 and SIM67-24 contin- and the sub scanning direction).
uously. Section
To perform both the copy color balance adjustment (Automatic Operation/Procedure
adjustment) and the printer color balance adjustment (Automatic
1) Select a target adjustment item with [n] [p] key.
adjustment), use this simulation for efficient adjustment operations.
2) Enter the set value with 10-key.
1) Press [EXECUTE] key, and the high density process control is
performed. Then, the copy color balance adjustment pattern is 3) Press [OK] key. (For the 4.3 Inch LCD model, press the OSA
printed. shortcut key.)
2) Plate the printed adjustment pattern on the document table, The set value is saved.
select [FACTORY] or [SERVICE] mode. When the adjustment value is increased, the image magnification
3) Press [EXECUTE] key, and the copy color balance adjustment ratio is increased.
is performed and the adjustment result pattern is printed. A change of "1" in the adjustment value of item A, C, or E corre-
4) Press [EXECUTE] key, and the printer color balance adjust- sponds to a change of about 0.02% in the copy magnification ratio.
ment pattern is printed. A change of "1" in the adjustment value of item B, D, or F corre-
5) Plate the printed adjustment pattern on the document table, sponds to a change of about 0.1% in the copy magnification ratio.
select [FACTORY] or [SERVICE] mode.
Setting Default
6) Press [EXECUTE] key, and the printer color balance adjust- Item/Display Content
range value
ment (automatic adjustment) is performed and the adjustment A CCD (MAIN) SCAN main scanning 1 - 99 50
result pattern is printed. magnification ratio
7) Press [OK] key. (For the 4.3 Inch LCD model, press the OSA adjustment (CCD)
shortcut key.) B CCD (SUB) SCAN sub scanning 1 - 99 50
magnification ratio
The half tone correction target is registered. adjustment (CCD)
NOTE: The adjustment result becomes effective only when the C SPF (MAIN) RSPF document front 1 - 99 50
adjustment operations in the both modes are completed all surface magnification ratio
the way. For example, when the copy color balance adjust- (Main scan)
ment (automatic adjustment) is performed and the simula- D SPF (SUB) RSPF document front 1 - 99 50
tion is canceled, the adjustment result is not effective. surface magnification ratio
(Sub scan)
E SPFB (MAIN) RSPF document back 1 - 99 50
surface magnification ratio
(Main scan)
48-6
Purpose Adjustment
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the rotation speed of each
motor.
Section
48-5
Operation/Procedure
Purpose Adjustment 1) Select an adjustment target mode.
Function (Purpose) Used to correction the scan image magnifi- 2) Select a target adjustment item with [n] [p] key on the touch
cation ratio (in the sub scanning direction). panel.
Section Scanner section 3) Enter the set value with 10-key.
Operation/Procedure 4) Press [OK] key. (For the 4.3 Inch LCD model, press the OSA
1) Select a target adjustment item with [n] [p] key. shortcut key.)
2) Enter the set value with 10-key. The set value is saved.
3) Press [OK] key. (For the 4.3 Inch LCD model, press the OSA When the adjustment value is increased, the speed is increased,
shortcut key.) and vice versa. A change of 1 in the adjustment value corresponds
The set value is saved. to a change of about 0.1% in the speed.
When the image magnification ratio in the sub scanning direction is Setting Default
adjusted with SIM48-1, and a different magnification ratio is speci- Item/Display Content Mode Select
range value
fied, and the image magnification ratio is not satisfactory, perform A RRM Resist Color COLOR 1 - 99 52
this adjustment. motor Mono MONO
When there is an error in the image magnification ratio in reduction, correction chrome
change the adjustment value in the high speed mode. When there value Heavy HEAVY 46
is an error in the image magnification ratio in enlargement, change paper
the adjustment value in the low speed mode. B DVM_K Developing Color COLOR 1 - 99 52
K motor Mono MONO
Setting Default correction chrome
Item/Display Content value
range value Heavy HEAVY
A MR (HI) Scanner motor (High speed) 1 - 99 50 paper
B MR(MID) Scanner motor 1 - 99 50 C FSM Fusing Color COLOR 1 - 99 17
(Reference speed) motor Mono MONO
C MR(LO) Scanner motor (Low speed) 1 - 99 50 correction chrome
D SPF(HI) Document feed (RSPF) 1 - 99 50 value Heavy HEAVY 23
motor (High speed) paper
E SPF(MID) Document feed (RSPF) 1 - 99 50 D DVM_CL Developing Color COLOR 1 - 99 52
motor (Reference speed) CL motor Heavy HEAVY
correction paper
value
E PFM Paper transport motor COLOR 1 - 99 50
correction value.
Item/Display Content
CONF Configuration data
• 8.5 Inch LCD model ICUM ICU Main section former half
ICUBM ICU Boot section main
ICUCN ICU Boot section CN
LANG Language support data program
(General term)
GRAPH Graphic data for L-LCD
SLIST SLIST data for L-LCD
PCUB PCU Boot section
PCUM PCU Main section
DESKB Desk unit BOOT section
DESKM Desk unit MAIN section
FINB Inner finisher BOOT section
FINM Inner finisher MAIN section
SCUB SCU Boot section
SCUM SCU Main section
FAXB FAX1 Boot section
FAXM FAX1 Main section
ESCP ESC/P font
49 PDL PDL font
ANIME Animation data
49-1 IMGDT Image ASIC data
CORP Color profile
Purpose
WEBHP WEB help
Function (Purpose) Used to perform the firmware update. UNICD UNICODE table
Section
Operation/Procedure
1) Save the firmware to the USB memory.
2) Insert the USB memory into the main unit.
3) Select a target firmware file for update.
Press [ALL] key to select all the Firmware collectively.
4) Press [EXECUTE] key.
5) Press [YES] key.
The selected firmware is updated.
When the operation normally completed, "COMPLETE" is dis-
played. When terminated abnormally, "ERROR" is displayed.
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
),50:$5(83'$7(XVEEG
',5!)2/'(5 ),/(
),/( ',5!)2/'(5
50
50-1
Purpose Adjustment
Function (Purpose) Copy image position, image loss adjust-
ment
Section
Operation/Procedure
1) Select an adjustment target item with [n] [p] key.
2) Enter the set value with 10-key.
Set the items other than RRCA, LEAD, and SIDE to the
49-3 default.
Purpose RRCA: Image lead edge reference position adjustment
Function (Purpose) Used to update the operation manual in the LEAD: Lead edge image loss adjustment
HDD. SIDE: Side image loss adjustment
Section 3) Press [OK] key. (For the 4.3 Inch LCD model, press the OSA
Operation/Procedure shortcut key.) (The set value is saved.)
1) Insert the USB memory into the main unit.
Setting Default
* When the USB is not inserted, "INSERT A STORANGE E- Item/Display Content
range value
MANUAL STORED ON" is displayed. When [OSA shortcut]
A Lead edge RRCA Document lead edge 0 - 99 50
key is pressed, the display is shifted to the folder select adjustment reference position
menu 1. (4.3 Inch LCD model) value (OC)
When the USB is not inserted, "INSERT A STORANGE E- B RRCB- Resist Standard 1 - 99 50
MANUAL STORED ON" is displayed. When [OK] key is CS1 motor Tray
pressed, the display is shifted to the folder select menu 1. C RRCB- ON Desk 1 - 99 50
(8.5 Inch LCD model) DSK timing
D RRCB- adjust- Manual 1 - 99 50
2) Press the folder button of the operation manual data. (The dis- ment
MFT paper
play is shifted to the operation manual update menu.)
feed
The current version and the update version are displayed. E RRCB- ADU 1 - 99 50
3) Press [EXECUTE] key. ADU
[EXECUTE] key is highlighted, and [YES] [NO] keys becomes F Image loss LEAD Lead edge image 0 - 99 30
area setting loss area setting
active from gray out.
G value SIDE Side image loss 0 - 99 20
4) When [YES] key is pressed, the selected operation manual is area adjustment
updated. H Void area DENA Lead edge void area 1 - 99 30
When update is completed normally, "COMPLETE" is dis- adjustment adjustment
played. When terminated abnormally, "ERROR" is displayed. I DENB Rear edge void area 1 - 99 30
• 4.3 Inch LCD model adjustment
J FRONT/ FRONT/REAR void 1 - 99 30
REAR area adjustment
K Off-center OFSET_ OC document off- 1 - 99 50
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26( adjustment OC center adjustment
(0$18$/83'$7(>XVEEG@ L Magnification SCAN_ SCAN sub scanning 1 - 99 50
ratio correc- SPEED_ magnification ratio
',5!)2/'(5 ),/(
tion OC adjustment (CCD)
),/( ',5!)2/'(5
',5!0$18$/
* When the value is increased, the void is increased. 200% enlargement copy
J. (FRONT/REAR) The void amount on the right and left edges of
paper is adjusted. (0.1mm/step)
Fig. 1
• 4.3 Inch LCD model
50-5
Purpose Adjustment
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the print lead edge image
position. (PRINTER MODE)
Section
Operation/Procedure
1) Select a target adjustment item (DEN-C) with [n] [p] key.
2) Enter the adjustment value using the 10-key.
3) Press [EXECUTE] key.
The set value is saved, and the adjustment check pattern is
printed.
4) Measure the distance from the paper lead edge the adjustment
pattern to the image lead edge, and check to confirm that it is
in the standard adjustment value range.
Standard reference value: 3.0r2.0mm
When the adjustment value is increased, the distance from the
paper lead edge to the image lead edge is increased. When the
adjustment value is decreased, the distanced is decreased.
When the set value is changed by 1, the distance is changed by
about 0.1mm.
Setting Default
Item/Display Content NOTE
range value
A DEN-C Used to adjust the print 1 - 99 30 Adjustment value too align the print lead edge for the printer. When the
lead edge image adjustment value of this item is decreased by 1, the printer print start position
position. in the paper transport direction is shifted to the lead edge by 0.1mm.
(PRINTER MODE)
B DEN-B Rear edge void area 1 - 99 30 Void amount generated at the paper rear edge. When the adjustment value
adjustment of item B (DEN-B) is decreased by 1, the print area adjustment value in the
sub scanning direction for the paper transport direction is decreased by
0.1mm.
C FRONT/REAR FRONT/REAR void area 1 - 99 30 Adjustment of the void amount generated on the left and right edges of paper.
adjustment When the adjustment value is increased, the void amount is increased.
D DENB-MFT Manual feed rear edge 1 - 99 50 Fine adjustment value of each paper feed source for the adjustment value of
void area adjustment DEN-B
correction value
When the adjustment value is increased, the distance from the paper lead edge to the image lead edge is increased. When the adjustment
value is decreased, the distance from the paper lead edge to the image lead edge is decreased.
When the set value is changed by 1, the distance is changed by about 0.1mm.
• 4.3 Inch LCD model • 8.5 Inch LCD model
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
/($'('*($'-8670(179$/8(35,17(5
$˖ ˖'(1&
$˖ %˖ ˖'(1%
˷̚˹ &˖ ˖)52175($5
'˖ ˖'(1%0)7
(;(&87(
Setting Default
50-6 Item/Display Content
range value
Purpose Adjustment C Image LEAD_EDGE Front surface 0 - 99 20
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the copy image position and loss (SIDE1) lead edge image
the image loss. (RSPF mode) amount loss amount
setting setting
Section RSPF SIDE1
Operation/Procedure D Image FRONT_REAR Front surface side 0 - 99 20
1) Select an adjustment target item with [n] [p] key. loss (SIDE1) image loss
amount amount setting
2) Enter the set value with 10-key. setting
E TRAIL_EDGE Front surface rear 0 - 99 30
3) Press [OK] key. (For the 4.3 Inch LCD model, press the OSA SIDE1 (SIDE1) edge image loss
shortcut key.) (The set value is saved.) amount setting
F Image LEAD_EDGE Back surface lead 0 - 99 20
Setting Default loss (SIDE2) edge image loss
Item/Display Content
range value amount amount setting
A SIDE1 Front surface 1 - 99 50 G setting FRONT_REAR Back surface side 0 - 99 20
document scan SIDE2 (SIDE2) image loss
position amount setting
adjustment H TRAIL_EDGE Back surface rear 0 - 99 30
(CCD) (SIDE2) edge image loss
B SIDE2 Back surface 1 - 99 50 amount setting
document scan I OFSET_SPF1 SPF front surface 1 - 99 50
position document off-
adjustment center adjustment
(CCD)
50-10
Purpose Adjustment
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the black print image magni-
fication ratio and the off-center position.
(The adjustment is made separately for
each paper feed section.)
Section
Operation/Procedure
1) Select an adjustment target item with [n] [p] key.
2) Enter the set value with 10-key.
3) Press [EXECUTE] key. (The set value is saved.)
Default
Item/Display Content Setting range NOTE
value
A BK-MAG Main scan print magnification ratio BK 60 - 140 100 Adjustment Item List
B MAIN-MFT Print off center adjustment value 1 - 99 50
(Manual paper feed)
C MAIN-CS1 Print off center adjustment value (Tray 1) 1 - 99 50
D MAIN-CS2 Print off center adjustment value (Tray 2) 1 - 99 50
E MAIN-CS3 Print off center adjustment value (Tray 3) 1 - 99 50
F MAIN-CS4 Print off center adjustment value (Tray 4) 1 - 99 50
G MAIN-ADU Print off center adjustment value (Duplex) 1 - 99 50 Adjustment Item List
(NOTE) If the adjustment items A - F are
not properly adjusted, this adjustment
cannot be executed properly.
H SUB-MFT Resist motor ON Manual paper feed 1 - 99 50
I SUB-CS1 timing adjustment Standard cassette 1 - 99 50
J SUB-DSK DESK 1 - 99 50
K SUB-ADU ADU 1 - 99 50
L MULTI COUNT Number of print 1 - 999 1 Adjustment pattern print conditions setting
M PAPER MFT Tray selection Manual paper feed 1-5 1 2 (CS1)
CS1 Tray 1 2
CS2 Tray 2 3
CS3 Tray 3 4
CS4 Tray 4 5
N DUPLEX YES Duplex print Yes 0-1 0 1 (NO)
NO selection No 1
Item A: When the set value is increased, the BK image magnification ratio in the main scanning direction is increased. When the set value is
decreased, the image magnification ratio is decreased.
Item B - G: When the adjustment value is increased, it is shifted to the front frame side. When the adjustment value is decreased, it is shifted to
the rear frame side.
Item B - G: 1 step = 0.1mm change
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26( ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
3$3(5&(17(52))6(76(783 25,*,1$/&(17(52))6(76(783
$˖ ˖%.0$* $˖ ˖2&
$˖ $˖
%˖ ˖0$,10)7 %˖ ˖63)6,'(
˷̚˹ &˖ ˖0$,1&6 ˷̚˹ &˖ ˖63)6,'(
'˖ ˖0$,1&6
(;(&87(
50-12 50-20
Purpose Adjustment Purpose Adjustment
Function (Purpose) Used to perform the scan image off-center Function (Purpose) Image registration adjustment
position adjustment. (The adjustment is (Manual adjustment)
made separately for each scan mode.) Section
Section Operation/Procedure
Operation/Procedure 1) Select an adjustment target item with [n] [p] key.
1) Select an adjustment target item with [n] [p] key. 2) Enter the set value with 10-key.
2) Enter the set value with 10-key. 3) Press [EXECUTE] key. (The set value is saved.)
3) Press [OK] key. (For the 4.3 Inch LCD model, press the OSA
shortcut key.) (The set value is saved.)
When the adjustment value is increased, the image position is
shifted to the rear frame side. When the adjustment value is
decreased, it is shifted to the front frame side.
1step = 0.1mm
Setting Default
Item/Display Content
range value
A OC Document table image off- 1 - 99 50
center adjustment
B SPF(SIDE1) RSPF front surface image 1 - 99 50
off-center adjustment
C SPF(SIDE2) RSPF back surface image 1 - 99 50
off-center adjustment
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
5(*,675$7,21$'-8670(17)52175($5',5(&7,21
$˖ ˖&<$1)5217
$˖ %˖ ˖&<$15($5
˷̚˹ &˖ ˖0$*(17$)5217
(;(&87(
50-22
Purpose Adjustment
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the image registration. (Main
scan direction, sub scan direction) (Auto
adjustment)/OPC drum phase adjustment
(Auto adjustment)
Section
Operation/Procedure
1) Select a target adjustment item.
*1: The color image skew adjustment is performed according to this display value.
When "R" is displayed in front of the value, turn and click the skew adjustment screw (LSU) clockwise by the value.
When "L" is displayed in front of the value, turn and click the skew adjustment screw (LSU) counterclockwise by the value.
At that time, the values under the decimal point are rounded.
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12 &/26( ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
7(67
$872$'-8670(172)5(*,675$7,21 '580326,7,21 $8725(*,675$7,21'$7$',63/$<
0$,1)0$,1568%6.(: 5(*B(;(B&17
6) Press [OK] key. (For the 4.3 Inch LCD model, press the OSA 5(68/7 '$7$
shortcut key.)
51-2
51 Purpose Adjustment/Setup
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the contact pressure (deflec-
51-1 tion amount) on paper by the main unit and
Purpose Adjustment/Setup the RSPF resist roller. (This adjustment is
performed when there is a considerable
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the ON/OFF timing of the variation in the print image position on the
secondary transport voltage. paper or when paper jams frequently
Section occur.)
Operation/Procedure Section
1) Select an adjustment target item with [n] [p] key. Operation/Procedure
2) Enter the set value with 10-key. 1) Select a target adjustment mode.
3) Press [OK] key. (For the 4.3 Inch LCD model, press the OSA 2) Select a target item to be adjusted with [n] [p] key.
shortcut key.) (The set value is saved.) 3) Enter the set value with 10-key.
When the adjustment value is decreased, the transfer ON/OFF tim- 4) Press [OK] key. (For the 4.3 Inch LCD model, press the OSA
ing for the paper is advanced. When the adjustment value is shortcut key.) (The set value is saved.)
increased, the timing is delayed.
When the adjustment value is changed by 1, the timing is changed
by about 10ms. The setting range is -490 - +490ms.
Default
Item/Display Content
value
A TC2 ON Secondary transfer voltage ON timing 40
TIMING setting
B TC2 OFF Secondary transfer voltage OFF timing 60
TIMING setting
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
75$16&5,37,217,0,1*6(783
$˖ ˖7&ǂ21ǂ7,0,1*
$˖ %˖ ˖7&ǂ2))ǂ7,0,1*
˷̚˹
<Note on "Large size" and "Small size"> • 8.5 Inch LCD model
"Small size": The paper length in the transport direction is LT size
(216mm) or less.
"Large size": The paper length in the transport direction is greater
than LT size (216mm).
<Adjustment value>
When the adjustment value is increased, the warp amount is
increased. When the adjustment value is decreased, the warp
amount is decreased.
When the adjustment value is changed by 1, the stop timing is
changed by 0.1mm.
• 4.3 Inch LCD model
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
5(*,6752//(5$'-8670(17
$˖ ˖1250$/B3/$,1B+,*+
$˖ %˖ ˖1250$/B3/$,1B/2:
˷̚˹ &˖ ˖1250$/B7+,1B+,*+
'˖ ˖1250$/B7+,1B/2:
Setting Default
Item/Display Content
range value
A ADJUST RSPF mode document scan 1 - 99 70
VALUE position adjustment (Scanner
stop position adjustment)
55-2
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12 &/26(
7(67 Purpose (Do not use this function unless specially
63)6&$11,1*326,7,21$'-8670(17 required.)
$872 0$18$/ Function (Purpose) Used to set the specifications of the scan-
ner control operation. (SOFT SW)
Section
Operation/Procedure
• 4.3 Inch LCD model
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21 ǂǂ12
• 8.5 Inch LCD model 7(67 &/26(
6&$11(562)76:6(77,1*
6:12 6: 1R
'$7$
(;(&87(
(;(&87(
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
&23<'$7$
$//ė+'' ˖(1$%/(
• 8.5 Inch LCD model ˖',6$%/(
+''ė$//
((3520ė+'' ˖',6$%/(
60
60-1
Purpose Operation test/check
Function (Purpose) Used to check the operations (read/write)
of the MFP PWB memory.
Section
Operation/Procedure
1) Press [EXECUTE] key.
Start the test.
-2%/2*(;3257
(;(&87(
Setting Default
Item/Display Content
range value
A SETTING DISABLE SDRAM DDR 0-1 0 0 • 8.5 Inch LCD model
ENABLE setting setting
change of
flag Onboard
SPD
ENABLE DDR 1
setting
of B or
later
B NUMBER 11BIT ROW address 0-2 0 2
OF ROW 12BIT width 1
13BIT 2
C NUMBER 8BIT COLUMN address 0-4 0 2
OF 9BIT width 1
COLUMN 10BIT 2
11BIT 3
12BIT 4
D TWR 2CLOCK TWR set value 0-3 0 1
SETTING 3CLOCK 1
VALUE 4CLOCK 2 61
5CLOCK 3
E TRAS 4CLOCK TRAS set value 0-3 0 2 61-1
SETTING 5CLOCK 1
VALUE 6CLOCK 2
Purpose Operation test/check
7CLOCK 3 Function (Purpose) Used to check the LSU polygon motor rota-
F TRC 6CLOCK TRC set value 0-4 0 3 tion and laser detection.
SETTING 7CLOCK 1 Section LSU
VALUE 8CLOCK 2
Operation/Procedure
9CLOCK 3
10CLOCK 4
1) Press [EXECUTE] key.
G TRCD 2CLOCK TRCD set value 0-3 0 1 When the operation is completed normally, [OK] is displayed.
SETTING 3CLOCK 1 In case of an abnormal end, [NG] is displayed.
VALUE 4CLOCK 2
5CLOCK 3 Display Content
H TRP 2CLOCK TRP set value 0-3 0 1 LSU TESTRESULT NG: PG Polygon mirror rotation abnormality
SETTING 3CLOCK 1 LSU TESTRESULT NG: K Laser abnormality (K)
VALUE 4CLOCK 2 LSU TESTRESULT NG: CL Laser light emitting abnormality (C,M,Y)
5CLOCK 3
Default
Item/Display Content
value
A MULTICOUNT Print quantity 1 • 8.5 Inch LCD model
B PAPER MFT Tray 1 Manual paper 2
selection feed (CS1)
CS1 2 Tray 1
CS2 3 Tray 2
CS3 4 Tray 3
CS4 5 Tray 4
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
/68326,7,21$'-8670(176(/)35,17
$˖ ˖08/7,&2817
$˖ %˖ ˖3$3(5&6
˷̚˹
62-2
Purpose Operation test/check
(;(&87( Function (Purpose) Used to check read/write of the hard disk
(partial).
Section
• 8.5 Inch LCD model Operation/Procedure
1) Press [EXECUTE] key.
2) Press [YES] key.
• 4.3 Inch LCD model
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
+''5:7(673$57
62-1
Purpose
Function (Purpose) Used to execute the hard disk format
(except operation manual area).
Section
Operation/Procedure
1) Press [EXECUTE] key.
2) Press [YES] key.
Used to execute the hard disk format.
When the operation is completed, [EXECUTE] key returns to the
normal display.
62-7
Purpose Operation test/check
Function (Purpose) Used to print the hard disk self diagnostics
error log.
Section
Operation/Procedure
1) Press [EXECUTE] key.
ERROR LOG SECTOR of the SMART function is executed, and
the result is printed.
When the operation is completed, [EXECUTE] key returns to the
normal display.
62-6 • 4.3 Inch LCD model
Purpose Operation test/check
Function (Purpose) Used to perform the self diagnostics of the
hard disk. ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12 &/26(
7(67
Section 60$57(5525/2*35,17287
Operation/Procedure 35(66>(;(&87(@7235,177+(60$57(552535,17
1) Select the self diag area.
2) Press [EXECUTE] key.
The self diag operation is performed.
NOTE:
(;(&87(
E7-03 error occurs. If there may be a trouble in the HDD, use this
simulation to cheek the HDD.
Section
Operation/Procedure
1) Press [EXECUTE] key.
2) Press [YES] key.
Used to execute the hard disk format. 685(" <(6 12 (;(&87(
When the operation is completed, [EXECUTE] key returns to the
normal display.
* When the HDD formatting (except for the system area) is not • 8.5 Inch LCD model
completed normally, "HDD FORMAT (EXCEPT SYSTEM AREA)
NG" is displayed.
• 4.3 Inch LCD model
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
+'')250$7(;&(376<67(0$5($
62-11
• 8.5 Inch LCD model Purpose Data clear
Function (Purpose) Used to delete the print hold data (docu-
ment filing data). (4.3 Inch LCD model)
Section
Operation/Procedure
1) Press [EXECUTE] key.
2) Press [YES] key.
Used to delete the print hold data.
When the operation is completed, [EXECUTE] key returns to the
normal display.
NOTE: Since the 4.3 inch LCD model is not provided with the doc-
ument filing function, there is no document filing data.
62-10 ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
Purpose Data clear 35,17+2/''$7$&/($5
62-13
Purpose Data clear
Function (Purpose) Used to format the hard disk. (only the
operation manual area)
Section
Operation/Procedure
1) Press [EXECUTE] key.
2) Press [YES] key.
The operation manual data are deleted.
When the operation is completed, [EXECUTE] key returns to the
normal display.
62-12
• 4.3 Inch LCD model
Purpose Setting
Function (Purpose) Used to set Enable/Disable of auto format
in a hard disk trouble.
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
Section
+'')250$70$18$/$5($21/<
Operation/Procedure
1) Enter the set value with 10-key.
2) Press [OK] key. (For the 4.3 Inch LCD model, press the OSA
shortcut key.)
The set value is saved.
When it is set to Enable, if a read error of HDD occurs in the system 685(" <(6 12 (;(&87(
data storage area (FAX/device cloning data, etc.), only the system
data storage area is cleared.
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
$872)250$76(77,1*+''7528%/(
$˖ ˖<(612
$˖
˷̚˹
Item/
Content NOTE
Display
GAIN ODD Gain adjustment • 8.5 Inch LCD model
value
(odd number)
GAIN EVEN Gain adjustment
value
(Even number)
OFFSET Offset value
ODD (odd number)
OFFSET Offset value
EVEN (even number)
SMP AVE Reference plate
ODD sampling average
value (ODD)
SMP AVE Reference plate
EVEN sampling average
value (EVEN)
TARGET Target value
VALUE
BLACK Black output level 63-2
LEVEL
Purpose Adjustment
ERROR Error code 0 No error
CODE (0, 1-14) 1 STAGE1: Loop number over Function (Purpose) Used to perform shading.
(for debug) 2 STAGE2: The target value is Section
under the specified value.
Operation/Procedure
3 STAGE3: The gain set value
is negative. 1) Press [EXECUTE] key.
4 END is not asserted. Used to perform shading.
(Gain adjustment) When the operation is completed, [EXECUTE] key returns to the
5 (reserve) normal display.
6 STAGE2: Underflow
• 4.3 Inch LCD model
7 Black shading error
8 Other error
9 END is not asserted.
(White shading) ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12 &/26(
7(67
10 END is not asserted.
6+$',1*(;(&87,21
(Black shading)
11 END is not asserted. 35(66>(;(&87(@726+$',1*67$57
(Light quantity correction)
12 END is not asserted. (Scan)
13 Register check error.
(When booting/Before gain)
14 Register check error. (;(&87(
(Before light quantity
correction)
RSPF First scan
WHITE RSPF white • 8.5 Inch LCD model
LEVEL 1ST reference level
RSPF Second scan
WHITE RSPF white
LEVEL 2ND reference level
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ
7(67 &/26(
6&$11(5&2/25%$/$1&($872$'-8670(17
2&
ǂ
% * 5 2&
63-4 ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12 &/26(
7(67
Purpose Operation data check 67$1'$5'6&$11(5*$00$6(783
Function (Purpose) Used to display the SIT chart patch density. 6'$2&
Section
Operation/Procedure
1) Set the SIT chart (UKOG-0280FCZZ or UKOG-0280FCZ1) to
the reference position on the left rear frame side of the docu-
685(" <(6 12 (;(&87(
ment table.
2) Select [OC] key.
(;(&87(
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
6&$11(57$5*(72)&2/25&$/,%6(7836(59,&(
• 8.5 Inch LCD model
%&'()
*+,-.
/012
63-11
Purpose Adjustment/Setup
Function (Purpose) Used to set the target color balance of the
copy mode auto color balance adjustment.
Section
Operation/Procedure
1) Select the target color balance.
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21
7(67 ǂǂ12 &/26(
6(/)35,17&2/25 ˖6(59,6(
$˖ 353$7aa
$˖ %˖ '27'27˚˙,)$
˷̚ ˹ &˖ '27'27˚˙,)$
64-2
Purpose Operation test/check
Function (Purpose) Test print. (Self print) (Monochrome mode)
Section
Operation/Procedure
1) Set the print conditions.
Select an item to be print condition with [n] [p] keys.
Set the print conditions with 10 key.
2) Press [EXECUTE] key.
The test print (self print) is performed.
Pattern Pattern
No. Content generating NOTE
section ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21
7(67 ǂǂ12 &/26(
1 Grid pattern LSU-ASIC 6(/)35,17%: ˖6(59,&(
2 Dot print -
$˖ 353$7aa
9 Each color 10% $˖
area (A4/A4R) %˖ '27'27˚˙,)$
density print ˷̚ ˹ &˖ '27'27˚˙,)$
10 8-color belt print
'˖ '(16,7<),;('āā,)$
11 4-color dot print Print of each color is made
(sub scan) for every 1/4 of the sub (;(&87(
scanning paper size.
15 16 gradations MFP ASIC • When all colors are
+ M by N selected, print is made in
(center gradations CMY. • 8.5 Inch LCD model
only): Sub scan) • 16 gradations print
16 16 gradations • The gradation is changed
+ M by N for every 256 dots.
(center gradations
only): Main scan)
17 All background Half tone -
(half tone) (MFP ASIC
18 256 gradations after -
pattern process)
(Other dither)
19 256 gradations -
pattern
(For text dither)
20 - - -
21 4-point dot print LSU-ASIC
(main scan)
22 Slant line
29 Dot print 1200dpi
64-4
Purpose Operation test/check
Function (Purpose) Printer test print. (Self print) (256 grada-
tions)
Section
Operation/Procedure
1) Set the print conditions.
Select an item to be print condition with [n] [p] keys.
Set the print conditions with 10 key.
Select a target print color.
2) Press [EXECUTE] key.
3) The test print (self print) is performed.
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
35,17(56(/)35,17
$˖ 35,173$77(51
$˖ %˖ '(16,7<
˷̚˹ &˖ 08/7,&2817
'˖ 3$3(5&6
64-5
Purpose Operation test/check
Function (Purpose) Printer test print. (Self print) (PCL)
Section
Operation/Procedure
1) Set the print conditions.
Select an item to be print condition with [n] [p] keys.
Set the print conditions with 10 key.
Select a target print color with 10 key.
2) Press [EXECUTE] key.
The test print (self print) is performed.
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21
7(67 ǂǂ12 &/26(
35,17(56(/)35,173&/
$˖ ˖35,173$77(51
$˖ %˖ ˖',7+(5 &$/,%
˷̚ ˹ &˖ ˖08/7,&2817
64-6
Purpose Operation test/check
Function (Purpose) Printer test print. (Self print) (PS)
Section
Operation/Procedure
1) Set the print conditions.
Select an item to be print condition with [n] [p] keys.
Set the print conditions with 10 key.
Select a print color.
2) Press [EXECUTE] key.
The test print (self print) is performed.
(;(&87(
64-7
Purpose Operation test/check
Function (Purpose) Used to print the adjustment pattern of the
test print. (Self print). (The adjustment pat-
tern of SIM46-21 is printed.)
Section
Operation/Procedure
1) Set the print conditions.
Select an item to be print condition with [n] [p] keys.
Set the print conditions with 10 key.
2) Press [EXECUTE] key.
The adjustment pattern of SIM46-21 is printed.
65-5
Purpose Operation check/test
Function (Purpose) Used to check the operation panel key
input.
Section
Operation/Procedure
Press the keys sequentially according to the guidance displayed on
the screen.
Operation/Procedure )257+,6$'-
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
35,17(5&21752//(50(025<&/($5
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26( ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
35,17(5(1*,1(&2/25%$/$1&(0$18$/$'-8670(173* 67'6&$17$5*(76(/(&72)357+$/)721($'-
$˖ ˖32,17 75*7%/ '() '() '()
$˖ ǂ
%˖ ˖32,17
˷̚˹ &˖ ˖32,17 ǂ
67-26 67-27
Purpose Adjustment/Setup Purpose Adjustment/Setup
Function (Purpose) Used to set the target color balance of the Function (Purpose) Used to set the service target of the printer
printer mode auto color balance adjust- mode auto color balance adjustment.
ment. Section Printer
Section Printer Operation/Procedure
Operation/Procedure 1) Select [SETUP].
1) Select the target color balance. 2) Place the printed color balance adjustment pattern sheet
printed in SIM 67-25 on the document table.
Default
Item/Display Content 3) Press [EXECUTE] key.
value
Target DEF1 The engine color balance adjustment DEF 1 The patch image of the adjustment pattern sheet is scanned.
value table target in the automatic color balance 4) Press [OK] key. (For the 4.3 Inch LCD model, press the OSA
select operation is slightly shifted to Magenta. shortcut key.)
When this target is selected, the color
balance is converted into natural gray The service target of the printer mode auto color balance
color balance by the color table in an adjustment is set according to the scanned adjustment pattern
actual printer mode and print is made. sheet patch images.
DEF2 The engine color balance adjustment The registered color balance and the density are displayed.
target in the automatic color balance
Select a target color with [C] [M] [Y] [K] key.
operation is slightly shifted to natural
gray color balance. When this target is NOTE: This simulation is executed only when the printer color bal-
selected, the color balance is slightly ance is manually adjusted.
shifted to Cyan by the color table in an
actual copy mode and print is made. B Point B target value
DEF3 The engine color balance adjustment C Point C target value
target in the automatic color balance D Point D target value
operation is slightly shifted to Cyan. E Point E target value
When this target is selected, the color
F Point F target value
balance is converted into the color
G Point G target value
balance with enhanced Cyan by the
color table in an actual copy mode and H Point H target value
print is made. I Point I target value
J Point J target value
K Point K target value
L Point L target value
M Point M target value
N Point N target value
O Point O target value
BASE Background sampling value
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
6&$11(57$5*(72)35,17(5&2/25&$/,%6(7836(59,&(
%&'()
*+,-.
/012
67-31
Purpose Data clear
Function (Purpose) Used to clear the printer calibration value.
Section Printer
Operation/Procedure
1) Press [EXECUTE] key.
2) Press [YES] key.
The printer calibration data (Half tone correction data) are
cleared.
(The printer color balance correction is canceled.)
• 4.3 Inch LCD model
67-28
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
Purpose Adjustment/Setup
35,17(5&$/%5$7,21'$7$&/($5
Function (Purpose) Used to set the default of the service target
of the printer mode auto color balance
adjustment.
Section Printer
Operation/Procedure
1) Press [EXECUTE] key. 685(" <(6 12 (;(&87(
2) Press [YES] key.
The service target of the printer mode auto color balance
adjustment is set to the default. • 8.5 Inch LCD model
The service color balance target and the color balance target
for the user color balance adjustment are set to the same color
balance as the factory color balance target.
• 4.3 Inch LCD model
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
67$1'$5'6&$11(57$5*(72)35,17(5&2/25&$/,%6(59,&(
)˖ ˖%/$&.0$;7$5*(7
mode (When 1200dpi mode is frequently used)
600dpi 1bit Adjustment item to improve the color balance in 600dpi,
1bit mode.
B/W Adjustment item to improve the density and gradation in
the monochrome mode
ALL Select all the items
2.
Warning
࠙࣬ A consumable No
OP
Πρήσȟ࠙࣬
Trouble/Warning part has reached
its lifetime
Trouble
Πρήσ ZFT
YES
Replace or supply
Troubleshoot
ະၻࡔ֦ͬऔ the cause. કΩȜΜ۟¦༞ݯ
the consumable part.
ਘၑ
Repair
ΘͼͺΈȪΞΑΠζϋΡȫ
Cancel the selfdiagnostic
message with the diag-
൝ͤ͢ͅুࡨ౯ιΛΓȜΐ
nostics (test
ٜੰ commands).
Reset
໘ܦ
Standby
ఞેܥఠ state
MFP event
manager Each block
(Power ON sequence)
H3, H4, U1, U2, U6, PF, F3 trouble check When the power is turned
Trouble check is made in each block when initializing on, check is made in each
and data are sent to the MFP PWB. Communication of trouble status block.
[Trouble code] [Trouble status]
H3, H4, H5 Saved in the PCU
U1 Saved in the MFP.
U2 Saved in each block.
PF Saved in the MFP.
U6-09, 29, 39,
49, 63, 69 Saved in the PCU
F3-12 Saved in the PCU
sim task
Detail SCU
Cause SCU PWB trouble.
Check & Remedy Check the SCU PWB.
Replace the SCU PWB.
Error cancel method Power OFF - ON
Detail MFP
Cause A PWB or firmware which is not supported by the
machine specifications is detected in the MFP
PWB.
MFP PWB trouble.
The PWB/firmware which is not supported by the
machine specifications is connected.
Check & Remedy Check the kind and the version of the firmware.
Check the MFP PWB, and replace it if necessary.
Error cancel method Power OFF - ON
Detail PCU
EE-EU Automatic toner density adjustment Cause Paper exit tray lift motor trouble.
error (Undertoner) Finisher control PWB trouble.
Check & Remedy Use SIM3-3 to check the operation of the paper
exit tray lift motor.
Detail PCU
Replace the finisher control PWB.
Cause Toner density sensor trouble.
Replace the paper exit tray lift motor.
Charging voltage/ developing voltage trouble, toner
Error cancel method Power OFF - ON
density trouble, or developing unit trouble.
PCU PWB trouble.
Check & Remedy Replace the toner density sensor.
Replace the developing unit.
F1-19 Finisher alignment operation trouble F
Replace the PCU PWB.
Error cancel method Power OFF - ON Detail PCU
Cause Finisher paper alignment motor lock.
Motor speed abnormality.
F1-00 Finisher - PCU PWB communication Overcurrent to the motor.
error Finisher control PWB trouble.
Check & Remedy Use SIM3-3 to check the operation of the paper
alignment motor F.
Detail PCU Replace the finisher control PWB.
Cause Connection trouble of the connector and the Replace the paper alignment motor F.
harness between the finisher and the PCU PWB. Error cancel method Power OFF - ON
Finisher control PWB trouble.
PCU PWB trouble.
Strong external noises. F1-20 Finisher alignment operation trouble
Check & Remedy Check the connector and the harness between the
finisher and the PCU PWB.
R
Replace the finisher control PWB.
Replace the PCU PWB. Detail PCU
Error cancel method Power OFF - ON Cause Finisher paper alignment motor lock.
Motor speed abnormality.
Overcurrent to the motor.
F1-03 Finisher paper exit roller lifting Finisher control PWB trouble.
operation trouble Check & Remedy Use SIM3-3 to check the operation of the paper
alignment motor R.
Replace the finisher control PWB.
Detail PCU Replace the paper alignment motor R.
Cause Finisher paper exit roller lift motor trouble. Error cancel method Power OFF - ON
Harness and connector connection trouble.
Home position sensor trouble.
Finisher control PWB trouble.
Detail PCU
F1-50 Main unit - Finisher combination error
Cause The initial detection fuse is not blown off though it is
conducted for the specified time. (Y)
Detail PCU Developing unit trouble.
Cause The finisher which is not supported by the main unit PCU PWB trouble.
model is installed. Connection trouble of the connector and the
Finisher control PWB trouble. harness.
Check & Remedy Install a proper finisher. Check & Remedy Use SIM6-51 to check the operations of the
Replace the finisher control PWB. [DVCRU Y] fuse blowing circuit.
Error cancel method Power OFF - ON Use SIM30-1 to check the [DVCRU Y] initial
detection input signal.
Replace the developing unit.
F2-11 Developing unit initial detection (K) Replace the PCU PWB.
Check connection of the connector and the
harness.
Detail PCU Error cancel method Power OFF - ON
Cause The initial detection fuse is not blown off though it is
conducted for the specified time. (K)
Developing unit trouble.
PCU PWB trouble.
Connection trouble of the connector and the
harness.
Check & Remedy Use SIM6-51 to check the operation of the [DVCRU
K] fuse blowing circuit.
Use SIM30-1 to check the [DVCRU K] initial
detection input signal.
Replace the developing unit.
Replace the PCU PWB.
Check connection of the connector and the
harness.
Error cancel method Power OFF - ON
F2-16 Drum unit initial detection trouble F2-19 Primary transfer unit initial
(C drum) detection trouble
Detail PCU
H2-00 Thermister open trouble
Cause Toner cartridge (CRUM) trouble.
PCU PWB trouble. (TH_UM_AD2)
Connector/harness trouble.
Check & Remedy Replace the toner cartridge. Detail PCU
Replace the PCU PWB. Cause Thermister trouble.
Connector/harness trouble. PCU PWB trouble
Error cancel method Power OFF - ON Connection trouble of the connector and the
harness.
Fusing unit not installed.
F2-76 Toner cartridge CRUM error Check & Remedy Replace the thermister.
(MAGENTA) Replace the PCU PWB.
Harness and connector connection trouble.
Error cancel method Power OFF - ON
Detail PCU
Cause Toner cartridge (CRUM) trouble.
PCU PWB trouble. H2-01 Thermister open trouble (TH_LM)
Connector/harness trouble.
Check & Remedy Replace the toner cartridge.
Replace the PCU PWB. Detail PCU
Connector/harness trouble. Cause Thermister trouble.
Error cancel method Power OFF - ON PCU PWB trouble.
Connection trouble of the connector and the
harness.
F2-77 Toner cartridge CRUM error Fusing unit not installed.
Check & Remedy Replace the thermister.
(YELLOW) Replace the PCU PWB.
Harness and connector connection trouble.
Detail PCU Error cancel method Power OFF - ON
Cause Toner cartridge (CRUM) trouble.
PCU PWB trouble.
Connector/harness trouble. H2-02 Sub thermister open trouble (TH_US)
Check & Remedy Replace the toner cartridge.
Replace the PCU PWB. Detail PCU
Connector/harness trouble.
Cause Thermister trouble.
Error cancel method Power OFF - ON PCU PWB trouble.
Connection trouble of the connector and the
harness.
F2-78 Registration image density sensor Fusing unit not installed.
trouble (Transfer belt substrate Check & Remedy Replace the thermister.
Replace the PCU PWB.
reflection rate abnormality) Harness and connector connection trouble.
Error cancel method Power OFF - ON
Detail PCU
Cause Image density (registration) sensor trouble (Sensor
sensitivity adjustment trouble). H2-03 Compensation thermister open
PCU PWB trouble.
Connection trouble of the connector and the
trouble (TH_UM_AD1)
harness.
Image density (registration) sensor dirt. Detail PCU
Transfer belt dirt, scratch. Cause Thermister trouble.
Check & Remedy Replace the image density (registration) sensor. PCU PWB trouble
Replace the PCU PWB. Connection trouble of the connector and the
Harness and connector connection trouble. harness.
Clean the image density (registration) sensor. Fusing unit not installed.
Clean or replace the transfer belt. Check & Remedy Replace the thermister.
Error cancel method Power OFF - ON Replace the PCU PWB.
Harness and connector connection trouble.
Error cancel method Power OFF - ON
H4-01 Fusing section low temperature H4-04 Fusing section low temperature
trouble (TH_LM) trouble (TH_EX)
Detail PCU
Cause The fusing temperature does not reach the
specified level within the specified time from
stopping a job due to fall in the fusing temperature.
Thermister trouble.
Heater lamp trouble.
PCU PWB trouble
Thermostat trouble.
Connector, harness connection trouble.
Power unit trouble.
Interlock switch trouble.
Check & Remedy Replace the thermister.
Replace the heater lamp.
Replace the PCU PWB.
Replace the thermostat.
Check connection of the connector and the
harness.
Replace the power unit.
Replace the interlock switch.
Use SIM5-2 to check the flashing operation of the
heater lamp.
Error cancel method Power OFF - ON
Detail PCU
L4-29 HDD fan trouble
Cause Transfer unit position sensor trouble.
PCU PWB trouble. Detail PCU
Connection trouble of the connector and the Cause The fan lock signal is detected during rotation of
harness. the HDD fan.
Transfer unit separation clutch operation trouble. HDD fan trouble.
Primary transfer belt unit is not installed. MFP PWB trouble.
Check & Remedy Use SIM6-3 to check the separating operation of Connection trouble of the connector and the
the transfer unit. harness.
Install the primary transfer belt unit. Check & Remedy Use SIM6-2 to check the operation of the fan
Replace the transfer unit position sensor. motor.
Replace the PCU PWB. Replace the HDD fan.
Harness and connector connection trouble. Replace the MFP PWB.
Replace the transfer unit separation clutch. Replace the connector or the harness.
Error cancel method Power OFF - ON Error cancel method Power OFF - ON
L4-12 Secondary transfer separation trouble L4-31 Paper exit cooling fan trouble
Detail PCU
L8-01 Full wave signal detection error
Cause The fan operation signal is not detected within the
specified time in the fusing cooling fan operation. Detail PCU
Fusing cooling fan trouble. Cause No full wave signal is detected.
PCU PWB trouble PCU PWB trouble
Connection trouble of the connector and the Power unit trouble.
harness. Connection trouble of the connector and the
Check & Remedy Use SIM6-2 to check the rotating operation of the harness.
fan. Check & Remedy Replace the PCU PWB.
Replace the fusing cooling fan. Replace the power unit.
Replace the PCU PWB. Check connection of the connectors and the
Harness and connector connection trouble. harness.
Error cancel method Power OFF - ON Error cancel method Power OFF - ON
Detail PCU
L8-20 MFP PWB - Mother board
Cause The fan operation signal is not detected within the communication error
specified time in the process fan 2 operation.
Process fan trouble. Detail MFP
PCU PWB trouble.
Cause Mother board PWB - MFPC PWB connection
Connection trouble of the connector and the
trouble.
harness.
MFP PWB trouble.
Check & Remedy Check that the fan is rotating after turning ON the Replace the mother board.
power. Check & Remedy Check connection between the mother board and
Replace the process fan 2. the MFPC PWB.
Replace the PCU PWB. Check the earth line of the main unit.
Check connection of the connector and the Replace the MFPC PWB.
harness. Replace the mother board.
Error cancel method Power OFF - ON Error cancel method Power OFF - ON
U6-03 Desk paper feed tray 3 lift trouble U7-51 Vendor machine error
Detail PCU Detail MFP (Notification of a trouble from the serial
Cause The D3ULD sensor is not turned ON within the vendor)
specified time during lift-up operation. Cause Serial vendor machine trouble.
D3ULD sensor trouble. Connector, harness connection trouble.
Desk control PWB trouble.
Check & Remedy Err.XX" is displayed on the operation panel of the
Lift unit trouble.
vendor. (XX is the detail code.)
Connection trouble of the connector and the
Repair the vendor machine referring to the detail
harness.
code.
PCU PWB trouble.
Check the connector and the harness in the
Check & Remedy Replace the D3ULD sensor.
communication line.
Replace the desk control PWB.
Error cancel method Power OFF - ON
Replace the lift unit.
Check connection of the connector and the
harness.
Replace the PCU PWB. UC-02 IPD ASIC (CPT) error
Error cancel method Power OFF - ON
Detail SCU
Cause IPD ASIC (CPT) operation error
U6-10 Desk paper feed unit paper transport SCN PWB trouble.
motor trouble Check & Remedy Replace the SCN PWB.
Error cancel method Power OFF - ON
Detail PCU
Cause Desk paper feed motor trouble (motor lock, motor UC-20 IPD ASIC (DOCC) error
rpm abnormality, overcurrent to the motor).
Desk control PWB trouble.
Connection trouble of the connector and the Detail SCU
harness. Cause IPD ASIC (DOCC) operation error
Check & Remedy Use SIM4-3 to check the operation of the desk SCN PWB trouble.
transport motor. Check & Remedy Replace the SCN PWB.
Replace the desk control PWB. Error cancel method Power OFF - ON
Replace the desk paper feed motor.
Harness and connector connection trouble.
Error cancel method Power OFF - ON A0-01 PCU PWB ROM error
Detail MFP
Cause Firmware combination error between the MFP and
the image ROM (color correction ROM).
Check & Remedy Upgrade the firmware versions of the MFP and the
image ROM (color correction ROM).
Error cancel method Power OFF - ON
Detail MFP
Cause Firmware combination error between the MFP and
the PCU.
Check & Remedy Check the combination between the MFP and the
PCU.
Error cancel method Power OFF - ON
Detail MFP
Cause Firmware combination error between the MFP and
the SCU.
Check & Remedy Check the combination between the MFP and the
SCU.
Error cancel method Power OFF - ON
Detail MFP
Cause Inconsistency between the MFP firmware version
and the EEPROM data version.
Check & Remedy Check the combination of the firmware.
Error cancel method Power OFF - ON
Detail PCU
Cause Inconsistency between the PCU firmware version
and the EEPROM data version.
Check & Remedy Check the combination of the firmware.
Error cancel method Power OFF - ON
* Firmware types
1. Outline
Display item Item description
A. Cases where update is required MAIN BODY CONFIG Configuration data
ROM update is required in the following cases: ICU(MAIN) First half of the ICU main section
ICU(BOOTM) ICU boot section main
1) When there is a necessity to upgrade the performance.
ICU(BOOTCN) ICU boot section CN
2) When installing a new spare part ROM for repair to the LANGUAGE Data program for language support
machine. GRAPHIC Graphic data for L-LCD
3) When installing a new spare parts PWB unit (with ROM) for SLIST SLIST data for L-LCD
repair to the machine. PCU(BOOT) PCU boot section
4) When there is a trouble in the ROM program and it must be PCU(MAIN) PCU main section
repaired. SCU(BOOT) SCU boot section
SCU(MAIN) SCU main section
B. Notes for update ESCP_FONT ESCP/P font
(1) Relationship between each ROM and update PDL_FONT PDL font
ANIMATION Animation data
Before execution of ROM update, check combinations with ROM’s
IMAGE_DATA Image ASIC data
installed in the other PWB’s including options. Some combinations
COLOR PROFILE Color profile
of each ROM’s versions may cause malfunctions of the machine.
WEB HELP WEB help
C. Update procedures and kinds of firmware UNICODE UNICODE table
OPTION DESK(BOOT) Desk unit boot section
There are following methods of update of the firmware.
DESK(MAIN) Desk unit main section
1) Firmware update using media
FIN(BOOT) Inner finisher boot section
2) Firmware update using FTP FIN(MAIN) Inner finisher main section
3) Firmware update using Web page FAX(BOOT) FAX1 boot section
4) Emergency update (incase of an HDD breakdown) FAX(MAIN) FAX1 main section
2. Update procedure
A. Firmware update using media
For the update, connect the media or USB memory to the USB port that exists in the main body, and select the firmware data in the media or
USB memory by simulation screen in the main unit.
Media *1
Firmware.sfu Adopter
Manual Data
Firmware.sfu
*1:
• Store the firmware data (xxx .sfu) to the media or USB memory beforehand.
• The media used for the update must have a minimum of 32MB of storage capacity.
• The USB memory equipped with the security (secure) function cannot be used.
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂ
7(67 12 &/26(
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21 ǂǂ &/26(
),50:$5(83'$7(XVEEG
7(67
),50:$5(83'$7(
),/( ),/(
&21),* 12:8372
),/( ),/(
,&80$,1 12:8372
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ
7(67 &/26( Exit the simulation mode and turn off the power.
),50:$5(83'$7( Go to Simulation 22-05 and confirm the firmware has
&21),* 12:8372 upgraded successfully.
,&80$,1 12:8372
Machine 1 Machine 2
10.36.112.8 10.36.112.8
Firmware.sfu
Machine 3 Machine 4
FTP client
10.36.101.5 10.36.112.8
MX-C310
EmergencyUpdateMode
Updating ....10%
EmergencyUpdateMode
(1)
MX-C401
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6
B7
R2
R3
R4
R5
R6
R7
G2
G3
G4
G5
G6
G7
CK
(NC)
(NC)
Vsync
ENAB
Hsync
UD/LR
F-GND
D-GND
D-GND
D-GND
D-GND
D-GND
D-GND
D-GND
D-GND
D-GND
D-GND
D-GND 9
8
7
6
5
3.3V_LCD 4
3.3V_LCD 3
2
3.3V_LCD 1
40
39
38
37
36
35
34
33
32
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
15
14
13
12
11
10
FH12-40S-0.5SH(55)
CN-2
CN-9 CN-8 CN-10 CN-1
B16B-CZHK-B-1 B16B-CZHK-B-1 501190-4017 501571-4009
D-GND 1 16 D-GND D-GND 40 1 D-GND
RXD_SCN 2 15 RXD_SCN 24V 38 3 24V
CTS_SCN 3 14 CTS_SCN 24V 36 5 24V
TXD_SCN 4 13 TXD_SCN D-GND 34 7 D-GND
YH(Y2)
XH(X1)
/YL(Y1)
/XL(X2)
PNL_SEL3 32 9 PNL_SEL3
23 B0
24 B1
25 B2
27 B3
28 B4
29 B5
7 R0
8 R1
9 R2
11 R3
12 R4
13 R5
nRTS_SCN 5 12 nRTS_SCN
15 G0
16 G1
17 G2
19 G3
20 G4
21 G5
3 CK
37 3.3V
38 3.3V
40 3.3V
6 (NC)
39 (NC)
nRES_SCN 6 11 nRES_SCN PNL_SEL2 30 11 PNL_SEL2
33 Vsync
35 ENAB
31 Hsync
52271-0469
CN-3
36 UD/LR
PNL_SEL1
34 F-GND
28 13 PNL_SEL1
1 D-GND
2 D-GND
4 D-GND
5 D-GND
10 D-GND
14 D-GND
18 D-GND
22 D-GND
26 D-GND
30 D-GND
32 D-GND
nRES_MFPC_SCN 7 10 nRES_MFPC_SCN
4
3
2
1
nPOF_SCN 8 9 nPOF_SCN PNL_SEL0 26 15 PNL_SEL0
nLCD_DISP 9 8 nLCD_DISP /CCFT 24 17 /CCFT
nPWR_SW 10 7 nPWR_SW 3.3VA 22 19 3.3VA
nWU_KEY 11 6 nWU_KEY VCONT 20 21 VCONT
1. Operation panel
LCD
5VO 15 2 5VO D-GND 12 29 D-GND
D-GND 16 1 D-GND /XL(X2) 10 31 /XL(X2)
YH(Y2) 8 33 YH(Y2)
XH(X1) 6 35 XH(X1)
/YL(Y1) 4 37 /YL(Y1)
D-GND 2 39 D-GND
LVDS PWB
D-GND 39 2 D-GND
(NC)CN_CHK_OUT 37 4 (NC)CN_CHK_OUT
LCD_A3_P 35 6 LCD_A3_P
LCD_A3_M 33 8 LCD_A3_M
D-GND 31 10 D-GND
LCD_CLK_P 29 12 LCD_CLK_P
TOUCH PANEL
LCD_CLK_M 27 14 LCD_CLK_M
24V
24V
D-GND 25 16 D-GND
CCFT
A-GND
A-GND
MX-C401/C381/C311 (8.5 inch model)
LCD_A2_P 23 18 LCD_A2_P
LCD_A2_M 21 20 LCD_A2_M
D-GND 19 22 D-GND
CN-4
5
4
3
2
1
SM05B-GHS-TB
LCD_A1_P 17 24 LCD_A1_P
LCD_A1_M 15 26 LCD_A1_M
D-GND 13 28 D-GND
LCD_A0_P 11 30 LCD_A0_P
LCD_A0_M 9 32 LCD_A0_M
D-GND 7 34 D-GND
DISP
5
4
3
2
1
5 36 DISP
(NC)CK_CHK_IN 3 38 (NC)CK_CHK_IN
D-GND 1 40 D-GND
A. Electrical and mechanism relation diagram
CN1
24V
24V
CCFT
A-GND
A-GND
B05B-PASK
[8] OPERATIONAL DESCRIPTIONS
CN-8 CN-11
B34B-PHDSS-B S34B-PHDSS-B
LCD INV
LCDSEL3
SEG1LEDCPR 13 8
D-GND 21 10D-GND SEG1LEDCPR
PWB
D-GND 22 26D-GND SEG0LEDBPR 15 6 SEG0LEDBPR
OPE-P
D-GND
D-GND
3
2
nPWRSW 1
CN-2
BM03B-PASS-1-TFT
CN1
1 D-GND
2 D-GND
B3B-PH-K-S
1
2
3 nPWRSW 3
PWRSW
(2)
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6
B7
R2
R3
R4
R5
R6
R7
G2
G3
G4
G5
G6
G7
CK
(NC)
(NC)
Vsync
ENAB
Hsync
UD/LR
F-GND
D-GND
D-GND
D-GND
D-GND
D-GND
D-GND
D-GND
D-GND
D-GND
D-GND
D-GND
CN-9 CN-8 CN-9 CN-1
B16B-CZHK-B-1 B16B-CZHK-B-1 501190-2017 501190-2017
9
8
7
6
5
3.3V_LCD 4
3.3V_LCD 3
2
3.3V_LCD 1
40
39
38
37
36
35
34
33
32
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
15
14
13
12
11
10
D-GND 1 16 D-GND D-GND 1 20 D-GND
FH12-40S-0.5SH(55)
CN-2
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
G0
G1
G2
G3
G4
G5
CK
R0
R1
R2
R3
R4
R5
nWU_LED 13 4 nWU_LED nPWRSW 6 15 nPWRSW
(NC)
(NC)
3.3V
3.3V
3.3V
WU_LED
Vsync
nINFO_LED WU_LED
Hsync
ENAB
nINFO_LED 14 3 8 13
UD/LR
F-GND
D-GND
D-GND
D-GND
D-GND
D-GND
D-GND
D-GND
D-GND
D-GND
D-GND
D-GND
FB
(NC)
(NC)
B. Operational descriptions
CN-8 CN-11
B34B-PHDSS-B S34B-PHDSS-B 5V_LCD 4
3
2
1
LCDSEL2 2 19 LCDSEL2
LCDSEL1 3 17 LCDSEL1
LCDSEL3 4 18 LCDSEL3 CN-10 CN-1
SCANDATA0- 5 13 SCANDATA0- 501190-4017 501571-4009
LCD_DATA0- 6 22 LCD_DATA0- D-GND D-GND
PNL_SEL3 32 9 PNL_SEL3
LVDS
the LCD unit, and the operation keys. Most of the operations can
The LCD is not provided with the touch panel, and the operations
For the model with 8.5" LCD color, it is composed of the LVDS
For the model with 4.3" LCD color, it is composed of the LVDS
PWB, the LCD INV PWB, the MFP OPE-P PWB, the touch panel,
but are used to operate and set the machine as well as to display
PWB, the MFP OPE-P PWB, the LCD unit, and the operation keys.
D-GND 39 2 D-GND
D-GND 27 6 D-GND (NC)CN_CHK_OUT 37 4 (NC)CN_CHK_OUT
D-GND 28 30 D-GND LCD_A3_P LCD_A3_P
SCANDATA3- 29 1 SCANDATA3- 35 6
LCD_A3_M 33 8 LCD_A3_M
LCD_DATA3- 30 34 LCD_DATA3-
SCANDATA3+ 31 D-GND 31 10 D-GND
2 SCANDATA3+ LCD_CLK_P 12 LCD_CLK_P
LCD_DATA3+ 32 33 LCD_DATA3+ 29
LCD_CLK_M 27 14 LCD_CLK_M
D-GND 33 4 D-GND
D-GND 34 32 D-GND D-GND 25 16 D-GND
LCD_A2_P 23 18 LCD_A2_P
LCD_A2_M 21 20 LCD_A2_M
D-GND 19 22 D-GND
LCD_A1_P 17 24 LCD_A1_P
LCD_A1_M 15 26 LCD_A1_M
D-GND 13 28 D-GND
LCD_A0_P 11 30 LCD_A0_P
LCD_A0_M 9 32 LCD_A0_M
D-GND 7 34 D-GND
DISP 5 36 DISP
(NC)CK_CHK_IN 3 38 (NC)CK_CHK_IN
D-GND 1 40 D-GND
MFP
PWB
OPE-P
1 D-GND
2 D-GND
B3B-PH-K-S
1
2
3 nPWRSW 3
PWRSW
2. Scanner section
A. Electrical and mechanism relation diagram
MIM
2
G. Zooming operation
Zooming in the sub scanning direction is performed by changing
the scanning speed in the sub scanning direction and using the
R,G,B Color filter image process technology (software).
Zooming in the main scanning direction is not performed optically,
but performed with the image process technology (by the software).
CCD Elements
MPWS
MPLD1
Signal name
3
3
SMP-02V-NC + SMR-02V-N
A. Electrical and mechanism relation diagram
1 24V3 1
2 /MPFS 2
MPED
P R
5
MPWS
179228-3
CN-17 33R-RWZV-K2GG(LF) (SN) + 3 5VNPD(R˄)
B30B-CZWHK-B-1 33P-RWZV-K4GG(LF) (SN) 2 D-GND
1 /MPED
24V3 B-1 A-17 24V3 A-1
/MPFS B-2 A-16 /MPFS A-2
5VNPD(R˄) B-3 A-15 5VNPD(R˄) A-3
D-GND B-4 A-14 D-GND A-4
/MPED B-5 A-13 /MPED A-5 SMP-04V-NC + SMR-04V-N
5VNPD(R˄) B-6 A-12 5VNPD(R˄) A-6 1 5VNPD(R˄) 1
D-GND B-7 A-7 2 D-GND 2
CN-15
B20B-PNDZS S6B-XH-A-1
CPFM_OUT_A 9 1 CPFM_OUT_A
24V_CPFM 11 2 24V_CPFM
CPFM_OUT_/A 13 3 CPFM_OUT_/A
CPFM_OUT_B 15 4 CPFM_OUT_B
24V_CPFM 17 5 24V_CPFM
CPFM_OUT_/B 19 6 CPFM_OUT_/B
š56 HB UNI
No. Name Function and operation
1 Paper feed roller Feeds paper to the paper transport section.
2 Separation sheet Separates paper to prevent double-feed.
3 Paper feed tray lift cam Lifts the paper feed lift plate.
4 Paper feed lift plate Presses paper on the top onto the paper feed roller.
5 Paper feed clutch Controls ON/OFF of the manual paper feed roller.
B. Operational descriptions
Power of the paper feed motor (CPFM) is transmitted to the paper
feed cam by the paper feed clutch to lift the paper feed lift plate so
that paper on the top is pressed onto the paper feed roller and the
paper feed roller is rotated to feed paper on the manual paper feed
tray to the paper transport section.
Everytime when one sheet of paper is fed, the paper feed roller
rotates one turn and the paper feed lift plate performs lifting once.
The separation sheet is provided to prevent double-feed.
ON/OFF of paper feed operation is controlled by the manual paper
feed clutch solenoid.
The paper size is detected by the paper width detector (MPWS)
and the paper length detector (MPLD1).
Relationship between paper size detection and the paper width
detector (MPWS) and the paper length detector (MPLD1)
MPWS
detection width MPLD1 Metric series Inch series NOTE
(mm)
207.9 – 221 ON FC (8.5" x 13") 8.5" x 14"
207.9 – 221 – 8.5" x 11"
202 – 218 A4 -
176.2 – 192.2 7.25" x 10.5"
174 – 190 B5
140.5 – 156.5 A5
131.7 – 147.7 5.5" x 8.5"
94 – 108 Postcard Japan only
24V_CPFM 17 24V_CPFM
CPFM_OUT_/B 6 19 CPFM_OUT_/B
š56 HB UNI
SMP-02V-NC + SMR-02V-N
CPFM
1 /CPFC 1
2 24V3 2 SMR-04V-N + SMP-04V-NC
P R 1 /CPUC1 1 12 /CPUC1
2 24V3 2 14 24V3
CPUC1
3 /CPFC 3 16 /CPFC
4 24V3 4 18 24V3
SMP-02V-NC + SMR-02V-N
R P
1 /CPUC1 1
2 24V3 2
P R
PAP-02V-S SMP-08V-NC + SMR-08V-N
P-GND 1 1 P-GND 1
/CLUM 2 2 /CLUM 2
3 5VNPD 3
CLUM
179228-3 4 /CSPD1 4
5VNPD 1 5 D-GND 5
/CSPD1 2 6 (NC) 6
D-GND 3 7 (NC) 7
8 (NC) 8
P R
5
CPFD1
CSPD1
DF1B-20DEP-2.5RC CN-8
+ DF1B-20DES-2.5RC B24B-PNDZS
1 P-GND 1 5 P-GND
2 /CLUM 2 7 /CLUM
CLUD1
3 5VNPD 3 9 5VNPD
4 /CSPD1 4 11 /CSPD1
S04B-PASK-2 5 D-GND 5 13 D-GND
D-GND 1 6 D-GND 6 15 D-GND
/CSS13 2 7 /CSS13 7 17 /CSS13
/CSS12 3 8 /CSS12 8 19 /CSS12
/CSS11 4 9 /CSS11 9 21 /CSS11
10 /TRC_DSK 10
11 RES_DSK 11 12 /TRC_DSK
12 DSR_DSK 12 14 RES_DSK
13 /DTR_DSK 13 16 DSR_DSK
12
14 RXD_DSK 14 18 /DTR_DSK
9
15 TXD_DSK 15 20 RXD_DSK
1
16 D-GND 16 22 TXD_DSK
4
17 (NC) 17 24 D-GND
18 24V_DSK 18
3
19 P-GND 19
20 5VN 20
P S
CPED1 2
10
6
11
PCU PWB
179228-3
1 5VNPD
3 D-GND
2 /PPD1
A. Electrical and mechanism relation diagram
04XR-6H-P
03XR-6H-P
03XR-6H-P
1 5VNPD 4
3
3 D-GND 2
1
03XR-6H-P
2 /CPED1
2 /CPFD1
1 5VNPD
1 5VNPD
292254-4
3 D-GND
3 D-GND
1 5VNPD
3 D-GND
2 /CLUD
4 F-GND
2 /PPD1
8
179228-4
4. Paper feed tray section
9
14R-RIZ-K4GG-FL(LF)(SN)
7
14P-RIZ-K2GG-RL(LF)(SN)
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
/CPED1
/CPFD1
5VNPD
5VNPD
5VNPD
5VNPD
D-GND
D-GND
D-GND
D-GND
F-GND
/CLUD
/PPD1
(NC)
10
11
12
13
14
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
CZWH-30-S + BU30P-TZW-S(LF)(SN)
A-15
A-14
A-13
A-12
A-11
A-10
A-9
A-8
A-7
A-6
A-5
A-4
A-3
A-2
A-1
CN-13
B30B-CZWHK-B-1
A-2 /CPED1
A-5 /CPFD1
A-4 5VNPD
A-1 5VNPD
A-7 5VNPD
A-10 5VNPD
A-3 D-GND
A-6 D-GND
A-9 D-GND
A-12 D-GND
A-13 F-GND
A-14 F-GND
CZHR-15V-S
A-8 /CLUD
A-15 5VNPD
A-11 /PPD1
A-15 (NC)
A-14 /CPED1
A-13 D-GND
A-12 5VNPD
A-11 /CPFD1
A-10 D-GND
A-9 5VNPD
A-8 /CLUD
A-7 D-GND
A-6 5VNPD
A-5 /PPD1
A-4 D-GND
Signal name Name Function and operation
CLUD1 Paper feed tray 1 upper limit detector Detects the upper limit of the paper feed tray 1, and maintains the contact pressure between
paper on the top and the paper pickup roller to provide stable paper feed power.
CLUM Paper feed tray 1 lift-up motor (Paper feed tray 1) Drives the lift plate of the paper feed tray 1, and maintains the contact pressure between
paper on the top and the paper pickup roller to provide stable paper feed power.
CPED1 Paper feed tray 1 paper empty detector Detects paper empty in the paper feed tray 1.
CPFC Paper feed tray vertical transport clutch Controls ON/OFF of the paper transport roller 1 in the paper feed tray 1 section.
CPFD1 Paper transport detector 1 Detects paper pass in the paper transport roller 1. Detects a paper jam.
CPFM Paper feed motor Drives the paper feed section.
CPUC1 Paper feed clutch (Paper feed tray 1) Controls ON/OFF of the rollers (the paper pickup roller, the paper feed roller, the paper
transport roller 2) in the paper feed tray 1 section.
CSPD1 Paper feed tray 1 insertion detector / Detects insertion of the paper feed tray 1, and detects the paper remaining quantity.
Paper remaining quantity detector
PPD1 Paper transport detector 2 Detects paper pass in the paper transport roller 2. Detects a paper jam.
(Figure showing state transition of the remaining paper detection sensor during tray elevation and
changes in status according to the number of remaining sheets)
CSPD
1/3 Field (remaining paper detection)
Sensor logic: Low
2/3 Field
Sensor logic: Hi
3/3 Field
Sensor logic: Low
APPD1
APPD2
DSW-R
TH/HUD
3
5 /FUM_D
1 4 Lock(W) 4
2
INT24V2
POFM
6 (NC)
P-GND 3 7 FUM_LD R P
/FUM_CK 5
/FUM_D 7
/FUM_LD 9
4
SMP-02V-NC + SMR-02V-N
/ADUC1 14 1 /ADUC1 1
24V3 16 2 24V3 2
P R
179228-3
1 /APPD1
5. Paper transport and switchback section
CN-1 2 D-GND
B2P-VH 3 5VNPD(R˄)
PS-187
+24V1 1 1 +24V1 179228-3
DSW_R(24V) 2 1 /APPD2
PS-187 2 D-GND
1 DSW_R(24V) 3 5VNPD(R˄)
A. Electrical and mechanism relation diagram
PHR-4
RRM
4 TH_M
PCU PWB
3 D-GND
33R-RWZV-K2GG(LF) (SN) + 2 HUD_M
CN-17 33P-RWZV-K4GG(LF) (SN)
B30B-CZWHK-B-1 1 5VN
POFM_V A-15 B-1 POFM_V B-16
/POFM_CNT A-14 B-2 /POFM_CNT B-15
P-GND A-13 B-3 P-GND B-14
/POFM_LD A-12 B-4 /POFM_LD B-13
/APPD1 A-11 B-5 /APPD1 B-12
D-GND A-10 B-6 D-GND B-11
5VNPD(R˄) A-9 B-7 5VNPD(R˄) B-10
/APPD2 A-8 B-8 /APPD2 B-9
D-GND A-7 B-9 D-GND B-8
5VNPD(R˄) A-6 B-10 5VNPD(R˄) B-7
TH_M B-12 A-6 TH_M A-12
D-GND B-13 A-5 D-GND A-13
HUD_M B-14 A-4 HUD_M A-14
5VN B-15 A-3 5VN A-15
A-2 F-GND A-16
A-1 (NC) A-17
R P
CN-15
B20B-PNDZS B4B-PH-K
RRM_OUT_/B 1 1 RRM_OUT_/B
RRM_OUT_/A 3 2 RRM_OUT_/A
RRM_OUT_B 5 3 RRM_OUT_B
RRM_OUT_A 7 4 RRM_OUT_A
1
CN-13
B30B-CZWHK-B-1 CZWH-30-S + BU30P-TZW-S(LF)(SN) 179228-3
5VNPD B-13 B-3 5VNPD B-13 1 5VNPD
/PPD2 B-14 B-2 /PPD2 B-14 2 /PPD2
D-GND B-15 B-1 D-GND B-15 3 D-GND
PPD2
CZHR-15V-S
Signal name Name Function and operation
FUM Fusing drive motor Drives the paper transport section and the switchback section.
PPD2 Paper transport detector 3 Detects paper pass in front of the resist roller, and controls the stop timing of paper at the
resist roller.
RRM Resist motor Controls ON/OFF of the resist roller. Controls the relationship between images and paper.
ADUC1 Switchback transport clutch Controls ON/OFF of the paper transport roller in the switchback section.
DSW-R Right door open/close detection switch Detects open/close of the right door.
APPD1 Switchback paper transport detector 1 Detects paper pass in the switchback section. Detects a paper jam.
APPD2 Switchback paper transport detector 2 Detects paper pass in the switchback section. Detects a paper jam.
TH/HUD Temperature and humidity sensor Detects the temperature and the humidity to use them as process control parameters.
POFM Paper exit cooling fan Cools the paper exit section.
10
CN-13
CZWH-30-S + BU30P-TZW-S(LF)(SN) B30B-CZWHK-B-1
A-15 5VNPD A-1 A-15 5VNPD
A-14 /CPED1 A-2 A-14 /CPED1
A-13 D-GND A-3 A-13 D-GND
9 A-12
A-11
5VNPD
/CPFD1
A-4
A-5
A-12 5VNPD
A-11 /CPFD1
A-10 D-GND A-6 A-10 D-GND
11 A-9
A-8
5VNPD
/CLUD
A-7
A-8
A-9 5VNPD
A-8 /CLUD
A-7 D-GND A-9 A-7 D-GND
A-6 5VNPD A-10 A-6 5VNPD
9 A-5
A-4
/PPD1
D-GND
A-11
A-12
A-5 /PPD1
A-4 D-GND
A-3 F-GND A-13 A-3 1TCSET
4 11 A-2
A-1
F-GND
(NC)
A-14
A-15
A-2 /1TCCRU
A-1 D-GND
CN1 CN-1
4 11 B-6 /DRCRU_C
B-7 /DRCRU_K
B-10
B-9
B-6
B-7
/DRCRU_C
/DRCRU_K
B05B-PASK-1 SM05B-PASS-1 B-8 /1TNFD B-8 B-8 /1TNFD
SMP-03V-NC + SMR-03V-N B-9 D-GND B-7 B-9 D-GND
TH 1 1 TH
D-GND 2 2 D-GND 1 +(R) 1 B-10 LSUFM_V B-6 B-10 LSUFM_V
BD 3 3 BD 9 2 -(Blk)
3 Lock(W) 3
2 B-11 P-GND
B-12 /LSUFM_LD
B-5
B-4
B-11
B-12
P-GND
/LSUFM_LD
D-GND 4
5VLD 5
4 D-GND
5 5VLD
11 4 P R B-13 5VNPD
B-14 /PPD2
B-3
B-2
B-13
B-14
5VNPD
/PPD2
LSUFM B-15 D-GND
CZHR-15V-S
B-1 B-15 D-GND
1
6 PCU PWB
4
6 2
5 5 8 CN-10 CN-7
B22B-CZWHK-B-1 B22B-CZWHK-B-1
6 2 7 nRES_PCU
5VNPD
A-1
A-2
A-11 PCU_RES
A-10 5VNPD
nRTS_PCU A-3 A-9 PCU_DTR
nCTS_PCU A-4 A-8 PCU_DSR
nPOF_PCU A-5 A-7 /POF
5 LSUASIC_RST A-6
nSCK_LSU
A-6 LSU_RST
A-7 A-5 SCK
nRSV_DAT A-8 A-4 RSV_DAT
TH_LSU A-9 A-3 TH1_LSU
D-GND A-10 A-2 D-GND
12 (NC) A-11 A-1 (NC)
5 D-GND
TXD_PCU
B-11
B-10
B-1
B-2
D-GND
PCU_TxD
RXD_PCU
PGM1 3 nINFO_LED
B-9
B-8
B-3
B-4
PCU_RxD
/FAX_LED
nTRANS_RST B-7 B-5 TRANS_RST
nTRANS_DAT B-6 B-6 TRANS_DAT
JOBEND_INT B-5 B-7 JOBEND_INT
nPCU_TRG B-4 B-8 (/PCU_TRG)
D-GND B-3 B-9 D-GND
D-GND B-2 B-10 D-GND
5 INT5V B-1 B-11 INT5V
LSU MOTHER
5 PWB
CN-4
5
CN-3 CN-17
SM06B-PASS-1 179228-5 TX24-60R-6ST-H1E
TX25-60P-6ST-H1E
24V 1 5 24V CNCHK 1 CNCHK
2 P-GND 1
P-GND 4 LD_CHK_4 31 LDCHK_1 2 2 LDCHK_1 31 LD_CHK_4
nSTART 3 3 nSTART LD_CHK_3 32 DT_C1+ 3 3 DT_C1+ 32 LD_CHK_3
LOCK 4 2 LOCK LD_CHK_2 33 DT_C1- 4 DT_C1- 33 LD_CHK_2
5 4
CLK 1 CLK nLDERR_Y 34 DT_C2+ 5 DT_C2+ 34 nLDERR_Y
(NC)BRAKE 6
5
nLDERR_C 35 DT_C2- 6 6 DT_C2- 35 nLDERR_C
VREF_C1 36 DT_K1+ 7 7 DT_K1+ 36 VREF_C1
nENB_C 37 DT_K1- 8 8 DT_K1- 37 nENB_C
nLDERR_K 38 DT_K2+ 9 9 DT_K2+ 38 nLDERR_K
VREF_Y1 39 DT_K2- 10 10 DT_K2- 39 VREF_Y1
nSH_C1 40 D-GND 11 11 D-GND 40 nSH_C1
nSH_C2 41 D-GND 12 12 D-GND 41 nSH_C2
VREF_K1 42 DT_Y1+ 13 13 DT_Y1+ 42 VREF_K1
nSH_K1 43 DT_Y1- 14 14 DT_Y1- 43 nSH_K1
nENB_K 44 DT_Y2+ 15 15 DT_Y2+ 44 nENB_K
nSH_K2 45 DT_Y2- 16 16 DT_Y2- 45 nSH_K2
VREF_C2 46 DT_M1+ 17 17 DT_M1+ 46 VREF_C2
VREF_K2 47 DT_M1- 18 18 DT_M1- 47 VREF_K2
VREF_Y2 48 DT_M2+ 19 19 DT_M2+ 48 VREF_Y2
VREF_M1 49 DT_M2- 20 20 DT_M2- 49 VREF_M1
VREF_M2 50 TH 21 21 TH 50 VREF_M2
nLDERR_M 51 D-GND 22 22 D-GND 51 nLDERR_M
nBD 52 D-GND 23 23 D-GND 52 nBD
D-GND 53 +5VLD 24 24 +5VLD 53 D-GND
D-GND 54 D-GND 25 25 D-GND 54 D-GND
+5VLD 55 D-GND 26 26 D-GND 55 +5VLD
P-GND 56 nBRAKE 27 27 nBRAKE 56 P-GND
P-GND 57 nPOLY_CK 28 28 nPOLY_CK 57 P-GND
+24V1 58 nPOLY_LOCK 29 29 nPOLY_LOCK 58 +24V1
+24V1 59 nPOLY_START 30 30 nPOLY_START 59 +24V1
+3.3V 60 60 +3.3V
Laser beam generating section Laser beam generating section (Scanning image on paper)
Paper exit direction
Rear
Scanning
direction
LD1 LD2 LD1 LD2
Front
C. Shutter operation
When the waste toner is removed toner may drop. A shutter mech-
anism will close to prevent toner from contaminating the filter.
The machine is also provided with the mechanism to adjust skews
of laser beams of each color.
By shifting the front frame section of the fI lens 2 with the cam
mechanism, the laser skew adjustment can be made in the main
scanning direction for the OPC drum.
D. LSU specifications
3
D-GND B-1 B-15 D-GND B-1 1 D-GND 1
DRSET B-2 B-14 DRSET B-2 2 DRSET 2
D-GND B-3 B-13 D-GND B-3 3 D-GND 3
/DRCRU_Y B-4 B-12 /DRCRU_Y B-4 4 /DRCRU_Y 4
/DRCRU_M B-5 B-11 /DRCRU_M B-5 5 /DRCRU_M 5
DRCRU_Y
/DRCRU_C B-6 B-10 /DRCRU_C B-6 6 /DRCRU_C 6 179228-2
/DRCRU_K B-7 B-9 /DRCRU_K B-7 7 /DRCRU_K 7 1 /DRCRU_Y
PROFM1
/1TNFD B-8 B-8 /1TNFD B-8 8 /1TNFD 8 2 D-GND
D-GND B-9 B-7 D-GND B-9 9 D-GND 9
LSUFM_V B-10 B-6 LSUFM_V B-10 10 F-GND 10 179228-2
DRCRU_M
P-GND B-11 B-5 P-GND B-11 11 (NC) 11 1 /DRCRU_M
/LSUFM_LD B-12 B-4 /LSUFM_LD B-12 12 (NC) 12 2 D-GND
5VNPD B-13 B-3 5VNPD B-13 R P
3
/PPD2 B-14 B-2 /PPD2 B-14 179228-2
4
1
D-GND B-15 B-1 D-GND B-15
D-GND 1 /DRCRU_C
CZHR-15V-S 2 D-GND
D-GND
D-GND 179228-2
D-GND 1 /DRCRU_K
D-GND
DF11-6DS-2C +
2 D-GND
1 2 3 4 56
D-GND
DF11-6DP-SP1(05)
1
7. Photoconductor section
PCU PWB
179228-2
MC
DRCRU_C
1TNFD
1 /1TNFD
2
2 D-GND
1
FPS-187
CN-12 MC-CMY #1 MC-CMY #1
MC
3
PWB
MC
2
4 51065-0300
D-GND MC_BK_ERR 9 1 MC_BK_ERR 1
5
DRCRU_K
4
DL_C# 1 D-GND MC_CL_ERR 8 2 MC_CL_ERR 2
6 2 (NC) GB-Y
A. Electrical and mechanism relation diagram
HV_REM# 7 3 HV_REM# 3
D-GND 7 3 DL_M# /HV_LD1# 6 4 /HV_LD1# 4
DL_BK# 8 GB-M
/HV_CLK# 5 5 /HV_CLK# 5
PROFM2_V 9 GB-C /HV_DATA# 4 6 /HV_DATA# 6
1
/PROFM2_CNT 10 51065-0300
P-GND 3 7 P-GND 7
P-GND 11 1 D-GND GB-K INT24V1 2 8 INT24V1 8
PROFM2_LD 12 2 (NC) F-GND 1
(from page 5) 3 DL_C# P R
51065-0300
2
1 D-GND
MC
2 (NC)
3 DL_BK#
4
SMR-04V-N + SMP-04V-NC
1 +(R) 1
DL_Y
CN-15 2 PWM(Brw) 2
B20B-PNDZS 3 -(Blk) 3
RRM_OUT_/B 1 4 Lock(W) 4
DHPD_CL
4
RRM_OUT_/A 3 R P
RRM_OUT_B 5
RRM_OUT_A 7 S6B-XH-A-1
CPFM_OUT_A 9 1 CPFM_OUT_A
MC
24V_CPFM 11 2 24V_CPFM
CPFM_OUT_/A 13 3 CPFM_OUT_/A
CPFM_OUT_B 15 4 CPFM_OUT_B
24V_CPFM 17 5 24V_CPFM
CPFM_OUT_/B 19 6 CPFM_OUT_/B
š56 HB UNI
INT24V2 2
P-GND
DL_M
4
/DVM_K_CK 6
/DVM_K_D 8 SMR-04V-N + SMP-04V-NC
DVM_K_LD 10
/CPUC1 12 1 /CPUC1 1
SMP-02V-NC + SMR-02V-N
(NC) 20 R P P R
179228-3
1 DHPD_K
2 D-GND
3 5VNPD(R˄)
DVM_CL
B7B-PASK-1
CPFC
1 INT24V2
2 P-GND
(NC)
DL_BK
3
4 /DVM_K_CK
5 /DVM_K_D
CN-9 6 (NC)
B15B-CZHK-B-1 DVM_K_LD
7
INT24V2 1
P-GND 2
CPFM
/DVM_CL_CK 3
DHPD_K
/DVM_CL_D 4
DVM_CL_LD 5
5
PROFM2
DHPD_CL 6
D-GND 7
5VNPD(R˄) 8 B7B-PASK-1
/1TURC_2 9 1 INT24V2
+24V3 10 2 P-GND
DVM_K
DHPD_K 11 3 (NC)
D-GND 12 4 /DVM_CL_CK
5VNPD(R˄) 13 5 /DVM_CL_D
/1TURC_1 14 6 (NC)
+24V3 15 7 DVM_CL_LD
CN-12
B20B-CZHK-B-1 179228-3
MC_BK_ERR 13
1 DHPD_CL
MC_CL_ERR 14
2 D-GND
HV_REM# 15 3 5VNPD(R˄)
/HV_LD1# 16
/HV_CLK# 17
/HV_DATA# 18
P-GND 19
INT24V1 20
Signal name Name Function and operation
1TNFD Waste toner full detector Detects the waste toner full state.
CPFM Paper feed motor Drives the waste toner transport screw and the paper feed section.
DHPD_CL Drum cartridge (CL) rotation detector Detects the rotating state of the color drum cartridge.
DHPD_K Drum cartridge (BK) rotation detector Detects the rotating state of the black drum cartridge.
DL Discharge lamp (Y,M,C,BK) Radiates light on the discharge lens to discharges the OPC drum surface
DRCRU OPC drum initial (new OPC drum) detector Detects the OPC drum initial state (new OPC drum).
(Y,M,C,K)
DVM_CL Developing drive motor (Color) Drives the color developing unit/color OPC drum.
DVM_K Developing drive motor (Black) Drives the black developing unit/black OPC drum.
MC Main charger (Y,M,C,K) Charges the OPC drum surface negatively.
PROFM1 Process fan 1 Cools the process section.
PROFM2 Process fan 2 Discharges ozone generated in the process section.
B. Charging, electrostatic latent image forming, When laser beams are radiated on the OPC drum CGL, posi-
discharging tive and negative charges are generated.
The OPC drum surface is charged negatively by the main charger, The positive charges generated in the CGL are attracted and
shifted to the negative charged on the OPC drum surface.
and laser beams are radiated to the LSU unit to form electrostatic
latent images. Meanwhile, the negative charges are attracted and shifted to
the positive charges in the aluminum layer of the OPC drum.
1) The OPC drum surface is charged negatively by the main
Therefore, on the surface and in the aluminum layer of the
charger.
OPC drum, the positive charges and the negative charges are
Aluminum neutralized each other, reducing the amount of positive and
layer negative charges to reduce the OPC drum surface potential.
CGL For the areas where laser beams are not radiated, electric
CTL charges remain unchanged.
As a result, electrostatic latent images are formed on the OPC
drum surface.
3) The whole surface of the OPC drum is discharged.
OPC drum
Aluminum Aluminum
layer layer
CGL CGL
Screen grid High voltage unit
CTL CTL
The screen grid is attached to the main charger unit, and the
OPC drum is charged at a voltage which virtually same as the When the discharge lamp light is radiated to the discharge
voltage applied to the screen grid. lens, the light is radiated through the lens to the OPC drum
2) Laser beams are radiated to the OPC drum surface by the surface.
laser (writing) unit to form electrostatic latent images. When the discharge lamp light is radiated to the OPC drum
Aluminum CGL, positive and negative charges are generated.
OPC drum layer The positive charges generated in the CGL are attracted to the
CGL negative charges on the OPC drum surface. Meanwhile, the
CTL negative charges are attracted to the positive charges in the
aluminum layer in the OPC drum.
Therefore, on the OPC drum surface, the positive and the neg-
OPC drum ative charges are neutralized each other, reducing the amount
of positive and negative charges to reduce the surface poten-
tial of the OPC drum.
Laser beams
CPFM
1TNFD
DRCRU_K
Drum initial detector
DR SET
DRCRU_C
Drum installation detector
DRCRU_M
DRCRU_Y
D-GND
In the OPC drum positioning unit, there is a contact to detect installation of the OPC drum. If there is no OPC drum installed, it is detected and
the message is displayed on the operation panel to show that there is no OPC drum installed.
SMR-02V-N + SMP-02V-NC
1 TNM_Y_1 1
2 TNM_Y_2 2
R P
TSHR-04V-K
D-GND 4
5VN 3
CRM_Y_CK# 2
TNM_Y CRM_Y_DT# 1
SMR-02V-N + SMP-02V-NC
1 TNM_M_1 1
2 TNM_M_2 2
TNM_M R
TSHR-04V-K
P
D-GND 4
5VN 3
CRM_M_CK# 2
CRM_M_DT# 1
TNM_C
CRM-Y
1
2
1
2
1 PCU PWB
2
QR/P8-8S-C(02) + QR/P8-8P-C(01)
2 1 D-GND 1
2 DVTYP_Y 2
3 /DVCRU_Y 3
4 DVCRU_V 4
5 ATC_V 5
6 TCS_Y 6
7 D-GND 7
8 TSG_Y 8
S P CN-11
B32B-CZWHK-B-1
QR/P8-8S-C(02) + QR/P8-8P-C(01)
A-16 D-GND
1 D-GND 1 A-15 DVTYP_Y
2 DVTYP_M 2 A-14 /DVCRU_Y
3 /DVCRU_M 3 A-13 DVCRU_V
4 DVCRU_V 4 A-12 ATC_V
5 ATC_M 5 A-11 TCS_Y
6 TCS_M 6 A-10 D-GND
7 D-GND 7 A-9 TSG_Y
8 TSG_M 8 A-8 D-GND
S P A-7 DVTYP_M
A-6 /DVCRU_M
QR/P8-8S-C(02) + QR/P8-8P-C(01) A-5 DVCRU_V
A-4 ATC_V
1 D-GND 1 A-3 TCS_M
2 DVTYP_C 2 A-2 D-GND
3 /DVCRU_C 3 A-1 TSG_M
4 DVCRU_V 4
5 ATC_C 5 B-1 D-GND
6 TCS_C 6 B-2 DVTYP_C
7 D-GND 7 B-3 /DVCRU_C
8 TSG_C 8 B-4 DVCRU_V
S P B-5 ATC_V
B-6 TCS_C
B-7 D-GND
QR/P8-8S-C(02) + QR/P8-8P-C(01) B-8 TSG_C
1 D-GND 1 B-9 D-GND
2 DVTYP_K 2 B-10 DVTYP_K
3 /DVCRU_K 3 B-11 /DVCRU_K
4 DVCRU_V 4 B-12 DVCRU_V
5 ATC_K 5 B-13 ATC_V
6 TCS_K 6 B-14 TCS_K
7 D-GND 7 B-15 D-GND
8 TSG_K 8 B-16 TSG_K
S P
B. Operational descriptions
When the toner density sensor in the developing unit detects a fall in the toner density, the toner motor drives the toner transport screw in the
toner cartridge to supply toner to the developer cartridge.
The toner motor is turned ON/OFF according to the output of the toner density sensor.
TCS
2 DVTYP_Y 2
3 /DVCRU_Y 3
4 DVCRU_V 4
DVM_K
2
5 ATC_V 5
DVM_CL
3
2
1
6 TCS_Y 6
No.
7 D-GND 7
8 TSG_Y 8
2
S P
CN-11
Signal name
B32B-CZWHK-B-1
D-GND A-16
DVTYP_Y A-15
/DVCRU_Y A-14 QR/P8-8S-C(02) + QR/P8-8P-C(01)
2
DVCRU_V A-13 1 D-GND 1
ATC_V A-12 2 DVTYP_M 2
TCS_Y A-11 3 /DVCRU_M 3
D-GND A-10 4 DVCRU_V 4
TSG_Y A-9 5 ATC_M 5
D-GND A-8 6 TCS_M 6
2
DVTYP_M A-7 7 D-GND 7
/DVCRU_M A-6 8 TSG_M 8
DVCRU_V A-5 S P
ATC_V A-4
TCS_M A-3
Mixing roller
2
D-GND A-2
TSG_M A-1
QR/P8-8S-C(02) + QR/P8-8P-C(01)
D-GND B-1 1 D-GND 1
Developing roller
DVTYP_C B-2 2 DVTYP_C 2
Name
Name
/DVCRU_C B-3 3 /DVCRU_C 3
9. Developing section
Developing connector
TCS_C B-6 6 TCS_C 6
2
D-GND B-7 7 D-GND 7
TSG_C B-8 8 TSG_C 8
D-GND B-9 S P
DVTYP_K B-10
3
/DVCRU_K B-11
2
DVCRU_V B-12
TCS_Y
ATC_V
5 ATC_K 5
6 TCS_K 6
7 D-GND 7
TCS_M
3
CN-12 8 TSG_K 8
2
B20B-CZHK-B-1 S P
D-GND 1
DL_Y# 2
D-GND 3
DL_M# 4
A. Electrical and mechanism relation diagram
D-GND 5
DL_C# 6
1
D-GND 7
DL_BK# 8
PROFM2_V 9
/PROFM2_CNT 10
3
P-GND 11 CN-1
SMP-08V-NC + SMR-08V-N
TCS_C
PROFM2_LD 12 B09B-PASK
MC_BK_ERR 13 1 MC_BK_ERR 1 9 MC_BK_ERR
MC_CL_ERR 14 2 MC_CL_ERR 2 8 MC_CL_ERR
HV_REM# 15 3 HV_REM# 3 7 HV_REM#
/HV_LD1# 16 4 /HV_LD1# 4 6 /HV_LD1#
PCU PWB
/HV_CLK# 17 5 /HV_CLK# 5 5 /HV_CLK#
/HV_DATA# 18 6 /HV_DATA# 6 4 /HV_DATA#
1
TCS_K
BS-K
BS-M
1
BS-Y
MC PWB
CN-9
B15B-CZHK-B-1 B7B-PASK-1
INT24V2 1 1 INT24V2
P-GND 2 2 P-GND
P R
Converts electrostatic latent images on the OPC drum into visible images.
/DVM_K_CK 6
3
4 /DVM_K_CK
5 /DVM_K_D
6 (NC)
1TURC_2
7 DVM_K_LD
Directly connected with the resistor and the fuse which identify the kind of the developer cartridge and
B. Developing operations
Electrostatic latent images formed on the OPC drum surface by the
laser (writing) unit (laser image beams) are converted into visible
images by toner.
Toner and carrier in the developer cartridge are mixed and trans-
ported by the stirring roller.
When toner and carrier are stirred and transported, toner is nega-
tively charged by mechanical friction with carrier.
In addition, the developing bias voltage (AC component of negative
DC component) is applied to the developing roller.
Negatively charged toner is attached to the exposed area (high
potential area) on the OPC drum by the developing bias voltage.
On the other hand, the potential of the unexposed area on the OPC
drum is lower than the developing bias voltage and toner is not
attached to it.
11
A-1 (NC) A-15 A-1 D-GND
SMR-12V-N + SMP-12V-NC
1 D-GND 1 B-1 D-GND B-15 B-1 D-GND
2 DRSET 2 B-2 DRSET B-14 B-2 DRSET
1
3 D-GND 3 B-3 D-GND B-13 B-3 D-GND
5
4 /DRCRU_Y 4 B-4 /DRCRU_Y B-12 B-4 /DRCRU_Y
/DRCRU_M
10. Transfer section
6
7 /DRCRU_K 7 B-7 /DRCRU_K B-9 B-7 /DRCRU_K
/1TNFD 1 8 /1TNFD 8 B-8 /1TNFD B-8 B-8 /1TNFD
D-GND 2 9 D-GND 9 B-9 D-GND B-7 B-9 D-GND
10 F-GND 10 B-10 LSUFM_V B-6 B-10 LSUFM_V
3
11 (NC) 11 B-11 P-GND B-5 B-11 P-GND
12 (NC) 12 B-12 /LSUFM_LD B-4 B-12 /LSUFM_LD
B-13 5VNPD B-3 B-13 5VNPD
2
R P
B-14 /PPD2 B-2 B-14 /PPD2
B-15 D-GND B-1 B-15 D-GND
CZHR-15V-S
3 3
14
1TC-K
CN-6
1TC-C SMP-11V-NC + SMR-11V-N B20B-PNDZS
CN-1 1 1TUD_CL 1 1 1TUD_CL
B08B-PASK 2 D-GND 2 3 D-GND
1TC-M
3
F-GND 1 3 5VNPD(R˄) 3 5 5VNPD(R˄)
PTC_ERR 2 4 PTC_ERR 4 7 PTC_ERR
1TC-Y HV_REM# 3 5 HV_REM# 5 9 HV_REM#
4
/TC_LD# 4 6 /TC_LD# 6 11 /TC_LD#
9
/TC_CLK# 5 7 /TC_CLK# 7 13 /TC_CLK#
1TNFD
еᩉ
6
/TC_DATA# 6 8 /TC_DATA# 8 15 /TC_DATA#
P-GND 7 9 P-GND 9 17 P-GND
VCASE INT24V1 8 10 INT24V1 10 19 INT24V1
8
A. Electrical and mechanism relation diagram
11 F-GND 11
P R
FPS-187
2-TC
TC
FPS-187
7
PWB
PTC
179228-3
1TUD_CL 1
PCU PWB
D-GND 2
5VNPD(R˄) 3
CN-18
DF1B-14DEP-2.5RC + DF1B-14DES-2.5RC B24B-PNDZS
1 (NC) 1 1 (NC)
3 REGS_R 3 3 REGS_R
5 REGS_R_LED# 5 5 REGS_R_LED#
7 D-GND 7 7 D-GND
12
9 +5VNPD 9 9 +5VNPD
2 PCS_F 2 11 PCS_F
4 REGS_F 4 13 REGS_F
6 REGS_F_LED# 6 15 REGS_F_LED#
8 D-GND 8 17 D-GND
179228-3 10 +5VNPD 10 19 +5VNPD
5VNPD(R˄) 3 11 5VNPD(R˄) 11 21 (NC)
D-GND 2 12 D-GND 12 23 (NC)
1TUD_K 1 13 1TUD_K 13
14 (NC) 14 2 5VNPD(R˄)
1TUD_CL
4 D-GND
10
P S
6 1TUD_K
13
CN-9
B15B-CZHK-B-1
1TUD_K
1TURC_1
1 /1TURC_1 1
2 +24V3 2
P R
14 /1TURC_1
SMP-02V-NC + SMR-02V-N 15 +24V3
1 /1TURC_2 1
2 +24V3 2 CN-15
P R B20B-PNDZS
B7B-PASK-1 9 CPFM_OUT_A
INT24V2 1 11 24V_CPFM
P-GND 2 13 CPFM_OUT_/A
(NC) 3 15 CPFM_OUT_B
/DVM_K_CK 4 17 24V_CPFM
/DVM_K_D 5 19 CPFM_OUT_/B
(NC) 6
1TURC_2
DVM_K_LD 7 2 INT24V2
4 P-GND
6 /DVM_K_CK
8 /DVM_K_D
10 DVM_K_LD
16 /CPFC
S6B-XH-A-1 18 24V3
CPFM_OUT_A 1
24V_CPFM
DVM_K
CPFM
CPFM_OUT_/A 3
CPFM_OUT_B 4
24V_CPFM 5
CPFC
33R-RWZV-K2GG(LF) (SN) + 33P-RWZV-K4GG(LF) (SN) CPFM_OUT_/B 6 CN-17
SMP-02V-NC + SMR-02V-N 16CZ-6H CZHR-16V-S š56 HB UNI B30B-PCZWHK-B-1
1 D-GND 1 B-6 D-GND B-11 A-5 D-GND
2 /2TCCRU 2 B-5 /2TCCRU B-12 A-4 /2TCCRU
P R P R
SMP-02V-NC + SMR-02V-N SMR-04V-N + SMP-04V-NC
1 /CPFC 1 3 /CPFC 3
2 24V3 2 4 24V3 4
P R R P
Signal name Name Function and operation
1TC (C,M,Y) Primary transfer output (C, M, Y) Primary transfer high voltage output (C,M,Y)
1TC (K) Primary transfer output (K) Primary transfer high voltage output (K)
1TUD_BK Primary transfer belt position sensor (BK) Detects the primary transfer belt position (BK) in combination with the 1TUD_BK output.
1TUD_CL Primary transfer belt position sensor (CL) Detects the primary transfer belt position (CL) in combination with the 1TUD_CL output.
1TURC 1 Primary transfer mode select clutch Transports the developing motor (K) power to the primary transfer mode select cam to select
the primary transfer mode. (The primary transfer mode select cam is rotated
counterclockwise.)
1TURC 2 Primary transfer mode select clutch Transports the developing motor (K) power to the primary transfer mode select cam to select
the primary transfer mode. (The primary transfer mode select cam is rotated clockwise.)
PTC PTC output PTC high voltage output
2TC Secondary transfer output Secondary transfer high voltage output
DVM_K Developing drive motor (K) Drives the transfer belt. (Also drives the K developing unit.)
B. Transfer operation With this operation, the transfer efficiency in secondary transfer is
improved.
Secondary transfer output Then, a high transfer voltage is applied to the transfer belt drive
roller to transfer toner imaged on paper. The secondary transfer
roller is connected to GND to flow the secondary transfer current.
Constant
voltage Constant
power voltage
power
Separation Constant current
power
output
PTC output
MC grid output
Toner images on the OPC drum are transferred onto the primary
transfer belt by applying a high positive voltage to the primary
transfer roller.
Negative charges are generated by the PTC unit to weaken posi-
tive charged on the transfer belt and to reduce the attracting force
between the primary transfer belt and toner. MC grid output
Lock lever A
PWB
P R
CN-11
B03P-VL
LiveHL_in 1
(NC) 2
HL DCDC
NeutralHL_in 3
HL_EX2
CN-4
B03P-VL
11. Fusing section
LiveHL_out 1
PWB
(NC) 2
NeutralHL_out 3
AC/DC
FUCRU
HL_EX
19P-RWZV-K4GG-P6(LF)(SN) CN-19
+19R-RWZV-K2GG-R6(LF)(SN) B18B-CZHK-B-1 CN-14
B-1 TH_MAIN_IN B-9 B28B-PNDZS
1 TH_MAIN_IN
B-2 TH_MAIN_CS_IN B-8 2 TH_MAIN_CS_IN HLOUT_EX 8
B-3 D-GND B-7 3 D-GND HLOUT_MAIN 10
B-4 TH_SUB_IN B-6 4 TH_SUB_IN HLOUT_LOW 12
B-5 D-GND B-5 5 D-GND
RTH_EX2
B-6 TH_EX1_IN B-4 6 TH_EX1_IN
B-7 D-GND B-3 7 D-GND
B-8 TH_EX2_IN B-2 8 TH_EX2_IN
HL_Main
B-9 D-GND B-1 9 D-GND
10 TH_LOW_IN
11 D-GND
RTH_EX1
HL_Sub
A-1 TH_LOW_IN A-10 12 5VNPD
A-2 D-GND A-9 13 HLPCD
A-3 5VNPD A-8 14 D-GND
A-4 HLPCD A-7 15 24V3
A-5 D-GND A-6 16 /HLPCS#
A-6 24V3 A-5 17 FUCRU_V
A-7 /HLPCS# A-4 18 /FUCRU
A-8 FUCRU_V A-3
A-9 /FUCRU A-2
A-10 (NC) A-1
1 N_HL_EX 1
2 N_HL_MAIN 2
A. Electrical and mechanism relation diagram
RDTCT_Main
SMR-02V-B + SMP-02V-BC 3 N_HL_LOW 3
RDTCT_EX
1 TH_LOW_IN 1 4 L_HL_LOW 4
2 D-GND 2 5 L_HL_MAIN 5
R P 6 F-GND 6
P R
SMR-02V-B + SMP-02V-BC
1 24V3 1
2 /HLPCS# 2
R P
179228-3
5VNPD 1
HLPCD 2
D-GND 3
RDTCT_EX2
RTH_Main
RTH_Sub
RDTCT_Low
PCU PWB
4 Lock(W) 4
R P
CN-16
B7B-PASK-1 B18B-PNDZS
INT24V2 1 1 INT24V2
P-GND 2 3 P-GND
(NC) 3 5 /FUM_CK
/FUM_CK 4 7 /FUM_D
/FUM_D 5 9 /FUM_LD
(NC) 6 11 POM_OUT_/B
FUM_LD 7 13 POM_OUT_/A
HLPCS
15 POM_OUT_B
FUM
17 POM_OUT_A
2 FUFM_V
HLPCD
4 FUM_CNT
6 P-GND
8 FUFM_LD
10 /2TURC
12 24V3
14 /ADUC1
16 24V3
18 (NC)
Signal name Name Function and operation
FUCRU Fusing unit initial detection Detects the initial state of the fusing unit.
FUM Fusing drive motor Drives the fusing unit.
FUFM Fusing cooling fan motor Cools the fusing unit.
HLPCD Fusing roller pressure release detector Detects separation of the upper and the lower heat rollers.
HLPCS Fusing pressure release solenoid Controls the pressure applied to the upper and the lower heat rollers in the fusing section.
RDTCT_EX External thermostat Prevents against overheating of the fusing roller.
RDTCT_EX2 External thermostat 2 Prevents against overheating of the fusing roller.
RDTCT_Low Lower thermostat Prevents against overheating of the fusing roller.
RDTCT_Main Upper thermostat Prevents against overheating of the fusing roller.
HL_EX External heater lamp Heats the upper heat roller through an external heat roller.
HL_EX2 External heater lamp 2 Heats the upper heat roller through an external heat roller.
HL_Main Upper heater lamp Heats the upper heat roller. (Main)
HL_Sub Lower heater lamp Heats the lower heat roller. (Main)
RTH_EX1 External heat roller contact thermistor 1 Detects the temperature of the external heat roller.
RTH_EX2 External heat roller contact thermistor 2
RTH_Low Lower heat roller contact thermistor Detects the temperature of the lower heat roller.
RTH_Main Upper heat roller non-contact thermistor Detects the temperature of the upper heat roller.
RTH_Sub Upper heat roller contact thermistor
B. Fusing unit drive 1) To increase the nip quantity. To increase the heating capacity
for paper.
For driving the fusing unit, the drive power is transmitted from the
drive motor (FUM) through the connection gear to the upper heat 2) By pressing the flexible roller, multi-layer toner can be fused
roller gear. without deformation.
Driving by the drive motor (stepping motor) is performed according 3) An even pressure can be applied to rough surface of toner lay-
to the control signal sent from the PCU. ers (multi-layer structure).
HLPCS (ON)
HLPCD
Pressure release
control lever
B7B-PASK-1
1 INT24V2
PCU PWB 2
3
P-GND
(NC)
4 /FUM_CK
CN-18 CN-16 5 /FUM_D
179228-3 B24B-PNDZS B18B-PNDZS 6 (NC)
5VNPD 1 8 5VNPD INT24V2 1 7 FUM_LD
/POD1 2 10 /POD1 P-GND 3
D-GND 3 12 D-GND /FUM_CK 5
14 5VNPD /FUM_D 7
16 /POD2 /FUM_LD 9 B4B-PH-K
18 D-GND POM_OUT_/B 11 1 POM_OUT_/B
179228-3 SMR-03V-N + SMP-03V-NC 20 5VNPD POM_OUT_/A 13 2 POM_OUT_/A
22 /TFD2 POM_OUT_B 15 3 POM_OUT_B
5VNPD 1 1 5VNPD 1
24 D-GND
/POD2 2 2 /POD2 2 POM_OUT_A 17 4 POM_OUT_A
D-GND 3 3 D-GND 3
R P
TFD2 POM
FUM
POD2
1
POD1
PCU PWB
CN-18 CN-16
179228-5 DF1B-14DEP-2.5RC + DF1B-14DES-2.5RC B24B-PNDZS B18B-PNDZS B7B-PASK-1
(NC) 5 1 (NC) 1 1 (NC) INT24V2 1 1 INT24V2
2 P-GND
REGS_R 4
REGS_R_LED# 3
3 REGS_R
5 REGS_R_LED# 5
3 3
5
REGS_R
REGS_R_LED#
P-GND
/FUM_CK
3
5 3 (NC) FUM
D-GND 2 7 D-GND 7 7 D-GND /FUM_D 7 4 /FUM_CK
+5VNPD 1 9 +5VNPD 9 9 +5VNPD /FUM_LD 9 5 /FUM_D
2 PCS_F 2 11 PCS_F /2TURC 10 6 (NC)
4 REGS_F 4 13 REGS_F 24V3 12 7 FUM_LD
6 REGS_F_LED# 6 15 REGS_F_LED#
179228-5 8 D-GND 8 17 D-GND
PCS_F 5 10 +5VNPD 10 19 +5VNPD SMP-02V-NC + SMR-02V-N
REGS_F 4 P S 1 /2TURC 1
REGS_F_LED# 3 2 24V3 2
D-GND
+5VNPD
2
1
P R 2TURC
REGS_R
REGS_F
CN2(YELLOW)
CON3P/2MM_V
1 5V
2 MGND
3 COVER2
CN7(BLACK)
CON3P/2MM_V
1 5V
2 MGND
3 FEED2
CN8(WHITE)
CON2P/2MM_V
1 /solenoid
2 24V
CN15 CN12
HEADER2x11/2MM-R-2 B22B-PHDSS
solenoid 20 1 SOLE_G
COVER2 19 2 COVER2
FEED1 18 3 FEED1
COVER1 17 4 COVER1
ENTRY 16 5 ENTRY
A_MPLUS2 15 6 A_MPLUS2_G
A_MPLUS1 14 7 A_MPLUS1_G
FEED2 13 8 FEED2
5V 12 9 5V_RSPF
MGND 11 10 GND
24V 10 11 24VPD
SPUS 24V
MGND
9
8
12 24VPD
13 GND
ADF_PH2 7 14 5ADF_PH2
MGND 6 15 GND
ADF_I12 5 16 5ADF_I12
ADF_I02 4 17 5ADF_I02
ADF_I11 3 18 5ADF_I11
ADF_PH1 2 19 5ADF_PH1
1 CN4(RED)
CON3P/2MM_V ADF_I01
MGND
1
21
20 5ADF_I01
21 SPF_DET
2 1 5V
2 MGND
(NC) 22 22 (NC)
3 ENTRY
CN6(WHITE)
3 CON3P/2MM_V
1 5V
2 MGND
SPED 3 FEED1
CN5(WHITE)
CON4P/2MM_V
1 /ADF_A
2 /ADF_B
SOCD 3 ADF_A
4 ADF_B
* 100V : STANDARD
WH PWB * EX100 / EX200 : OPTION FAX PWB HDD FRONT BD PWB OPTION SCN UN
USB 2.0(HOST) COVER2
USB PGM BD TH CARD READER CCD PWB CCFL
WH SW WH1 TO : DESK UN USB 1.1(DEVICE) COVER1
AUDITOR CCD HOME
LAN RS-232C SPUS SPFM ENTRY
MSW REACTOR LD PWB INV PWB
PSFM MIM FEED1
* EX200 ONLY
ARDF RELAY PWB
FEED2
RSPF UN
AC/DC PWB MFPC PWB LSU MOTHER PWB SCN CNT PWB
System block diagram
RTH(MAIN)
INVERTER PWB BACK LIGHT
DEVE UN(Y) ADU OPENING &
HL EX2 RTH(SUB) CLOSING UN
DVR PWB TCS_Y LVDS 8.5 PWB LCD module 8.5
TS HL EX1 TS HL LOW RTH(LOW) APPD1 APPD2 2TCCRU 2TCSET
DEVE UN(M) TNM_K TOUCH PANEL 8.5
HL MAIN TS RTH(EX1) TH-HUD
TS DVR PWB TCS_Y MULTI UN 8.5 OPERATION UN
TNM_C
MPFS ALTERNATE
DEVE UN(C) TNM_M POFM
MPED
OPE KEY 4.3 PWB POWER SW PWB
HL DCDC PWB DVR PWB TCS_Y
HLPCS TNM_Y KEYs LEDs BZR PWRSW
MULTI TRAY
HLPCD DEVE UN(K) RIGHT MPLD1
DVR PWB TCS_Y DOOR LVDS 4.3 PWB LCD module 4.3
MPWS
RTH(EX2) PAPER 1TUD_K
FUSING UN UN
OUTPUT BACK LIGHT
FUCRU
CRM-K UN FRAME FUSING UN RESI UN 4.3 OPERATION UN
PROFM2
CRM-C POD1 2TURC FUM PROCON F
DL-K
CRM-M POD2 ADUC1 POM RESI F MAIN DRIVE UN
DL-C HDDFM DVM_CL DHPD_CL 1TURC1 DHPD_K 1TURC2
CRM-Y TFD2 FUFM RESI R
DL-M
DVM_K
DL-Y
USB HOST
SATA2 TYPE-A CN LCD Pannel SCANNER Control
HDD (FRONT)
LVDS System (SCU)
MFPC PWB
SATA
a. MX-C311, MX-C310
CN
USB Device
TYPE-B CN
USB HOST
TYPE-A CN
(REAR)
SYSTEM Memory
DDR2 DIMM SPD USB2.0 SATA SATA DIP USB
Device Interface Interface SWITCH SWITCH
SLOT Controller USB2.0
0 1
Host
Controller
SDRAM SDRAM
DDR/DDR2 Controller 64M bx2 PCU
Giga IF HDD ASIC
LAN JACK RTC
RTC
BitEther GMII Controller
RJ45
PHY GbE
MAC PCI-Express UART
PCI-Express Interface Interface
(4Lane) (x10)
Interface
SOC (4lane)
I2C 1
I2C 2
LCDC
Local-Bus
Controller
Controller
PCI-Express Interface
D-SUB9 RS232C Interface
RS232C LEVEL CON.
MPC8533E
(4lane)
800MHz
Local Bus
Interrupt
Controller
Controller
Programable
FPDLINK
Transmitter
256Kb
EEPROM
I2C1
I2C2
UART
Controller
Controller
Receiver
FPDLINK
LSU Controller
(LSUC)
FPDLINK
Boad to Board Connector
LVDS
CPLD
Transmitter Receiver
FAX
PROGROM & OPT
Local Memory
CN FLASH DIMM I2C DDR2 DIMM
PIC
SLOT Micon.
SATA
CN
USB Device
TYPE-B CN
USB HOST
TYPE-A CN
(REAR)
SYSTEM Memory
DDR2 DIMM SPD USB2.0 SATA SATA DIP USB
SLOT Device Interface Interface SWITCH SWITCH
Controller 0 1 USB2.0
Host
Controller
(4lane)
I2C 1
I2C 2
LCDC
Local-Bus
Controller
Controller
PCI-Express Interface
D-SUB9 RS232C Interface
RS232C LEVEL CON. MPC8533E (4lane)
1000MHz
PCI-Express
Interface
Interrupt
Controller
Programable
FPDLINK
(1lane)
Transmitter
256Kb
Local Bus EEPROM
I2C1
I2C2
UART Controller
Controller
Controller
Receiver
FPDLINK
LSU Controller
(LSUC)
FPDLINK
PCI
LVDS
Express
Transmitter Receiver
Boad to Board Connector
CPLD SW
PCI-
Express SCAN LSU
Interface
DDR/DDR2
Video In Memory
Out Controlller
SRAM
4Mbit
I2C
FAX PROGROM & OPT Local Memory
CN
FLASH DIMM DDR2 DIMM PIC
SLOT Micon.
Local Memory
DDR2 DIMM
SLOT
MFPC PWB
(3)
DC Motor Control
DV Motor BK (DVM_K)
CLOCK DV Motor CL (DVM_CL)
Fuser Motor (FUM)
IC29 Fuser unit
PCU PWB
Drum Lamp
3-wired
Not Mount IC39 (DL_K/C/M/Y)
SRAM
Write Protect
(1Mbit)
Sensor Input
CSS11-13/POD1/APPD1/APPD2 Sensor Input
1TUD_K/1TUD_CL/(2TUHPS) COIN VENDOR
IC11 (Optional)
DC Power PWM Motor Lock Detect
PMC ASIC CV_CLCOPY/
Supply FW CLOCK FUM_LD/FAN_LD3/FAN_LD8
CV_COPY
Fuser Thermistor open detect
(THOPEN_MAIN_CS)/EX2
CRU initial detect
DVCRU_Y_in/M/C/K/DRSET
CRUM TNCRU_Y/M/C/K
To MFPC I2C Bus CRUM_K/C/M/Y HV error detect
UART IC37
Via LSU-Mother MC_BK_ERR /CL/PTC_ERR
CPU
H8S/2373 Drum Lamp open detect
DLOPEN_Y/M/C/K
IC34
To LSU-Mother CPLD Load control Output
UART
I2C Bus MPFS/CPUC1/1TURC_1/
1TURC_2/CPFC/ADUC1
/2TURC/HLPCS/
Optional DVCRU_Y/M/C/K
Primax
SCNcnt
Scanner DCDC-C CLK27.53MHz
17V - 24V line buf
16 64Mbit x 2
clk SS
FPD Link
AFE RGB
CCD DS90CR218A
LM98513 32bit bus mother MFP
12V/5V/3V CPLD
3.3V
SCN
1.5V Rx
FFC
ASIC
(Medusa) LVDS IC 28bit
FFC
CLK 13.769MHz V385
HP sensor CL
3.3V CS3
CLK
SDIO 24 12V CTRL_A12V IPD
SS
SCLK 12 5V CTRL_A5V
/SEN 5 3.3V CTRL_A3.3V CS4
/RESET LV047
MHPS 1.2V
Mortor 3.3V
M.M
CN
MOTORDRIVER
RSPF UN L6219
BUSBUF
powdown
MOTORDRIVER
BD6393FP NRTS_SCN
CN
CS2 CS0 NCTS_SCN
F-ROM RXD_SCN
SRAM
(DIMM) TXD_SCN
NRES_MFPC_SCN
CPU uart, others RES_SCN
E2PROM
H8S/2373 NPOF_SCN
TP
CS5 NFWP_SCN
LVDS PWB
/YL(Y1)
XH(X1)
YH(Y2) LCDs detection IO ASIC
/XL(X2) Touch panel
244
PNL_SEL0
PNL_SEL1 CN_CHK_OUT
PNL_SEL2
PNL_SEL3 PNL_SEL3
PNL_SEL0
PNL_SEL1
PNL_SEL2
LCD_FPDCLK Tx
28bit
INV PWB CCFT
nLCD_DISP LCD_A0+/-
LCD_A1+/-
LCD Rx LCD_A2+/-
28bit LCD_A3+/-
LCD_CLK_+/-
KEY CON
/KEYIN
NINFO_LED
NPWRSW
POW_LED
WU_LED
5V2 NWU_KEY
NINFO_LED
NPWRSW
POW_LED
WU_LED
NWU_KEY
5V2
/BZR
SCN_DATA0-3 +-
/SCN_CLK+- 10
TXD_SCN/RXD_SCN/CTS_SCN/RTS_SCN/RES_SCN
UART
LCD_DATA0-3 +-
/LCD_CLK+- 10
LCD_DISP
LCD_SEL0-3
TXD_PIC/RXD_PIC
REQ_PIC/REQ_PIC_INT/CLR_PIC
POF_SCN
O.C.
UART
WU_FAX POW_LED
MFP O.C. O.C.
POF_MFP WU_LED
O.C. O.C.
Reset
Reset Input Reset IC
SCN
PICVPPON cnt LVDS
LCD_CLKIN LCDCLK
33.26MHz PIC PWR_KEY
PIC16F882
TXD_PCU WU_KEY
RXD_PCU
CTS_PCU
RTS_PCU
USB SW RES_PCU
DCPS
DCCNT2
O.C.
POF
INFO_LED
ID[0:1]
Reset
Reset Input Reset IC ASIC
CHIP- 2
Mot or Cont rol PGM_CK
PCU PGM_START
IRQ1 (PGM_BRAKE) 3
JOBEND_INT Polygon O.C.
PCU I/ F Motor Polygon
ASIC PGM_LOCK
CHIP- 2
Control Motor
Regist er
SCK
RSV_DAT
et c...
3 TRANS_RST FAN_PWM
FAN O.C. O.C. LSU
ASIC Cont rol FANSTABLE FAN
Synchronous Serial CHIP- 2
communication
CLK_C_EN
TRANS_DAT
CLK_M_EN
ASIC BD
CHIP- 2 CLK_A_EN
(BD/
PCU_TRG
LSU_ASIC TH)
CHIP-2
OSC SYSCLK Serial I/F
S/S
(System CK) LD Cont rol DA_CLK
DA_DT Vref YMCKx2
Serial DA_LD Serial 8
ASIC
D/A I/F D/A
CHIP- 2
HSYNC HSYNC
LD_ENB KC 2
O.C.
VSYNC_M/Y
4 VSYNC LD Control LD5V
VSYNC_K/C ASIC Horizont al Scan (APC LDERRY MCK
CHIP- 2 / Vert ical Scan /ENB)
VIDEO I/ F CK ECLK Timing Cont rol BD
ASIC
LD_CHK 1/2/3/4 4
CHIP- 2
35 : 5 8 DT_K1+- 2
Channel A: K1
DT_K2+- 2
Channel B: K2
35 : 5 8 DT_C1+- 2
Channel C: C1
DT_C2+- 2 LD
Channel D: C2
VIDEOIF_ACT
ID[0:0]
MFP Reset
Motor Control
Polygon
IRQ2 Motor
PCU I/ F Control
Synchronous Serial FAN
Register
communicat ion Control
SCK etc...
RSV_DAT
TRANS_RST
TRANS_DAT
System CK
LSU_ASIC
CHIP- 1
VSYNC_K/ C LD Cont rol
Horizont al Scan
ECLK Serial
/ Vert ical Scan
Timing Cont rol D/A I/F
HSYNC
nSH MYx2 4
LD Control LD_ENB MY 2
O.C.
(APC
/ENB) LD5V
BD
nSHB MYx2
FPD- LINK/ Reciver
35 : 5 8 DT_M1+- 2
Channel A: M1
DT_M2+- 2
Channel B: M2
35 : 5 8 DT_Y1+- 2
Channel C: Y1
DT_Y2+- 2
Channel D: Y2
P.U.
TxD0 RxD[1]
nPCU_RxD
P.D. O.C. Schmit Inv.
P.U.
RxD0 TxD[1]
nPCU_TxD
Schmit Inv. O.C. P.D.
P.U.
I/O port CTS[1]
PCU_DSR
P.D. O.C. Schmit Inv.
P.U.
I/O port RTS[1]
PCU_DTR
Schmit Inv. O.C. P.D.
P.U.
TxD[PIC] TxD[PIC]
nTxD_PIC
P.U. P.D.
TxD1 RxD Schmit Inv. O.C.
Serial communication
TRANS_DAT P.U.
RxD[PIC] RxD[PIC]
P.D. Schmit Inv. Schmit Inv. nRxD_PIC
RxD1
P.U.
TxD
PIC
O.C Schmit Inv.
RSV_DAT LSU ASIC PIC16F882 P.U. P.U.
CLR[PIC] CLR[PIC]
Schmit Inv. Schmit Inv. P.D. CLR_PIC
P.U.
SCK1 SCK O.C O.C.
SCK_LSU P.U.
REQ[PIC] REQ[PIC]
P.D. Schmit Inv. Schmit Inv. REQ_PIC
LSU-MOTHER O.C Schmit Inv.
CPU
H8S/2373
P.U. P.U.
TxD2 RxD
TxD_FIN
O.C. Schmit Inv.
P.U. P.U.
RxD2 TxD
RxD_FIN
O.C. CPU
O.C.
P.U. P.U. M30843FWGP
I/O MFPC
DTR_FIN INNER
O.C. Schmit Inv. SCN Cnt HDD ASIC
P.U. P.U.
I/O
FINISHER
P.U.
䋨Optional) RxD TxD[2]
nTxD_SCN
O.C. O.C.
Schmit Inv. O.C. P.D.
P.U.
TxD RxD[2]
DSR_FIN
P.U. P.U. nRxD_SCN
P.U.
TxD3 RxD
TxD_DSK CPU P.D. O.C Schmit Inv.
H8S/2373 P.U.
O.C. O.C. RTS[2]
P.U. RTS_SCN
P.U. P.U.
RxD3 TxD A[4:0]
RxD_DSK Schmit Inv. O.C. P.D.
I/O ASIC
CPU P.U.
O.C. O.C. μPD65892GC CTS[2]
P.U. P.U. P.U. H8/3684 D[15:8] CTS_SCN
I/O
DTR_DS K P.D. O.C Schmit Inv.
F301
DC POWER SUPPLY Voltage
T2AH/250V Conversion
+ 5Vo
+ 5VL
RC101
+
~
~
-
N/F
Power FAN
MAIN POWER SW
B. AC power line diagram
AC IN F001
Live in Live out Live1 in
+24V5
20A/250V F101 Voltage
SQ001 NR002 T2AH/250V Conversion
+12V
+5Vn
+3.3V
INT24V1
Live WH
Neutral WH
/HL_PR
L101
L102
WH-SW
HL DCDC PWB
WH PWB
MAIN UNIT 6 6 6
MAIN UNIT
Neutral EX
Live HL
Live HL
Neutral LOW
Neutral MAIN
DESK
DESK drawer
THERMOSTAT RDTCT_EX1
THERMOSTAT RDTCT_Low
HL_MAIN HL_LOW
HL_EX1 HL_EX2
THERMOSTAT RDTCT_EX2 THERMOSTAT RDTCT_Main
FUSING UNIT
(2)
F301
DC POWER SUPPLY Reactor Voltage
T2AH/250V Conversion
+ 5Vo
+ 5VL
RC101
+
~
~
-
N/F Power FAN
MAIN POWER SW
AC IN F001
Live in Live out Live1 in
+24V5
T10AH/250V F101 Voltage
SQ001 NR002 T2AH/250V Conversion
+12V
+5Vn
AC power line diagram (200V)
+3.3V
F002
Neutral out Neutral1 in
Neutral in
T10AH/250V
FW
NR102 Voltage
Generating
F201 Conversion
F003 F004 Circuit
+24V1
+24V2
T2AH/250V T2AH/250V T5AH/250V +24V3
+24V4
no mount RL102 +24V5
NR003
INT24V1
Live WH
Neutral WH
/HL_PR
L101
L102
WH-SW
HL DCDC PWB
WH PWB
MAIN UNIT 6 6 6
MAIN UNIT
Neutral EX
Live HL
Live HL
Neutral LOW
Neutral MAIN
DESK
DESK drawer
THERMOSTAT RDTCT_EX1
THERMOSTAT RDTCT_Low
HL_MAIN HL_LOW
HL_EX1 HL_EX2
THERMOSTAT RDTCT_EX2 THERMOSTAT RDTCT_Main
FUSING UNIT
(3)
HL DCDC PWB
24V4 24V1
Interlock
DCDC
24V2
DCDC
5VN 3.3V 12V
LSU-MOTHER SCNcnt PWB MIM SPUS
PWB MFPC PWB
LCD INV
FAX UN PWB LCD BACK LIGHT
INT5V
FET
CL INV
DCDC CL
PWB
POL
YSW
INT 24V2 Motors
INT24V2 PGM
FET
24V1
DVM_BK DVM_CL FUM
INTCNT INT5V
LD PWB
LD
24V3 Clutches, Solenoids and others
24V1 24V1
1TURC2 2TURC ATC
6.3A
24V3 Motors
24V2
24V4 24V4
PROFM2 POFM FUFM HDDFM LSUFM
TC PWB MC PWB
INT24V1 INT24V1
4.0A INT 24V1 Motors
24V_DSK
FET
OPTION OPTION
PROFM1
A. Maintenance counter
Display condition Print job
Display content Sim26-38-A Enable/
Counter name Counter value
set value Disable
(Maintenance required.Code:TA) 0 (Print continue) Maintenance counter (Total) When the Sim21-1 set value is reached Enable
1 (Print stop) When 90% of the Sim21-1 set value is reached
[Maintenance required. Code: TA] 1 (Print stop) When the Sim21-1 set value is reached Disable
(Maintenance required.Code:CA) 0 (Print continue) Maintenance counter (Color) When the Sim21-1 set value is reached Enable
1 (Print stop) When 90% of the Sim21-1 set value is reached
[Maintenance required. Code: CA] 1 (Print stop) When the Sim21-1 set value is reached Disable
(Maintenance required.Code:AA) 0 (Print continue) Maintenance counter (Total), When the Sim21-1 set value is reached Enable
1 (Print stop) Maintenance counter (Color) When 90% of the Sim21-1 set value is reached
[Maintenance required. Code: AA] 1 (Print stop) When the Sim21-1 set value is reached Disable
• After execution of maintenance, execute SIM24-4 to clear the maintenance counter (total) and the maintenance counter (color).
• When the maintenance counter (total) and the maintenance counter (color) are cleared, the above display disappears.
MX-C401 MAINTENANCE 9 – 1
• When the primary transfer unit is replaced with a new one, the print counter, the accumulated traveling distance counter, and the usage day
counter are automatically cleared, and the guidance for execution of the auto color calibration is displayed.
• If a sub part is used to execute the maintenance or if the above guidance does not disappear when the whole primary transfer unit is
replaced, SIM24-4 must be executed to clear the print counter, the accumulated traveling distance counter, and the usage day counter of the
primary transfer unit, and the auto color calibration must be executed by the simulation.
• The above display disappears by cleaning the counters.
• When the secondary transfer unit is replaced with a new one, the print counter, the accumulated traveling distance counter, and the usage
day counter are automatically cleared, and the above display disappears.
• If the above guidance does not disappear though the secondary transfer unit is replaced, SIM24-4 must be executed to clear the print
counter, the accumulated traveling distance counter, and the usage day counter.
• The above display disappears when the counters are cleared.
D. Fusing unit
Display condition Print job
Display content Sim26-38-D Enable/
Counter name Counter value
set value Disable
(Maintenance required.Code:FK1) 0 (Print continue) Fusing unit print counter When 120K is reached Enable
(The supplies will be needed soon. Fusing Unit) 1 (Print stop) (Heat roller upper) When 90% of 120K is reached Enable
[Change the supplies. Fusing Unit] 1 (Print stop) When 120K is reached Disable
(Maintenance required.Code:FK2) 0 (Print continue) Fusing unit print counter When 120K is reached Enable
(The supplies will be needed soon. Fusing Unit) 1 (Print stop) (Heat roller lower and external) When 90% of 120K is reached Enable
[Change the supplies. Fusing Unit] 1 (Print stop) When 120K is reached Disable
• When the fusing unit is replaced with a new one, the print counter (on the upper side of the heat roller), the usage day counter (on the upper
side of the heat roller), the print counters (on the lower side and the outside of the heat roller), and the usage day counters (on the lower side
and the outside of the heat roller) are automatically cleared, and the above display disappears.
• If a sub part is used to execute the maintenance or if the above guidance does not disappear when the whole fusing unit is replaced, SIM24-
4 must be executed to clear the print counter (on the upper side of the heat roller), the usage day counter (on the upper side of the heat
roller), the print counters (on the lower side and the outside of the heat roller), and the usage day counters (on the lower side and the outside
of the heat roller).
• The above display disappears when the counters are cleared.
E. Drum cartridge
For K C Y M , only the life end cartridge code is displayed.
Display condition
Print job Enable/
Display content Sim26-38-E
Counter name Counter value Disable
set value
(Maintenance required. 0 (Print continue) Drum cartridge print counter (K) When 60K is reached Enable
Code:DK) Drum cartridge accumulated rotation number (K) When 550K rotations is reached Enable
(Maintenance required. 0 (Print continue) Drum cartridge print counter (C) When 30K is reached Enable
Code:DC) Drum cartridge accumulated rotation number (C) When 550K rotations is reached Enable
(Maintenance required. 0 (Print continue) Drum cartridge print counter (M) When 30K is reached Enable
Code:DM) Drum cartridge accumulated rotation number (M) When 550K rotations is reached Enable
(Maintenance required. 0 (Print continue) Drum cartridge print counter (Y) When 30K is reached Enable
Code:DY) Drum cartridge accumulated rotation number (Y) When 550K rotations is reached Enable
(The supplies will be needed 1 (Print stop) Drum cartridge print counter (K) When 90% of 60K is reached by Enable
soon. Photoconductive Drum cartridge print counter (C) the K counter.
Drum Cartridge K C M Drum cartridge print counter (M) When 90% of 30K is reached by
Y ) *1 Drum cartridge print counter (Y) the C, M, or Y counter.
Drum cartridge accumulated rotation number (K) When 90% of 550K rotations is Enable
Drum cartridge accumulated rotation number (C) reached by either counter
Drum cartridge accumulated rotation number (M)
Drum cartridge accumulated rotation number (Y)
[Change the supplies. 1 (Print stop) Drum cartridge print counter (K) When 60K is reached Disable
Photoconductive Drum Drum cartridge accumulated rotation number (K) When 550K rotations is reached Disable
Cartridge K ]
MX-C401 MAINTENANCE 9 – 2
Display condition
Print job Enable/
Display content Sim26-38-E
Counter name Counter value Disable
set value
(Change the supplies. 1 (Print stop) Drum cartridge print counter (C) When 30K is reached by either Enable for Black/White
Photoconductive Drum Drum cartridge print counter (M) counter Disable for Color
Cartridge C M Y ) Drum cartridge print counter (Y) *2
Drum cartridge accumulated rotation number (C) When 550K rotations is reached Enable for Black/White
Drum cartridge accumulated rotation number (M) by either counter Disable for Color
Drum cartridge accumulated rotation number (Y) *2
*1: Selection of Display/Not Display can be made with Sim26-69. (Default: Not Display)
*2: When the black drum cartridge does not reach the life end and only the color drum cartridge reaches the life end, black/white print can be
performed but color print cannot be performed.
• When the drum cartridge is replaced with a new one, the print counter, the accumulated traveling distance counter, the accumulated rotation
number counter, and the usage day counter are automatically cleared, and the above display disappears.
• If the above guidance does not disappear when the drum cartridge is replaced, SIM24-7 must be executed to clear the print counter, the
accumulated traveling distance counter, the accumulated rotation number counter, and the usage day counter, and the auto color calibration
must be executed.
• The above display disappears when the counters are cleared.
F. Developer cartridge
For K C Y M , only the life end cartridge code is displayed.
Display condition
Print job
Display content Sim26-38-E
Counter name Counter value Enable/Disable
set value
(Maintenance required. 0 (Print continue) Developer cartridge print counter (K) When 60K is reached Enable
Code:VK) Developer cartridge accumulated rotation number (K) When 550K rotations is reached Enable
(Maintenance required. 0 (Print continue) Developer cartridge print counter (C) When 30K is reached Enable
Code:VC) Developer cartridge accumulated rotation number (C) When 550K rotations is reached Enable
(Maintenance required. 0 (Print continue) Developer cartridge print counter (M) When 30K is reached Enable
Code:VM) Developer cartridge accumulated rotation number (M) When 550K rotations is reached Enable
(Maintenance required. 0 (Print continue) Developer cartridge print counter (Y) When 30K is reached Enable
Code:VY) Developer cartridge accumulated rotation number (Y) When 550K rotations is reached Enable
(The supplies will be 1 (Print stop) Developer cartridge print counter (K) When 90% of 60K is reached by Enable
needed soon. Developer cartridge print counter (C) the K counter.
Developer cartridge K Developer cartridge print counter (M) When 90% of 30K is reached by
C M Y ) *1 Developer cartridge print counter (Y) the C, M, or Y counter.
Developer cartridge accumulated rotation number (K) When 90% of 550K rotations is Enable
Developer cartridge accumulated rotation number (C) reached by either counter
Developer cartridge accumulated rotation number (M)
Developer cartridge accumulated rotation number (Y)
[Change the supplies. 1 (Print stop) Developer cartridge print counter (K) When 60K is reached Disable
Photoconductive Drum Developer cartridge accumulated rotation number (K) When 550K rotations is reached Disable
Cartridge K ]
(Change the supplies. 1 (Print stop) Developer cartridge print counter (C) When 30K is reached Enable for Black/White
Photoconductive Drum Developer cartridge print counter (M) Disable for Color
Cartridge C M Y ) Developer cartridge print counter (Y) *2
Developer cartridge accumulated rotation number (C) When 550K rotations is reached Enable for Black/White
Developer cartridge accumulated rotation number (M) Disable for Color
Developer cartridge accumulated rotation number (Y) *2
*1: Selection of Display/Not Display can be made with Sim26-69. (Default: Not Display)
*2: When the black drum cartridge does not reach the life end and only the color drum cartridge reaches the life end, black/white print can be
performed but color print cannot be performed.
• When the developer cartridge is replaced with a new one, the print counter, the accumulated traveling distance counter, the accumulated
rotation number counter, and the usage day counter are automatically cleared, and the guidance for execution of the auto color calibration is
displayed.
• If the above guidance does not disappear when the developer cartridge is replaced, the initial setting of the toner density must be executed
with the simulation, and the auto color calibration must be executed.
• When the initial setting of the toner density is executed, the counters are cleared and the above display disappears.
MX-C401 MAINTENANCE 9 – 3
G. Toner cartridge
For K C Y M , only the life end cartridge code is displayed.
Display condition
Print job
Display content Sim26-38-A Remaining
Status Enable/Disable
set value quantity display *1
( K C M Y Toner supply is low.) 0 (Print continue) 25-0% Toner remaining quantity is 25% or less. Enable
*2 1 (Print stop)
(The supplies will be needed soon. 0 (Print continue) 25-0% Toner remaining quantity corresponds to output of Enable
Toner Cartridge K C M Y ) *2 1 (Print stop) XX sheets. *3
[Change the toner cartridge. K ] 0 (Print continue) 25-0% When the black toner cartridge reaches toner end. Disable
1 (Print stop)
(Change the supplies. Toner 0 (Display) 25-0% When the color toner cartridge reaches toner end. Enable for Black/White
Cartridge C M Y ) 1 (No display) Disable for Color
*4
No display — 50-25% Toner remaining quantity is 49 - 25%. Enable
No display — 75-50% Toner remaining quantity is 74 - 50%. Enable
No display — 100-75% Toner remaining quantity is 100-75%. Enable
Install the toner cartridge. — No display When no toner cartridges are installed. Disable
When a toner cartridge of a different color is installed.
Improper cartridge. — No display When an incompatible toner cartridge is installed. Disable
Cartridge error. — No display CRUM trouble Disable
Toner cartridge connector contact trouble
*1: Detected by the toner motor rotation number and the pixel count (The value of larger life percentage is employed.)
Since the life of the toner cartridge which is packed when shipping from the factory is 2.5K, the remaining quantity of the toner cartridge,
though it is a new one, is displayed as 25-0%.
*2: Selection of Display/Not Display can be made with Sim26-69. (Default: Not Display)
*3: Setting can be made with Sim26-69. (Default: 0 sheet)
*4: When the black toner cartridge does not reach the life end and only the color toner cartridge reaches the life end, black/white print can be
performed but color print cannot be performed.
MX-C401 MAINTENANCE 9 – 4
3. Maintenance list
: Check {: Clean : Replace : Adjust ✩: Lubricate
MX-C401 MAINTENANCE 9 – 5
A. Drum cartridge
: Check {: Clean : Replace : Adjust ✩: Lubricate
No. Part name 30K 60K 90K 120K 150K 180K 210K 240K 270K 300K Remark
1 Drum cartridge (Black)
2 Drum cartridge (Cyan)
3 Drum cartridge (Magenta)
4 Drum cartridge (Yellow)
NOTE: When handling the drum cartridge, be careful not to put fingerprints, oil, grease, or other foreign material on the OPC drum surface.
NOTE: When fingerprints or foreign materials are attached to the OPC drum surface, the cleaning blade may be reversed and defective
images may be generated. In this case, use dry cloth to clean the drum. If foreign materials cannot be removed by cleaning, replace
the drum with a new one.
NOTE: Avoid exposing the OPC drum surface to strong lights (sunlight, fluorescent lamp lights, incandescent lamp lights).
Remove the black protection sheet which covers the OPC drum before installing the drum cartridge to the machine.
NOTE: When putting the drum cartridge outside the machine, cover the OPC drum with light-blocking material. (When using paper, use about
10 sheets of paper to cover.)
NOTE: When the drum cartridge is replaced with a new one, the print counter, the accumulated traveling distance counter, the accumulated
rotation number counter, and the usage day counter are automatically cleared.
NOTE: If the machine power is turned OFF or the door is opened during warming up and initializing (until the machine enters the print (copy)
ready state), the initial detection function may not operate normally.
Never operate the machine such as execution of the simulation, turning OFF the machine power, or opening the door during the period
after turning ON the power before the machine enters the print (copy) ready state.
If the counters are not automatically reset, SIM24-7 must be used to reset the counters manually.
4 3 2 1
MX-C401 MAINTENANCE 9 – 6
B. Developer cartridge
: Check {: Clean : Replace : Adjust ✩: Lubricate
No. Part name 30K 60K 90K 120K 150K 180K 210K 240K 270K 300K Remark
1 Developer cartridge (Black)
2 Developer cartridge (Cyan)
3 Developer cartridge (Magenta)
4 Developer cartridge (Yellow)
NOTE: When the developer cartridge is replaced with a new one, the print counter, the accumulated traveling distance counter, the accumu-
lated rotation number counter, and the usage day counter are automatically reset, and the initial setting of the toner density is automat-
ically executed.
If the machine power is turned OFF or the door is opened during warming up and initializing (until the machine enters the print (copy)
ready state), the initial detection function may not operate normally.
Never operate the machine such as execution of the simulation, turning OFF the machine power, or opening the door during the period
after turning ON the power before the machine enters the print (copy) ready state.
If the counters are not automatically reset, use SIM24-4 to reset the counters manually.
NOTE: When installing a new developer cartridge, be sure to install the toner cartridge in advance. If a new developer cartridge is installed
without installing the toner cartridge, the initial setting of the toner density is not executed.
NOTE: If the initial setting of the toner density is not automatically executed when the developer cartridge is replaced, SIM25-2 must be used
to execute the initial setting of the toner density.
NOTE: When handling the developer cartridge, be careful not to put fingerprints, oil, grease, or other foreign material on the developer roller
surface.
NOTE: When fingerprints or foreign materials are attached to the developer roller surface, defective images may be generated. In this case,
use dry cloth and alcohol to clean the roller. If foreign materials cannot be removed by cleaning, replace the developer cartridge with a
new one.
If developer or toner is attached to the developer roller surface, never use alcohol.
4 3 2 1
MX-C401 MAINTENANCE 9 – 7
C. Toner cartridge
: Check {: Clean : Replace : Adjust ✩: Lubricate
No. Part name 30K 60K 90K 120K 150K 180K 210K 240K 270K 300K Remark
1 Toner cartridge (Black) Replace at every toner empty. Replacement is made by the user.
2 Toner cartridge (Cyan)
3 Toner cartridge (Magenta)
4 Toner cartridge (Yellow)
5 Waste toner box Replace at every full detection. Replacement is made by the user.
4
3
2
1
MX-C401 MAINTENANCE 9 – 8
D. Secondary transfer section
: Check {: Clean : Replace : Adjust ✩: Lubricate
No. Part name 30K 60K 90K 120K 150K 180K 210K 240K 270K 300K Remark
1 Secondary transfer roller unit
NOTE: When the secondary transfer unit is replaced with a new one, the print counter, the accumulated traveling distance counter, and the
usage day counter are automatically reset.
If a simulation is executed or the machine power is turned OFF or the door is opened during warming up and initializing (until the
machine enters the print (copy) ready state), the initial detection function may not operate normally.
Never operate the machine such as execution of the simulation, turning OFF the machine power, or opening the door during the period
after turning ON the power before the machine enters the print (copy) ready state.
If the counters are not automatically reset, use SIM24-4 to reset the counters manually.
NOTE: When handling the secondary transfer unit, be careful not to put fingerprints, oil, grease, or other foreign material on the secondary
transfer roller surface.
MX-C401 MAINTENANCE 9 – 9
E. Primary transfer section
: Check {: Clean : Replace : Adjust ✩: Lubricate
No. Part name 30K 60K 90K 120K 150K 180K 210K 240K 270K 300K Remark
1 Primary transfer belt
2 Primary transfer roller
3 Cleaning blade
4 PTC wire
5 PTC cleaner
6 PTC cleaner B
7 Primary transfer drive coupling
8 Transfer drive roller
9 Transfer follower roller
10 Transfer tension roller
11 Backup shaft
12 Registration backup shaft
NOTE: When the primary transfer unit is replaced with a new one, the print counter, the accumulated traveling distance counter, and the usage
day counter are automatically reset.
If the machine power is turned OFF or the door is opened during warming up and initializing (until the machine enters the print (copy)
ready state), the initial detection function may not operate normally.
Never operate the machine such as execution of the simulation, turning OFF the machine power, or opening the door during the period
after turning ON the power before the machine enters the print (copy) ready state.
If the counters are not automatically reset, use SIM24-4 to reset the counters manually.
NOTE: When a sub part is used to execute the maintenance, SIM24-4 must be used to reset the counters manually.
When handling the primary transfer unit, be careful not to put fingerprints, oil, grease, or other foreign material on the transfer belt sur-
face.
When fingerprints or foreign materials are attached to the transfer belt surface, defective images may be generated. In this case, use
dry cloth and alcohol to clean the belt. When alcohol is used, wipe with dry cloth carefully.
9 3 1 7
11
10
11
2
8
2
12
2 6
4 5
MX-C401 MAINTENANCE 9 – 10
NOTE: Be careful not to put fingerprints or oily dirt on the transfer belt surface. (Do not put the transfer belt on a place where there is oily dirt or
dust.)
NOTE: When replacing the transfer belt, hold the edge section (within 8mm from the edge) of the transfer belt.
NOTE: When rotating the transfer belt manually, use a screwdriver to rotate the drive gear section.
NOTE: To install or remove the primary transfer unit, hold the grip.
NOTE: When installing or removing the primary transfer unit, be careful not to touch the section marked with a red circle in the figure below.
When opening the right door, be careful not to touch the exposed section of the transfer belt.
MX-C401 MAINTENANCE 9 – 11
F. Fusing section
: Check {: Clean : Replace : Adjust ✩: Lubricate
No. Part name 30K 60K 90K 120K 150K 180K 210K 240K 270K 300K Remark
1 Upper heat roller unit
2 Lower heat roller unit
3 External heating unit
4 Separation pawl lower
5 Separation pawl lower spring
6 Thermister retainer
7 External heat roller contact Part with four thermisters
thermistor 1 (RTH_EX1) integrated in it
External heat roller contact
thermistor 2 (RTH_EX2)
Upper heat roller non-contact
thermistor (RTH_Main)
Upper heat roller contact
thermistor (RTH_Sub)
8 Lower heat roller contact
thermistor (RTH_Low)
NOTE: When the fusing unit is replaced with a new one, the print counter (on the upper side of the heat roller), the usage day counter (on the
upper side of the heat roller), the print counters (on the lower side and the outside of the heat roller), and the usage day counters (on
the lower side and the outside of the heat roller) are automatically reset.
If the machine power is turned OFF or the door is opened during warming up and initializing (until the machine enters the print (copy)
ready state), the initial detection function may not operate normally.
Never operate the machine such as execution of the simulation, turning OFF the machine power, or opening the door during the period
after turning ON the power before the machine enters the print (copy) ready state.
If the counters are not automatically reset, SIM24-4 must be used to reset the counters manually.
NOTE: When a sub part is used to execute the maintenance, SIM24-4 must be used to reset the counters manually.
2
7
6 8
4
5
4
5
MX-C401 MAINTENANCE 9 – 12
G. Filter section
: Check {: Clean : Replace : Adjust ✩: Lubricate
No. Part name 30K 60K 90K 120K 150K 180K 210K 240K 270K 300K Remark
1 Ozone filter
MX-C401 MAINTENANCE 9 – 13
H. Roller section
: Check {: Clean : Replace : Adjust ✩: Lubricate
No. Part name 30K 60K 90K 120K 150K 180K 210K 240K 270K 300K Remark
1 Paper pickup roller (Tray 1) Replace as needed.
2 Paper feed roller Reference: About 100K or 1 year of
3 Separation roller use.
4 Paper feed roller
(Manual paper feed tray)
5 Manual paper feed separation pad
unit
6 Paper pickup roller unit
7 RSPF separation pad unit
2
1
MX-C401 MAINTENANCE 9 – 14
[10] DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY
MX-C401
5GTXKEG/CPWCN
1. External view
External view
P 10-1 P 10-1
Paper exit cover Paper exit tray
P 10-2 P 10-2
Left cabinet upper Upper cabinet left
P 10-2 P 10-2
Left cabinet MFP ROM cover
P 10-3 P 10-2
Front cabinet upper Left cabinet lower
P 10-3
Upper cabinet rear
P 10-3 P 10-3
Rear cabinet Upper cabinet right
A. Paper exit cover 2) Remove the coin screw, and remove the paper exit tray.
1) Disengage the pawl, and remove the paper exit cover.
2) Pull the lever to release the lock, and open the right door.
3) Remove the screw, and slide the front cabinet upper to the
right to remove.
E 10-5
U 10-4
LCD
8.5" operation panel unit
E 10-5
P 10-5
Touch panel
P 10-2 Operation panel base plate
Upper cabinet left E 10-6
LCD INV PWB
P 10-3
Front cabinet upper E 10-6
LVDS PWB
P 10-3
Upper cabinet rear E 10-5 E 10-6
Operation panel power switch MFP OPE-P PWB
U 10-6
4.3" operation panel unit E 10-7
LCD
P 10-7
Operation base plate E 10-7
LVDS PWB
E 10-7 E 10-7
Operation panel power switch MFP OPE-P PWB
A. 8.5" operation panel unit 2) Remove the screw, and remove the 8.5" operation panel unit.
1) Disconnect the connector. Remove the screw, and remove the
earth wire.
2) Disengage the pawl, and remove the holder. Remove the LCD.
NOTE: Be careful not to put fingerprints on the LCD surface.
2) Remove the screw, and remove the wire saddle and the LVDS
PWB.
NOTE: When the LVDS PWB is removed, the earth plate is also
removed. Be sure to install it together when installing.
2) Remove the screw, and remove the 4.3" operation panel unit.
U 10-4
8.5" operation panel unit
U 10-6
4.3" operation panel unit Scanner section
U 10-8
U 10-57 Scanner unit
RSPF unit E 10-9
Carriage unit
U 10-8
P 10-3 Scanner top cover unit
Upper cabinet right E 10-9
Scanner motor unit
A. Scanner unit 3) Remove the screw from the scanner unit, and remove the
frame.
1) Disconnect the connector. Remove the screw, and remove the
earth wire.
(2) Carriage unit 2) Remove the harness from the scanner unit.
1) Slide the pulley on the right side of the belt, and remove the
belt.
3) Remove the screw, and remove the earth wire and the scanner
motor unit.
2) Remove the screw, and remove the earth wire and the fixing
plate. Lift the carriage unit and remove the shaft.
U 10-17
ADU open/close PG unit
E 10-12
Paper pickup solenoid
E 10-12
Manual feed paper empty detector
E 10-11 E 10-11
Manual paper feed tray paper width sensor Manual feed paper length detector 1
A. Paper feed roller 3) Slide the collar to the front side and the rear side.
1) Remove the cover.
2) Disengage the pawl, and slide the roller stopper to the front
side and the rear side.
D. Manual paper feed unit (2) Manual feed paper empty detector
1) Remove the screw, and remove the earth wire. Disconnect the 1) Remove the spring, and deflect the actuator to remove.
connector.
U 10-14 E 10-14
Paper feed reverse unit Tray 1 upper limit detector
E 10-15
Paper transport detector 1
E 10-14
Paper transport detector 2
(1) Paper feed reverse unit (3) Tray 1 upper limit detector
1) Disconnect the connector. Remove the screw, and remove the 1) Remove the screw, and remove the paper feed lower unit.
paper feed reverse unit.
NOTE: When installing, pinch the band with the paper feed reverse
unit and install.
4) Remove the shaft. Remove the gear, the holder, and the bear-
ing.
M 10-28 E 10-18
Secondary transfer unit ADU transport path detector 2
P 10-18
ADU tray lower cabinet
U 10-17
Right door
E 10-18
Temperature humidity sensor
U 10-14 U 10-18
Tray paper feed unit PS unit
E 10-18
Paper transport detector 3
A. ADU cabinet upper 2) Disengage the pawl, and remove the ADU cabinet upper.
1) Pull the lever, and release the lock, and open the right door.
2) Remove the screw on the rear side, and remove the arm from
the right door. Remove the band on the front side, and remove
the right door.
NOTE: When placing the right door, place so that the secondary
transfer unit faces up.
3) Disconnect the connector, and remove the snap band, and pull
out the harness. (3) Temperature humidity sensor
1) Disengage the pawl, and remove the temperature humidity
sensor, and disconnect the connector.
4) Remove the screw, and remove the holder and remove the
ADU open/close PG unit. E. PS unit
1) Remove the screw, and remove the PS unit.
M 10-20
Waste toner box
U 10-20 E 10-21
Waste toner fulcrum holder unit Drum cartridge detection switch
U 10-13
Tray
E 10-21
Waste toner full detection switch
U 10-42 E 10-22
Main drive unit Discharge lamp
3) Turn the lock lever until it stops to release the lock, and
remove the waste toner box.
2) Remove the spring and the lever. Remove the waste toner full 3) Remove the screw, and remove the plate.
detection switch from the lever.
Y
A. Toner cartridge
1) Open the front cover.
E. Discharge lamp
1) Disengage the pawl, and remove the discharge lamp, and dis-
connect the connector.
Y 2) Hold the handle of the toner cartridge, and pull it out straight.
M
K C
Developing section
M 10-20 M 10-23
Waste toner box Developer cartridge
A. Developer cartridge
1) Put the lock lever horizontally, release the lock, and open the
drum positioning plate unit.
Transfer section
M 10-27
Transfer drive roller
M 10-27
Primary transfer roller
M 10-26 M 10-27
Transfer follower roller Backup shaft
M 10-27
Registration backup shaft
M 10-20
Waste toner box
U 10-25
Primary transfer unit
M 10-25 U 10-26
Primary transfer drive coupling Cleaner unit
P 10-25 M 10-26
Transfer front cover Cleaning blade
M 10-28 U 10-27
Secondary transfer unit PTC unit
U 10-51 M 10-28
High voltage PWB holder unit PTC cleaner B
M 10-28 M 10-28
E 10-28 PTC wire PTC cleaner
Transfer belt separation detection CL
E 10-28
Transfer belt separation detector BK
2) Put the lock lever horizontally, release the lock, and pull out the
primary transfer unit until it stops. (1) Primary transfer drive coupling
1) Press the primary transfer drive coupling, and remove the
screw.
3) Hold the handle, push the lock on the left side of the primary
transfer unit and remove the primary transfer unit.
3) Remove the blue screw. Remove the holder and remove the
transfer follower roller unit.
2) Remove the collar, the gear, and parallel pin, and the collar (9) Backup shaft
from the transfer drive roller.
1) Turn back the primary transfer unit. Remove the bearing side
of the backup shaft, and remove the backup shaft. Remove the
bearing from the backup shaft.
NOTE: When installing the backup shaft, be careful of the direction
of the concave section of the bearing.
b. PTC wire
1) Remove the spring on the front side of the PTC wire. Remove
the rear side and remove the PTC wire.
NOTE: Do not touch the wire section of the PTC wire with a bare 2) Release the lock, and remove the secondary transfer unit.
hand.
NOTE: When installing, arrange so that the PTC wire is on the
PTC cleaner.
c. PTC cleaner
1) Remove the cleaner rod. Disengage the pawl, and remove the
holder.
2) Slide the cleaner holder to the front side to remove. Remove D. Transfer belt separation detector BK
the PTC cleaner from the cleaner holder.
M 10-30
Separation pawl lower spring
E 10-30
Upper thermostat
E 10-31
Lower thermostat
M 10-31
Lower heat roller contact thermistor
U 10-30
Fusing unit E 10-31
External heater lamp
M 10-31
P 10-30 External heating unit
Fusing cover E 10-31
External heater lamp 2
M 10-32
Upper heat roller contact thermister
M 10-32
Upper heat roller non-contact thermister
M 10-32
Thermister retainer
M 10-32
External heat roller contact thermister 1
M 10-32
External heat roller contact thermister 2
E 10-34
Upper heater lamp
U 10-33 M 10-35
Pressure release mounting plate unit Upper heat roller unit
E 10-34
Lower heater lamp
M 10-35
Lower heat roller unit
E 10-33
Fusing roller pressure release detector
E 10-33
Fusing pressure release solenoid
White harness
Black harness
2) Remove the clip. Remove the screw, and remove the external
heat roller contact thermister 1 and the external heat roller
contact thermister 2.
3) Remove the clip. Remove the screw, and remove the external
heat roller contact thermister 1 and the external heat roller
contact thermister 2.
(8) Thermister retainer
1) Remove the screw, and remove the drawer. Remove the ther-
mister retainer.
NOTE: When installing the thermister retainer, push it until it clicks.
NOTE: When installing the drawer, push the harness with a tube
first, then install the drawer so that the harness is not
pinched.
3) Remove the stopper from the step screw, and remove the
upper heat roller unit.
NOTE: Be careful not to scratch or put dirt on the heat roller. 3) Remove the lower heat roller unit.
NOTE: When installing the upper heat roller unit, check to confirm NOTE: Be careful not to scratch or put dirt on the heat roller.
that the bearing ring is outside of the frame.
P 10-1
Paper exit tray
U 10-36 U 10-37
Paper exit lower PG unit Paper exit upper PG unit
P 10-3
Front cabinet upper
E 10-37 E 10-37
Paper exit detector Paper exit tray full detector
B. Fusing rear detector 2) Disconnect the connector. Remove the screw, disengage the
pawl, and remove the paper exit lower PG unit.
1) Disconnect the connector, and remove the fusing rear detec-
tor.
Drive section
U 10-13 U 10-39
Tray Paper tray lift-up drive unit
E 10-39
Tray 1 detector
P 10-39
Lift-up cover
E 10-39
Paper tray lift-up motor
E 10-39 E 10-40
Fusing drive motor ADU transport clutch 1
E 10-39
Secondary transfer separation clutch
E 10-41
Paper exit drive motor
E 10-41
Developing drive motor (K)
P 10-3
Rear cabinet
E 10-41
Developing drive motor (CL)
E 10-41
Resist motor
E 10-41
Paper feed motor
U 10-25
Primary transfer unit U 10-42
Main drive unit
E 10-43
M 10-20
Primary transfer separation clutch 1
Drum cartridge U 10-42
Belt separation frame unit
E 10-43
Primary transfer separation clutch 2
E 10-43
Drum cartridge (BK) rotation detector
E 10-44
Drum cartridge (CL) rotation detector
U 10-44
Paper feed drive unit
E 10-45
Paper feed clutch
P 10-1 P 10-45
Paper exit tray Paper feed drive frame
E 10-46
Tray vertical transport clutch
M 10-22 E 10-46
Toner cartridge Toner motor
U 10-50
PCU PWB unit
2) Remove the screw, and remove the fusing drive frame unit.
NOTE: When the fusing drive frame unit is removed, the bearing
and the shaft may easily come off. Be careful not to lose
them.
5) Remove the E-ring, and remove the gear. Remove the parallel
pin. Remove the E-ring, and remove the ADU transport clutch
1.
H. Resist motor
1) Disconnect the connector. Remove the screw, and remove the
resist motor.
2) Pull the lever to release the lock, and open the right door.
2) Remove the E-ring, and remove the parallel pin and the collar. NOTE: When installing, fit the turn-stopper of the clutch.
Remove the E-ring. Disengage the pawl, and remove the gear
and the parallel pin.
L. Toner motor
1) Push the coupling and rotate it 90q and remove the coupling
and the spring.
PWB
U 10-13 E 10-47
Tray Paper size detection PWB
P 10-3 E 10-48
Upper cabinet rear Scanner control PWB
P 10-2 U 10-48
Left cabinet MFPC unit
E 10-48
MFPC PWB
U 10-52 U 10-49
HDD cooling fan motor unit LSU mother PWB unit
E 10-49
LSU mother PWB
E 10-49
ACDC power PWB
P 10-3 E 10-49
Rear cabinet PCU PWB
U 10-53 U 10-50
ACDC power unit MC PWB holder unit
M 10-22 E 10-50
Toner cartridge MC PWB
P 10-1
Paper exit tray
U 10-51
High voltage PWB holder unit
P 10-2
MFP ROM cover
E 10-51
TC PWB
U 10-25
Primary transfer unit
A. Paper size detection PWB 2) Disengage the pawl, and remove the paper size detection
PWB.
1) Disengage the pawl, and remove the paper size detection
Remove the spring from the paper size detection PWB.
holder. Disconnect the connector.
[31-sheet machine]
C. MFPC unit
1) Remove the screw, and remove the controller cover.
[38-sheet machine]
E. ACDC power PWB 2) Disconnect the connector. Remove the screw, and remove the
1) Disconnect the connector. Remove the harness from the wire PCU PWB.
saddle.
H. HL PWB
1) Disconnect the connector. Remove the harness from the wire
saddle.
(1) MC PWB
1) Disconnect the connector. Remove the snap band, and
remove the harness.
OK NG
OK NG
NOTE: When installing, engage the rear side of the high voltage
PWB holder unit first, and then lower the front side to
engage. NOTE: When installing the PWB, check to confirm that there is no
shift between the PWB terminal and the terminal on the
high voltage PWB holder side.
Fan
U 10-18 E 10-52
PS unit LSU cooling fan motor
P 10-2 E 10-52
MFP ROM cover Process fan motor 1
P 10-2 U 10-52
Left cabinet HDD cooling fan motor unit
U 10-42 E 10-52
Main drive unit HDD cooling fan motor
U 10-50 E 10-53
MC PWB holder unit Process fan motor 2
P 10-3 E 10-53
Rear cabinet Fusing cooling fan motor
P 10-2 U 10-53
Left cabinet lower ACDC power unit
E 10-53
Power cooling fan motor
Filter
M 10-54
Ozone filter
A. Ozone filter
1) Remove the filter cover, and remove the ozone filter.
NOTE: When installing the ozone filter, install cut corner
(illustarted) facing toward front.
A. Registration sensor unit 2) While pressing the cover which comes on the registration sen-
sor unit bottom, pull out the lever.
1) Push the lever on the front side. The shutter of the registration
sensor unit is closed, and the cover comes to the registration
sensor unit bottom.
3) Pull the cam on the rear side to the harness side, and remove
the shaft. Remove the cam on the front side.
RSPF section
M 10-56 M 10-56
Paper pickup roller unit RSPF separate pad unit
P 10-3 U 10-57
Upper cabinet rear RSPF unit
U 10-57 E 10-58
Chassis unit RSPF open/close detector
E 10-58
RSPF transport motor
E 10-58
RSPF driver PWB
E 10-58
RSPF cover open/close detector
E 10-58
RSPF transport detector 1
A. Paper pickup roller unit 3) While pressing the document stopper, remove the paper
1) Open the upper cover of the RSPF unit. pickup roller unit.
5) Remove two screws and the rubber which are fixing the har-
ness, and pull out the harness.
Other
P 10-2 E 10-59
MFP ROM cover Front door open/close switch
U 10-8 E 10-59
Scanner unit Right door open/close switch
P 10-3
Rear cabinet
U 10-59
Power switch unit
P 10-2
Left cabinet lower
E 10-60
Main switch
P 10-2 E 10-60
Left cabinet HDD
B. Right door open/close switch 2) Disconnect the connector from the main switch.
1) Remove the screw, and remove the right door open/close NOTE: When connecting the connector, be sure to fit with the
switch, and disconnect the connector. engraved mark inside the mounting plate.
Wire color
Connector
color
W
W
R
OFF
ON
W
R
OFF ON
W
W
R
OFF
ON
W
R
D. HDD
1) Disconnect the connector. While disengaging the pawl,
remove the HDD unit.
CN
㪰㪜㪪
㪠㫊㩷㫀㫋㩷㫇㫆㫊㫊㫀㪹㫃㪼㩷㫋㫆㩷㪼㫏㪼㪺㫌㫋㪼㩷 㪥㪦
㪟㪛㪛㩷㪹㪸㪺㫂㫌㫇㩷㫎㫀㫋㪿㩷㫋㪿㪼㩷㪤㪝㪧㩷
㪧㪮㪙㩷㩿㪪㫀㫄㪌㪍㪄㪈㪀㪖
㪠㫊㩷㫀㫋㩷㫇㫆㫊㫊㫀㪹㫃㪼㩷㫋㫆㩷㪼㫏㪼㪺㫌㫋㪼㩷
㪹㪸㪺㫂㫌㫇㩷㫋㫆㩷㫋㪿㪼㩷㪬㪪㪙㩷㫄㪼㫄㫆㫉㫐㩷 㪥㪦
㫎㫀㫋㪿㩷㫋㪿㪼㩷㪤㪝㪧㩷㪧㪮㪙㩷㩿㫊㫀㫄㪌㪍㪄㪉㪀㪖
㪰㪜㪪
㪰㪜㪪
㪈 㪉 㪊
㪓㪚㪸㫊㪼㩷㪈㩷㩽㩷㪉㪕 㪓㪚㪸㫊㪼㩷㪊㪕
㪠㫋㩷㫀㫊㩷㫇㫆㫊㫊㫀㪹㫃㪼㩷㫋㫆㩷㪹㪸㪺㫂㩷㫌㫇㩷㫋㪿㪼㩷㫉㪼㪾㫀㫊㫋㪼㫉㪼㪻㩷㫌㫊㪼㫉㩷 㪠㫋㩷㫀㫊㩷㫇㫆㫊㫊㫀㪹㫃㪼㩷㫋㫆㩷㫂㪼㪼㫇㩷㫋㪿㪼㩷㫊㪼㫋㫋㫀㫅㪾㩷㫆㪽㩷㫋㪿㪼㩷㪜㪜㪧㪩㪦㪤㪃㩷㪹㫌㫋㩷
㫀㫅㪽㫆㫉㫄㪸㫋㫀㫆㫅㩷㪹㫐㩷㫋㫉㪸㫅㫊㪽㪼㫉㫉㫀㫅㪾㩷㫋㪿㪼㩷㫊㪼㫋㫋㫀㫅㪾㩷㫆㪽㩷㪪㪩㪘㪤㩷 㫋㪿㪼㩷㫊㪼㫋㫋㫀㫅㪾㩷㫆㪽㩷㪪㪩㪘㪤㩷㪸㫅㪻㩷㫋㪿㪼㩷㫉㪼㪾㫀㫊㫋㪼㫉㪼㪻㩷㫌㫊㪼㫉㩷
㪸㫅㪻㩷㪜㪜㪧㪩㪦㪤㪅 㫀㫅㪽㫆㫉㫄㪸㫋㫀㫆㫅㩷㪺㪸㫅㫅㫆㫋㩷㪹㪼㩷㫉㪼㪺㫆㫍㪼㫉㪼㪻㪅㩷㩿㪁㪈㪀㩷
㩿㪥㫆㫋㪼㪀㩷㪥㪼㫍㪼㫉㩷㪼㫏㪼㪺㫌㫋㪼㩷㪪㫀㫄㪈㪍㩷㪼㫍㪼㫅㩷㫀㪽㩷㩹㪬㪉㪄㪇㪌㩹㩷㫋㫉㫆㫌㪹㫃㪼㩷㫀㫊㩷㫀㫅㪻㫀㪺㪸㫋㪼㪻㩷㪸㪽㫋㪼㫉㩷㫋㫌㫉㫅㫀㫅㪾㩷㫆㫅㩷㫋㪿㪼㩷㫇㫆㫎㪼㫉㪅
㪫㪿㪼㩷㫉㪼㪾㫀㫊㫋㪼㫉㪼㪻㩷㫌㫊㪼㫉㩷㫀㫅㪽㫆㫉㫄㪸㫋㫀㫆㫅㩷㫎㫀㫃㫃㩷㪹㪼㩷㪻㪼㫃㪼㫋㪼㪻㪅
㪈㪅㩷㪜㫏㪼㪺㫌㫋㪼㩷㪪㫀㫄㪌㪍㪄㪇㪈㩷㩿㪻㪸㫋㪸㩷㫋㫉㪸㫅㫊㫄㫀㫊㫊㫀㫆㫅㪀㩷㪹㪼㪽㫆㫉㪼㩷㫉㪼㫇㫃㪸㪺㫀㫅㪾㩷㫋㪿㪼㩷㪤㪝㪧㩷㪧㪮㪙㪃㩷㪼㫏㪼㪺㫌㫋㪼㩷㩹㪘㪣㪣㸢㪟㪛㪛㪃㩹㩷㪸㫅㪻㩷㫋㫉㪸㫅㫊㪽㪼㫉㩷㫋㪿㪼㩷㪪㪩㪘㪤
㩷㩷㩷㪻㪸㫋㪸㩷㪸㫅㪻㩷㫋㪿㪼㩷㪜㪜㪧㪩㪦㪤㩷㪻㪸㫋㪸㩷㫋㫆㩷㪟㪛㪛㪅
㪉㪅㩷㪘㫋㫋㪸㪺㪿㩷㫋㪿㪼㩷㪽㫃㪸㫊㪿㩷㪩㪦㪤㪃㩷㫋㪿㪼㩷㫄㪼㫄㫆㫉㫐㪃㩷㫋㪿㪼㩷㪜㪜㪧㪩㪦㪤㩷㪼㫋㪺㪅㩷㫆㪽㩷㫋㪿㪼㩷㪤㪝㪧㩷㪧㪮㪙㩷㫆㫅㩷㫋㪿㪼㩷㫊㪼㫉㫍㫀㪺㪼㩷㫇㪸㫉㫋㫊㩷㪤㪝㪧㩷㪧㪮㪙㩷㪸㫅㪻㩷㫀㫅㫊㫋㪸㫃㫃㩷㫀㫋
㪈 㩷㩷㩷㫋㫆㩷㫋㪿㪼㩷㫄㪸㫀㫅㫌㫅㫀㫋㪅
㪥㫆㫋㪼㪑㩷㪞㫉㫆㫌㫅㪻㩷㫐㫆㫌㫉㩷㪹㫆㪻㫐㩷㫎㫀㫋㪿㩷㪾㫉㫆㫌㫅㪻㫀㫅㪾㩷㪹㪸㫅㪻㩷㪻㫌㫉㫀㫅㪾㩷㫋㪿㪼㩷㫎㫆㫉㫂㪅
㪊㪅㩷㪜㫏㪼㪺㫌㫋㪼㩷㩹㪟㪛㪛㸢㪘㪣㪣㩹㩷㪹㫐㩷㪪㫀㫄㪌㪍㪄㪇㪈㩷㩷㩿㪻㪸㫋㪸㩷㫋㫉㪸㫅㫊㫄㫀㫊㫊㫀㫆㫅㪀㩷㫋㫆㩷㫉㪼㫋㫌㫉㫅㩷㫋㪿㪼㩷㪻㪸㫋㪸㩷㫆㪽㩷㪪㪩㪘㪤㩷㪸㫅㪻㩷㪜㪜㪧㪩㪦㪤㩷㫀㫅㩷㫋㪿㪼㩷㪟㪛㪛㩷㫋㫆㩷㫋㪿㪼
㩷㩷㩷㫅㪼㫎㩷㪤㪝㪧㩷㪧㪮㪙㪅
㪁㩷㪧㫃㪼㪸㫊㪼㩷㪹㪼㩷㪸㫎㪸㫉㪼㩷㫋㪿㪸㫋㩷㫀㪽㩷㩹㪘㪣㪣㸢㪟㪛㪛㩹㩷㫀㫊㩷㫅㫆㫋㩷㪼㫏㪼㪺㫌㫋㪼㪻㩷㪹㫐㩷㪪㫀㫄㪌㪍㪄㪇㪈㩷㩿㪻㪸㫋㪸㩷㫋㫉㪸㫅㫊㫄㫀㫊㫊㫀㫆㫅㪀㪃㩷㪹㫃㪸㫅㫂㩷㪻㪸㫋㪸㩷㫎㫀㫃㫃㩷㪹㪼㩷㪼㫏㫇㫆㫉㫋㪼㪻㩷㫋㫆
㩷㩷㫋㪿㪼㩷㪜㪜㪧㪩㪦㪤㩷㫎㪿㪼㫅㩷㩹㪟㪛㪛㸢㪘㪣㪣㩹㩷㫀㫊㩷㪼㫏㪼㪺㫌㫋㪼㪻㪅
㩿㪥㫆㫋㪼㪀㩷㪥㪼㫍㪼㫉㩷㪼㫏㪼㪺㫌㫋㪼㩷㪪㫀㫄㪈㪍㩷㪼㫍㪼㫅㩷㫀㪽㩷㩹㪬㪉㪄㪇㪌㩹㩷㫋㫉㫆㫌㪹㫃㪼㩷㫀㫊㩷㫀㫅㪻㫀㪺㪸㫋㪼㪻㩷㪸㪽㫋㪼㫉㩷㫋㫌㫉㫅㫀㫅㪾㩷㫆㫅㩷㫋㪿㪼㩷㫇㫆㫎㪼㫉㪅
㪫㪿㪼㩷㫉㪼㪾㫀㫊㫋㪼㫉㪼㪻㩷㫌㫊㪼㫉㩷㫀㫅㪽㫆㫉㫄㪸㫋㫀㫆㫅㩷㫎㫀㫃㫃㩷㪹㪼㩷㪻㪼㫃㪼㫋㪼㪻㪅
㪈㪅㩷㪜㫏㪼㪺㫌㫋㪼㩷㩹㪜㪜㪧㪩㪦㪤㩽㪪㪩㪘㪤㩷㪜㪯㪧㪦㪩㪫㩹㩷㪹㫐㩷㪪㫀㫄㪌㪍㪄㪇㪉㩷㩿㫄㪼㫄㫆㫉㫐㩷㪟㪛㪛㩷㪻㪸㫋㪸㩷㪹㪸㪺㫂㫌㫇㪀㩷㪹㪼㪽㫆㫉㪼㩷㫉㪼㫇㫃㪸㪺㫀㫅㪾㩷㫋㪿㪼㩷㪤㪝㪧㩷㪧㪮㪙㩷㫋㫆
㩷㩷㩷㫋㫉㪸㫅㫊㪽㪼㫉㩷㫋㪿㪼㩷㪻㪸㫋㪸㩷㫆㪽㩷㪪㪩㪘㪤㩷㪸㫅㪻㩷㪜㪜㪧㪩㪦㪤㩷㫋㫆㩷㪬㪪㪙㩷㫄㪼㫄㫆㫉㫐㪅
㪉 㪉㪅㩷㪘㫋㫋㪸㪺㪿㩷㫋㪿㪼㩷㪽㫃㪸㫊㪿㩷㪩㪦㪤㪃㩷㫋㪿㪼㩷㫄㪼㫄㫆㫉㫐㪃㩷㫋㪿㪼㩷㪜㪜㪧㪩㪦㪤㩷㪼㫋㪺㪅㩷㫆㪽㩷㫋㪿㪼㩷㪤㪝㪧㩷㪧㪮㪙㩷㫆㫅㩷㫋㪿㪼㩷㫊㪼㫉㫍㫀㪺㪼㩷㫇㪸㫉㫋㫊㩷㪤㪝㪧㩷㪧㪮㪙㩷㪸㫅㪻㩷㫀㫅㫊㫋㪸㫃㫃㩷㫀㫋㩷㫋㫆
㩷㩷㩷㫋㪿㪼㩷㫄㪸㫀㫅㫌㫅㫀㫋㪅
㪥㫆㫋㪼㪑㩷㪞㫉㫆㫌㫅㪻㩷㫐㫆㫌㫉㩷㪹㫆㪻㫐㩷㫎㫀㫋㪿㩷㪾㫉㫆㫌㫅㪻㫀㫅㪾㩷㪹㪸㫅㪻㩷㪻㫌㫉㫀㫅㪾㩷㫋㪿㪼㩷㫎㫆㫉㫂㪅
㪊㪅㩷㪜㫏㪼㪺㫌㫋㪼㩷㩹㪜㪜㪧㪩㪦㪤㩽㪪㪩㪘㪤㩷㪠㪤㪧㪦㪩㪫㩹㩷㪹㫐㩷㪪㫀㫄㪌㪍㪄㪇㪉㩷㩿㫄㪼㫄㫆㫉㫐㩷㪟㪛㪛㩷㪻㪸㫋㪸㩷㪹㪸㪺㫂㫌㫇㪀㩷㫋㫆㩷㫉㪼㫋㫌㫉㫅㩷㫋㪿㪼㩷㪻㪸㫋㪸㩷㫆㪽㩷㪪㪩㪘㪤㩷㪸㫅㪻㩷㪜㪜㪧㪩㪦㪤
㩷㩷㩷㫀㫅㩷㫋㪿㪼㩷㪬㪪㪙㩷㫄㪼㫄㫆㫉㫐㩷㫋㫆㩷㫋㪿㪼㩷㫅㪼㫎㩷㪤㪝㪧㩷㪧㪮㪙㪅
㪈㪅㩷㪘㫋㫋㪸㪺㪿㩷㫋㪿㪼㩷㪽㫃㪸㫊㪿㩷㪩㪦㪤㪃㩷㫋㪿㪼㩷㫄㪼㫄㫆㫉㫐㪃㩷㫋㪿㪼㩷㪜㪜㪧㪩㪦㪤㩷㪼㫋㪺㪅㩷㫆㪽㩷㫋㪿㪼㩷㪤㪝㪧㩷㪧㪮㪙㩷㫆㫅㩷㫋㪿㪼㩷㫊㪼㫉㫍㫀㪺㪼㩷㫇㪸㫉㫋㫊㩷㪤㪝㪧㩷㪧㪮㪙㩷㪸㫅㪻㩷㫀㫅㫊㫋㪸㫃㫃㩷㫀㫋㩷㫋㫆
㩷㩷㩷㫋㪿㪼㩷㫄㪸㫀㫅㫌㫅㫀㫋㪅
㪥㫆㫋㪼㪑㩷㪞㫉㫆㫌㫅㪻㩷㫐㫆㫌㫉㩷㪹㫆㪻㫐㩷㫎㫀㫋㪿㩷㪾㫉㫆㫌㫅㪻㫀㫅㪾㩷㪹㪸㫅㪻㩷㪻㫌㫉㫀㫅㪾㩷㫋㪿㪼㩷㫎㫆㫉㫂㪅
㪉㪅㩷㪫㫌㫉㫅㩷㫆㫅㩷㫋㪿㪼㩷㫇㫆㫎㪼㫉㪃㩷㪼㫏㪼㪺㫌㫋㪼㩷㪪㫀㫄㪈㪍㩷㫋㫆㩷㪺㫃㪼㪸㫉㩷㪬㪉㪄㪇㪌㩷㫋㫉㫆㫌㪹㫃㪼㪅
㪊㪅㩷㪪㪼㫋㩷㪸㫊㩷㪽㫆㫃㫃㫆㫎㫊㩷㪸㪽㫋㪼㫉㩷㫉㪼㫊㫋㪸㫉㫋㫀㫅㪾㩷㫋㪿㪼㩷㫄㪸㫀㫅㩷㫌㫅㫀㫋㪅
㪊 㩿㪈㪀㩷㪪㪼㫋㩷㫋㪿㪼㩷㪸㫇㫇㫉㫆㫇㫉㫀㪸㫋㪼㩷㪺㫆㫌㫅㫋㫉㫐㩷㪺㫆㪻㪼㩷㪹㫐㩷㪪㫀㫄㪍㪍㪄㪇㪉㩷㩿㪺㫃㪼㪸㫉㩷㫋㪿㪼㩷㫊㫆㪽㫋㫎㪸㫉㪼㩷㫊㫎㫀㫋㪺㪿㪼㫊㩷㫉㪼㫃㪸㫋㪼㪻㩷㫋㫆㩷㪝㪘㪯㪀㪅
㩿㪥㫆㫋㪼㪀㩷㪤㪸㫂㪼㩷㫊㫌㫉㪼㩷㫋㫆㩷㪼㫏㪼㪺㫌㫋㪼㩷㪼㫍㪼㫅㩷㫀㪽㩷㫋㪿㪼㩷㪽㪸㫏㩷㫆㫇㫋㫀㫆㫅㩷㫀㫊㩷㫅㫆㫋㩷㫀㫅㫊㫋㪸㫃㫃㪼㪻㩷㫆㫅㩷㫋㪿㪼㩷㫄㪸㪺㪿㫀㫅㪼㪅
㩿㪉㪀㩷㪬㫊㪼㩷㪪㪠㪤㪍㪎㪄㪎㪇㩷㫋㫆㩷㪺㫃㪼㪸㫉㩷㫋㪿㪼㩷㪺㫆㫅㫋㪼㫅㫋㫊㩷㫆㪽㩷㫋㪿㪼㩷㪤㪝㪧㩷㪧㪮㪙㩷㪪㪛㪩㪘㪤㪅
㩿㪊㪀㩷㪪㪼㫃㪼㪺㫋㩷㩹㪧㫉㫀㫅㫋㪼㫉㩷㪼㫅㫍㫀㫉㫆㫅㫄㪼㫅㫋㩷㫊㪼㫋㫋㫀㫅㪾㩹㩷㪸㫋㩷㪪㫐㫊㫋㪼㫄㩷㫊㪼㫋㫋㫀㫅㪾㪃㩷㫊㪼㫃㪼㪺㫋㩷㩹㪧㫉㫀㫅㫋㪼㫉㩷㫀㫅㫀㫋㫀㪸㫃㩷㫊㪼㫋㫋㫀㫅㪾㪃㩹㩷㫆㫇㪼㫅㩷㩹㩷㩷㪪㫋㪸㫅㪻㪸㫉㪻㩷㫇㪸㫇㪼㫉
㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㪽㪼㪼㪻㩷㫇㪸㫇㪼㫉㩷㫊㫀㫑㪼㩹㫊㪺㫉㪼㪼㫅㪃㩷㪸㫅㪻㩷㫊㪼㫋㩷㪘㪋㩷㫊㫀㫑㪼㩷㫀㪽㩷㫐㫆㫌㩷㫌㫊㪼㩷㪸㫅㩷㪘㪙㪄㫋㫐㫇㪼㩷㫄㪸㪺㪿㫀㫅㪼㩷㪸㫅㪻㩷㫃㪼㫋㫋㪼㫉㩷㫊㫀㫑㪼㩷㫀㪽㩷㫐㫆㫌㩷㫌㫊㪼㩷㪸㫅㩷㫀㫅㪺㪿㪄㫋㫐㫇㪼
㩷㩷㩷㩷㩷㫄㪸㪺㪿㫀㫅㪼㪅
㩿㪁㪈㪀㩷㪠㪽㩷㫐㫆㫌㩷㪿㪸㫍㪼㩷㪹㪸㪺㫂㪼㪻㩷㫌㫇㩷㫋㪿㪼㩷㪻㪸㫋㪸㩷㪹㫐㩷㫊㫋㫆㫉㪸㪾㪼㩷㪹㪸㪺㫂㫌㫇㩷㩿㪮㪜㪙㪀㩷㫆㫉㩷㪻㪼㫍㫀㪺㪼㩷㪺㫃㫆㫅㫀㫅㪾㩷㩿㪮㪜㪙㩷㪽㫆㫉㩷㫊㪼㫉㫍㫀㪺㪼㪀㩷㪻㫌㫉㫀㫅㪾㩷㫅㫆㫉㫄㪸㫃㩷㫌㫊㪼㩷㪹㪼㪽㫆㫉㪼㩷㫋㪿㪼㩷
㪽㪸㫀㫃㫌㫉㪼㩷㫆㪽㩷㪤㪝㪧㩷㪧㪮㪙㪃㩷㫀㫋㩷㫀㫊㩷㫇㫆㫊㫊㫀㪹㫃㪼㩷㫋㫆㩷㫉㪼㫋㫌㫉㫅㩷㫋㫆㩷㫋㪿㪼㩷㫊㫋㪸㫋㪼㩷㫎㪿㪼㫅㩷㫋㪿㪼㩷㪻㪸㫋㪸㩷㫎㪸㫊㩷㪹㪸㪺㫂㪼㪻㩷㫌㫇㩷㪼㫍㪼㫅㩷㫀㪽㩷㪪㫀㫄㪈㪍㩷㫀㫊㩷㪼㫏㪼㪺㫌㫋㪼㪻㪅
*1: The e-Manual cannot be backed up, but can be reinstalled by using SIM49-3 and USB memory.
Version Check
2) The above error message is displayed for 10 sec. Then the fol- IcM:UNUSUAL
lowing message is displayed.
JOB STATUS
SYSTEM
SETTINGS
READY
PRINT
DATA
LINE
IMAGE SEND
DATA LOGOUT
HOME
Key name in the normal mode Key name in the boot mode Function
Start key (Monochrome) [OK] key Performs the selected item or function.
Home key [MENU] key Selects a menu.
Clear key [BACK] key Selects a menu. (Serves as a cancel key in the execution check screen.)
Job status key [UP] key Selects an item.
System setting key [DOWN] key Selects an item.
READY
BACK OK PRINT DATA
LINE
IMAGE SEND DATA
COPY
SYSTEM
JOB STATUS SETTINGS
LOGOUT
Key name in the normal mode Key name in the boot mode Function
Start key (Monochrome) [OK] key Performs the selected item or function.
Home key [MENU] key Selects a menu.
Clear key [BACK] key Selects a menu. (Serves as a cancel key in the execution check screen.)
Job status key [UP] key Selects an item.
System setting key [DOWN] key Selects an item.
Function Content
Firmware version check function Displays the firmware version of the ICU PWB, the SCU PWB, the PCU PWB, and the FAC PWB.
Firmware install (update) function Installs (revises) the firmware by transmitting data from the PC which is connected to the ICU PWB, the SCU PWB, the
PCU PWB, the FAX PWB, and other options with the USB memory or the USB cable.
From USB Memory (To upload to the complex machine, files of "**_pdf_fax.idx"
and "**_pdf.idx" and "version.txt" as well as the Operation
Manual data (**.pdf) are required. When the downloaded files
2) Insert the USB memory which includes the update firmware file
are copied without changing the file hierarchy, these files also
(SFU file) into the USB port of the machine, and press [OK]
are copied.)
key.
NOTE:
When data are uploaded from the USB memory to the HDD, if
Firm Update
there are some data in the HDD, the files in the memory are
> 0100P200.sfu compared with the files in the HDD and only the files which
SFU file display satisfy the following conditions are written into the HDD.
3) Select the firmware file (SFU file) of the target. • The file size is different.
• The time stamp is different.
Use [UP] key and [DOWN] key to select the target file.
• The file exists only in the USB memory.
When [OK] key is pressed with the directory name displayed,
the control can enter the lower level directory. (However, one- 2) Enter the SIM49-3 mode.
step lower level) (8.5 Inch LCD model)
When [BACK] key is pressed in the lower level directory, the
control can return to the upper level directory.
ǂǂǂ6,08/$7,21ǂǂ12
7(67 &/26(
4) Press [OK] key. (0$18$/83'$7(>XVEEG@
',5!)2/'(5 ),/(
The selected firmware file (SFU) is read. (It takes about 1 ),/( ',5!)2/'(5
minute.) ',5!0$18$/
Firm Update
Reading Data
Firm Update
(4.3 Inch LCD model)
IcuM
1. General
The following functions are available on the Hidden Web Page
exclusively used for the serviceman.
D. Font/Form Download
Select the Pages Limit Group and the Favorite Operation Group.
(The Pages Limit Group and the Favorite Operation Group must be
set in advance.)
(Example of use)
The use sets the conditions for servicing work by using the Pages
Limit Group and the Favorite Operation Group functions in
advance, and the serviceman selects the set conditions in this
mode for servicing work.
J. Job Log
(1) Save Job Log
(1) Export
1) Select the folder to be backed up.
The list display conditions can be specified by changing the
index and the number of display items on the pull-down menu.
2) Click "Execute" button.
Specify the save position of the file, and save the file. (File
name: *****.bin)
3) Click "Update" button.
(2) Import
1) Click "Refer" button to select a target file. (File name: *****.bin)
2) Click "Execute" button.
The target file is imported. 1) Click "Save" button, and specify the save position of the Job
Log to save it.
3) Click "Update" button.
H. User Control
K. Update of Firmware
When saving the Syslog, click "Save" button and specify the save
position and save it.
When deleting, click "Delete" button.
* Measurement conditions: A4R/8.5 x 11R paper is fed from the 100V series 200V series
paper feed tray 1 of the machine in longitudinal feed. Voltage 100V 15A 100-127V 12A 220 - 240V 8A
Auto color selection/Maginal view OFF, and the polygon motor is Frequency 50/60Hz 50/60Hz 50/60Hz
rotating. Power Fixed type (Direct Fixed type (Direct Inlet
source code connection) connection)
Power switch 2 positions (Primary side switch: Left side of the machine,
Secondary side switch: Operation panel)
MX-C401 SPECIFICATIONS 13 – 1
(10) Power consumption USB 2.0 (High speed) 1 port
(Host) (Either on the front section or rear section)
100V series 200V series For connection of USB memory, USB keyboard,
Max. Rated Power 1.45kW 1.44kW 1.84kW IC card reader, IC card reader writer or USB hab
Consumption *1 USB 2.0 (High speed) 1 port
(Device)
*1: When the power supply is turned on, when the dehumidification USB authentication No
heater is OFF. acquisition
Video I/F (For EFI) No
B. Controller, Interface
Serial I/F (For new 1 port
(1) Controller board coin vendor)
Memory slot 31-sheet machine: System 2 slots (Empty 1)
CPU Power QUICCIII-MPC8533E Local 1 slot
(31-sheet machine: 800MHz, 38/40-sheet 38/40-sheet machine: System 2 slots (Empty 1)
machine: 1GHz) Local 1 slot
Interface Codec memory 1 slot
IEEE 1284 Parallel No
Ethernet 1 port
Interface 10Base-T , 100Base-TX, 1000Base-T
Support TCP/IP (IPv4 IPv6), IPX/SPX ,
Protocol NetBEUI , EtherTalk
Memory for copy (Local memory) Memory for printer (System memory) Codec ASIC
Model HDD
Standard Expansion Max. Standard Expansion Max. Standard Expansion Max.
31-sheet machine 512MB — 512MB 512MB 1GB 1.5GB — — — 80GB
38/40-sheet machine 512MB — 512MB 1GB 1GB 2GB 256MB — 256MB 80GB
MX-C401 SPECIFICATIONS 13 – 2
E. Paper feed, transport, paper exit section (3) Manual paper feed tray special paper capacity
(1) Paper feed section Manual paper feed tray
Paper type Capacity
Type Standard: 1-stage paper feed tray + Multi manual
Postcard 20 sheets
feed
Envelope 20 sheets
Max.: 4-stage paper feed tray + Multi manual feed
OHP 20 sheets
Dehumidifying heater Service parts (Supported by kit)
Heavy paper 40 sheets
(2) Paper feed tray section (main unit), manual paper Glossy paper 20 sheets
feed tray Other special paper 1 sheet
MX-C401 SPECIFICATIONS 13 – 3
Paper feed section Paper exit section
Tray 1 Manual feed tray Paper exit tray
Auto Auto
Manual Auto detection Auto detection Manual
detection detection Normal
setting AB series inch series setting Duplex
AB series inch series paper exit
Size setting User setting User setting
Thin paper 55-59g/m2 No Yes Yes No
Plain paper 60-79g/m2 Yes Yes Yes Yes
Plain paper 80-105g/m2 Yes Yes Yes Yes
Heavy paper 106-209g/m2 No Yes Yes No
Recycled paper Yes Yes Yes Yes
Letterhead Yes Yes Yes Yes
Punched paper Yes Yes Yes Yes
Color paper Yes Yes Yes Yes
Printed paper Yes Yes Yes Yes
Envelope monarch 99 x 191 No Yes Yes No
Envelope Com-10 105 x 241 No Yes Yes No
Paper Envelope DL 110 x 220 No Yes Yes No
type Envelope C5 162 x 229 No Yes Yes No
Envelope Long format
120 x 255 No Yes Yes No
No. 3
Envelope Western
114 x 162 No Yes Yes No
format No. 2
Envelope Western
105 x 235 No Yes Yes No
format No. 4
Label sheet No Yes Yes No
OHP No Yes Yes No
Glossy paper No Yes Yes No
Yes
User type 1-7 Yes Yes Yes
*2
*1: Switch ON/OFF with SIM. Default is OFF. For tray 2, R/C support.
*2: Follows the paper type registration setting.
Scan
Monochrome (8.5x11R) Color (8.5x11R) Monochrome (A4R) Color (A4R)
speed
Copy Single: 35.0 sheet/min (600x300dpi) Single: 33.0 sheet/min (600x300dpi)
17.0 sheet/min (600x600dpi) 17.0 sheet/min (600x600dpi)
Duplex: 12.0 page/min (600x300dpi) Duplex: 12.0 page/min (600x300dpi)
7.0 page/min (600x600dpi) 7.0 page/min (600x600dpi)
FAX/ Single: Single:
Internet 35 sheet/min (200x200dpi, 1bit) 33 sheet/min (200x200dpi, 1bit)
N/A N/A
Fax Duplex: Duplex:
12.0 page/min (200x200dpi, 1bit) 12.0 page/min (200x200dpi, 1bit)
Scanner Single: Single: Single: Single:
35 sheet/min (200x200dpi, 1bit) 35 sheet/min (200x200dpi, 8bit) 33 sheet/min (200x200dpi, 1bit) 33 sheet/min (200x200dpi, 8bit)
Duplex: Duplex: Duplex: Duplex:
12.0 page/min (200x200dpi, 1bit) 12.0 page/min (200x200dpi, 8bit) 12.0 page/min (200x200dpi, 1bit) 12.0 page/min (200x200dpi, 8bit)
MX-C401 SPECIFICATIONS 13 – 4
(3) Specifications (4) Color adjustment
Document size detection No RGB adjustment Yes
Paper feed direction To the right Color balance Yes
Finish stamp No Chroma adjustment Yes
Power source Supplied from the machine Brightness adjustment Yes
Dimensions 515 x 335.5 x 106.8mm Contrast adjustment Enable with the system setting, No
Weight 3.15kg Sharpness adjustment Yes
External view color Warm Gray / Warm White Background removal Yes
Option detection Auto detection supported Auto color calibration Enable with the system setting
Preview function No
Copy magnification Normal ratio 1 :1 r0.8%
ratio Binding margin Yes
AB series 50%, 70%, 81%, 86%, 100%,
115%, 122%, 141%, 200% Frame/center delete Yes (Frame only)
Inch series 50%, 64%, 77%, 100%, 121%, 1 set 2 copy No
129%, 200% Center binding Yes (Layout only)
Zoom 50 - 200% (For the RSPF, 50 - 200%) Large quantity document
Yes
Preset magnification 4 (Registered by the system setting) mode
ratio Connection copy (Tandem
No
Longitudinal/crosswise Yes copy)
independent Copier/Insertion paper/
No
magnification ratio Insertion
Tab paper insertion paper
No
(2) Density/copy image quality process insertion
OHP insertion paper Yes
Exposure mode Automatic (Color: magical view, Black/White: Multi shot Yes (Centering)
Text AE), Text, Text/Printed Photo, Book copy No
Printed Photo, Text/Photograph, Photograph, Tab copy No
Map, light document Special
Card shot Yes
Number of manual steps 9 steps function
Date print Yes
Toner save mode Yes
Text print Yes
* Off on printed photo, photograph or light
Print menu Stamp Yes
document
User stamp No
(3) Color copy mode Watermark No
Photo repeat Yes
Auto color selection Copy mode automatically discerning color/ Enlargement
monochrome. continuous No
Full color Full color copy shots
Two color (Red/Black mode) Mirror image Yes
Copies with one color (R/G/B/C/M/Y) that is Image edit Full image
replaced from red color area in document, copy (No- No
and black color. brink copy)
Single color Mode to select one color from R/G/B/C/M/Y Centering Yes
Black/White copy mode Black/White copy mode Black/white
Yes
reverse
MX-C401 SPECIFICATIONS 13 – 5
MX-C401/ (5) Print channel
MX-C381 MX-C311/
MX-C400/ MX-C310 USB USB1.1:Windows 98 / Me / 2000 / Server
MX-C380 2003 / XP / Vista only
RGB USB2.0(High-Speed): Windows2000 / XP /
Yes Vista only
adjustment
Sharpness Yes PSERVER/RPRINT for PSERVER/RPRINT used in the NetWare
Background NetWare environment environment
Yes LPR UNIX LPR/LPD command compatible
delete
Color IPP IPP1.0 conforming print channel
Color
adjustment Yes
balance PAP: EtherTalk(AppleTalk) Macintosh environment
Brightness FTP Data received through the built-in FTP
Yes
adjustment server
Chroma NetBEUI Microsoft NetBEUI compatible
Yes
adjustment Raw Port(Port9100) Supporting 9100 TCP port (Raw Port).
Auto temporary save No Yes HTTP (Web Submit Print) Yes
Filing No Yes POP3 (E-Mail To Print) Yes
Special Trial copy No Yes
function
Document quantity count No (6) Environment setting
Mixed document feed Yes (Same width only)
Setting item General
Thin paper scan Yes
Default setting Basic settings for using the printer such as the number of
Blank paper omitting No
copies and the print direction
Repeat layout No
PCL(SPDL2-c) Setting of the PCL(SPDL2-c) symbol and fonts
Chapter division No
setting
Book division No
PS setting Setting of enabling/disabling of print in case of a PS
Shift No error, setting of binary data outputting
Hatching No
Document control
Yes (With the data security kit I. Image send function
installed)
Yes (With an option installed / (1) Mode
Name card scan
ON/OFF with the system setting)
Scanner • Scan to e-mail
H. Printer function • Scan to Desktop (Scan data send without using the IP
address under DHCOP environment)
(1) Platform • Scan to FTP
• Scan to Folder (SMB)
• IBM PC/AT • Scan to USB memory
• Macintosh • Scan to e-mail with Meta
• Scan to Desktop with Meta
(2) Support OS • Scan to FTP with Meta
• Scan to SMB with Meta
Custom • Scan to Scan to e-mail/FTP/Desktop/SMB
Custom Custom
OS PCL6 PPD (Document Admin)
PCL5c PS
SPDL2-c Internet Fax • Internet Fax to Internet FAX (Manual)
Windows 98 / Me (Direct SMTP • Internet Fax to e-mail/FTP/Desktop/SMB
NT 4.0 SP5 or later including send/ (Inbound routing)
Yes receive) • Internet Fax to e-mail/FTP/Desktop/SMB
2000
XP (Document Admin)
XP x 64 Yes No Yes Yes Fax • Fax to Fax (Manual)
• Fax to e-mail/Internet Fax/Fax (Relay transfer)
Server 2003 Yes
• Fax to e-mail/FTP/Desktop/SMB (Inbound routing)
Server 2003 x 64 No
• Fax to e-mail/FTP/Desktop/SMB (Document Admin)
Vista Yes
Vista x 64 No (2) Support system
Mac 9.0 - 9.2.2
X 10.2.8 Internet Fax
Mode Scanner Fax
X 10.3.9 No No No Yes Direct SMTP
X 10.4 - 10.4.11 Corresponding SMTP/SMTPS POP server
X 10.5-10.5.1 server/protocol FTP (TCP/IP)/FTPS SMTP server ---
SMB ESMTP server
(3) PDL emulation
(4) Font
MX-C401 SPECIFICATIONS 13 – 6
(3) Support image (5) Address specification
MX-C401 SPECIFICATIONS 13 – 7
(6) Specification of Multiple Addresses Internet Fax
Mode Scanner Fax
Direct SMTP
Internet Fax Long-size document Yes (Max. 500mm)
Mode Scanner Fax
Direct SMTP send
Broadcast send Yes (500 addresses) (Email/ Yes (500 addresses) Changing the number of Yes ---
FTP/Desktop/SMB/Enable) pages for a file
Sequential send --- Yes Job division by No ---
request recognition of blank
paper
(7) Send function Send size limitation Yes (Direct SMTP is No) No
Drop-out color No ---
Internet Fax
Mode Scanner Fax Finish stamp function No
Direct SMTP
Confidential send --- No
Memory send 94 items in total
(Sharp mode)
On-hook --- Yes
Interface broadcast --- No
Quick online send --- Yes
direction send
Direct send --- Yes (Sharp mode)
Memory
Large quantity document Yes
send l
mode
Direct send
Thin paper scan Yes
selection
Mixed document feed No
Manual communication --- No
setting Default date sender send --- Yes (ON only)
Auto reduction send --- Yes Preview check function No
Rotation send --- B5R o B5, A5R o A5, Invoice R Specified side delete Yes
o Invoice rotation only supported Document quantity count No
Zoom send Standard size, enlargement send only Book division No
supported
Recall mode Error --- Yes
Busy --- Yes Yes
(When D-SMTP)
--- Internet Fax: Only Yes
the number of
setting is set.
DSMTP: Number of
times and time are
set conditionally with
the system setting.
Internet Fax
Mode Scanner Fax
Direct SMTP
Auto receive --- Yes
Manual receive --- Yes (Direct SMTP: No) Switch from manual receive to auto receive
(Enable only for France)
Memory receive --- Yes
Standard size reduction receive --- Yes
Specified size zoom receive --- No
Rotation receive --- Yes
Receive data print condition setting --- --- Yes
Duplex receive --- Setting conditions by system setting
2 in 1 receive --- No
Automatic reduction setting upon A3 receive --- No
Automatic reduction setting upon letter receive --- Yes (Other than North America) (Other than inch areas of Fax destinations)
Specified address/domain receive allow --- Yes (50 items) ---
Specified address/domain receive inhibit (reject) --- Yes (50 items) ---
Receive inhibit (reject) from specified number --- Specified numbers only (50 items/20 digits)
Receive allow from specified number --- Specified numbers only (50 items/20 digits)
Tel/Fax auto select --- No
External telephone connection remote --- Yes
Answering phone connection --- No
Dial in --- No
Confidential receive (Sharp mode) --- No
Receive data overtake output --- Yes
Receive check cycle setting --- Yes (0 - 8 ours, setting for every 1 min) ---
(Direct SMTP: No)
POP3 communication time-out time setting --- Yes (30 - 300 sec. setting for every 30 sec) ---
(Direct SMTP: No)
Index print --- No
Machine print setting --- Yes ---
Transfer setting when output disable --- Yes (Transfer address registration: 1 address)
MX-C401 SPECIFICATIONS 13 – 8
Internet Fax
Mode Scanner Fax
Direct SMTP
Routing function --- Yes
• Inbo undRouting (Internet Fax / Fax receive data 1. Selection of the format in transfer is enabled. (PDF/Single, TIFF/Multi, TIFF)
network transfer) 2. Transfer address trget is e-mail/ FTP/ SMB/ Desktop.
3. The sender information is added to the transfer address when transfer.
Paper exit tray setting for each line --- No
JOB separator sheet insertion --- No
Setting of the number of copies of receive data --- No Yes
Receive data staple function --- Yes
Auto rise-up mode --- Yes
Receive data print hold function (ALL RX data into the --- Yes
Memory regardless)
Print by color toner when black toner empty --- No
Fax receive lamp --- No
Foot print --- Yes
Image check function --- Yes (Print after checking images of receive data is enabled.)
MX-C401 SPECIFICATIONS 13 – 9
(12) Registration system
*1: For Scan/ Internet Fax (including Direct SMTP)/ Fax, the common address book is used. Therefore, the number of addreses which can be
registered is to total of all the modes.
*2: When Scan sender is selected, the destination selection address book is used.
*3: The quick key is used to select the destination according to the registration number of each destination in the destination selection address
book. The user can select and register the quick key number optionally.
MX-C401 SPECIFICATIONS 13 – 10
Mode Item Scanner Internet Fax Direct SMTP Fax
Communication error sound Sound volume setting --- Yes (Set by the system setting.) No
Document scan end sound Sound volume setting Yes (Set by the system setting.) No
setting (Image send)
Internet Fax PC-Internet Fax send Yes (Internet Fax expansion kit is required)
Mode Scanner Fax
Direct SMTP Internet Fax address: max. 64 digits
PC-Internet Fax --- Yes --- PC-FAX send Yes (When FAX is installed)
PC-Fax --- Yes Fax number max. 64 digits (including sub
FAST --- Yes (North address and pass code)
America only) Resolution 200 x 100dpi / 200 x 200dpi / 200 x 400dpi /
Network FAST --- No 400 x 400dpi /600 x 600dpi
Distinctive ring --- Setting differs Send document size A3 / B4 / A4 / A5 / B5 / 11 x 17 / 8.5 x 14 /
detection depending on 8.5 x 11 / 5.5 x 8.5 / 8.5 x 13 / 8k / 16k
the area. Compression system MH / MMR / JBIG
Linealize PDF Yes --- Broadcast send Yes (Mix of FAX/Internet Fax Enable: Max.
Supportiong with 500 items)
Net Scan Tool F-code send Yes Sub address Yes (Max. 20 digits)
Pass code Yes (Max. 20 digits)
J. PC-Fax, PC internet Fax functions Telephone book Yes
(1) Working environment registration, Send function
Use of MFP address book No
OS • Windows 98 Covering letter attachment Yes (Disable in broadcast send)
• Windows Me function
• Windows NT4.0 Workstation Covering letter making Yes
(Service Pack5, IE4.0 or more) function
• Windows 2000 Sender print Yes
• Windows XP Preview Yes
• Windows server 2003 Delivery confirmation Yes
• Windows Vista (Notification to PC by NJR)
PC IBM PC/AT compatible machine Document filing function Filing MX-C401/
CPU Pentium II 300MHz or more MX-C381/
Monitor Screen resolution: 640 X 480 pixel or above MX-C311: YES
Number of colors: 256 colors or above MX-C400/
Memory 64 MB or more MX-C380/
HDD Empty capacity of 50MB or above MX-C310: No
Interface USB 2.0 Automatic temporary MX-C401/
10/100BASE-TX save MX-C381/
1000BASE-T MX-C311: YES
Communication protocol LPR / lp MX-C400/
Port9100 (RAW) MX-C380/
IPP MX-C310: No
USB2.0 PC- FAX send log Yes (Resend is Disable.)
User authentication Yes
Time specification Yes
R-KEY Yes (Germany oniy)
MX-C401/MX-C381/MX-C311 MX-C400/MX-C380/MX-C310
Document filing capacity Standard folder 38GB Standard folder: 50GB
User folder 12GB N/A
Temporary save folder
Number of pages and files which can be Standard folder 5,500 pages or 3,000 files (Sharp standard Standard folder: 5,500 pages or 3,000 files
filed User folder document) (Sharp standard document)
Temporary save folder 1,700 pages or 1,000 files (Sharp standard N/A
document)
Number of folders that can be made as Max. 1,000 folder N/A
user folders.
Number of users which can be registered Same as that of account users of the main unit (1000 users) N/A
MX-C401 SPECIFICATIONS 13 – 11
Reference of pages which can be filed:
Color Mono-chrome
Document What’s color Greg fruit watermelon Test Sheet C
MX-C401/MX-C381/MX-C311 MX-C400/MX-C380/MX-C310
Job
Temporary save folder Standard folder User folder Temporary save folder Standard folder User folder
Copy Yes Yes Yes No No No
Printer Yes Yes Yes No Yes No
Direct print (FTP pull) Yes No No No Yes No
Direct print (FTP push) Yes No No No Yes No
Direct print (USB pull) Yes No No No Yes No
Direct print (e-mail push) Yes Yes Yes No Yes No
Direct print (Web push) Yes No No No Yes No
Direct print (SMB pull) Yes No No No Yes No
Scan to e-mail/FTP Yes Yes Yes No No No
Scan to SMB Yes Yes Yes No No No
Scan to USB memory No Yes (when x in 1) No No No No
Fax receive No No No No No No
Fax send Yes Yes Yes No No No
Internet Fax receive No No No No No No
Internet Fax send Yes Yes Yes No No No
PC-Fax PC-Internet Fax send Yes Yes Yes No No No
Remote PC scan No No No No No No
Scan to HDD No Yes Yes No No No
"Color" includes "Color and B/W mixed." "Color" includes "Color and B/W mixed."
Function Number of copies, finish, paper Function setting Basic Format, resolution, image quality, send
Basic function
setting specification, duplex, B/W print in resend function details setting, meta data input
for reprint Special function Center binding, 2in1, binding Special Time specification, sender print, sender
(Printer data (Color, B/ margin, print menu, document function selection, communication result table
W) cannot be set with control data (when the data security
the special function.) kit is installed)
MX-C401 SPECIFICATIONS 13 – 12
(5) Special functions limitations in resend
When the above setting is performed on the operation panel, Web access is disabled.
MX-C401 SPECIFICATIONS 13 – 13
L. Remote PC function M. Tray for name card (Option)
(1) Pull scan (TWAIN) specifications (1) Specification
MX-C401 SPECIFICATIONS 13 – 14
[14] SIGNAL LIST
MX-C401
5GTXKEG/CPWCN
CN-1
CN-2 (NC)B05B-PASK-1
(NC)B03B-PASK-1 RSVFAN 1
MX-C401
4 3R3V D-GND 116 +5VL 57 57 +5VL 116 D-GND 36 DT_K1+ 7 7 DT_K1+ 36 VREF_C1 D-GND 4 4 D-GND
5 D-GND D-GND 117 +5VL 58 58 +5VL 117 D-GND nENB_C 37 DT_K1- 8 8 DT_K1- 37 nENB_C 5VLD 5 5 5VLD
D-GND 118 TXD_LCDsub 59 59 TXD_LCDsub 118 D-GND nLDERR_K 38 DT_K2+ 9 9 DT_K2+ 38 nLDERR_K
(NC) 119 RXD_LCDsub 60 60 RXD_LCDsub 119 (NC) VREF_Y1 39 DT_K2- 10 10 DT_K2- 39 VREF_Y1
+24V1 120 120 +24V1 nSH_C1 40 D-GND 11 B to B 11 D-GND 40 nSH_C1
nSH_C2 41 D-GND 12 12 D-GND 41 nSH_C2
VREF_K1 42 DT_Y1+ 13 13 DT_Y1+ 42 VREF_K1 LD PWB
nSH_K1 43 DT_Y1- 14 14 DT_Y1- 43 nSH_K1
nENB_K 44 DT_Y2+ 15 15 DT_Y2+ 44 nENB_K
nSH_K2 45 DT_Y2- 16 16 DT_Y2- 45 nSH_K2
CN-4 VREF_C2 46 DT_M1+ 17 17 DT_M1+ 46 VREF_C2 CN-4
SATA cable 6SAT07P-328B-B5 VREF_K2 47 DT_M1- 18 18 DT_M1- 47 VREF_K2 SM06B-PASS-1 PGM harness 179228-5
1 D-GND VREF_Y2 48 DT_M2+ 19 19 DT_M2+ 48 VREF_Y2 24V 1 5 24V
2 SATA_TXP VREF_M1 49 DT_M2- 20 20 DT_M2- 49 VREF_M1 P-GND 2 4 P-GND
3 SATA_TXN VREF_M2 50 TH 21 21 TH 50 VREF_M2 nSTART 3 3 nSTART POLYGON
4 D-GND nLDERR_M 51 D-GND 22 22 D-GND 51 nLDERR_M LOCK 4 2 LOCK MOTOR
5 SATA_RXN nBD 52 D-GND 23 23 D-GND 52 nBD CLK 5 1 CLK
6 SATA_RXP D-GND 53 +5VLD 24 24 +5VLD 53 D-GND (NC)BRAKE 6
7 D-GND D-GND 54 D-GND 25 25 D-GND 54 D-GND
+5VLD 55 D-GND 26 26 D-GND 55 +5VLD
P-GND 56 nBRAKE 27 27 nBRAKE 56 P-GND
P-GND 57 nPOLY_CK 28 28 nPOLY_CK 57 P-GND
+24V1 58 nPOLY_LOCK 29 29 nPOLY_LOCK 58 +24V1
CN-15 +24V1 59 nPOLY_START 30 30 nPOLY_START 59 +24V1
+12V 15 SATA cable B4P-VH +3.3V 60 60 +3.3V
+12V 14 1 +12V
7 D-GND +12V 13 2 +5VHD
6 SATA_RXP D-GND 12 3 D-GND
5 SATA_RXN D-GND 11 4 D-GND
4 D-GND D-GND 10
3 SATA_TXN +5VHD 9
2 SATA_TXP +5VHD 8 CN-14
1 D-GND
HDD +5VHD 7 B04B-PASK-1
SATA 7Pin during 22P D-GND 6 1 HDDFAN
D-GND 5 2 PWM_HDDFAN
D-GND 4 3 P-GND
3.3V 3 4 LOCK_HDDFAN
3.3V 2
3.3V 1
SATA 7Pin during 22P
OPERATION UN
VCC3R3V 16 25 VCC3R3V B6 13 28 B4
SCANDATA2+ 19 8 SCANDATA2+ SC_TEMP
LCD_DATA2+ 20 14 27 SC_TEMP B5 14 27 B3
27 LCD_DATA2+
21 D-GND 12 29 D-GND D-GND 15 26 D-GND
D-GND 10 D-GND /XL(X2)
22 10 31 /XL(X2) B4 16 25 B2
D-GND 26 D-GND YH(Y2) 33 YH(Y2) B3 17 24 B1
5 SCANCLKOUT-
8
SCANCLKOUT- 23 XH(X1) 6 35 XH(X1) B2 18 23 B0
LCD_CLK- 24 29 LCD_CLK-
/YL(Y1) 4 37 /YL(Y1) D-GND 19 22 D-GND
SCANCLKOUT+ 25 3 SCANCLKOUT+
LCD_CLK+ 26 31 LCD_CLK+ D-GND 2 39 D-GND G7 20 21 G5
D-GND 27 6 D-GND
D-GND 39 2 D-GND G6 21 20 G4 LCD module
(NC)CN_CHK_OUT 37 4 (NC)CN_CHK_OUT G5 22 19 G3
D-GND 28 30 D-GND LCD_A3_P 8.5
29 35 6 LCD_A3_P D-GND 23 18 D-GND
SCANDATA3- 1 SCANDATA3- LCD_A3_M
LCD_DATA3- 30 34 LCD_DATA3- 33 8 LCD_A3_M G4 24 17 G2
SCANDATA3+ 31 D-GND 31 10 D-GND G3 25 16 G1
2 SCANDATA3+ LCD_CLK_P 12 LCD_CLK_P 26 15 G0
LCD_DATA3+ 32 33 LCD_DATA3+ 29 LVDS 8.5 PWB G2
LCD_CLK_M 27 14 LCD_CLK_M D-GND 27 14 D-GND
D-GND 33 4 D-GND
D-GND 34 32 D-GND 25 16 D-GND R7 28 13 R5
D-GND LCD_A2_P 18 LCD_A2_P R6 29 12 R4
23
LCD_A2_M 21 20 LCD_A2_M R5 30 11 R3
D-GND 19 22 D-GND D-GND 31 10 D-GND
LCD_A1_P 17 24 LCD_A1_P R4 32 9 R2
LCD_A1_M 15 26 LCD_A1_M R3 33 8 R1
D-GND 13 28 D-GND R2 34 7 R0
LCD_A0_P 11 30 LCD_A0_P (NC) 35 6 (NC)
CN-12 LCD_A0_M 9 32 LCD_A0_M D-GND 36 5 D-GND
B22B-PHDSS D-GND 7 34 D-GND D-GND 37 4 D-GND
DISP 5 36 DISP CK 38 3 CK
1 SOLE_G (NC)CK_CHK_IN 38 (NC)CK_CHK_IN D-GND 39 2 D-GND
2 COVER2 3
3 FEED1 D-GND 1 40 D-GND D-GND 40 1 D-GND
4 COVER1
5 ENTRY CN-3
6 A_MPLUS2_G CN-2 52271-0469
7 A_MPLUS1_G_CN 52030-3029 /YL(Y1) 1
8 FEED2 D-GND 1 XH(X1) 2 TOUCH BACK
9 5V_RSPF 2 YH(Y2) 3
INCLK-
10 D-GND INCLK+ /XL(X2) PANEL LIGHT
3 4
ARDF Module
PAPER FEED DRIVE UN
CN-15
179228-3 TC PWB harness B20B-PNDZS Paper feed drive harness B4B-PH-K
1TUD_CL 1 RRM_OUT_/B RRM_OUT_/B
1 1
D-GND 2 RRM_OUT_/A RRM_OUT_/A
1TUD_CL 5VNPD(with R) 3 3 2
RRM_OUT_B 5 3 RRM_OUT_B RRM
VHPGP1S73P+-18 RRM_OUT_A 7 4 RRM_OUT_A
CPFM_OUT_A 9 φ42 PM BI
24V_CPFM 11
Wire jumper CPFM_OUT_/A 13
Spring 1TC-K CPFM_OUT_B 15 S6B-XH-A-1
Wire jumper CN-6 24V_CPFM 17 1 CPFM_OUT_A
TC PWB SMP-11V-NC + SMR-11V-N Power harness B20B-PNDZS CPFM_OUT_/B 19 2 24V_CPFM
Spring 1TC-C CPFM_OUT_/A
CN-1 1 1TUD_CL 1 1 1TUD_CL 3
Wire jumper INT24V2 2 4 CPFM_OUT_B
B08B-PASK 2 D-GND 2 3 D-GND CPFM
Spring 1TC-M P-GND 4 5 24V_CPFM
F-GND 1 3 5VNPD(with R) 3 5 5VNPD(with R) /DVM_K_CK CPFM_OUT_/B
Wire jumper 4 PTC_ERR 4 7 PTC_ERR 6 6
To TC UN PTC_ERR 2 /DVM_K_D 8
Spring 1TC-Y HV_REM# 3 5 HV_REM# 5 9 HV_REM# 56 HB UNI
DVM_K_LD 10 SMR-04V-N + SMP-04V-NC
Wire jumper /TC_LD# 4 6 /TC_LD# 6 11 /TC_LD# /CPUC1 12 1 /CPUC1 1
/TC_CLK# 5 7 /TC_CLK# 7 13 /TC_CLK# SMP-02V-NC + SMR-02V-N
Spring Separation 24V3 14 2 24V3 2
/TC_DATA# 6 8 /TC_DATA# 8 15 /TC_DATA# 1 /CPUC1 1
Wire jumper 7 9 17 P-GND /CPFC 16 3 /CPFC 3 2 CPUC
P-GND 9 P-GND 24V3 18 4 24V3 4
2 24V3
Spring VCASE INT24V1 8 10 INT24V1 10 19 INT24V1 (NC) P R
20 R P
11 F-GND 11
P R 2 INT5V SMP-02V-NC + SMR-02V-N
PS-187 FPS-187 HL DCDC PWB 4 (NC) 1 /CPFC 1
2-TC 2-TC F.G (to page 8) 6 2 24V3 2 CPFC
INTCNT
PS-187 FPS-187 SRA-01T-3.2 8 PROFM1_V P R
PTC PTC
10 /PROFM1_CNT Paper feed drive clutch harness
12 P-GND
14 /ROFM1_LD
16 (NC)
PTC harness 18 (NC) MAIN DRIVE UN
20 INT24V1
CN-9
B15B-CZHK-B-1 Main drive harness B7B-PASK-1
INT24V2 1 1 INT24V2
P-GND 2 2 P-GND
/DVM_CL_CK 3 3 (NC)
Paper feed UN /DVM_CL_D 4 4 /DVM_CL_CK DVM_CL
Paper feed transport DVM_CL_LD 5 5 /DVM_CL_D
CS PAPER FEED UN DHPD_CL 6 6 (NC)
interface harness harness D-GND 7 7 DVM_CL_LD
CN-13 5VNPD(with R) 8
14R-RIZ-K4GG-FL(LF)(SN) CZWH-30-S + BU30P-TZW-S(LF)(SN) B30B-CZWHK-B-1 DC brushless motor
03XR-6H-P /1TURC_2 9
14CZ-6H
Paper feed UN harness 14P-RIZ-K2GG-RL(LF)(SN) 14CZ-6H 15CZ-6Y 15CZ-6Y 15CZ-6Y
5VNPD 1 14 5VNPD 1 A-15 5VNPD A-1 A-15 5VNPD +24V3 10
/CPED1 2 13 /CPED1 2 A-14 /CPED1 A-2 A-14 /CPED1 DHPD_K 11 179228-3
CPED1 D-GND 3 12 D-GND 3 A-13 D-GND A-3 A-13 D-GND D-GND 12 1 DHPD_CL
VHPGP1A73A+-18 11 5VNPD 4 A-12 5VNPD A-4 A-12 5VNPD 5VNPD(with R) 13 2 D-GND DHPD_CL
03XR-6H-P 10 /CPFD1 5 A-11 /CPFD1 A-5 A-11 /CPFD1 /1TURC_1 14 3 5VNPD(with R)
5VNPD 1 9 D-GND 6 A-10 D-GND A-6 A-10 D-GND +24V3 15 VHPGP1S73P+-18
CPFD1 /CPFD1 2 8 5VNPD 7 A-9 5VNPD A-7 A-9 5VNPD
D-GND 3 7 /CLUD 8 A-8 /CLUD A-8 A-8 /CLUD SMP-02V-NC + SMR-02V-N
VHPGP2A230L-1 6 D-GND 9 A-7 D-GND A-9 A-7 D-GND AC/DC power source mounting plate 1 /1TURC_2 1
03XR-6H-P 5 5VNPD 10 A-6 5VNPD A-10 A-6 5VNPD 2 +24V3 2 1TURC2
5VNPD 1 4 /PPD1 11 A-5 /PPD1 A-11 A-5 /PPD1 P R
/CLUD 2 3 D-GND 12 A-4 D-GND A-4 D-GND F.G F.G
CLUD1 A-12
D-GND 3 2 F-GND 13 A-3 F-GND A-13 A-3 1TCSET SRA-21T-3 SRA-21T-3 179228-3
VHPGP1A73A+-18 292254-4 1 (NC) 14 A-2 F-GND A-14 F. G A-2 /1TCCRU 1 DHPD_K
179228-3 179228-4 04XR-6H-P A-1 (NC) A-15 A-1 D-GND 2 D-GND DHPD_K
5VNPD 1 4 5VNPD 1 SRA-01T-3.2 3 5VNPD(wtih R)
Process positioning plate R
PPD1 /PPD1 2 3 /PPD1 2 F.G B-1 D-GND B-15 B-1 D-GND VHPGP1S73P+-18
D-GND 3 2 D-GND 3 B-2 DRSET B-14 B-2 DRSET
1 F-GND 4 SRA-21T-4 B-3 D-GND B-3 D-GND F.G F.G SMP-02V-NC + SMR-02V-N
VHPGP1A73A+-18 B-13
B-4 /DRCRU_Y B-12 B-4 /DRCRU_Y SRA-21T-3 SRA-21T-3 1 /1TURC_1 1
PPD1 harness B-5 /DRCRU_M B-11 B-5 /DRCRU_M 2 +24V3 2 1TURC1
B-6 /DRCRU_C B-10 B-6 /DRCRU_C P R
F.G B-7 /DRCRU_K B-9 B-7 /DRCRU_K
SRA-01T-3.2 B-8 /1TNFD B-8 B-8 /1TNFD
B-9 D-GND B-7 B-9 D-GND
B-10 LSUFM_V B-6 B-10 LSUFM_V
B-11 P-GND B-5 B-11 P-GND
B-12 /LSUFM_LD B-4 B-12 /LSUFM_LD
B-13 5VNPD B-3 B-13 5VNPD CN-12
HT POSITION LOCK UN B-14 /PPD2 B-2 B-14 /PPD2 B20B-CZHK-B-1
CZHR-20V-S DV interface harness
D-GND
D-GND
D-GND
D-GND
D-GND
D-GND
/DRCRU_K 1 GB-M Spring
DRCRU_K D-GND 2 F. G
Wire jumper
QSW-B0017QSZZ DF11-6DS-2C + DF11-6DP-SP1(05) SRA-01T-3.2 GB-Y Spring
B4B-PH-K
1 POM_OUT_/B
2 POM_OUT_/A
3 POM_OUT_B POM
4 POM_OUT_A
SMP-02V-NC + SMR-02V-N
CN-16 1 /2TURC 1
B18B-PNDZS Paper exit interface harness 2 24V3 2 2TURC
INT24V2 1 P R
P-GND 3 SMP-02V-NC + SMR-02V-N
/FUM_CK 5
/FUM_D 1 /ADUC1 1
7
/FUM_LD 9 2 24V3 2 ADUC1
POM_OUT_/B 11 P R
POM_OUT_/A 13
POM_OUT_B 15
POM_OUT_A 17
SMR-04V-N + SMP-04V-NC Fusing fan
FUFM_V 2 1 +(R) 1
FUM_CNT 4 2 PWM(Brw) 2
P-GND 6 3 -(BIk) 3 FUFM
6. Right door, Frame fusing
FUFM_LD 8 4 Lock(W) 4
/2TURC 10 R P 80 x 25 axial-flow PWM
24V3 12
/ADUC1 14
24V3 16
(NC) 18 RIGHT DOOR UN
SMR-04V-N + SMP-04V-NC
1 +(R) 1
PCU PWB 2 PWM(Brw) 2
3 -(BIk) 3 POFM
4 Lock(W) 4
R P 60 x 25 axial-flow PWM
179228-3
1 /APPD1
2 D-GND APPD1
3 5VNPD(with R)
CN-17 33R-RWZV-K2GG(LF) (SN) + 33P-RWZV-K4GG(LF) (SN) VHPGP1S73P+-18
B30B-CZWHK-B-1 Paper exit interface harness Right door harness
15CZ-6Y 16CZ-6H CZHR-16V-S
POFM_V A-15 B-1 POFM_V B-16
/POFM_CNT A-14 B-2 /POFM_CNT B-15
P-GND A-13 B-3 P-GND B-14
/POFM_LD A-12 B-4 /POFM_LD B-13 179228-3
/APPD1 A-11 B-5 /APPD1 B-12 1 /APPD2
D-GND A-10 B-6 D-GND B-11 2 D-GND APPD2
5VNPD(with R) A-9 B-7 5VNPD(with R) B-10 3 5VNPD(with R)
/APPD2 A-8 B-8 /APPD2 B-9 VHPGP1S73P+-18
D-GND A-7 B-9 D-GND B-8
5VNPD(with R) A-6 B-10 5VNPD(with R) B-7 SMP-02V-NC + SMR-02V-N
D-GND A-5 B-11 D-GND B-6 1 D-GND 1
/2TCCRU A-4 B-12 /2TCCRU B-5 2 /2TCCRU 2
D-GND A-3 B-13 5VNPD(with R) B-4 P R SRA-21T-4
2TCSET A-2 B-14 2TCSET B-3 2TCCRU
(NC) A-1 B-15 (NC) B-2
B-1 F. G F. G 2TCCRU harness SRA-21T-4
B-16 (NC)
SRA-21T-3 SRA-21T-4
24V3 B-1 A-17 24V3 A-1
/MPFS B-2 A-16 /MPFS A-2
5VNPD(with R) B-3 A-15 5VNPD(with R) A-3 MULTI UN
D-GND B-4 A-14 D-GND A-4
/MPED B-5 A-13 /MPED A-5 SMP-02V-NC + SMR-02V-N
PHR-4
4 TH_M Temperature/
3 D-GND
2 HUD_M humidity
1 5VN detection
DEVELOPER UNIT(YELLOW)
QR/P8-8S-C(02) + QR/P8-8P-C(01) DV harness Resistor
1 D-GND 1
2 DVTYP_Y 2 2KΩ1/4W
3 /DVCRU_Y 3
4 DVCRU_V 4 Fuse
5 ATC_V 5
RESI UN 6 TCS_Y 6
7 D-GND 7 51021-0400
CN-18
179228-5 DF1B-14DEP-2.5RC + DF1B-14DES-2.5RC B24B-PNDZS 8 TSG_Y 8 1 TSG_Y
(NC) 5 1 (NC) 1 1 (NC) S P 2 ATC_V
RESI REGS_R 4
RESI harness 3 REGS_R 3
Paper exit interface harness 3 REGS_R 3 TCS_Y TCS_Y
REGS_R_LED# 3 REGS_R_LED# 4 D-GND
SENSOR 5 REGS_R_LED# 5 5
D-GND 2 7 D-GND 7 7 D-GND
R +5VNPD 1 9 +5VNPD 9 9 +5VNPD
2 PCS_F 2 11 PCS_F
VHPYAHA16++-1 4 REGS_F 4 13 REGS_F
6 REGS_F_LED# 6 15 REGS_F_LED#
179228-5 8 D-GND 8 17 D-GND
PCS_F 5 10 +5VNPD 10 19 +5VNPD DEVELOPER UNIT(MAGENTA)
RESI REGS_F 4 11 5VNPD(with R) 11 21 (NC)
SENSOR REGS_F_LED# 3 12 D-GND 12 23 (NC)
D-GND 2 13 1TUD_K 13 QR/P8-8S-C(02) + QR/P8-8P-C(01) DV harness
F Resistor
+5VNPD 1 14 (NC) 14 2 5VNPD(with R) 1 D-GND 1
4 D-GND 2 DVTYP_M 2 2KΩ1/4W
P S
VHPYAHA16++-1 6 1TUD_K CN-11 3 /DVCRU_M 3 Fuse
8 5VNPD B32B-CZWHK-B-1 4 DVCRU_V 4
10 /POD1 CZHR-16V-Y DV interface harness 5 ATC_M 5
D-GND D-GND A-16
12 DVTYP_Y A-15 6 TCS_M 6
179228-3 14 5VNPD 7 D-GND 7 51021-0400
/DVCRU_Y A-14
5VNPD(with R) 3 16 /POD2 DVCRU_V 8 TSG_M 8 1 TSG_M
D-GND 2 18 A-13 S P 2 ATC_V
1TUD_K D-GND ATC_V A-12
1TUD_K 1 20 5VNPD 3 TCS_M TCS_M
TCS_Y A-11
VHPGP1S73P+-18 22 /TFD2 D-GND 4 D-GND
A-10
24 D-GND TSG_Y A-9
D-GND A-8
DVTYP_M A-7
PAPER OUTPUT UN /DVCRU_M A-6
DVCRU_V A-5
179228-3 ATC_V A-4
5VNPD 1
TCS_M A-3 DEVELOPER UNIT(CYAN)
D-GND A-2
POD1 /POD1 2 TSG_M A-1
D-GND 3 QR/P8-8S-C(02) + QR/P8-8P-C(01)
VHPLG248NL1-1
DV harness Resistor
7. Process, DV, RESI, Paper exit
TSHR-04V-K
D-GND 4
5VN 3
CRM-Y CRM_Y_CK# 2
CRM_Y_DT# 1
CN-3
Power harness B6PS-VH
1 24V3
2 12V
3 P-GND SCN CNT PWB
4 5VN
CN-203 5 3.3V
B5P-VH-B 6 D-GND
12V 1
12V 2
12V 3
D-GND 4
D-GND 5 PS-187
1 DSW_F(24V)
CN-204 PS-187 DSW-F
B7P-VH-B 1 DSW_R(24V)
5VN 1
5VN 2
5VN 3
5VN 4
5VN 5
D-GND 6
HL DCDC PWB D-GND 7
CN-205
WH PWB
(to page 9)
B4P-VH-B
3.3V 1
3.3V 2
3.3V 3
D-GND 4
LUM harness
SMP-08V-NC + SMR-08V-N PAP-02V-S
1 P-GND 1 1 P-GND
2 /CLUM 2 2 /CLUM CLUM
CN-302 CN-6 3 5VNPD 3 Brush motor
B04B-PASK-1 (from page 5)
B20B-PNDZS 4 /CSPD1 4 179228-3
INT24V1 1 20 INT24V1 5 D-GND 5 1 5VNPD
INTCNT 2 6 INTCNT CN-8 6 (NC) 6 2 /CSPD1
(NC) 3 2 INT5V B24B-PNDZS 7 (NC) 7 3 D-GND
CSPD1
INT5V 4 WH_CNT 1 DF1B-20DEP-2.5RC 8 (NC) 8 VHPGP1A73A+-18
24V3 3 + DF1B-20DES-2.5RC P R
CN-3 P-GND 5 1 P-GND 1
B8P-VH /CLUM 7 2 /CLUM 2
1 12V 5VNPD 9 3 5VNPD 3
2 D-GND /CSPD1 11 4 /CSPD1 4 CN-1
3 5VN D-GND 13 5 D-GND 5 CSS harness S04B-PASK-2
CN-301 4 D-GND D-GND 15 6 D-GND 6 1 D-GND
B3P-VH-B 5 3.3V /CSS13 17 7 /CSS13 7 2 /CSS13 CASSETE SIZE
24V2 1 6 (NC) /CSS12 19 8 /CSS12 8 3 /CSS12 DETECT PWB
P-GND 2 7 DSW_R(24V) /CSS11 21 9 /CSS11 9 4 /CSS11
INT24V2 3 8 DSW_F(24V) (NC) 23 10 /TRC_DSK 10
11 RES_DSK 11
INT24V1 2 12 DSR_DSK 12
CN-202 /HLPR 4 13 /DTR_DSK 13 DESK (OPTION)
B5P-VH-B
FW 6 14 RXD_DSK 14
OV 1 PSFM_V 8 15 TXD_DSK 15
P-GND 2 PSFM_LD QR/P4-12P-C(01)
P-GND 10 16 D-GND 16
3 /TRC_DSK + QR/P4-12S-C(01)
24V4 4 12 17 (NC) 17
RES_DSK 14 18 24V_DSK 18 1 24V_DSK 1
24V4 5 DSR_DSK 16 19 P-GND 19 2 /TRC_DSK 2
/DTR_DSK 18 20 5VN 20 3 RES_DSK 3
CN-4 RXD_DSK
B7P-VH 20 P S 4 DSR_DSK 4
TXD_DSK 22 5 /DTR_DSK 5
1 +24V4 D-GND 24 6 5VN 6
2 P-GND 7 P-GND 7 DESK
3 INT24V2
4 P-GND 8 RXD_DSK 8
9 TXD_DSK 9
5 P-GND 10 D-GND 10
6 +24V3 PCU PWB CN-23 11 (NC) 11
+24V1
8. Power source, Frame electrical fitting, Option
7
B04B-PASK-1 12 F-GND 12
PSFM2_V 1 SMP-03V-NC + SMR-03V-N P S
CN-104
B05B-PASK-1 /VFM_EX_CNT 2 1 +(R) 1
P-GND 3 2 -(Blk) 2 HDD FM
INT24V1 1 PSFM2_LD 4 3 LOCK(Y) 3
/HLPR 2 F. G. F. G.
3 P R
FW
PSFM_V 4 SRA-21T-4
PSFW_LD 5
CN-10
B16B-PNDZS
CN-101 1 24V3 INNER FINISHER (OPTION)
B9P-VH-B 2 P-GND
3 /CV_COPY
24V_DSK 1 CN-5
/CV_COUNT
RTH(MAIN)
RTH(SUB)
19P-RWZV-K4GG-P6(LF)(SN) CN-19
Fusing harness +19R-RWZV-K2GG-R6(LF)(SN) Fusing interface harness B18B-CZHK-B-1
9. AC, Fusing
WH CN-13 CN-201
WH B03P-VL-R B3B-PASK-1
1 Neutral_HL_EX HLOUUT_HL_LOW 3
D1.25-M3(Ni) D1.25-M3(Ni) SRA-51T-3 2 Neutral_HL_MAIN HLOUUT_HL_MAIN 2
3 Neutral_HL_LOW HLOUUT_HL_EX 1
D1.25-M3(Ni)
HL external Interface harness HL DCDC PWB
JPN:BK CN-12 CN-11
D1.25-M3(Ni) EX120:RD D1.25-M3(Ni) B03P-VL B03P-VL
EX200:BL WH 1 Live_HL LiveHL_in 1
HL EX1 2 Live_HL_MAIN (NC) 2
BK JPN:BK WH 3 Live_HL_LOW NeutralHL_in 3
EX120:RD
D1.25-M3(Ni) EX200:BL D1.25-M3(Ni)
HL EX2 WH
D1.25-M3(Ni) D1.25-M3(Ni) AC/HL harness
CN-4
JPN: SLP-01V(WH) + SLR-01VF(WH) B03P-VL
EX120: SLP-01V(RD) + SLR-01VF(WH) LiveHL_out 1
D1.25-M3(Ni) D1.25-M3(Ni) EX200: SLP-01V(BL) + SLR-01VF(WH) (NC) 2
NeutralHL_out 3
BK RD WH
HL LOW 1 N-HL(LOW) 1 WH
P R
EX200 ONLY
CN-6
B2P3-VH-B-E ELP-02V + ELR-02V
LiveR_in 1 1 LiveR_in 1
(NC) 2 2 LiveR_in 2 REACTOR
LiveR_in 3 P R
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
A8
A9
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
A8
A9
A10
A10
1 2 3 3 2 1 B03P-VL PS-250(RD)
Neutral1_in
B9
B8
B7
B6
B5
B4
B3
B2
B1
Neutral1_in 3
B9
B8
B7
B6
B5
B4
B3
B2
B1
6 5 4 4 5 6 (NC) 2 PS-250(RD)
Live_in 1 Live_in
View from Fusing unit side View from Body unit side WH PWB
CN-4 CN-2 CN-5
B2P3-VH-BL B2P3-VH-BK WH harness B2P3-VH-B CN-1
DESK UN 1 WH-N(DESK1) Neutral_WH 1 3 Neutral_WH B03P-VL JPN,EX120
2 NC (NC) 2 2 (NC) Live_in 1
(OPTION) 3 WH-L(DESK1) Live_WH 3 1 Live_WH (NC) 2
Neutral_in 3
WH-SW
PS-187 SRA-51T-4
Live_WH
CN-1
PS-187 B03P-VL Inlet harness EX200
Live_WH Live_in 1 Live_in
(NC) 2 F-GND
Neutral_in 3 Neutral_in
INLET
SRA-51T-4
Memo
Memo
Memo
LEAD-FREE SOLDER
The PWB’s of this model employs lead-free solder. The “LF” marks indicated on the PWB’s and the Service Manual mean “Lead-Free” solder.
The alphabet following the LF mark shows the kind of lead-free solder.
Example:
Trademark acknowledgements
• Microsoft®, Windows®, Windows® 98, Windows® Me, Windows NT® 4.0,
Windows® 2000, Windows® XP, Windows® Vista, Windows® Server 2003 and
Internet Explorer® are registered trademarks or trademarks of
Microsoft Corporation in the U.S.A. and other countries.
• PostScript is a registered trademark of Adobe Systems Incorporated.
• Macintosh, Mac OS, AppleTalk, EtherTalk, LaserWriter, and Safari are registered
trademarks or trademarks of Apple Computer, Inc.
• IBM, PC/AT, and PowerPC are trademarks of International Business Machines
Corporation.
• Acrobat® Reader Copyright® 1987- 2002 Adobe Systems Incorporated. All rights
reserved. Adobe, the Adobe logo, Acrobat, and the Acrobat logo are trademarks of
Adobe Systems Incorporated.
• PCL is a registered trademark of the Hewlett-Packard Company.
• Sharpdesk is a trademark of Sharp Corporation.
• All other trademarks and copyrights are the property of their respective owners.
SHARP CORPORATION
Digital Document System Group
CS Promotion Center
Yamatokoriyama, Nara 639-1186, Japan
2008 October Produced in Japan for electronic Distribution